Amjad Izhar Blog

Blog

  • Microsoft’s Majorana 1: A Quantum Computing Leap with Topological Qubits

    Microsoft’s Majorana 1: A Quantum Computing Leap with Topological Qubits

    Microsoft has announced the creation of Majorana 1, a quantum chip powered by Topological Core architecture. This novel design utilizes topoconductors to observe and control Majorana particles for more reliable qubits. The new architecture aims for a million qubits on a single chip, enabling solutions to complex industrial and societal problems. Microsoft’s approach focuses on practical applications, leading to inclusion in DARPA’s US2QC program for utility-scale quantum computing. A Nature paper validates their creation and precise measurement of topological qubits, integrating qubits and control electronics into a compact chip for Azure data centers. This advancement marks a significant step toward scalable and commercially viable quantum computing, potentially revolutionizing fields like materials science and pharmaceuticals.

    Microsoft’s Majorana 1: A Quantum Computing Leap – Study Guide

    I. Study Guide Topics:

    1. Quantum Computing Fundamentals: Review the basic principles of quantum computing, including qubits, superposition, and entanglement.
    2. Topological Qubits: Understand the concept of topological qubits and their advantages over traditional qubits.
    3. Majorana Particles: Define Majorana particles and their role in Microsoft’s quantum computing approach.
    4. Topoconductors/Topological Superconductors: Understand what a topoconductor is and how it enables the observation and control of Majorana particles.
    5. Microsoft’s Topological Core Architecture: Understand the key features of Microsoft’s quantum chip architecture and its scalability.
    6. Error Correction and Stability: Grasp the importance of error correction in quantum computing and how Microsoft’s design aims to address it.
    7. Applications of Quantum Computing: Understand the potential applications of quantum computing in various industries.
    8. Azure Quantum Platform: Learn about Microsoft’s Azure Quantum platform and its role in advancing scientific discovery.
    9. Scalability and the Million-Qubit Threshold: Understand why scaling to a million qubits is crucial for practical quantum computing.
    10. Microsoft’s Approach: Understand how Microsoft’s approach has focused on commercial impact rather than theoretical advancement.

    II. Short-Answer Quiz:

    1. What is the significance of Microsoft’s Majorana 1 chip in the field of quantum computing?
    2. What are topological qubits, and how do they differ from traditional qubits?
    3. What is a topoconductor, and what role does it play in the creation of Majorana particles?
    4. Why is error correction a critical issue in quantum computing, and how does Microsoft address it in its design?
    5. Name three potential applications of quantum computing mentioned in the article.
    6. What is the purpose of Microsoft’s Azure Quantum platform?
    7. Why is achieving a million qubits considered a crucial threshold for quantum computers?
    8. How does Microsoft’s approach to quantum computing differ from some other approaches in the industry?
    9. What material is Microsoft using to create topological qubits?
    10. What is DARPA’s US2QC program and what role does Microsoft play?

    Answer Key:

    1. Majorana 1 is the first quantum chip powered by Microsoft’s Topological Core architecture, promising more reliable and scalable qubits, potentially solving industrial-scale problems in years, not decades.
    2. Topological qubits are more stable and require less error correction than traditional qubits because they encode information in the topology of the system, making them more resistant to local disturbances.
    3. A topoconductor, or topological superconductor, creates a new state of matter enabling a more stable, fast, and digitally controlled qubit without the limitations of current approaches.
    4. Quantum systems are highly susceptible to errors due to environmental noise; Microsoft’s Topological Core aims to incorporate error resistance at the hardware level for greater stability.
    5. Potential applications include breaking down microplastics, creating self-healing materials, and designing materials with unprecedented efficiency.
    6. Azure Quantum integrates AI, high-performance computing, and quantum systems to help customers advance scientific discovery.
    7. A million qubits is a critical threshold because it is believed to be the point at which quantum computers can tackle complex industrial and societal challenges that classical computers cannot solve.
    8. Microsoft’s approach focuses on practical application and commercial impact from the start, rather than focusing primarily on theoretical advancements.
    9. Microsoft has developed a new materials stack made of indium arsenide and aluminum to create topological qubits.
    10. The US2QC program aims to develop the industry’s first utility-scale fault-tolerant quantum computer, and Microsoft is one of two companies invited to the final phase of the initiative.

    III. Essay Questions:

    1. Discuss the potential impact of Microsoft’s Majorana 1 chip on the future of quantum computing. What are the key innovations, and how might they address existing challenges in the field?
    2. Compare and contrast the advantages and disadvantages of topological qubits versus traditional qubits. In what scenarios might each type of qubit be more suitable?
    3. Explain the role of Majorana particles in Microsoft’s quantum computing approach. Why are these particles considered crucial, and what challenges did Microsoft overcome in creating and measuring them?
    4. Describe the potential applications of quantum computing across different industries. Choose three specific examples and explain how quantum computers could revolutionize these fields.
    5. Evaluate Microsoft’s overall strategy in the quantum computing space. How does their focus on scalability and commercial applications position them in the competitive landscape?

    IV. Glossary of Key Terms:

    • Qubit: The fundamental unit of information in quantum computing, analogous to a bit in classical computing. A qubit can exist in a superposition of states (0 and 1 simultaneously).
    • Superposition: A quantum mechanical principle where a quantum system can exist in multiple states at the same time until measured.
    • Entanglement: A quantum mechanical phenomenon where two or more qubits become linked, and the state of one qubit instantly affects the state of the others, regardless of the distance between them.
    • Topological Qubit: A type of qubit that encodes information in the topology of the system, making it more resistant to local disturbances and errors.
    • Majorana Particle: A particle that is its own antiparticle. In the context of quantum computing, they are used in topological qubits to provide greater stability.
    • Topoconductor (Topological Superconductor): A new state of matter that exhibits topological properties, enabling the development of more stable qubits.
    • Quantum Computing: A type of computing that uses quantum mechanical phenomena like superposition and entanglement to perform calculations.
    • Error Correction: Techniques used to mitigate the effects of errors and noise in quantum computations, crucial for achieving reliable results.
    • Scalability: The ability to increase the size and complexity of a quantum computer without significantly increasing error rates, a key challenge in quantum computing.
    • Azure Quantum: Microsoft’s cloud-based platform that provides access to quantum computing hardware, software, and services.

    Briefing Document: Microsoft’s Majorana 1 Quantum Computing Leap

    Date: October 12, 2024 (based on assumption of current date from lack of date provided in source)

    Subject: Review of Microsoft’s Majorana 1 Quantum Chip Announcement

    Source: Excerpts from “Microsoft unveils Majorana 1 in quantum computing leap” (IT Brief Australia)

    Executive Summary: Microsoft has announced Majorana 1, a quantum chip powered by a new Topological Core architecture, which it claims is a significant leap toward achieving fault-tolerant, utility-scale quantum computing. The innovation centers around the use of topological qubits based on Majorana particles, offering increased stability and scalability compared to traditional qubit technologies. This development puts Microsoft on a path to creating quantum computers with a million qubits, which the company argues is a necessary threshold to tackle complex industrial and societal problems.

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    1. Topological Qubits and Majorana Particles: The core of Microsoft’s innovation lies in the use of topological qubits derived from Majorana particles. These particles, generated using a custom-built “materials stack made of indium arsenide and aluminium,” offer inherent stability. The benefit, as stated by Chetan Nayak, is, “It’s one thing to discover a new state of matter. It’s another to take advantage of it to rethink quantum computing at scale.” This approach addresses a fundamental limitation of existing qubit technologies, which are prone to errors and require extensive error correction.
    2. Scalability to One Million Qubits: Microsoft emphasizes the importance of achieving a quantum computer with a million qubits for solving real-world problems. Chetan Nayak states, “Whatever you’re doing in the quantum space needs to have a path to a million qubits. If it doesn’t, you’re going to hit a wall before you get to the scale at which you can solve the really important problems that motivate us.” The Topological Core architecture is designed with this scalability in mind, offering a “clear path” to reaching this critical threshold.
    3. Industrial and Societal Impact: The article highlights the potential applications of million-qubit quantum computers in various fields. Examples include:
    • Breaking down microplastics into harmless byproducts.
    • Creating self-healing materials for construction, manufacturing, and healthcare.
    • Designing new materials, pharmaceuticals, and industrial products with unprecedented efficiency. According to Matthias Troyer, “Any company that makes anything could just design it perfectly the first time out. It would just give you the answer.”
    1. Digital Measurement and Simplified Control: Microsoft’s approach includes a new digital measurement method that simplifies qubit control. This is crucial for managing the complexity of a million-qubit system. Current analogue-based methods are deemed impractical for handling trillions of operations across a million qubits, so this digital approach is a crucial innovation in the architecture.
    2. Focus on Practical Application: Unlike some other quantum computing efforts, Microsoft emphasizes a focus on practical application and commercial impact. Matthias Troyer states, “From the start, we wanted to make a quantum computer for commercial impact, not just thought leadership.” This focus is evident in their long-term pursuit of topological qubits and their participation in DARPA’s US2QC program, which aims to develop utility-scale fault-tolerant quantum computers.
    3. Integration with Azure Quantum: Microsoft’s Azure Quantum platform integrates AI, high-performance computing, and quantum systems to enable customers to advance scientific discovery. The Majorana 1 chip is designed to fit inside Microsoft’s Azure datacenters, underscoring their strategy of offering quantum computing as a cloud-based service.
    4. Breakthrough Confirmed in Nature Paper: A paper published in Nature validates Microsoft’s claims by confirming the creation and measurement of the quantum properties of topological qubits using microwaves. This independent verification strengthens the credibility of Microsoft’s announcement. This precision allows the detection of differences of “as small as a single electron among a billion”.
    5. Error Resistance at the Hardware Level: The Topological Core powering Majorana 1 is designed for reliability, incorporating error resistance at the hardware level. This intrinsic error resistance is critical for achieving fault tolerance and scaling up to a million qubits.

    Key Facts:

    • Majorana 1 is the first quantum chip powered by Microsoft’s Topological Core architecture.
    • The chip utilizes a topoconductor to enable the observation and control of Majorana particles.
    • Microsoft claims the architecture offers a path to fitting a million qubits on a single chip.
    • The company is participating in DARPA’s US2QC program to develop a utility-scale fault-tolerant quantum computer.
    • A paper in Nature confirms the creation and measurement of Majorana particles by Microsoft researchers.
    • Majorana 1 integrates both qubits and control electronics into a single chip designed for Azure datacenters.

    Implications:

    If Microsoft’s claims hold true, the Majorana 1 chip represents a major step towards achieving practical, utility-scale quantum computing. The focus on topological qubits, combined with their emphasis on scalability and industrial applications, positions Microsoft as a significant player in the quantum computing landscape. This breakthrough could accelerate innovation in various industries, leading to the development of new materials, pharmaceuticals, and solutions to complex societal challenges.

    Further Research:

    • Review the published paper in Nature for a more detailed technical understanding of Microsoft’s breakthrough.
    • Investigate the specific goals and timelines of DARPA’s US2QC program.
    • Monitor the progress of Microsoft’s partnerships with Quantinuum and Atom Computing.

    Microsoft’s Majorana 1 Chip: Topological Qubits and Quantum Computing

    What is Majorana 1 and why is it significant?

    Majorana 1 is Microsoft’s first quantum chip built using its Topological Core architecture. It is significant because it utilizes a novel material called a topoconductor to enable the observation and control of Majorana particles. This allows for the creation of more stable and scalable qubits, which Microsoft believes is crucial for developing quantum computers capable of solving complex, industrial-scale problems.

    What are topological qubits and how do they differ from traditional qubits?

    Topological qubits, unlike traditional qubits, are inherently more stable and less susceptible to errors due to their topological properties. This stability reduces the need for extensive error correction, making them more scalable. They rely on Majorana particles, which are exotic states of matter that Microsoft has successfully created and measured.

    What is a “topoconductor” (topological superconductor) and what role does it play in Majorana 1?

    A topoconductor (or topological superconductor) is a new state of matter that enables the creation of Majorana particles. In Majorana 1, the topoconductor, made of indium arsenide and aluminium, allows for the development of more stable, fast, and digitally controlled qubits, overcoming limitations of current quantum computing approaches.

    What is the significance of achieving one million qubits on a single chip?

    Reaching one million qubits on a single chip is a critical threshold for quantum computers to tackle complex industrial and societal challenges. This scale allows for the practical application of quantum computing to problems that are currently intractable for classical computers, such as breaking down microplastics, designing self-healing materials, and developing new pharmaceuticals.

    What is Microsoft’s approach to error correction in quantum computing?

    Microsoft’s approach prioritizes error resistance at the hardware level through its Topological Core architecture. By using topological qubits based on Majorana particles, the system is designed to be inherently more stable, reducing the need for extensive and complex error correction methods required by other qubit technologies.

    What are some potential applications of quantum computers with a million qubits?

    Quantum computers with a million qubits could revolutionize various industries. Some potential applications include: designing new materials with specific properties (like self-healing materials), developing catalysts for breaking down pollutants, creating new pharmaceuticals and optimizing drug design, and improving efficiency in industries such as manufacturing and construction.

    How is Microsoft’s approach to quantum computing different from other companies?

    Microsoft’s approach, from the beginning, has been focused on practical application and commercial impact rather than just theoretical advancement. They chose to pursue topological qubits due to their inherent stability and scalability, and have developed a comprehensive system, including hardware, software (Azure Quantum), and partnerships, to advance quantum computing towards real-world problem-solving.

    How does Microsoft plan to integrate its quantum computing efforts with its existing Azure cloud platform?

    Microsoft plans to integrate its quantum computing capabilities into its Azure Quantum platform. This allows customers to access quantum hardware, quantum algorithms, and high-performance computing resources within the Azure cloud environment. Azure Quantum combines AI, high-performance computing, and quantum systems to enable customers to advance scientific discovery and solve complex problems.

    Microsoft’s Majorana 1 Quantum Chip: Topological Core Architecture

    The Majorana 1 chip is Microsoft’s first quantum chip, which is powered by its new Topological Core architecture. This chip aims to enable quantum computers to solve industrial-scale problems.

    Key aspects of the Majorana 1 chip:

    • Topological Core: The chip utilizes a novel material called a topoconductor, enabling the observation and control of Majorana particles, leading to more reliable and scalable qubits. Microsoft designed and fabricated much of the material, atom by atom, using indium arsenide and aluminium.
    • Scalability: The architecture has a path to fitting a million qubits on a single chip. This is viewed as a crucial threshold for quantum computers to tackle complex industrial and societal challenges.
    • Stability: The Topological Core incorporates error resistance at the hardware level for greater stability. Topological qubits offer greater stability and require less error correction, making them more scalable.
    • Digital Measurement: Microsoft’s new digital measurement approach allows for simplified qubit control, which redefines how quantum computing functions. The Nature paper confirms that Microsoft has not only succeeded in creating Majorana particles but also developed a precise measurement method using microwaves. This allows Microsoft’s quantum systems to measure qubits with extreme accuracy.
    • Integration: Majorana 1 integrates both qubits and control electronics into a single compact chip that can fit inside Microsoft’s Azure datacentres.

    Microsoft’s long-term approach to quantum computing focuses on practical application. The company aims to develop the industry’s first utility-scale fault-tolerant quantum computer. Microsoft envisions that quantum computers could solve complex problems in various industries, such as designing self-healing materials or developing catalysts for breaking down pollutants.

    Microsoft’s Majorana 1 Chip: Topological Qubit Quantum Computing

    Topological qubits are a key component of Microsoft’s approach to quantum computing, particularly within the Majorana 1 chip. Microsoft decided to pursue topological qubits nearly two decades ago because, unlike traditional qubits, topological qubits offer greater stability and require less error correction, making them more scalable.

    Key points about topological qubits:

    • Topoconductor Material: The Majorana 1 chip leverages a novel material known as a topoconductor (or topological superconductor), which creates a new state of matter that is neither a solid, liquid nor gas but instead exists in a topological state. This material allows for the observation and control of Majorana particles.
    • Majorana Particles: Creating the exotic Majorana particles needed for topological qubits is challenging because they do not exist in nature and must be generated under specific conditions. Microsoft has succeeded in creating Majorana particles.
    • Stability and Error Correction: Topological qubits are reliable by design, incorporating error resistance at the hardware level for greater stability. They also require less error correction compared to traditional qubits, which enhances their scalability.
    • Digital Measurement: Microsoft has developed a precise measurement method using microwaves, confirmed in a Nature paper, that allows their quantum systems to measure qubits with extreme accuracy.
    • Scalability: The new chip architecture offers a clear path to fitting a million qubits on a single chip, which is a crucial threshold for tackling complex industrial and societal challenges.
    • Fabrication: Microsoft designed and fabricated much of the material for the topological qubits, atom by atom, using indium arsenide and aluminium.

    Microsoft’s Topological Quantum Computing Innovation

    Microsoft’s innovation in quantum computing is characterized by its focus on practical application, scalability, and stability, particularly through its development and use of topological qubits. This approach is exemplified by the Majorana 1 chip, which is powered by a new Topological Core architecture.

    Key areas of Microsoft’s innovation:

    • Topological Core Architecture: This architecture is at the heart of Microsoft’s quantum computing innovation. It utilizes a novel material called a topoconductor to enable the observation and control of Majorana particles, leading to more reliable and scalable qubits. This is a departure from traditional methods and is seen as a “transistor for the quantum age”.
    • Topological Qubits: Microsoft’s decision to pursue topological qubits nearly two decades ago reflects a long-term vision for creating more stable and scalable quantum computers. Unlike traditional qubits, topological qubits offer greater stability and require less error correction.
    • Materials Science: Microsoft has innovated in materials science by designing and fabricating much of the material for topological qubits, atom by atom, using indium arsenide and aluminum. The creation of Majorana particles, which do not exist in nature and must be generated under specific conditions, is a significant achievement.
    • Scalability: Microsoft is focused on achieving the scale needed to solve complex industrial and societal challenges. The new chip architecture offers a clear path to fitting a million qubits on a single chip, a crucial threshold for practical quantum computing.
    • Digital Measurement: Microsoft has developed a precise measurement method using microwaves to measure qubits with extreme accuracy. This new digital measurement approach simplifies qubit control, redefining how quantum computing functions.
    • Practical Application: Microsoft’s approach is driven by the goal of creating a quantum computer for commercial impact rather than just theoretical advancement. This is demonstrated by its inclusion in DARPA’s US2QC program, which aims to develop the industry’s first utility-scale fault-tolerant quantum computer.
    • Integration: Majorana 1 integrates both qubits and control electronics into a single compact chip that can fit inside Microsoft’s Azure datacenters. This ensures a more practical and scalable solution compared to alternative qubit technologies that require large-scale infrastructure.

    Microsoft envisions quantum computers that can solve complex problems in diverse fields, including designing self-healing materials, developing catalysts for breaking down pollutants, and creating advanced materials and pharmaceuticals. The company believes that quantum computers could even teach AI the “language of nature” to design materials perfectly.

    Microsoft: Million-Qubit Quantum Computing and Majorana 1 Chip

    The achievement of one million qubits on a single chip is a crucial milestone for quantum computing, particularly emphasized by Microsoft in the context of its Majorana 1 chip and broader quantum computing efforts. Microsoft believes that reaching this threshold is essential for quantum computers to effectively tackle complex industrial and societal challenges.

    Key points regarding the million-qubit milestone:

    • Threshold for Complex Problem-Solving: Microsoft states that a quantum system capable of handling a million qubits and performing trillions of reliable operations is necessary to address the “really important problems” that motivate their work.
    • Scalability: The architecture of the Majorana 1 chip offers a clear path to fitting a million qubits on a single chip. This scalability is a primary focus of Microsoft’s quantum computing strategy.
    • Practical Applications: Reaching a million qubits would enable quantum computers to mathematically model nature with extreme precision, potentially solving complex problems in chemistry, materials science, and other industries that classical computers cannot.
    • Impact on Industries: Microsoft envisions that with a million qubits, quantum computers could revolutionize various sectors. This includes designing self-healing materials for construction, manufacturing, and healthcare, as well as developing catalysts for breaking down pollutants.
    • AI Integration: Microsoft anticipates that quantum computers with this level of capability could teach AI the “language of nature,” allowing AI to provide recipes for creating desired materials and products perfectly.
    • Utility-Scale Computing: Microsoft’s participation in DARPA’s US2QC program reflects the aim to develop utility-scale, fault-tolerant quantum computers, which necessitates achieving a million qubits.
    • Commercial Viability: Microsoft’s focus from the start has been on creating quantum computers with commercial impact, which requires scaling to a million qubits to solve commercially relevant problems.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Mastering Microsoft OneNote: A Comprehensive Guide

    Mastering Microsoft OneNote: A Comprehensive Guide

    The text provides instructions on how to use Microsoft OneNote effectively. It covers topics such as navigating the OneNote interface, creating and managing notebooks, sections, and pages, and adding various types of content like text, images, links, and recordings. The text also demonstrates formatting options and organizational features, including tables, tags, and spell-checking. Additionally, it compares features across the desktop and Windows 10 versions of OneNote. The guide focuses on enhancing note-taking efficiency and usability through practical tips and step-by-step instructions.

    OneNote for Microsoft 365 Study Guide

    Quiz

    1. What is the primary purpose of OneNote for Microsoft 365, according to Deb? Deb describes OneNote as a digital note-taking application designed to rethink how users approach the task of taking notes. It’s intended to help organize and gather information from multiple sources.
    2. What assumptions does Deb make about the users of this OneNote course? She assumes users have some familiarity with Microsoft applications, the ribbon layout, and the standard user interface common to these applications. She will not be covering any Microsoft basics.
    3. Where are the commands for inserting tables, file printouts, and pictures located within the OneNote interface? These commands are found within the “Insert” ribbon.
    4. If using a touch device with a stylus, which ribbon tab in OneNote would be most relevant for handwriting notes or making annotations? The “Draw” tab is the most relevant because it provides tools for drawing, handwriting notes, and inserting shapes.
    5. Explain the purpose of the “History” tab in OneNote, particularly in the context of collaborative notebooks. The “History” tab is useful when multiple people are collaborating on a notebook, allowing users to see changes made by different authors and track different versions of a page.
    6. How does saving a OneNote notebook to a local drive affect its shareability with other users? Saving a notebook to a local drive (like the desktop) makes it non-shareable, whereas saving it to a network drive or OneDrive makes it shareable.
    7. How does the process of saving changes to a notebook in OneNote differ from the process in other Microsoft applications, like Word or Excel? OneNote automatically saves and synchronizes changes, so there’s no need to manually save or press Ctrl+S.
    8. When modifying notebook properties, what aspects of a notebook can be changed? You can change the display name, color, and location of the notebook. You can also determine the default format.
    9. What is the procedure for deleting a notebook stored in OneDrive, and why is it not as straightforward as one might expect? To delete a notebook stored in OneDrive, you must navigate to the folder in OneDrive where the notebook is saved and delete it from there, because there is no delete option from within OneNote. It’s not straightforward because users often assume there’s a “delete” option in OneNote itself.
    10. What considerations should be taken into account when using images from the internet in OneNote notebooks, particularly regarding copyright? It’s essential to check the licensing of images and ensure they have a Creative Commons license suitable for the intended use (commercial vs. non-commercial). You must delve further as to whether you can use the image as a lot of people make the mistake when it comes to copyright.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using OneNote for Microsoft 365 as a collaborative tool for team projects, referencing specific features mentioned in the source material.
    2. Explain the importance of understanding the file storage location of OneNote notebooks (OneDrive vs. local storage) and how it impacts sharing and accessibility.
    3. Compare and contrast the OneNote for Microsoft 365 desktop application with the OneNote for Windows 10 version, focusing on interface differences and feature availability as described by Deb.
    4. Describe how OneNote’s organizational structure (notebooks, sections, pages, subpages, and section groups) facilitates effective note-taking and information management, providing examples of how each element can be used.
    5. Analyze how different formatting options (font styles, tables, tags, etc.) contribute to the clarity, readability, and overall effectiveness of notes in OneNote, and how these can be tailored to different note-taking purposes.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Notebook: The highest level of organization in OneNote; analogous to a physical notebook or binder.
    • Section: A division within a notebook used to further organize notes; similar to tabs in a physical binder.
    • Page: A single sheet within a section where notes are placed; the primary canvas for note-taking.
    • Subpage: A nested page within a page, used to create hierarchies and further organize content.
    • Section Group: A container that holds multiple sections; useful for grouping related sections together.
    • Ribbon: The user interface element at the top of the OneNote window that contains various commands and tools, organized into tabs.
    • Tag: A marker or label that can be applied to notes for categorization, prioritization, or tracking; can be customized.
    • Placeholder: A container for text or other content that can be moved and resized on a OneNote page.
    • Format Painter: A tool that copies formatting from one area of a document and applies it to another.
    • File Printout: An inserted image of a document or file, displaying its content within a OneNote page.
    • Clip to OneNote: A tool for capturing web content and inserting it into OneNote.
    • OneDrive: Microsoft’s cloud storage service, used for saving and synchronizing OneNote notebooks for accessibility and sharing.
    • To-Do Tag: A specific tag used to create checklists, allowing items to be marked as completed.
    • Ink Equation: Inserts mathematical equations using your handwriting.
    • Creative Commons License: A license to allow the free distribution of an otherwise copyrighted work.

    OneNote for Microsoft 365 Training Course: A Comprehensive Guide

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text excerpts:

    Briefing Document: OneNote for Microsoft 365 Training Course

    Overview:

    This document summarizes a training course on OneNote for Microsoft 365. The course aims to provide a comprehensive guide to the application, focusing on note-taking, organization, collaboration, and content integration. The target audience is assumed to have basic familiarity with Microsoft applications (Word, Excel, PowerPoint).

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    1. Course Scope and Structure:
    • The course covers a complete guide to the latest version of OneNote for Microsoft 365.
    • It’s divided into 13 logically arranged sections, corresponding to a natural workflow.
    • While the primary focus is the desktop application, mobile and online versions will receive a high-level overview.
    • The course will cover “how to get started with onenote how to gather information from different sources how to insert different types of media files how to organize that information logically so it’s easier to read and find I’m going to show you how you can collaborate with others on team notebooks.”
    1. User Interface and Navigation:
    • The course assumes familiarity with the Microsoft Office ribbon interface.
    • Key interface elements discussed include:
    • File Ribbon: Used for creating new notebooks, opening existing ones, saving/exporting, and managing account settings.
    • Home Ribbon: Contains basic text formatting options (font, size, bold, italics, bullets, numbering, highlighting).
    • Insert Ribbon: Used for adding various types of content: tables, files, printouts, attachments, pictures (local/online), screen clippings, audio/video recordings, and page templates.
    • “The insert tab you come to whenever you want to insert something into your notebook”
    • Draw Ribbon: Primarily useful for stylus users to draw, annotate, and handwrite notes.
    • History Ribbon: Crucial for collaborative notebooks, allowing users to track changes by author and view different versions of pages.
    • “the history tab really comes into play if you want to essentially see changes that have been made to a notebook by author if you want to find specific changes or even if you want to see different versions of your page”
    • Review Ribbon: Standard review tools, including spell check, thesaurus, accessibility checker, and language settings.
    • View Ribbon: Options for page appearance, including rule lines, zoom levels, and window management.
    • “Moving across we have our review tab and this is pretty much what you would expect to find on any review tab in your microsoft applications this is where you would come to spell check use the thesaurus check your accessibility change things like language”
    1. Notebook Creation and Management:
    • Notebooks can be saved to OneDrive (for sharing and automatic syncing) or locally.
    • “If you want to share your notebook with other people then your notebook must be saved to location that’s shareable”
    • Saving to a shareable location (like OneDrive) enables collaboration features.
    • OneNote automatically saves and synchronizes changes, especially when stored in the cloud.
    • “onenote notebooks automatically save so you don’t have to worry about going into file and save you don’t have to press ctrl s as you’re working everything automatically saves and synchronizes”
    • Notebook properties can be modified (display name, color, location).
    • “if you want to change the display name of your notebook so maybe I want to change this to project alpha project beta something else I can come in here and I can edit the display name”
    • Notebooks can be closed (removed from the list of open notebooks) without being deleted.
    • “you haven’t deleted your notebook it hasn’t disappeared you have literally just closed it down”
    • Deleting notebooks requires understanding where they are stored (OneDrive or locally). Deleting a notebook stored on OneDrive requires deleting it through the OneDrive interface.
    • “you need to jump into your onedrive account find the folder that contains your onenote notebooks and then delete your notebook through onedrive.com”
    1. Notebook Structure: Sections and Pages:
    • Notebooks are organized into sections (tabs) and pages.
    • Sections act as dividers within a notebook. Pages are contained within sections.
    • Sections can be renamed, reordered, color-coded, and deleted.
    • Section groups are used to further organize sections, especially in notebooks with lots of information.
    • “a way of grouping different sections together”
    • Pages can be added, renamed, moved, and made into subpages.
    • “Adding pages in itself is a very simple and straightforward process but what you might not know is that you can also add sub pages”
    1. Adding and Formatting Content:
    • Text notes can be typed directly onto pages within placeholders, and multiple placeholders can exist on a single page.
    • “don’t think that you’re limited to just always typing in one placeholder you can have multiple going on on the same page”
    • Text formatting options (font, size, bold, italics, underline, color, highlighting, alignment, etc.) are available on the Home tab and a mini toolbar.
    • Styles can be used to ensure consistency in headings and other elements.
    • The Format Painter tool copies formatting from one piece of text to another.
    • “format painter is a great tool if you just want to copy formatting from one piece of text to another it can save you a lot of time”
    • Web content can be clipped and inserted into OneNote pages using the OneNote Clipper browser extension.
    • “clip this information and send it directly to a page in onenote”
    • Images (local and online), audio recordings, and video recordings can be inserted.
    • “You can also insert pictures whether they be saved on your local drives or located online you can add screen clippings or screenshots directly into your notebook and you can also do cool things like record audio and video from directly within your onenote notebook”
    • Files can be attached to pages or inserted as printouts (images of the file’s content).
    • “This is more like adding a file attachment like you would in an outlook email or something along those lines”
    • Links to websites, files, and other sections within the notebook can be added.
    • “create a link to web pages files or other places in your notes”
    • Mathematical equations and symbols can be inserted using the equation editor.
    • “onenote provides an equation editor to assist you with this”
    • Content can be copied and pasted from other documents, with options for preserving source formatting or using the destination formatting.
    1. Organizing Information:
    • Tables can be inserted to organize text and data (though with limited formatting options compared to Word or Excel). Tables can be converted to Excel Spreadsheets.
    • “it allows you to select a file that you have stored in onedrive or locally and that could be any kind of file it might be a word document an excel spreadsheet powerpoint pdf anything like that and it’s going to print the contents of that file into wherever you’re clicked”
    • Tags (like “To Do”) can be added to create checklists and categorize information.
    1. OneNote for Windows 10
    • Features many similar features to the Desktop version of OneNote, though there are some changes to the user interface.
    • Custom tags can be created to better manage organization of topics.
    • Spelling is checked as you type.
    • Provides options to insert tables, files, printouts, pictures, online video, as well as things like links and audio meeting details symbols.
    • Formatting can be applied using the formatting painter.
    1. Collaboration:
    • Saving notebooks to OneDrive enables sharing and collaborative editing with team members.
    • “You’ll see as we move through the course you can share your notebook with team members other people and then everybody can jump into the notebook and make changes their own annotations things like that”

    In summary, this OneNote training course offers a detailed guide to using the application effectively for note-taking, organization, and collaboration. It covers a range of features from basic text formatting to advanced content integration and sharing options.

    Microsoft OneNote: Usage, Organization, and FAQs

    OneNote FAQs

    Here’s an 8-question FAQ covering key aspects of using Microsoft OneNote, based on the provided source:

    1. What is Microsoft OneNote, and what are its primary functions?

    OneNote for Microsoft 365 is a digital note-taking application designed to help users rethink the simple task of taking notes. It allows users to gather information from various sources, insert different types of media files, organize information logically for easy reading and finding, and collaborate with others on team notebooks. It’s a comprehensive tool for organizing thoughts, research, and collaborative projects.

    2. What are the key assumptions made before starting a OneNote course?

    A basic familiarity with Microsoft applications (Word, Excel, PowerPoint) is assumed, specifically regarding the ribbon layout and standard user interface common across these applications. The course primarily focuses on the OneNote for Microsoft 365 desktop application, with overviews of the mobile app and online version.

    3. How do you create a new notebook in OneNote, and where should you save it?

    To create a new notebook, go to File > New, select a location (OneDrive or local), give the notebook a name, and click Create. If you intend to share the notebook with others, it must be saved to a shareable location like OneDrive or a network drive, not a local location like your desktop. OneNote notebooks automatically save, so there’s no need to manually save your work.

    4. How do you modify notebook properties, and what properties can be changed?

    To modify notebook properties, right-click the notebook name in the notebook list and select “Properties”. You can change the display name (without affecting the actual folder name), the color of the notebook tab for visual organization, and the location where the notebook is stored. You can also view the default notebook format.

    5. How do you close a notebook in OneNote, and how does this differ from deleting it?

    To close a notebook, right-click the notebook name in the notebook list and select “Close This Notebook.” This removes the notebook from the list of open notebooks but does not delete it. To reopen, go to File > Open and select the notebook.

    6. How do you properly delete a OneNote notebook stored in OneDrive?

    Deleting a notebook stored on OneDrive involves closing the notebook within OneNote, then navigating to the notebook’s location on OneDrive through File Explorer or a web browser. From there, the notebook folder can be deleted. This ensures the notebook and its contents are permanently removed from cloud storage.

    7. What are sections and pages in OneNote, and how can they be used to organize information?

    Sections are like dividers within a notebook, allowing you to group related pages together. Pages contain the actual content (text, images, etc.). Sections appear as tabs at the top of the OneNote window, while pages are listed on the right-hand side. You can create subpages to further organize pages within a section.

    8. How can you add different types of content to OneNote pages?

    OneNote allows you to add various types of content, including text notes, web clippings (using the OneNote Clipper), pictures (from local files or online sources), file printouts, file attachments, audio recordings, and links to websites or other sections within the notebook. You can also insert equations and symbols for mathematical or technical notes.

    OneNote for Microsoft 365: A Comprehensive Guide

    OneNote for Microsoft 365 is a digital note-taking application with many features available. A comprehensive course is available that offers a complete guide to all the features in the latest version of OneNote.

    Versions

    • OneNote for Windows 10 For Windows 10 users, OneNote may come packaged with the operating system. This version has fewer features than the desktop version, but a module at the end of each course section reviews the content in the Windows 10 version. A quick way to check if you’re using the Windows 10 version is to check the title bar at the top, which will say “OneNote for Windows 10”.
    • Online version With a Microsoft 365 subscription, OneNote is accessible through an online portal. This allows users to update and read information and work on the go.
    • Desktop version The full desktop version is available with a Microsoft 365 subscription. This version is feature-rich and the primary focus of the training course.
    • Mobile app A mobile app is available for Windows Phone, Android, and iOS, with a brief overview of the iOS app provided at the end of the course.

    Interface

    • The ribbon tabs are located at the top.
    • The File menu provides access to admin tasks such as creating, opening, printing, and sharing notebooks.
    • The Home ribbon contains frequently used commands, including clipboard functions, text formatting options, styles, tags, and Outlook integration.
    • The Insert ribbon is where users can insert tables, file printouts, attachments, Excel spreadsheets, pictures, screen clippings, audio recordings, video recordings, and page templates.
    • The Draw tab is designed for touch devices with stylus pens, allowing users to draw, make annotations, handwrite notes, and insert shapes.
    • The History tab is useful for collaborative notebooks, allowing users to see changes made by different authors, find specific changes, and view different versions of a page.
    • The Review tab includes tools for spell checking, using the thesaurus, checking accessibility, changing language, and password protecting sections.
    • The View tab allows users to view their notebook in different ways, format the page background, zoom in and out, and modify window display.
    • The Help tab provides access to help files and is not always visible by default. It can be enabled in OneNote options.
    • The Quick Access Toolbar is located above the ribbon and can be customized with frequently used commands.

    Key Features and Functions

    • Keyboard shortcuts Many keyboard shortcuts are the same across Microsoft applications. Screen tips display keyboard shortcuts when hovering over commands on the ribbons.
    • Touch Mode OneNote is suited for touch devices and has a touch mode that optimizes the interface for touch input.
    • Notebook Structure Notebooks are organized into sections and pages. Sections are like dividers, and each section can contain multiple pages.
    • Creating a New Notebook To create a new notebook, go to the File tab, select New, and choose a location to save the notebook.
    • Notebook Properties Notebook properties can be modified by right-clicking the notebook name and selecting Properties.
    • Closing Notebooks To close a notebook, right-click the notebook name and select Close This Notebook.
    • Deleting Notebooks Deleting a notebook involves locating the notebook file in File Explorer and deleting it from there.
    • Send to OneNote Tool The Send to OneNote tool allows users to send items like Excel spreadsheets, Word documents, or emails directly to a specific page in OneNote.
    • OneNote Clipper The OneNote Clipper is a browser extension that makes it easy to clip content from the web and pull it into a specific page in OneNote.
    • Screen Clipping Utility The screen clipping utility allows users to clip anything that they have open on their PC.
    • Inserting Pictures Pictures can be inserted from local files or online sources.
    • Inserting Online Video OneNote allows embedding videos from various online video sites such as YouTube, Dailymotion, and Vimeo.
    • File Printouts File printouts allow users to insert the contents of a file (e.g., Word document, Excel spreadsheet, PDF) into a OneNote page.
    • Audio and Video Recordings OneNote allows users to record audio and video directly into their notebooks.
    • Adding Links OneNote allows adding links to web pages, files, and other sections within the notebook.
    • Equations and Symbols OneNote allows users to insert mathematical equations and symbols into their notes.
    • Copying and Pasting Content OneNote offers various paste options, including keeping source formatting, merging formatting, keeping text only, and inserting text as a picture.
    • Formatting Text Notes OneNote offers various formatting options to make text more readable and emphasize certain points.
    • Using Styles OneNote offers a range of styles that can be applied to headings, quotes, and other elements to give a consistent look and feel.
    • Tables Tables can be used to organize information on a page.
    • Tags OneNote allows users to add tags to their notes to categorize and prioritize information.
    • Spell Checking OneNote checks spelling as you type and allows you to correct errors as you go.

    OneNote: Keyboard Shortcuts for Efficiency

    OneNote has keyboard shortcuts to help you work more efficiently. Many shortcuts are the same across other Microsoft applications.

    General Information

    • A keyboard shortcut is a combination of keystrokes that executes a task.
    • Screen tips provide a description of the command and its keyboard shortcut when hovering over different commands on the ribbons. To ensure screen tips are enabled, navigate to File > OneNote options > General tab > User interface options and select “Show feature descriptions in screen tips” in screen tips style.
    • Pressing the Alt key on the keyboard assigns keyboard shortcuts to the different ribbon tabs, allowing navigation and execution of tasks without a mouse.
    • A full list of shortcut keys available in OneNote can be found within the help files. The Help tab may need to be turned on in OneNote options. To turn it on, go to file, options, customize ribbon and make sure there is a tick next to help. The shortcut key for help is the F1 key.

    Frequent keyboard shortcuts

    • Bold: Ctrl + B
    • Italics: Ctrl + I
    • Underline: Ctrl + U
    • Cut, Copy, and Paste also use the same keyboard shortcuts as other Microsoft applications.

    OneNote Quick Access Toolbar: Customization and Use

    The Quick Access Toolbar in OneNote provides quick access to frequently used commands. It can be customized to include the commands you use most often. This feature is available across all Microsoft applications.

    Location and Appearance

    • The Quick Access Toolbar is located in the top left-hand corner of the OneNote interface.
    • By default, it may contain commands such as Undo and Touch/Mouse Mode.
    • The toolbar can be positioned either above or below the ribbon. To change the location, click the drop-down button on the right end of the toolbar and select “Show below the Ribbon”.

    Customization

    • To add commands, click the drop-down button on the right end of the toolbar. This will display a list of popular commands that can be added.
    • Commands from the ribbon can be added by right-clicking on them and selecting “Add to Quick Access Toolbar”.
    • The “More Commands” option in the drop-down menu opens the OneNote Options, where you can add any command available in OneNote. This includes commands not listed on the ribbon.
    • To access all commands, in the OneNote Options, choose “All Commands” from the drop-down menu. To see commands not on the ribbon, select “Commands not in the ribbon”.
    • Commands can be removed from the toolbar via the OneNote Options.

    Organization

    • The order of commands on the Quick Access Toolbar can be reorganized using the up and down arrows in the OneNote Options.
    • Separators can be added between commands to visually group them. Separators are available at the top of the list of commands in the OneNote Options.

    OneNote: Inserting and Refreshing File Printouts

    File printouts in OneNote allow you to insert the contents of a file stored locally or in OneDrive into a OneNote page. This can be any kind of file, such as a Word document, Excel spreadsheet, or PDF.

    Key aspects of file printouts:

    • Insertion: To insert a file printout, select “File Printout” from the Insert tab. This will prompt you to select the desired file from File Explorer.
    • Content Copy: The content is printed directly into the page. It’s a copy, so the text isn’t directly editable from within OneNote.
    • Updating Content: To update the printout with any changes made to the original file:
    • Double-click the printout to open the original file in its respective application (e.g., Word).
    • Make the necessary edits and save the file.
    • In OneNote, right-click on the printout and select “Refresh Printout” to display the updated content.
    • Copying Text: The text from a printout can be copied and pasted elsewhere. Right-click the printout, select “Copy Text from this Page of the Printout”, and paste the text wherever it is needed. The text will then be editable.
    • As with other types of inserted content, you can use the send to OneNote tool to print to OneNote from other applications. When printing this way, you must select the notebook and section to send the content to.

    OneNote: Managing Notebook Sections and Section Groups

    Notebook sections in OneNote are a way to organize your notebooks. Sections function as dividers within a paper notebook and are displayed as tabs. Each section can contain multiple pages.

    Here’s what you should know about working with sections:

    • Adding Sections The most direct way is to click the plus sign, which says ‘create new section’. Alternatively, you can right-click on any one of the tabs and select ‘new section’.
    • Renaming Sections Right-click on a section tab and choose ‘rename’.
    • Section Colors Section tabs are color-coded. To change the color, right-click on the tab, select ‘section color’, and choose a new color.
    • Reordering Sections To move a section, click and drag the tab to the desired position. You can also right-click a tab, choose ‘move or copy,’ and select where to move the section.
    • Copying Sections To copy a section, right-click on the tab, choose ‘move or copy’, select a location, and click ‘copy’.
    • Deleting Sections Right-click on a section tab and select ‘delete’. Deleting a section will also delete all of the pages within it. When you delete sections, pages, or anything from your notebooks, they go into the notebook recycle bin.

    Section Groups

    • Section groups are a way to group different sections together, which is useful if you have a lot of information in one notebook. To create one, right-click on any of the tabs and select ‘new section group’.
    • To move sections into a section group, right-click on a section tab, select ‘move or copy,’ choose the section group, and click ‘move’. Unfortunately, in OneNote, there is currently no way to select multiple sections and move them all at once.

    In OneNote for Windows 10, you can add sections at the bottom. You can also reorder sections by dragging them.

    OneNote Tutorial: Getting Started with Microsoft OneNote – 3.5 hour+ OneNote Class

    The Original Text

    subscribe and click the bell icon to turn on notifications hello everyone and welcome to this course on onenote for microsoft 365. my name’s deb and i’m a microsoft i.t trainer and your excitable host for this course and the reason why i’m so excited is because i love onenote and i can’t wait to show you some of the awesome features available in this digital note-taking application which is really going to make you rethink how you go about the simple task of taking notes over the balance of this course i’m going to show you how to get started with onenote how to gather information from different sources how to insert different types of media files how to organize that information logically so it’s easier to read and find i’m going to show you how you can collaborate with others on team notebooks now this is a very comprehensive course and it offers a complete guide to all of the features available in the latest version of onenote so if that’s what you’re looking for then you’ve come to the right place now this course is divided down into 13 sections and i’ve tried to arrange these logically to correspond with the natural flow of how you would work in onenote now i’m going to be making some assumptions before we begin this course i’m going to assume that you have some familiarity with microsoft applications so maybe you are a word or an excel or a powerpoint user prior to coming to onenote and what i mean by this is that i won’t be going through the basics of how microsoft applications work per se i am going to assume you are reasonably familiar with the ribbon layout and the standard user interface that’s common amongst all microsoft applications and when it comes to the scope of this course i’m going to be working in the onenote for microsoft 365 desktop application i’ll be providing information on things like the mobile app and the online version but it will be a high level overview as opposed to a full training course in those specific parts now if you’re feeling a bit confused by what i’ve just said there don’t worry at all in the next module we’re going to start by running through the different versions of onenote that are available because as with all things in microsoft there are quite a few options but for now that is all i just want to say thank you so much for choosing this course i can’t wait to dive into it with you so with that said grab yourself a coffee and let’s get started hello everyone and welcome back to the course now i just thought i’d start out this section by running you through the different versions of onenote that are available because in my experience this is one of those things that causes a lot of confusion in fact very recently i was running a webinar on onenote and we got about halfway through and i had many of the participants say to me what you’re looking at on the screen looks nothing like what i’m looking at on my screen and we determined that we were actually using different versions of onenote so this is something you really have to watch out for so i’m going to run you through the different versions available and also let you know the version that i’m going to be using throughout the balance of this course if you are a windows 10 user what you might find is that you have access to the windows version of onenote because onenote now comes packaged with windows 10 so if you’ve downloaded that onto your pc or maybe you’ve bought a new laptop that has it already installed you’ll find that you will have a version of onenote 2016 already installed and ready to go on your pc so i’m using a windows 10 laptop and this is a fairly new laptop so i have this version installed so i’m going to jump down to my search bar at the bottom and i’m going to start to type in one note now i want you to ignore the onenote app which is showing underneath best match for the moment because that’s something different to the one underneath which is one note for windows 10. this is the one that comes installed with windows 10 and it looks completely different to the onenote desktop version and also the online version so if i very quickly open onenote for windows 10 you’ll see that it looks like this so if when you open up your version of onenote it looks very similar to something that i have here then you’re more than likely using the windows 10 version and a really quick and easy way to check that is that in the title bar at the top it will say onenote for windows 10. so this is one of the versions now this isn’t the version that i’m going to be using throughout this course and the reason why is that it doesn’t have quite as many features as the full desktop version however because a lot of people do have this on their pc for free without having to have any kind of 365 subscription at the end of each section of this course i am going to provide a module which basically runs through everything we’ve been through in the section but in the windows 10 version as well so if you do have this version you should still be able to follow along nicely so that’s the first version of windows 10 that you may or may not have available depending on what operating system you’re using now the second way that you can access onenote is through a microsoft 365 subscription and you can see here that i’m currently logged in to my online 365 portal and if you’re a bit confused by microsoft 365 it’s just the new name for office 365 so if you have a subscription to microsoft 365 then you should have access to onenote so if i click the little waffle or the app launcher at the top here you can see that one of the applications i have access to is onenote i can click it and it’s going to jump me into the online version of onenote and again this looks very different to the windows version and also the full desktop version that we’re going to open shortly now if you’re fairly used to using microsoft 365 you’ll know that this kind of online browser online portal is where you can come to access the lite versions of the applications so they’re intended for you to be able to update read things work on the go on whatever device you’re using as long as you’ve got an internet connection you can jump into your office 365 account and access online versions but these aren’t the full versions and because of that this also isn’t the version that we’re going to be covering in this particular course now i’m going to click on home for the time being because when you do have a microsoft 365 subscription when you log into the portal you’re able to download and install the full versions of all of these applications and you do that via this button just here install office and by clicking that and running through the setup process you’re then going to have the full versions of all of the applications available on your desktop so that’s exactly what i’ve done and once you’ve done that you’ll then be able to search for onenote it’s actually this one here so not the one with four windows 10 after it this is the full desktop version so you can click here to launch it or you can do what i’ve done and pin it to your taskbar and you’ll see mine is located down here with the rest of my microsoft applications so i can click to open it up and this is the feature rich desktop version and it’s this one that i’m going to be using throughout the balance of this course so what i’m trying to say to you here is if you predominantly work in the online version then this isn’t a training course that’s going to cover that however if you do have the desktop version and also if you have that free version through windows 10 then this course is going to be perfect for you just bear in mind there will only be one module per section that relates to the windows 10 version as we’re mostly going to be working in the desktop version phew quite a lot to take in there as always microsoft likes to make things a little bit confusing for everybody and just a final point to note there is a mobile app that you can download for windows phone android and ios and i will be doing a brief overview on the ios app at the end of this course so hopefully that is reasonably clear to everybody and we’re all on the same page with regards to the version we’re going to be using and what we’re going to be covering in this course i’m going to jump across to the next module where we’re going to start to explore some of the keyboard shortcuts in onenote so i’m going to go across there now and i hope to see you there now in this first module we’re going to talk about keyboard shortcuts and it wouldn’t be one of my courses if i didn’t start out with this module because keyboard shortcuts are such an important thing when it comes to being able to work efficiently not just in onenote but any microsoft application now if you’re coming to onenote having used word excel powerpoint or even outlook then you’ve got a bit of a head start here because many of the keyboard shortcuts are exactly the same in onenote as they are in those other applications at least the ones that you’ll use most frequently now if all things microsoft are completely new to you and you’re not entirely sure what i mean by a keyboard shortcut keyboard shortcut is essentially a combination of keystrokes that will execute a task and a lot of the time using a keyboard shortcut is a lot quicker than using your mouse to hunt through the different ribbons to find the task that you need and there are so many different keyboard shortcuts in onenote that you would never be expected to remember them all but most people have a catalog of about five to ten in their minds which they use frequently now as i mentioned the keyboard shortcuts in one note do bear a lot of similarities to the keyboard shortcuts in other microsoft applications so for example something like bold control b is the keyboard shortcut and that is the same across every single microsoft application italics is control i underline control u and of course we have things like cut copy and also paste with the same keyboard shortcuts now you’ll see that as i hover over these different commands on the ribbons i’m getting a little screen tip which not only gives me a little bit of description text so i know exactly what that command does it’s also showing me the keyboard shortcut now if for some reason when you hover over these icons you can’t see those screen tips i would advise you to turn them on so let’s just take a look at how we do that if we can’t see these screen tips so i’m going to jump up to file and you’ll find this in the onenote options and it’s this first general tab just here in this first group user interface options so in screen tips style make sure you have show feature descriptions in screen tips now if for some reason you find those completely annoying then you can also turn them off from here as well but soon as you turn those on it’s going to allow you to see those keyboard shortcuts in that screen tip text so that can be super useful now if you’re somebody who likes to work predominantly using the keyboard as opposed to the mouse if you press the alt key on your keyboard you’ll see that you get some keyboard shortcuts assigned to the different ribbon tabs so this is great because it enables me to navigate and do things without touching my mouse and i know a lot of people who are really into working with keyboard shortcuts use this option quite frequently it’s also really good if you have any wrist problems or something that prevents you from fully working with your mouse you don’t technically have to use it in order to work within onenote so for example if i want to navigate to the insert tab i can press capital n which is going to jump me to that tab and then i get a whole new list of keyboard shortcuts that i can use to execute a task so if i want to insert a picture i could press p and it’s going to open up file explorer and let me browse for the picture that i want to add and also with screens like this if you take a look at the bottom if i was to hit my enter key it’s going to open whatever i have selected now if i want to just cancel out of this window which i do i can use my tab key to move to cancel and then hit the enter key so i’ve been able to cancel that dialog box without touching the mouse at all so those alt key shortcuts are really useful now the only other thing i really want to mention to you regarding keyboard shortcuts here is if you’re somebody who does like their keyboard shortcuts and you want to see a full list of all of the shortcut keys available in onenote then you can find a list of those within the help files so you can see here in onenote i have a help tab and once again this isn’t a tab that’s turned on by default so if you can’t see help up here you’re going to want to jump to file go down to options and then jump into customize ribbon and on the right hand side here this is where you can select what ribbon tabs you can see in your onenote so just go into here and make sure that you have a tick next to help in order to be able to see that ribbon tab so if i hold my mouse over where it says help you’ll see that there’s also a shortcut key for this as well and that is the f1 key and again as you would expect that is the same across all microsoft applications so let’s jump into help and that’s going to open a pane up on the right hand side and what i can do is type in keyboard shortcuts and press enter to run that search and the top result i get is keyboard shortcuts in onenote and if i jump into here i get a lot of information about different keyboard shortcuts and then i can view all of the shortcuts divided down by category so i can jump to frequently used shortcuts and i can see all of them listed in here i then have shortcuts for formatting inserting items onto a page working with tables so on and so forth so this is a really great place to come if you want just to see a full list of all the keyboard shortcuts available in onenote now i will say that throughout this training course i’m going to try to use keyboard shortcuts as little as possible and the only reason for that is because it’s a lot more difficult for you to see what i’m doing if i’m using a keyboard shortcut as opposed to if i’m actually clicking on things bringing up menus so on and so forth so if you wonder why i’m not personally using them i will say that in my day-to-day work when i’m not recording a training course i use keyboard shortcuts all the time but i’m going to be using my mouse throughout the balance of this course so that’s it on keyboard shortcuts in the next module in this introductory section i’m just going to be talking to you a little bit about customizing the quick access toolbar again this is something you might have done in previous applications so if you’re familiar with how to do that then you can probably jump over the next module but if not stay tuned i’m going to show you how you can be more efficient by adding frequently used commands to the quick access toolbar i’m going to jump over there now so join me when you’re ready hi guys and welcome back to the course in this module we’re going to take a look at customizing the quick access toolbar now once again this is one of those features that’s available across all of the microsoft applications so if you are a excel powerpoint word user and you’re fairly familiar with how the quick access toolbar works and how to customize it then you can probably skip over this module and head straight to the next one however if this is all fairly new for you stay tuned and let’s run through why the quick access toolbar is useful and how you can customize it now the quick access toolbar you’ll see located in the top left hand corner and it’s this little toolbar just here so it’s kind of tucked away a little bit now i don’t have a great deal on my quick access toolbar at the moment just a couple of commands and that’s pretty much what this quick access toolbar is you can add whatever commands you like to it in particular commands that you use frequently to make them super easy for you to access so for example if i’m always inserting pictures into my onenote notebook instead of jumping to the insert tab and then selecting pictures from here i could essentially add this command to my quick access toolbar which then gives me one click access to that particular option now by default when you first open up onenote you’ll already see a couple of things assigned to your quick access toolbar so for me that is the undo command a very popular command ctrl z to take us back a step and also the command that allows me to switch between touch and mouse mode now i’m going to be going into that in more detail in the next module so i’m not going to delve into exactly what this command does right at this moment and then right on the end here we have this little drop down button and when i hover over it says customize quick access toolbar and what this is going to show you is a number of different commands that you could add to your quick access toolbar so i could add forward i could add redo print print preview so on and so forth so these are merely suggestions of popular commands that you might consider adding to that quick access toolbar now something else i want to draw your attention to here is as you can see currently my quick access toolbar is tucked away in the top right hand corner now whilst i don’t have too many options as to the location of this toolbar i do have one more option and that is i can choose to show it below the ribbon so i’m going to click that and you can now see that it pulls it down to below my ribbons now this is where i like to have my quick access toolbar because i just find it a lot easier to get to and less tucked out the way so let’s click our drop down again and look at how we can customize and add commands to this toolbar now if i wanted to choose any of these i can just select them so let’s add the redo button like so i could also add the print button and let’s add print preview as well and you’ll see it just builds a long list of all of these different commands which i can then execute simply by clicking on them so it’s a lot more efficient than having to find them in the ribbons or in that file area backstage now one thing you will notice is that obviously we just have a selection of commands which we can choose from here but what if you want to add a command that’s on the ribbon well as i said at the beginning if i insert a lot of pictures into my onenote notebook then what i could do is right click on the pictures command and say add to quick access toolbar to add that on and you’ll see that you have this option whenever you right click on any of these commands and of course i could carry on going and build myself up a nice long list of all of the commands that i access frequently now in addition to adding them this way through the right click menu if i click the drop down again you’ll see right at the bottom we have a more commands option and that’s going to jump you straight into the onenote options and into the quick access toolbar area so over on the right hand side of the screen you’re going to see everything that you currently have on your quick access toolbar and what you can essentially do is go through all of the commands available in onenote and add them in from here so it’s definitely worth noting that not every single command that’s available in onenote is listed out as a command on ribbons so what you could do is click the drop down here and i could say all commands which is going to show absolutely every command available in one note if i just wanted to see the commands that weren’t available to select from a ribbon i could select commands not in ribbon now i’m going to select all commands to bring up the full list that’s available so i’m going to scroll through and i can add a couple of things from here so let’s say customize tags is something i do all the time i’m going to select it click on the add button to add it over to my quick access toolbar and of course once i have it over here i could then choose to remove so let’s remove print preview if i want to get rid of any of these so i could go through this big long list just adding commands i use frequently to my quick access toolbar now another thing that you can do within here is you can reorganize the way these are listed out so for example undo and redo are kind of in the same category so i want these to be together so i’m going to click on redo and then i can use my arrows to move that up one maybe i want touch mouse mode to be right at the beginning so i’m going to select it and say move up just to put that at the beginning so you can organize your list however you like now something else you might want to add in here and again this is more of an organizational tip if you start to get quite a lot of icons on your quick access toolbar sometimes it’s nice to have a little bit of separation between commands of similar type and we can do that by adding in a separator now you’ll find separators available at the top of any of these lists that you select and it’s this just here i can click click on add to add in a separator and i can add in as many separators as i like so i’m going to add another one i can then use my up and down arrows to move these into position so i’m going to have one separator there and i’m going to move this one down two so now when i click on ok you can see how that looks on my quick access toolbar i now have these very faint lines in between separating out different groups of commands so it’s just a little bit easier on your eye to have them organized in this way as opposed to just a big long row of random icons so that is how you can customize your quick access toolbar and it is something i always advise people to do because it does really increase your efficiency when you’re looking for commands you use frequently in onenote in the next module we’re going to finish off this introductory section by talking about using onenote on a touch device so i’m going to grab a coffee head over there now and i look forward to you joining me hi guys welcome back now i didn’t want to finish up this introductory section without giving a bit of a shout out to all the touch screen users out there more and more these days people have tablet devices and also laptops that have touch screen capabilities i am in fact using one of those laptops as we speak and out of all of the microsoft applications onenote is the application that is most suited to people who use touch device with a stylus pen and you’ll see as we work through this course particularly in certain sections when it comes to things like handwriting things are a lot easier if you are using a touch device with a stylus because let’s face it trying to write a word using your mouse never works well so before we finish up this section i just want to run through a couple of the options for all of the touch screen users out there now currently i’m working with the mouse and keyboard and so i’m in what we call mouse mode now helpfully one of the default commands on my quick access toolbar is this option just here the touch mouse mode option so this allows me to toggle between using a mouse and using touch now when you’re using a mouse and keyboard the interface is really optimized for that particular usage whereas if we jump into touch you’ll see that the screen changes slightly more because it’s then going to optimize for people who use a touch screen so let me briefly switch into touch mode now the most obvious thing that’s changed here is that i have a lot more space between the different commands on the ribbons so what it’s doing here is just accommodating for your finger your finger is a lot bigger than your mouse pointer and so you need a little bit more room because the last thing you want to be doing is pressing one command and accidentally hitting two or three so if you’re watching this course now and you are using a touch device i would advise you to switch into this particular mode and remember if you can’t see this option on your quick access toolbar by default then you can jump into more commands and then find touch mouse mode in here and add it to make it super simple for you to switch between the two modes now we are going to be typing a lot of text throughout the balance of this course and again if you are using a touch device then you’re going to want to make sure that you know how to pull up your touch screen keyboard now mine’s located right in the bottom corner on my taskbar and you can see as i hover over it says touch keyboard and if i click that that’s going to pull up my touch keyboard and i can then go through and i can start to use that to type in different words and notes so make sure you know where that is because it’s going to make your life a whole lot easier as we’re going through this course now we’re going to dip back into touch a little bit later on particularly when we get to this section of the course here where we start to draw things as i said it’s a lot easier to do if you do have a touch screen with a stylus but of course as always i will try to accommodate both keyboard and mouse users as well as touch users so that’s it on touch i am going to very quickly toggle back to mouse and keyboard mode and i will see you in the next section hello everyone and welcome back to the course this is deb your host and we are about to get into section two which i’ve titled getting started with onenote and over the course of this section we’re going to learn some of the skills that you need to know in order to get going with onenote and we’re going to start out in this first lesson by just taking a look at how we open onenote i’m going to show you how to open a notebook and then we’re going to do a quick tour of the onenote interface so you understand the ribbon structure and the kinds of commands that you’ll find on the different ribbons so let’s dive in now as i mentioned in the previous section i’m going to be demonstrating one note for desktop so what i could do in order to launch onenote is click in the search bar down here and i’m using windows 10 type in onenote and you’ll see that i have onenote listed underneath my apps so i could launch it from here simply by clicking on this menu item but what i’ve actually done is i’ve pinned the application to my taskbar just to make it super simple for me to access and it’s all the way down here right in the middle i’m going to click to launch now when you open onenote for the first time it’s probably going to look something similar to this so you can see there right in the middle we have this big old message that says you don’t have any open notebooks and that would be correct i haven’t created a notebook and i don’t have an open notebook now one thing you’ll notice is that with no notebook open a lot of the commands on the menus are out so in order to give you a quick tour of this interface i’m going to need to either create a new notebook or open a notebook that i have saved off so i’m going to do the latter i’m going to open a notebook that i’ve already created and we are going to go into this in more detail a bit later on but for demonstration purposes let’s quickly run through the process now much like any other microsoft application you’ll see that we have our ribbon tabs at the top we have our file menu which jumps us into that backstage area and if you are familiar with other microsoft applications you’ll know that this is kind of where you’ll find those admin style tasks so if you need to create a new notebook open print share all of those kinds of things you’re going to find in here so what i want to do is i want to jump straight down to open and you’ll see at the top some of the notebooks that i’ve had open recently and these are notebooks that i have stored in onedrive and then if i scroll down i can see some more lists so on the right hand side i’ve got notebooks selected and this is showing me any notebooks that i’ve recently used so i could select to open one of these alternatively if i can’t see the notebook that i want to open listed either down here or at the top here what i can do is choose to open from other locations and jump across to my onedrive or maybe even browse my local drives to find a notebook that i want to use now as i said we’re going to get into this a bit more later on so for the time being i’m just going to open something that i’ve opened recently and i’m going to choose this one here that is my work trips notebook click to open it up so this is a very basic notebook but we’re not going to worry about the content too much at this time really what i want to do in this lesson is just run you through the interface so you kind of start to get an idea of where things are located on the different ribbons now again something that’s very consistent across all microsoft applications your home ribbon is going to contain all of the things that you’re probably going to utilize most often so we have our clipboard group which contains cut copy paste we have add text formatting options and also styles if we want to apply them we then have a big section here called tags and tags is something that’s really cool and we’re going to talk a lot about this a bit later on in the course i can email my page from here and i also have some interaction with outlook on the end here and again we’re going to cover this a bit later on moving across to the insert ribbon this contains all of the things that you can insert into your notebooks so that might range from things like tables file printouts attachments even excel spreadsheets you can also insert pictures whether they be saved on your local drives or located online you can add screen clippings or screenshots directly into your notebook and you can also do cool things like record audio and video from directly within your onenote notebook this is also where you would come if you wanted to use some kind of page template as well so the insert tab you come to whenever you want to insert something into your notebook we then have our draw tab and this is probably most useful if you are somebody who uses a laptop or maybe a touch device that has a stylus because this is where you can come to draw make annotations handwrite your own notes and insert things like shapes now whilst it is possible to do these things using a mouse a lot of the time it is quite hard to use a mouse to do handwriting as i said this does tend to work best if you’re using a stylus moving across to the next tab we have our history tab and this really relates to having lots of people collaborating on one notebook you’ll see as we move through the course you can share your notebook with team members other people and then everybody can jump into the notebook and make changes their own annotations things like that so the history tab really comes into play if you want to essentially see changes that have been made to a notebook by author if you want to find specific changes or even if you want to see different versions of your page and again we’re going to get into how all that works a little bit later on moving across we have our review tab and this is pretty much what you would expect to find on any review tab in your microsoft applications this is where you would come to spell check use the thesaurus check your accessibility change things like language or even password protector section we also have something in here called linked notes which is a very useful feature which we’ll explore in more detail later on in the course the view tab is where you can view your notebook or your page in different ways and you can also format your page background so if you want to change your page color or maybe you want to add raw lines to your page you can definitely do that you can do things like zoom in and out to make things a bit easier to see and also make modifications to how you’re displaying your window and then finally on the end here we have our help tab now as i mentioned at the beginning of this course the help tab isn’t always there by default if you think that you’re going to utilize this tab then it’s definitely worth jumping into onenote options and turning that tab on i’m not going to focus on this because we have already been through this tab earlier on in the course so aside from that ribbon structure underneath we have our quick access toolbar which we’ve seen how to customize and then we have our notebook and the way that a notebook is structured is it has sections and then it has pages so i liken this to a paper notebook that maybe you have dividers in the dividers are very similar to the different sections that we have up here and you can see them showing as tabs and then within each section i have pages and if you cast your eyes over to the right hand side in this blue panel you can see i currently have three pages milan rome and venice within the italy section and of course you can add sections and you can add more pages to each section and this is in general how all of the notebooks that you create will be structured don’t forget if you feel that you need a little bit more room when you’re working in your onenote notebook and you want to temporarily minimize the ribbon you can definitely do that by clicking on this small little up arrow over on the right hand side and this up arrow does have a keyboard shortcut control plus f1 and that’s going to minimize up your ribbon which gives you a little bit more room when you’re working in your notebook if you want to bring your ribbons back after you’ve collapsed them up if you click on any of the tabs the ribbon will drop down again if i click back on my notebook that ribbon’s going to disappear if you decide that you want to have that ribbon back permanently what you need to do is just click on one of the ribbons again to pull it up and then go over to the right hand side and click on the pin the ribbon icon again control plus f1 and that’s going to lock that ribbon in place so that is pretty much what your interface looks like when you open up a workbook so the main point i want you to take away here is this notebook structure you have your sections running in tabs across the top and each section can contain multiple different pages and we’re going to see in the next lesson exactly how we create a new notebook from scratch and how we start to add sections and pages so i’m going to jump over to the next module now and i look forward to you joining me hello everyone and welcome back to the course it’s time for us to start creating some stuff let’s start creating some content in wonderful onenote now in the previous module we took a quick tour around the onenote interface and of course we’re going to be dipping in and out of these ribbons and exploring all of the commands over the balance of this course but the first thing we want to do the most fundamental thing in one note is we want to create a new notebook and this is a very simple process so we’re going to go up to the file tab and as you would expect we want to make sure that we’ve got new selected now what you’ll see in here is essentially a split screen on the left hand side we have different locations so this is where we want to save a new notebook and then on the right we have a list of recent folders so recent folders that you’ve saved into are used now this is a reasonably new account that i’ve set up so currently i only have one recent folder listed and that’s my documents folder in onedrive and the way this works is that when you create a new notebook you essentially save it first which is why we’re being asked to select a location now i’m going to save my notebook into onedrive but before i do that let’s just take a look at the other options that we have so you could if you wanted to choose to save this directly to a sharepoint team site you could save it to this pc you can add a place so if you have more than one onedrive account you can choose to add those from here to make them easy to access alternatively if you just want to save your notebook locally you can do that by selecting browse and it’s going to jump you into file explorer and you can then jump in and choose a folder now one thing to note here if you want to share your notebook with other people then your notebook must be saved to location that’s shareable so for example saving your notebook to your desktop is not a shareable location whereas saving your notebook to maybe a network drive that you have within your company or even saving it to onedrive cloud storage those are considered shareable locations now whilst it is a good idea to have a little bit of an idea as to if you want to share your notebook right at the point where you’re creating it it doesn’t matter so much if you create it in one location and then change your mind because you can move your notebook at a later time if you then want to share it but what i’m going to do is i’m going to save to onedrive and i’m going to put it just in my onedrive train it now limited folder and when i click it it’s going to jump me to that folder and i’m going to say i want to put it in the folder notebooks and then i’m going to give my notebook a name so i’m going to click in the notebook name field and i’m going to call my notebook project artemis so maybe where i work we are working on a project that’s got a code name of project artemis and i want all of my notes all of the meetings all of the content related to this project to be contained within this notebook so i’ve given my notebook a name and i’m going to say create and this is a really important point you’ll see straight away it’s popped up with a little message that says your notebook has been created would you like to share it with other people and that’s come up because i’ve saved it in a location that is shareable so if i wanted to maybe i know right now that i want to share this with the rest of the project artemis team i could choose invite people now i’m not going to do that at this stage because i want to talk you through that process a bit later on so i’m going to say not now and it creates my notebook and what you’ll see is that my notebook name is now listed just here and as i hover over it gives me a little bit of information in that screen tip so it says i can click to view other notebooks so if you have more than one notebook open if you click just here you’re going to be able to see all of your notebooks listed and you can easily switch between the different notebooks that you’re working in now obviously i only have project artemis open which is why it’s the only one i can see listed here something else you can see when i hover over is you can see the location where i have this notebook saved so onedrive train it now notebooks and it’s telling me that it’s up to date and this is another important thing to note onenote notebooks automatically save so you don’t have to worry about going into file and save you don’t have to press ctrl s as you’re working everything automatically saves and synchronizes and this is particularly important if you’ve saved your notebook to cloud storage like onedrive every change you make will be synchronized every change that anybody else makes to your team notebook if they have access will also be synchronized so all this message is telling me is that all of the changes are up to date so that is basically how you create a notebook from scratch if you wanted to create another one you could just jump back into file go to new and go through exactly the same process select your location first give your notebook a name and then it’s going to open in onenote and it will be listed in your notebooks drop down and we’re going to create a couple of notebooks a bit later on so you can see how you can very easily switch between the two and work in multiple workbooks at the same time now in the next lesson we’re going to delve a bit more into notebook properties i’m going to show you the different things that you can change and i’m also going to show you how you can essentially close a notebook and come out of it when you’re done but for now that is it i will see you in the next module hello everyone welcome back to the course we are down in section two where we are getting started with onenote and in the previous module i showed you how to create a new notebook from scratch and select a location in which to store it so what we’re going to do in this module is i’m just going to show you how you can modify the properties on a notebook and also how you can close a notebook when you’re finished with it so let’s take a look at properties first of all now as we’ve already discovered any notebook that we have open will be listed underneath this drop down and currently i only have project artemis open now if i want to view the properties for this particular notebook if i right click my mouse you’ll see right towards the bottom in this little menu we have a properties option so let’s select it and see what we get now when you go into notebook properties there isn’t a great deal of information that you can change in here but there are some important things that you should be aware of if for example you want to change the display name of your notebook so maybe i want to change this to project alpha project beta something else i can come in here and i can edit the display name and what you’ll see underneath is it says does not affect the actual notebook folder name so what that’s essentially saying is you are merely changing the display name the name that you can see in onenote it doesn’t change the folder name so for example if i just quickly pull up file explorer this is essentially where i have my notebook saved in onedrive in the notebooks folder and you can see here a couple of workbooks that i have within this folder and one of them is project artemis so if i was to change the display name to project beta and click on ok it’s going to change the name here but what it’s not going to do is change the actual folder name within notebooks so that’s a really little important point to be aware of now so we don’t confuse things i’m actually going to go back into my properties and i’m just going to change that name back to project artemis the next property that we can change is the color of the notebook and we have a drop down here which brings up a little palette of muted pastel shades and we can essentially color code our different notebooks it makes them stand out from one another you could even color code notebooks that are maybe related with the same color just as a way of organizing your notebooks in a more visual way so i’m going to select this purple color for this particular notebook underneath that we have the location so it’s telling me the location where my current notebook is stored and if i decide i want to move that somewhere else i can click on change location once again it’s going to open up file explorer and i can choose a different folder to save my notebook into and then finally at the bottom it’s telling me what my default format is so it’s saying that this is a onenote 2010 to 2016 notebook format and the convert to button is grayed out for me so if i was to open a notebook that was in a different format i could choose to convert it to 2010 to 2016 format but at the moment we are all good with how we have our format set so i’m just going to click on ok so now when i click the drop down you can see that my notebook is that purple color so those are the properties that you have for each notebook as i said not a great deal but some important things in there now the final thing i want to talk to you about in this particular module is how to close notebooks so you might have multiple notebooks open and if you’ve finished working in one of them for the day you’re going to want to close down that particular notebook now in most microsoft applications when you want to close something you would jump up to file and there would be a handy little close button in here but you can see with onenote we don’t actually have that so we need to close in a slightly different way again we’re going to click the drop down we’re going to hover the mouse over the notebook that we want to close right click and in here you’ll find a close this notebook option and when i click it it’s going to remove that notebook from the list now i want to stress here you haven’t deleted your notebook it hasn’t disappeared you have literally just closed it down and of course if you want to reopen it you would go back up to file down to open and because this is a notebook that i’ve recently opened the quickest way for me to open this would be to scroll down make sure i’m clicked on recent and then underneath the notebooks tab i should be able to see the last notebook that i had open at the top of this list so i’m going to click project artemis just to re-open this notebook so modifying your notebook properties and closing notebooks very straightforward very simple but very important in the next module i’m going to talk you through the process of deleting a notebook because this is not as easy as it might sound and it’s something that i find confuses people quite a bit because it works a lot different to how other things work in microsoft so i’m gonna grab a coffee jump over to the next lesson and i look forward to you joining me over there hello everyone and welcome back to the course this is still deb and we are still down in section two where we’ve been taking a look at some of the fundamental skills you need to know in order to get started with onenote and in the previous modules i’ve shown you how you can create a notebook from scratch and as is called project artemis and i’ve also shown you how you can modify those notebook properties and we finished off by taking a look at how we can close down any open notebooks once we’re finished using them now the subject that i want to discuss in this particular module is deleting notebooks because i’ve been training onenote for quite a few years now and i find that this is a really common question people get very confused when it comes to deleting because it’s not as straightforward and obvious as you might expect it to be so for example if i said to you how do you think you would delete a notebook the logical assumption is that you might jump into your notebooks list right click on the notebook and you have an option in here to delete the notebook but what you’ll find when you come into this right-click menu is that you actually don’t the only thing you have is close this notebook now whilst that will get rid of the notebook from your notebooks list it hasn’t deleted it it’s just closed it and you can jump back into file and reopen that notebook whenever you like however there will be times where maybe you’ve completed a project and you have no use for the notebook anymore we want to actually delete it and all of its contents so how do we actually delete a notebook this is where it’s really important to know where you have your notebook stored or saved so if i pull up file explorer so here i can see the two notebooks that i have saved into the notebooks folder in onedrive so what do you think i might do here in order to delete this notebook well again the logical assumption as i’ve led you down this path is that you can come into here click on the notebook you want to delete and press the delete key on your keyboard but look what happens i’m going to delete it i’m going to wait a few seconds and you’ll see that it automatically comes back again and this is where i find people have a problem they try to delete it from one drive but it keeps appearing back now the reason why that is happening is because you can see that i’m working within file explorer and i have my onedrive synchronized to file explorer so i can work with my onedrive files without having to log in to the microsoft 365 portal but what happens is my portal synchronizes with my folders in file explorer so as soon as i delete project artemis the synchronization happens onedrive can see the project artemis notebook still in microsoft 365 and so it pulls it back into my folder structure so with all that said how do we actually delete this notebook well we need to log into the online portal so i’m going to minimize file explorer and the first thing i’m going to do is i’m going to close down project artemis because this is the one that we’re going to delete so i’m going to right click and i’m going to say close this notebook what i’m then going to do is jump across to my microsoft 365 portal now i’m already logged in and for those of you that are familiar with using microsoft 365 this should be instantly recognizable and what i want to do is i want to access onedrive from here so i’m going to select the onedrive icon and then i’m going to go to my notebooks folder and this is where i have my onenote notebook saved so what i need to do is select the notebook in this case project artemis and delete it from my portal and you’ll see that when i delete it from here it doesn’t come back again so now if i jump back into file explorer you can see that in my notebooks folder i don’t have that project artemis notebook anymore so essentially it is deleted so this is a really important point to note if you want to delete a notebook that you have saved to cloud storage now i will say that if the notebook that you’ve created is just a local notebook it does work in a slightly different way but we’re going to save that for the next module where we’re going to jump in i’m going to show you how you can create a locally stored notebook and then we’ll look at the difference when it comes to deleting but for the time being that is it i will see you in the next module hello everyone and welcome back to the course in the last module i showed you the process of deleting a notebook that’s been stored into onedrive so what i want to do in this lesson is really just talk a little bit about locally stored notebooks and show you how you can manage those how you can delete them so that you can see the difference between local notebooks and notebooks that are stored in the cloud so let’s jump in and let’s create ourselves a couple of notebooks so we’re going to go up to file down to new and i’m going to recreate one saved into onedrive because we did delete project artemis and i kind of want to use that one so let’s select onedrive i’m going to select the folder of notebooks and i’m just going to call it the same thing let’s call it project artemis just to recreate that notebook and click on create now because i’m saving to a shareable location it’s asking me if i want to invite people i’m going to say not now because that’s something i’m going to do later and there i have my notebook opened again and of course we’ve already seen we can right click and maybe i want to go into the properties and i’m going to change the color to blue and click on ok so what i’m going to do next is i’m going to create another notebook but this time i’m going to save it to my local drives not in onedrive so back up to file down to new and this time i’m going to browse for a location to save now what i’m looking for here is a location that doesn’t synchronize and these days with onenote if you have it installed on your pc even your desktop will synchronize so i’m going to select a folder that i know doesn’t synchronize which is the downloads folder now i know this is an extremely strange folder to save a notebook into but as i said i just want one that i know for sure doesn’t synchronize at all so i’m going to give my notebook a name i’m going to call it my personal notebook and click on create now did you notice the difference there it didn’t ask me if i wanted to invite people to my notebook and that’s because onenote has recognized that this is a locally saved notebook and so it’s not shareable another thing you’ll notice is that if i click this drop down you can now see both of my notebooks in here now if i just make a quick change so i’m going to right click and i’m going to say properties and let’s just change the color of the folder again and click on ok notice this little sinking icon that comes up it was pretty quick so you may have missed it let me do it one more time i’m going to right click go to properties i’m just going to change the color of the notebook look for this icon when i click on ok can you see it just there that tells me that the notebook is synchronizing to cloud storage now when it comes to locally saved notebooks it doesn’t matter how many changes you make you’re never going to get that icon because it’s just saving to your local drive it doesn’t have to synchronize with cloud storage so if you’re wondering what that little sync icon is that appears every now and again when you’re working in a notebook that’s been saved to the cloud that’s what it’s doing it’s just updating any changes that you’ve made or any changes that other people have made to the notebook with the copy in the cloud now when it comes to local notebooks you can right click and you can change the properties in exactly the same way so i can change the color of the icon the location and the display name as well so maybe i want to remove the word notebook let’s just delete that out as it’s a bit of overkill and just call it my personal click on ok and there we go and i can very easily switch between my two notebooks now when it comes to deleting locally stored notebooks it works in a slightly different way now i still can’t delete it from within one note so if i right click i don’t have a delete option so what i need to do is open up file explorer again and navigate to the folder where i have this notebook stored so i’ve stored this notebook in the downloads folder you can see it there sitting at the top so if i want to delete it i can actually just delete it directly from here because i don’t need to jump into cloud storage because it’s just saved locally and because there’s no synchronization happening it’s not going to keep reappearing however the first thing i’m going to want to do is close down this notebook i can then jump into the folder click on the notebook press delete and that notebook is essentially deleted so the process is a little bit shorter a little bit easier when you’re deleting local notebooks now in the next module we’re gonna start to actually expand on our notebook by adding in sections and pages so i’m looking forward to it i hope you are too i’m gonna head over there now and i look forward to seeing you so so far in this course we’ve been taking a look at some of the more admin tasks that you might wish to do within onenote such as closing notebooks creating new notebooks and also the process for deleting notebooks it’s now time to move on to something a little bit more interesting and that is to start to build our notebook with content now before we can start adding content in we need to understand the structure of a notebook and that means talking about sections and pages so currently i’m in the project artemis notebook and you can see at the top i have a tab that says new section one then if you cast your eyes over to the right hand side you can see i have add page at the top here and then something that says untitled page now untitled page is currently where i’m clicked now i’m going to speak a little bit more about pages in the next couple of modules but for now we’re going to focus on sections and really organizing our notebook now the way i like to think about this is i like to imagine a book project artemis is the book title and then within that book i might have part one which would be the section and then i would have the different chapters which might be the different pages so these are kind of like dividers within your notebook and within each section you can have numerous different pages now when it comes to sections there are lots of different things that you can do with them so let’s start out by running through some of the basics so currently i’m clicked on new section one and if i right click my mouse you’ll see that i get that contextual menu come up which has lots of different things i can do with this particular section so the first thing i have in this menu is the rename option now obviously most of the time you’re not going to want to keep that tab as new section one you’re going to want to give it a more meaningful name so i’m going to select rename and i’m just going to over type what i have on the screen and i’m going to call this tab meetings now what i can do here is i can either hit the enter key on my keyboard or i can just click away in order to set that so that is my first section now i want to have lots of other different sections within this notebook to store different types of information so i’m going to add another section in and there’s a couple of ways that you can do this the most easiest and probably the most obvious to everybody watching this lesson is that we have a little plus sign and when we hover over it it says create new section that’s going to give me another tab and i can now type the name of that tab and this one is going to be called corsets and hit enter now the other way that i can add a new section is if i right click on any one of the tabs you’ll see that i have a new section option down here as well which is basically going to do exactly the same thing so for this one i’m going to call this offices and hit enter and i’m going to carry on just adding a couple more sections into this notebook so let’s click the plus and i’m going to call this one travel hit enter click the plus again and we’re going to call this one costs and hit enter so very quickly i’ve been able to add into my notebook all of these different tabs and i can then just click on them to switch to those different sections and what you’ll also notice is the section tabs are color coded so if you want to keep them all different colors that’s absolutely fine however if you have sections that maybe relate to each other a nice way of just visually indicating that to whoever is looking at the notebook is to make those tabs the same color so maybe both offices and travel are related and i want to make them both orange what i can do is click on that travel section right click my mouse and right at the bottom of the contextual menu i have a section color option so i might want to change this to orange as well and so visually i’ve now created a link between those two different sections now of course when you have a whole bunch of sections added into your notebook there might come a time where you want to reorder them or rearrange them and again that’s very simple to do if you want to move a section all you need to do is grab that particular section so let’s say the courses section click your mouse drag and you’ll see as i drag back and forth across the section tabs i’m getting that little black arrow and that’s indicating to me where that section is going to be dropped when i let go of my mouse so i want this to be the first tab in this particular notebook so i’m going to let go of my mouse and it moves that tab across another way that i can move section tabs is to utilize that right click menu also so for example if i take this meetings tab and right click my mouse within that right click menu you’ll see that we have a move or copy option so if i select that i can now choose where i want to move this particular tab to and what it’s showing here are all of these sections that are currently in my notebook and all i need to do is select the one that i want to move this particular section after so i’m going to say i want meetings to move after the travel section so i’m going to select travel and click move and it’s going to move that across similarly if i right click my mouse and just jump back into there i might want to copy a section instead of moving it so if i want to copy this meeting section and i want that copy to be placed after the cost section i’m going to select costs and then click copy at the bottom and it’s going to give me a new tab that’s called meetings 2. i can then right click go in and rename that to something else so we’re going to call this one schedule like so and you’ll see that because i copied it it takes on the same tab color as that particular section now in this case i don’t want these two to be the same color so i’m going to right click section color and i’m going to make this a purple color and of course i’m sure you get the idea now but if you want to delete a particular section you can right click and you have a delete option in here now it’s worth noting and you’ll see this a bit later on when we start talking about pages when you delete a section it’s going to delete all of the pages within that section as well so just bear that in mind before you actually execute this particular task but more about that later so that is the basics of adding new sections and a few tips and tricks there when it comes to managing them in the next lesson i’m going to talk to you about section groups so i’m going to head over there now and i look forward to you joining me hello everyone and welcome back to the course in the previous module i introduced you to the concept of sections and we took a look at some of the things that you can do to add new sections and also manage them so we’re going to kind of follow on from that in this particular module and i’m going to talk to you about section groups and just show you what they are and how you can use them now the first thing i’m going to do in here is i’m actually going to delete one of these sections that i’ve created so i’m going to delete this courses section because what i’m going to do is i’m going to make courses a section group so i’m going to right click and i’m going to say delete and i’m getting a message here saying are you sure you want to move this section to deleted notes so i’m going to say yes now that’s actually an important point to know when you do delete sections or pages or anything from your notebooks they don’t disappear entirely they go into what we call the notebook recycle bin i’m going to talk a little bit more about that later on in the course so just keep that in your memory for a bit later on so now what i’m going to do is i’m going to create a section group and this is really just another way of organizing your notebooks and this is particularly good if you have a lot of information in any one notebook now to create a section group it’s pretty simple all you need to do is right click on any of the tabs and you can see you have an option here for new section group and what that does is it gives me another little heading up here that currently says news section group and you can see the icon next to it has all of these different tabs so that gives you an idea as to what we’re doing here this is a way of grouping different sections together so i’m going to call this section group courses and hit enter what i’m going to do within here is create sections within this section group so if i right click i’m going to say new section and what you’ll notice is something a bit strange it adds it as if it’s just another new section it doesn’t necessarily fall directly underneath where we’ve created the new section group so i’m going to go ahead and create my sections that i want to be part of my section group now this whole project artemis is about the rollout of office 365 across all of my company’s global offices and part of that rollout program is going to be training and we want to retrain everyone on the applications within office 365 or microsoft 365 as it’s now known so i’m going to have a section for each of the courses that are going to be offered so the first section is going to be called word i’m going to create another new section called excel another one called powerpoint we’re going to have one for one drive and i could carry on going now obviously this is just a demo so i’m gonna stop there but you would add as many sections as you needed now once you’ve added in your sections if you want to group them together underneath this courses section group all you need to do is right click so let’s right click on this first section tab i’m going to say move or copy i’m going to select the section group which is courses and then i’m going to say move and you’ll see immediately it jumps me from my main notebook into this kind of sub group so project artemis courses section group and there is my section so if i want to jump back i just click that green arrow so if i take this excel section i’m going to click i’m going to drag over and hover my mouse on top of courses and you’ll see it jumps me across i can let go and it moves that section now unfortunately there is currently no way in one note to make a multiple selection so you can’t select multiple sections and then move them all in one go unfortunately you have to do them all individually so i’m going to do the last two let’s do powerpoint i’m going to drag and drop and then the final one i’m going to right click i’m going to say move or copy select courses and click on move so now i have these essentially sectioned off from the main bulk of my notebook and i have my courses section group just there so if you have a particular section that has lots of different subsections then this is a great way of organizing your notebook so we’re starting to get some kind of structure to our notebook now we’ve got a notebook ready we’ve got all of our sections we’ve got a little section group on the end there now we want to start adding pages and content and that’s exactly what we’re going to do in the next module so i’m going to head over there and i look forward to you joining me hi guys and welcome back to the course this is still deb and we are heading towards the end of section two and over the course of this section we’ve really got to grips with some of the basics of working in onenote and in the last couple of modules i’ve shown you how you can add sections into your notebooks and also section groups it’s now time to start adding pages because there’s a couple of things that you need to be aware of when you’re doing this so as i mentioned within each section you can have different pages and each of those pages will contain content so let’s first walk through the process of adding pages to sections so currently i’m clicked on this offices section now what i want to have here is i want to have maybe an overview of all of the different offices which we’re rolling out microsoft 365 to and then i might want to have a specific page that lists out each office individually with bits of information that are particularly important to that office now if you cast your eyes over to the right hand side of the screen you’ll see that you have this kind of orange bar running down the side and this is where you basically create all of your pages for your sections and onenote will automatically create a page called untitled when you add a new section and that page is currently what i’m clicked on within the offices section now currently it’s called untitled which isn’t particularly meaningful so i’m probably going to want to go in and rename this page so it’s easy for me to identify so my first page in this section is just going to be called overview so i’ve clicked my mouse just above where we have the date and time and i’ve typed in the word overview and you’ll see as soon as i do that over on the right hand side the page is now renamed so i’m going to go through and i’m going to add a few more pages and we do that by clicking on the add page link at the top of that right hand pane so let’s click on add page you’ll see automatically i get another untitled page and i can now type a title for this particular page so this one is going to be called europe i’m going to add another page called north america another page for asia another page for africa and then one final page for australia and as we move through this course i’m going to be adding information onto these pages so adding pages in itself is a very simple and straightforward process but what you might not know is that you can also add sub pages so for example underneath each of these pages which i’ve just created i might want to have sub pages for each of these specific office locations in each of these regions so what i’m going to do is i’m going to add a page and you’ll see it adds it to the bottom i’m going to call this one london i’m going to add another page i’m going to call it paris i’m going to add another page and let’s call this new york and i’m going to add two pages for each of the regions and we’ll do bangkok and we’ll say durban and finally for australia we will have sydney and melbourne so you can see that now i have quite a collection of pages and at the moment they’re not really organized as i want them to be so the first thing i’m going to want to do is i’m going to want to move the pages i’ve just created underneath their relevant locations so for example we’ve got london and that needs to go underneath europe so all i need to do to move a page is click drag and you’ll see i get that line let go and it’s going to move that page i’m going to grab paris and we’re going to do the same thing we’re going to move that up now of course when i’m moving these i can go to the right click menu and move or copy but for me by far the quickest way of doing it is just simply to drag and drop them so i’m going to move new york and chicago underneath north america and for pages you can actually move multiple pages in one go so i want to move shanghai and if i hold down my control key i can also select bangkok and then i can move both of those underneath asia so i’m going to do the same for durban and johannesburg hold down control drag and drop and then finally at the bottom we have australia with sydney and melbourne so these look slightly better but the structure still isn’t quite there because essentially these city pages that i’ve added are subpages of the continent so i want to indicate that these are in fact sub pages and again there’s a couple of different ways that we can do this the first thing i can do is if i click on london if i click my mouse and just drag to the right very slightly you can see i can indent it so this is a sub page so i’m going to indent it once and i could do the same for paris click drag once and that essentially makes london and paris subpages of europe and the structure is now reflecting that now i can do this a slightly different way so let’s select new york hold down control and also select chicago if i right click i can say make subpage and it’s going to move both of those in i’m going to select shanghai bangkok durban johannesburg sydney and melbourne and i’ve done that again simply by holding down the control key as i’m clicking right click make subpage and it’s going to move all of those in in one go so right away i now have a much better structure it’s a lot easier for me to see what’s going on here and as you can imagine you can have sub pages of sub pages as well so if i just show you a quick example if i add another page and let’s call this sync kilda which is a very specific area in melbourne what i might want to do is make the syncilda page a sub page of melbourne so again i can click on it i can drag once twice to make that a sub page of a sub page and you can carry on going making whatever structure it is that you need and of course if we right click we now have that contextual menu come up so everything in here is related to pages as opposed to sections or anything else you can promote the sub page so that’s essentially pulling it back up a level or you can collapse all sub pages for whichever one you’re clicked on so for me that was australia it’s collapsed them all up i can then click that drop down arrow to bring those back again i can right click i can move or copy i can add a new page from here as well and you can also see the keyboard shortcuts in there now i’m actually going to delete this page so let’s select delete to bring me back to how we were so i’ve got a pretty good outline or structure going on on this offices section and of course i can go to each of these sections and start adding in different pages you don’t necessarily have to do that before you add content you can definitely do it as you go but for me on this particular section it works best if i set them up beforehand so that’s how you can very simply add pages to a section and also make subpages and that draws this section to a close in section three this is where the fun begins we’re going to start adding all different types of content into a notebook so you can get a really good feel for the application and what it can do so i’m really looking forward to this section i’m gonna head across there now and i look forward to you joining me hi guys and welcome back to the course now as i mentioned in the introduction at the end of each section i’m going to also throw in a module using onenote for windows 10 because this is something that is available for free and comes automatically installed for anybody who has windows 10 on their pc or laptop so in general what we tend to find is that if somebody doesn’t have a microsoft subscription necessarily they can still utilize onenote but the windows 10 version so in order to cater for those people who are using this version i’m just going to do a module at the end of each section just recapping the main points in that particular section so let’s get started with our first look at onenote for windows 10. so if you do have a windows 10 device you’ll probably find that you already have onenote pre-installed so i’m going to jump down to search and i’m going to type in onenote and you’ll see the first one that comes up is onenote for windows 10. so let’s click to open this app and take a look at the differences so immediately what you’ll notice is that the look and feel is completely different to one note for desktop so first of all let’s take a quick look at the interface now we still have essentially a ribbon structure but our ribbons look slightly different they’re a bit more compact we have a home ribbon that has all of our basic formatting options on it an insert ribbon if we want to do things like insert tables files pictures a draw ribbon for making annotations and inserting shapes a view ribbon for doing things like zooming in and out changing the page color adding raw lines so on and so forth and then finally we have a help ribbon that’s going to allow us to access help on demand if we need it and then all the way over in the right hand corner we have some icons so this first icon here allows me to open a feed so this is basically going to allow me to see a feed of all activity that’s going on in my onenote notebook i then have this little light bulb icon which is basically my search so this is the tell me what you want me to do pain i have a notifications area where i can see exactly what’s going on in my notebooks i have a share button that’s currently grayed out i can choose to enter full screen mode and then i have three dots in the top corner or ellipses that’s going to allow me to access my settings now when it comes to actually viewing my notebooks if you cast your eyes over to the left hand side this first icon just here is the show navigation button so if i click this this is going to open up a pane where i can view all of my notebooks now i haven’t created a new notebook yet so that’s why there’s nothing in there but when i do this is where you’ll find them and this is how you can switch between your notebooks so let’s start out by doing exactly that and there’s a couple of different ways that you can create notebooks in onenote for windows 10. if you take a look in the big empty space in the middle where it says start taking notes it says tap or click here to create a new notebook you can also open one of your existing notebooks from the notebooks list so that’s an important point if i click the drop down where it says notebooks and then click on more notebooks it’s going to allow me to open an existing notebook that i have saved off so if i want to go in and open up project artemis or personal i can do that simply by clicking on that notebook and then opening it now in this case i actually want to create a brand new notebook so i could click somewhere in this center pane select a name for my notebook and then click create notebook alternatively i could right click up where it says notebooks and select new notebook or if i click on notebooks right at the bottom i have a plus symbol that says add notebook so i’m going to call this notebook project sierra i’m going to select an account and click on create notebook so now i have my new notebook and it’s created a new section with a default name and also an untitled page for that section now of course i’m going to want to rename this particular section so i can right click my mouse to pull up the contextual menu and say rename section now i’m going to call this to-do list and click away to set that and then i can name my page so let’s say today’s list what you’ll notice is right at the bottom if you want to start adding more sections and more pages you can so i’m going to click add page tomorrow’s list add page next week’s list so on and so forth and i can do the same with sections so let’s say add section things to remember and then maybe i want to name this page emails so on and so forth so pretty easy to create notebooks sections and pages and of course if you click that drop down this is where you’re going to see a list of your notebooks and if i had more than one i can easily switch between them from up here if i right click on this notebook you can see that i have other options that are similar to the desktop version for example i can change the notebook color to something that’s a bit brighter so let’s say pink and another thing i can do here is if i want to close this notebook and essentially remove it from my list if i right click i have an option to close the notebook from here now when it comes to things like sorting or moving rearranging sections and pages around again the process is very simple it’s just drag and drop so if i want to reorder these pages for example if i want to move tomorrow’s list above today’s list i can click drag just to reorder those the same thing goes for sections so i can click on things to remember and drag it above to-do list just to reorder those items i also have a sort button over here so i can sort these pages in alphabetical order by day created or date modified now you can also create sub pages in this version of onenote so let me add in a couple more pages i’m going to call this one monday let’s add another one and call it tuesday and what i want to do is make monday and tuesday subpages of next week’s list so what i can do here is select both monday and tuesday right click my mouse to pull up the contextual menu and you see all of the different options you have in there related to pages so i can delete my pages i can cut copy and paste i can move them to other sections and i can also make these two selected pages sub pages so let’s click that option you can see that they indent very slightly and next week’s list is now a collapsible and expandable menu item and of course if i want to go in and right click and say move this particular page i can then select where i want to move it to so let’s say things to remember and i can say move it’s going to move that across and now when i click on things to remember i can see that page sitting there so in this case it’s really important where you’re clicked when you right click if i right click on a section i get a contextual menu full of options related to that section whereas if i right click on a page i get a completely different contextual menu that allows me to select options related to managing this particular page now what i’m going to do here is select tuesday right click and say delete page and if at any point when you’re working in onenote for windows 10 you want to get rid of this navigation pane to give yourself a little bit more room if you click on the hide navigation icon it’s going to minimize that down and now you have loads of room from which to type your notes so that is it that is all the information that you need in order to get started working in onenote for windows 10. hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re down to section three now and in this section we’re going to explore all the different tools that you have available for adding content into your notebook and really this is what a notebook is all about of course once we’ve created our sections and our pages we’re going to start to want to add content to each of those pages and in onenote there are so many different types of content that you can add in so that what you end up with in the end is a really nice functional informative and interesting way of storing notes and throughout most of this section we’re going to be focusing on the insert tab up here because this is where you’ll find all the different types of content you can insert into your notebook now before we get on to some of the more interesting and exciting aspects of onenote we’re going to start out with the basics and that is adding a text note onto a page now that might seem fairly straightforward i have my cursor flashing flush with that left hand margin and as you could probably imagine i can start typing a note and that is very true now when you type a text note in onenote it does work a little bit differently to something like word in word when we have a document open we start typing from the left hand margin and work across the page and unless we use things like tabs or maybe indents we’re pretty much limited to starting our typing from the left hand side of the page now one note works in a slightly different way because what you can see is i can literally click my mouse anywhere on this page my cursor starts flashing and i can start typing so it has much more of a scrapbook like quality so what i’m going to do is i am going to click over towards the left hand margin and i’m going to start to type my first note on the overview page so this is my first note just a little bit of information about the rollout and what you’ll see is that when you type in a text note it kind of puts it in this little placeholder and this is kind of like a movable text box in a way you can see that if i hover over the gray bar that runs across the top i get a crosshair it just means i can pick this note up and i can literally drag and drop it anywhere on the page that i like so it is a lot more flexible than when you’re typing text directly into a word document what you’ll also notice is that on the end here i have these two arrows and that just allows me to resize this placeholder so i can drag it in if i want to make it smaller and drag it out if i want to make it wider and as you would imagine if i right click my mouse on this grey bar i get a contextual menu that has options in it relating specifically to this particular placeholder and the text contained within it now if i want to edit any of this text i just click back in the placeholder and i’m going to add a little bit of a title here i’m going to hit enter and let’s call this rollout dates and of course i can treat this like any other text across all of the microsoft applications and i can apply formatting if we jump up to the home tab this is where you’ll find all of your text formatting options so it might be that i want to change the font style of all of this text now what i can do there is because the text is contained within one placeholder i can just select that placeholder i can jump up and i can change this to something else so i’m going to do my favorite font so go ui hit enter and it’s going to change that and if i want to make this heading stand out a little bit i can maybe make it slightly bigger so let’s make that 12. i might want to make it bold i can change the color i can do all different kinds of things and if you’ve used any of the other microsoft applications you’ll know that this is fairly standard when it comes to font formatting now i’m going to add a little bit more text into here so i’m going to press enter a couple of times now i’m going to add some bulleted text so again up to the home tab into that basic text group and we’re going to utilize our bullets and i can add my bulleted text much like i would in any other application now everything that i’ve typed so far has been contained within this one placeholder you don’t have to carry on typing absolutely everything within the same placeholder you could click somewhere else and start to type in some more text like so and then i’m going to add some more bullet points in like so now one thing you’ll notice here is that as soon as i started typing in a different placeholder it’s switched back to the default font which for me is calibri so if you want to keep things consistent then you’ll probably have to go in and change that font to match the rest of the font in this particular document and i can then pick that up and i can drag it underneath so what i’m trying to say here is don’t think that you’re limited to just always typing in one placeholder you can have multiple going on on the same page another thing you can also incorporate into your text notes is that you can utilize styles and you’ll find those on the home tab in the styles group and this can sometimes make it a little bit easier to achieve a level of consistency when it comes to the headings that you’re using in your notebooks so for example instead of going through and manually formatting the headings like i did with rollout dates i could select the heading and utilize a style instead which has pre-formatting already applied so i could say heading 1 to change that and i know that every time i add a heading 1 it’s going to look exactly the same throughout the entire notebook so don’t forget about those you have headings 1 to 6 and you also have other styles in here for page title quotes anything else that you want to add in now the final thing i’m going to do in my text notes is i’m just going to highlight the dates that this rollout is going to start and end just so it’s super clear to everybody who is looking at this notebook so i’m going to highlight january the 1st 2021 and i’m actually going to apply some highlighting like so now i want to apply the same highlighting to the 31st of july 2021 so i could repeat the same process alternatively i could utilize the format painter so i’m going to highlight january the 1st 2021 i’m going to go up to the home ribbon and select format painter let go and it’s going to apply that highlight for me so format painter is a great tool if you just want to copy formatting from one piece of text to another it can save you a lot of time particularly if you have a lot of manual formatting applied to a specific piece of text or paragraph and we’re going to be utilizing format painter quite a lot as we work our way through the course so for the time being that is the basics of adding in a text note into your notebook page over the next few modules we’re going to move into adding all different types of content in and we’re going to start out by taking clippings from web pages and pulling those into our notebook so i’m going to head over to the next module now and i look forward to seeing you there hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re down in section 3 where we’re talking about adding content to onenote and in the previous lesson i showed you the very simple task of adding text notes to your onenote pages so we’re going to move up a gear now and we’re going to start to add content from other sources now there are many different ways that you can do this in one note and we are going to explore all of them over the balance of this section but i want to start out by introducing you to a little tool that you can install that’s going to make your life a lot easier in certain respects and that is the send to onenote tool now you won’t find this when you’re actually working in onenote there is no button on any of the ribbons called send to onenote this is a little app that you can install which makes it super easy for you to send things like excel spreadsheets or word documents or even emails directly to a specific page in onenote so i’m going to show you first of all how you can install the app it’s very very simple and then i’m going to show you how to use it so the first thing you’re going to want to do if you don’t have this app installed is just open up your preferred web browser so for me that is microsoft edge and then search for send to onenote app and hit enter and the first link you’re going to get takes you to the microsoft web page and you can see there it is send to onenote we have a little description underneath so it says send to onenote lets you print from any app to a onenote page once it’s in onenote you can access it from any device even if you’re offline so this is also great if you have maybe something like a pdf document and you want to bring that information into your onenote page so it’s viewable to everyone so what you do from here is you can see over on the right hand side is actually a free app which is always good i’m going to click on get and that’s going to ask me to open the microsoft store so it’s jumping me across to the application within the microsoft store and from here i can install it now the first thing you’ll notice is that i actually already have this product installed if you don’t what you’ll see here is an install button where i currently have wishlist so all you need to do is click install it takes a few seconds for that to download and that is pretty much it once you’ve done that you are good to go so let’s take a look at how we would then use it so i’ve jumped across to outlook just to show you an example of how you can utilize send to onenote once you’ve downloaded and installed the app and you might have to restart your applications in order for this to show but for example on the home ribbon in outlook you can see in the move group i now have this little icon here send to onenote and that’s going to allow me to directly send any email message that i have selected to a specific page in my onenote notebook so i can see here that i have an email which is all about team leader assignments for this rollout project and it has a file attachment there as well so this is important information that everybody’s going to need to know so this would be great content for me to add into my notebook so i’m going to click the onenote button and you can see what i get so underneath all notebooks i have project artemis now i’m going to click on the plus to expand that out and you can then see all of my different sections and tabs now if i have a specific page in onenote that i want to send content to i can expand for example the offices section and see all of the pages that i have underneath there so what i might decide to do is select the overview page click on ok and there we go you can see that i now have that email added into my onenote page it’s telling me the subject who it’s from who it’s to the date it was sent and i also have the attachment just here so what i can do is double click on this attachment and it’s going to open it up and the cool thing about this is if any changes are made to this particular spreadsheet those are going to update because you’re essentially you’ve just created a link to the original spreadsheet now it might be that now that i have this email on the overview page i think to myself actually you know what this needs to go on a different page so what i might want to do is create a new section let’s click on plus and i’m going to say important emails and i’m going to call this page team assignments and what i’m going to do is i’m simply going to move that content across to this new page now i can do that by selecting the placeholder and the simplest way of doing this is to do a cut and paste so i can either jump up to my home ribbon and select cut from there or i can utilize the keyboard shortcut of control x i’m going to jump across to important emails and the team assignments page i can do ctrl v to paste or select my paste button just to paste that in so a nice simple way of adding content using that send to onenote tool and just to show you another example of how you can utilize this if i had this information in a word document as opposed to an email i could also send this directly to onenote as well so any content you have in spreadsheets documents powerpoint presentations once you’ve installed this app when you go to the file area and go down to print underneath printer you can select onenote desktop and then when you click on print you’re going to get the same thing you need to select a location in which to print this piece of content to so i’m going to expand offices again i’m going to select overview and click on ok and you can see exactly what it does there it’s going to pull that information in now one of the drawbacks of this which you can see immediately is that it’s brought it in with a load of white space at the bottom so everything else gets pushed down underneath now i have scoured the internet trying to find a way to get around this and there doesn’t appear to be any particular method of cropping out all of that white space so just think about that before you utilize it to send word documents and excel spreadsheets to your notebook but for now that is how you utilize send to onenote in the next lesson i’m going to show you how you can use onenote’s clipping tool so i’m going to head over there now and i look forward to you joining me hello guys and gals and welcome back to the course we’re down in section three where we’ve been taking a look at how we can add different types of content to our onenote notebook and in the previous module we saw how we could download and install the send to onenote app in order to send documents different files pdf content to onenote now we’re going to stay along similar lines and when i say similar lines i just mean that what i’m going to show you next is also an app that you have to install and that is the onenote clipper now onenote clipper is pretty much the same as any other clipping utility that you might find in microsoft applications most of the applications these days contain some kind of screen clipping tool which makes it super easy for you to grab content off of different applications or maybe even web browsers and pull that into whichever application you happen to be working in now the cool thing with onenote is that there is a specific clipper extension that you can add into your browser to make clipping things off the web super easy to pull into a specific page in onenote so what i’m going to do in this module is to show you where you go to install the onenote clipper and then we’ll do a quick demonstration so the first thing you need to do is open up a web browser of your choice and for me i’m using microsoft edge but you could be using chrome firefox safari whatever it is that you choose now depending on what your web browser of choice is will depend what you search for when looking to install the onenote clipper so for me because i have edge i would search for onenote clipper app edge if you’re using chrome you might want to type in onenote clipper app chrome so on and so forth just to make sure that you get the correct download so i’m going to click on search and i’m going to click on this link just here which is going to jump me across to the microsoft store now what you’ll see here is the web clipper app and because i’ve already installed this i only have a remove button if this is the first time that you’re using this then you’ll have an install button just here so you just need to click it run through the process again it just takes a few seconds it’s a very small little app and once you’ve installed it you should then see a button in your web browser in the toolbar running across the top that says clip to onenote and you can see mine just there so once you have it installed let’s take a look at how you can use it so i’ve just jumped across to the microsoft 365 homepage and this is a web page that just gives me some information about microsoft 365 and the different subscription plans so maybe i want to add into my document some information related to the business plans for microsoft 365. so i’m going to scroll down and see if anything takes my fancy and i can see here we have some information relating to the costs of subscriptions so this might be something that i want to add into my rollout plan for when we’re trying to work out our budget so what i can do is i can clip this information and send it directly to a page in onenote and i’m going to do that by clicking on my clip to onenote tool now if this is the first time that you’re using it it’s going to ask you to sign in with a microsoft account now once you’ve signed in you’re going to have a few different options when it comes to clipping and by default it’s going to clip a full page so if i wanted to send everything on this page to onenote that is my default option now in this particular case i don’t want to send the full page i just want to select a region so let’s select region and you’ll see it says drag and release to capture a screenshot the other thing you’ll notice is that the page background has kind of faded out very slightly and my cursor has changed to a crosshair so this means that i can just click and drag over the region that i want to clip and you can see it adds it to this clipboard ready to send to onenote now if i have lots of different things that i want to clip off of a certain web page then i can just select to add another region and then scroll through and find the next piece of information that i like to clip so let’s say for example i want to add in this i’m going to select it and it’s added that to this clipboard as well and i could carry on going collecting different pieces of content now once i’m finished and i want to send these to my page in onenote i then need to select the location so if i click this drop down you’ll see it’s going to show any onenote notebooks that i have and the one that we’re working in is project artemis so i’m going to click to expand and then i can see all of my different sections now with this you can’t select a specific page you can only select a specific section so i’m going to select offices and i’m going to say clip it goes away it clips those regions it tells me it’s been successful and i can either choose to view in one note or i can just pull it up from my taskbar and what you’ll then see is if you look at all of the pages for this particular section right at the bottom i have a new page and when i click on it it’s labeled it microsoft 365 for business and there are my clips and another really useful thing that it does is it gives you a direct link back to the page where these clips came from so if you essentially want to view the source or maybe read more information you have the link there you can simply click on it and it’s going to jump you back to that specific page now of course because you weren’t able to select a page in your notebook to send this to you might want to do some rearranging at this point you might want to copy and paste this information into a different section so i’m going to select this entire placeholder simply by clicking on it and i’m going to do a simple cut from the home ribbon i’m going to go to the overview page i’m going to click my mouse at the bottom and i’m going to say paste and that then pastes that content in i can resize it to make it a bit neater but i essentially have my nicely clipped content with a link back to the original document of course what i would then need to do would be to go in and delete that temporary page so over in my pages list i’m going to select it right click and i’m going to say delete just to get rid of that so very simple and very straightforward to utilize that clipping utility in the next module i’m going to show you how you can add pictures and video to your onenote notebooks so i’m excited i hope you are too please join me in the next module for that hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re down in section 3 where we’re talking about adding content to our onenote notebooks and in the previous module i showed you how you can utilize the onenote clipper app in order to clip information content from the web and pull it through into onenote so now what i want to do over the course of the next few modules is show you how to add pictures video and different types of content into your notebooks so for this we’re going to need to be on the insert tab and we’re going to focus on this images group just here now the first thing that we have in images is a screen clipping utility now you might be thinking to yourself well why on earth would i need that you’ve just shown me how to use the onenote clipper well the onenote clipper is an installation for your browser so essentially it only really allows you to clip content from the web now the screen clipping utility that you have available within onenote allows you to clip anything that you have open on your pc so maybe you want to clip something from a pdf document or maybe an excel spreadsheet or from a powerpoint presentation pretty much anything that you can open on your pc you can clip using the screen clipping utility within onenote and you can see as i hover over it we get the screen tip that tells us what this is going to do so it’s going to allow us to take a snapshot of parts of your screen and add it to the page it says onenote will hide while you capture web pages documents or anything else and one interesting point to note that we’re going to get onto a little bit later when we cover searching is that onenote can search for text in screen clippings and that’s a really cool little feature if you clip something so maybe a paragraph of text you can make it searchable but more on that specific aspect a bit later on let’s concentrate on utilizing this screen clipping utility now what i’ve done here is i’m still in the offices section but i’m clicked on the london page and i’ve added a text note that gives the address of the london office now what i might also want to do here is maybe add in a map that shows where the office is located so i’ve opened up google maps and i’ve navigated to the address of the office and maybe what i want to do is take a screen clipping of a certain section of this map now because this is in a web browser i definitely could utilize my clip to onenote utility but i’m going to do this a slightly different way i’m going to utilize the screen clipping option now one of the things that you have to be careful of here is that whatever it is that you want to clip needs to be open directly behind onenote because what happens is as soon as you click on screen clipping it minimizes one note and allows you to clip whatever it finds behind it so if you want to clip a section from a word document you need to make sure that that is directly behind onenote so a way that i do this is i want to clip this so i want to have it as the last thing open and then i’m going to open up onenote on top of it so let’s click on screen clipping you’ll see it minimizes down and shows what’s directly behind it my screen has kind of faded away and i have my cursor as a crosshair so i’m going to clip a certain section of this particular map and pull it through to onenote so let’s just drag a big region over here and i can see rope maker street in the middle let go and like magic it pulls it directly into my page what you’ll also see when you take a screen clipping in this way is that you have underneath the date and time that this screen clipping was taken now if you don’t want this screen clipping information you can delete it out an easy way of doing that is as i hover over this text you’ll see i get this little arrow or tab at the side if i click on that it’s going to highlight that text and i can just press the delete key to get rid of it i can of course then click on the image and i can resize it if it’s a little bit too big and as i mentioned at the beginning if i right click on this image i can choose to make the text in the image searchable now i’m not going to do that right now because we’re going to do that a bit later on but just hold that piece of information in your minds until we get to that section let’s do another screen clipping but this time of something that’s not on the web now earlier i showed you how you can send a word document to your page in onenote utilizing the send to onenote tool under file print but if you remember when we do it that way we get a lot of white space in the bottom so what i could do instead is use the screen clipping utility just to clip out that part of the word document so again i need to make sure that i have the word document open directly behind onenote i’m going to jump to screen clipping it minimizes down and i can then just clip this specific area and pull that through so you can see that’s a much neater way i don’t have loads of blank space at the bottom and once again i can resize that as necessary so screen clipping is a tool that i use all the time in onenote just to grab different pieces of content i find it a lot quicker and a lot easier than other options and if i’m adding content where i’m not too concerned about it being updated dynamically then screen clipping is just a great way to get information into a page in the next module we’re going to start adding some life to our pages by adding pictures so please join me for that hi guys and welcome back to the course this is still deb and we are still down in section three where we’re looking at the different methods that you can use to add different types of content into your onenote notebooks and so far we’ve seen how we can add text notes we’ve seen how we can add screen clippings and now i want to show you how you can insert pictures into your pages so once again for this we’re going to be working predominantly on that insert ribbon and we’re sticking within this images group now you’ll see within here we have two options we have pictures and we also have online pictures so if you have a particular image that you want to add into your notebook and you have that image already stored off locally maybe into your my pictures folder then you would use this option just here however if you want to browse online for a picture to use you could do that through the online pictures option and i’m going to show you an example of both of these so let’s start out with pictures that i have already saved off so currently i am clicked on the europe page within the offices section and what i have on this page is just some suggested activities for free time in both of the european office locations so london and paris so if this is a rollout project we’re maybe sending trainers to these different offices around the world and those trainers might have to stay there for a couple of weeks they’re going to have some free time we want to give them some ideas of things they can do whilst they’re there and in order to illustrate that point make it a little bit more interesting we’re going to add some pictures in so you can see here i have free time suggested activities and i’ve applied a heading 1 style to that particular piece of text i then have london underneath and i have a heading 2 style applied to that and what i now want to do is add in a couple of pictures of some of the main sites in london so i’m going to jump up to the insert tab i’m going to jump into pictures and it’s going to open up file explorer so all you need to do now is navigate to whichever folder you have those pictures stored in and there we go i can see a selection of pictures so i’m going to add in tower bridge i’m going to hold down control and also select the london eye and click on insert and it’s going to pull both of those pictures through now one thing to note when you insert multiple images in this way is that they will become part of the same container the same placeholder so maybe if i want this bottom image to be next to this image of the london eye if i click on it when i drag i’m essentially dragging it out of that particular placeholder now you might think to yourself well why is that a problem well if i then wanted to add some more text in if i hit enter a couple of times it’s going to move down one image but this image is going to stay where it is so just be aware of that if you do drag an image out of its original placeholder you may have to reorganize its placement on your particular page alternatively i’m going to control zed a couple of times just to put this back how it was so now what i might want to do here is click next to london press enter a couple of times and then just add some bullet points which has london eye tower bridge and of course again if you don’t like the font you can go in and change the font for any of the text in your notebook now what i’m going to do is i’m going to click somewhere over in this blank space on the page and i’m going to create another placeholder and this one is going to be called paris i’m going to double click and give that a heading 2 format so it matches london i’m going to drag the placeholder out and just reposition that very slightly now when it comes to lining things up because really i want this paris heading in line with this london heading you are a bit limited with options but one thing i will generally do is jump across to the view tab and turn on raw lines so this just gives me some paper lines running across the page and i just find it a little bit easier to line things up when i have these turned on so now i’m going to add some bullet points we’re going to have eiffel tower and sacra ke let’s apply some formatting so it matches the rest of the document and now i’m going to add in my images so up to insert across to pictures it’s going to default to the last folder that i was in i can pick up the image of the eiffel tower hold down control select sac recur click on insert and it’s going to add those images in for me and of course these images can be resized if you need to do that but there we go fairly straightforward to insert pictures that you have stored off locally so now let’s take a look at how we can add in online pictures now this is pretty much exactly the same as jumping into google or a different web browser googling an image saving it off and inserting it but it’s just a little bit quicker as we’re missing out some of those steps what i can do is click on online pictures and it’s going to jump me across to a image gallery browser which is powered by microsoft bing and what i can do is i can utilize images in any of these galleries alternatively if i know what i’m looking for i can just type my search term into that online picture search bar so i’m looking for an image of big ben i’m going to hit enter and there you go so let’s select this one and click on insert and it’s inserted that very nicely into the bottom of this document i’m going to do the same thing but i’m going to add an image for paris this time so let’s jump up to online pictures once more and i’m going to type in notre dame and hit enter this image looks pretty good to me i’m going to select it but one thing i want to point out here is when you are adding online pictures into your documents it’s really important that you check this little setting just here you want to make sure that you’re searching and using only images that have a creative commons license so it basically means you can use that image for not-for-profit reasons so if this is just a one note team notebook that’s going to be shared between me and maybe three of my colleagues then that’s absolutely fine any of these images i can use because i’m filtering for creative commons license now even when you have this filter on if the notebook that you’re adding it into is going to be used for any kind of commercial purpose so if you are going to demonstrate this to a wide audience or if you’re going to create a youtube video something that you’re going to get money from then you need to delve a bit further as to whether you can use this image a lot of people make the mistake when it comes to copyright by thinking that if they have creative commons selected they can use any image that comes up in any type of document and that’s simply not the case and a lot of people have been caught out by this if you’re using it for a non-commercial purpose then yes normally it’s fine but otherwise you might want to review and you’ll see here right at the bottom it says you are responsible for respecting others rights including copyright and then you have a link to learn more here so if you’re not entirely sure what creative commons licenses are then it’s definitely worth having a read up about that before you start to use these images in any commercial projects now just while we’re in here we do also have a filter button which allows us to search for specific types of images so i can search by size i can search by type so if i want to photograph a clip art or if i want something that has a transparent background and this is an option i use fairly frequently sometimes maybe i’m looking for an icon or maybe a logo but i don’t want to have any background even if it’s just a white background i just want images that have transparent backgrounds and you can also do things like search for images by their layout so square white tall and also color or black and white photographs only so don’t forget about those filters that you have within this little area now for this particular image i don’t need to do any of that i’m going to click on insert and it’s going to pull that through and once again i can just go ahead and resize that as necessary i’m going to jump up to the top of this document and just add in another bullet point so we’re going to say big ben and then for paris we’re going to say notre dame like so so pretty simple and straightforward to add pictures into your notebooks if you’ve used microsoft applications for a while this will be like second nature to you we’re going to move on to the next module now where we’re going to talk a little bit about inserting video into your notebooks so i’m looking forward to that i hope to see you over there hello everyone and welcome back to the course in the last lesson i showed you how you can insert pictures both online and locally saved pictures into pages in your onenote notebook but did you know that onenote also has the ability to embed videos right into your pages and adding videos really makes your notebooks come alive and they’re particularly good if you’re creating an interactive notebook to share with others it’s worth noting at this stage that inserting video is a little bit different to inserting pictures when it comes to video you cannot insert a video that you have saved off locally so if you’ve got your own video stored off to file explorer there isn’t an option to browse your local drives to upload that video and add it into your notebook what you can do however is pull in videos from other video sites so online video essentially and if you take a look at that insert ribbon in the media group in the middle you’ll see exactly what i mean we just have one option here which is online video so if you have a video that you’ve uploaded to youtube then you can essentially embed that link into the page now if you’re wondering which sites you can embed video from i would advise you to jump onto the microsoft help page if you search for embedding videos in onenote you’ll get to this page and that goes through and shows you all of the currently supported sites and services and you’ll find in there most of the ones that you’re going to want to use are listed there so we have things like dailymotion vimeo youtube ted talks all of those kinds of things and microsoft do advise that you check back here periodically as they’re consistently adding more and more video sites to this particular list so let’s jump back to onenote and let’s take a look at how we can add an online video now for this i’m going to go across to my courses section group and i’ve got the excel section selected and what i want to do here is add in a tutorial video related to excel pivot table so this might be something that we want to send out to different staff members in offices to back up the in-person training that they’re gonna get when we roll out microsoft 365. now if i was to click on online video what you’ll see is that immediately it asks for the video address and you’ll see underneath it says view supported video which is going to jump you to that help page that i was just showing you so really what you need to do here is jump onto youtube or dailymotion or vimeo grab the url and then come back to this option so that’s what we’re going to do i’ve just jumped into youtube i have the pivot tables in excel open i’m going to copy url control c jump back to onenote and then go to online video control v to paste it in if i click on ok it’s then going to embed that video into my page and what i get here is a clickable link so if i click this it’s going to take me to youtube where i can view the video but i can also view the video from within my onenote page so if i click on play that video is going to start and i can move through the video as i would on youtube or any other video application so super straightforward you just need to make sure you grab the url first and then just paste it in to embed that video that’s it for now i will see you in the next module hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re down in section three where we’ve been taking a look at adding different types of content into our onenote notebooks and in the previous few modules i’ve shown you how you can add in screen clippings pictures online pictures and also online video now in this and the next couple of modules we’re going to concentrate on adding files into our notebooks and adding files is just another way of gathering together information that’s going to be useful to anybody who has access to this notebook it’s also a great way of saving time so for example instead of retyping information or maybe relying on links to documents that might become unavailable if you go offline you can bring content that you need directly into onenote either as an attachment or as a printout that you can annotate and you’ll find these options on the insert tab in the files group and it’s these three that we’re going to concentrate on over the next couple of modules so let’s start out by taking a look at inserting file printouts now when you insert a printout it basically allows you to select a file that you have stored in onedrive or locally and that could be any kind of file it might be a word document an excel spreadsheet powerpoint pdf anything like that and it’s going to print the contents of that file into wherever you’re clicked so in my case i’m in the schedule section and i’m clicked on the course plan page so let’s click on file print out and you can see it’s going to jump me across to file explorer and i have a word document here called course descriptions that i want to add into this notebook now it’s worth noting that i just have some junk text inside this word document to demonstrate this but hopefully you’ll still get the idea so i’m going to click on insert and you’ll see exactly what that does so it prints the contents into the actual page now it’s worth noting that this is a copy so when i click on this page i get my resize handles at the side but it doesn’t let me directly edit the text from within onenote however if i did want to update this text you’ll see just above i basically have a link back to the original word document so what i can do if i want to update is i can double click to open in word i can go in and make my changes save the document and i’m going to close down word now what you’ll see when i go back to onenote is that it doesn’t automatically update you can’t see that text that i’ve just added onto the beginning of the first paragraph what i do have just above it says the printout below may be out of date right click here to refresh so all i need to do is right click and then in the contextual menu i have a refresh print out option so if i click this it basically reloads that print out and now you can see that my changes have updated so that’s one important point to note when you insert it you’re essentially getting a copy that you can’t edit within the notebook but you can edit the original and then just refresh the printout to update it now if you come across a situation where you have inserted a printout and then maybe you want to copy and paste this first paragraph into another page well you can do that as well if you click on the printout and right click your mouse you’ll see you have an option here for copy text from this page of the printout so i’m going to click to copy and that’s going to copy everything it doesn’t allow me to select a specific paragraph so i’m going to just quickly add a new page and if i right click and paste it’s going to paste all of that text in and i can then jump into the text and this is in fact editable so i can make some changes i can select different paragraphs copy and paste elsewhere so on and so forth so that’s a really useful little option as it essentially makes the text editable and allows you to do other things with it so let’s add another page and move on to the next option which is file attachment so this is more like adding a file attachment like you would in an outlook email or something along those lines if i click file attachment again it’s going to jump me into file explorer and i can select a document to attach so this time i’m going to select the course descriptions pdf click on insert and i get a choice of attaching the file or inserting the printout now if i was to select insert printout that is basically exactly the same as selecting file print out from here so we’ve pretty much just run through how that works so let’s go for attach file instead and as you would expect this looks a lot like an email attachment it just gives you a link to your document and of course you can double click to open that up and because it’s a pdf it has opened in a web browser for me once you’re in here of course you then have lots of different annotation tools if you do want to make changes to it but essentially what you have here is a link to the original document so any changes made in that document will automatically update the next time you open you’re going to see the latest version so that’s all very straightforward now before we carry on so we don’t get too crazy i’m going to rename some of these pages so i’m going to title this one course details and the other page that we created i’m actually just going to delete that one out now the final option we have in here is to insert a spreadsheet and if you click the drop down you have two options you can insert an existing excel spreadsheet or you can create a new excel spreadsheet so let’s go for existing excel spreadsheet first of all again it’s going to jump me into file explorer i can then select an excel spreadsheet click on insert and this time i get three different ways i can insert this file so i can attach the file which means it’s going to show very similar to this pdf it’s going to be a link back to that original document i can insert the spreadsheet or i can choose to just insert a specific chart or table so let’s go for the insert spreadsheet option and there we go so i’m going to move this over like so now this spreadsheet had four different workbooks so i had a chart which you can see there i then had some data and i then had a list of employees and you can see here it’s brought everything in that workbook into my onenote notebook and once again if you don’t want to make any changes if i double click on where it says course plan europe it’s going to open up in excel and let’s just make a simple change let’s make a formatting change here i’m just going to change the color of these bars to a dark red color i’m going to save and close down and this time you’ll see that it has automatically updated with those changes that i’ve made so it works slightly different to inserting a printout even though it looks fairly similar it does link directly back so any changes you make to the original document will automatically update in your onenote notebook now i’m going to scroll all the way down to the bottom here and let’s take a look at this final option which is new excel spreadsheet so what this essentially allows you to do is create a new excel spreadsheet directly from within onenote and you can see here i have an edit button and if i click on edit it basically opens up a temporary excel spreadsheet for me and i can start to add data i’m just going to add a couple of columns click on save close it down and you can see that that data then updates so a great way of creating a spreadsheet kind of on the fly if it doesn’t already exist somewhere on your system so those are all the different ways that you can add files and documents into your onenote notebooks in the next module we’re going to move on to talking about recording and i’m going to show you how you can add audio and video recordings into your notebooks so i’m going to head over there now i look forward to you joining me hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re still down in section three where we’ve been taking a look at adding different types of content into our onenote pages and what we’re going to take a look at now is how we can record and add to our notebooks audio and video files now it might be at some stage when you’re working in your notebooks that you want to maybe take a quick audio note or record a video and the cool thing about this little feature in onenote is that if you do record a piece of audio or a piece of video and insert it into your page if you type any notes as you’re recording your audio or video the notes will essentially bookmark within the audio or video file so you can easily find the place in the recording where you typed your note so let me show you an example of both so we’re working up on the insert tab and you can see that i’ve just added a new page to the travel section called recording audio and video i’m going to click my mouse somewhere on this page and then in the recording group we’re going to choose record audio now what this does is that as soon as you click on that button it’s automatically recording everything that you say and you can see the audio files sitting there nicely in the onenote notebook underneath we have the time that the audio recording was started and if you take a look up to the ribbons at the top you can see i now have a contextual ribbon that’s called recording and this contains all of the options i might need in order to manage this audio recording so currently because it is recording i have a pause and a stop button and you can see as i hover over those they both have keyboard shortcuts now it might be that you are taking a recording of a meeting or maybe a lecture or something like that and as you’re recording you might also be making notes so let me show you how this works so if i take some notes just here so i’m going to type taking notes for audio recording [Music] and if i was to type something else so i’m just going to type in test test test test i could carry on going but now when i stop this recording so i’m going to press stop on that contextual ribbon i now have a couple of different ways that i can play this audio recording back if i just want to play the whole thing you can see if i hover over this file i get a little play button next to it and i can click play yo now what this does is that as soon as you click on that button it’s automatically record but alternatively what i could do is if i hover my mouse over my notes underneath you’ll see that each line of notes also has a little play button next to it so this is essentially bookmarked in the recording where i was when i was taking this note so what i can do is just click on play so if i take some notes just here and i could do the same for the line underneath recording so it essentially keeps track of what was being said at the point that the note was written now this also works for video as well so if we go back to the insert tab and click on record video this is going to pop open a window hi everybody nice to see you and it’s going to allow you to take a recording in exactly the same way so if i’m again working through this and typing in some notes so i’m going to say typing notes for video recording again that’s bookmarking where i am in my recording when i typed that note so now if i press stop on the contextual ribbon i can choose to either play back the entire recording or just the part where i took the note if i’m again working through this and typing in some notes so i’m going to say typing and it’s as simple as that now you’ll also notice that when these recordings start to play some of these other buttons in the playback group become active so you can do things like rewind for 10 minutes rewind for 10 seconds and also fast forward and then right on the end here we have audio and video settings so this is where you can customize how onenote creates and plays audio and video recordings and this is essentially going to jump you into your onenote options where you can set up things like your default audio recording device and also your video recording settings so this is particularly helpful i find if i’m ever in a training course or there is something that someone is saying that i want to make sure i get correct you can start a quick recording record it all and then you can type your own notes that is it for this module i will see you in the next one hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re still in section three and in this section we’ve been looking at adding content and it’s now time to look at adding links into our notebooks this is a very simple process again if you’re used to using microsoft applications then you’re not going to find this difficult at all because it’s pretty similar to every other application so occasionally you might need to add links to external websites or even links to other documents into your notebooks so for example i’m currently clicked on the travel tab and i’ve created a page and i’ve called it flights so what i might want to have in here are some links to websites where you can book flights and to do this we’re staying on the insert tab and you’ll see right in the middle we have a group called links and we only have one option in there you can see as i hover over it says create a link to web pages files or other places in your notes and the keyboard shortcut to bring that up quickly is control k so let’s click and see what we get now the first two links that i’m going to add are links to external websites now there’s a couple of different ways that you can approach this the first box you have to fill out here is text to display so i’m going to put in here expedia i now need to add in the link to that particular website and you can see just to the right i can choose to browse the web from here or if i already have the website open i can just jump across and copy and paste the link so i’m just going to go to microsoft edge where i have a few different websites open and the first one here is in fact expedia so all i’m going to do is click in the url bar to highlight that web address control c to copy i’m going to jump back to onenote and ctrl v to paste it into the address field i can then simply click ok and it adds in that link let’s do another one but in a slightly different way i’m going to hit enter i’m going to go back up to link this time i’m going to display a link to sky scanner but i’m going to use the browse the web option so let’s click and this time it opens up the default page in my default web browser which for this is microsoft edge i can then simply navigate to http://www.skyscanner.net i can then copy the link control c jump back to onenote and then paste that address in so it’s pretty much exactly the same just a slightly different way of getting to your web browser and now i’ve managed to add in another link now i’m just going to give these a little bit of a title [Music] recommended sites for booking flights and then i have my two links to my web pages and of course if i hover over i can see the url if i click it’s going to jump me to that particular webpage so all very straightforward and simple let’s look at some other options that we have underneath link now what we can also do is we can choose a file to link to so if i click browse for file just here i can navigate to where i have my file stored and it’s this one just here flights.x click on ok i’m going to have the text to display as suggested flights and click on ok so now essentially i’ve created a link to a document and you’ll see when i click it’s going to open that document up in word now the final option that i have in here is i can link to other sections within my notebook so you can see at the bottom here i can expand the project artemis notebook it’s going to show me all my different sections and i can choose any one of these sections to link through to so i’m going to link to the overview section the text to display is guide for flight dates click on ok and that’s exactly what i get so if i now click it’s going to jump me to that particular section so those are the different kinds of links that you can add into your notebooks and of course if you right click on any of these you get a contextual menu which is going to allow you to jump in and edit that link if you need to make any changes you can also remove the link from here select it or copy it and that is pretty much it it is as simple as that in the next module we’re going to explore how to add equations and symbols into our onenote notebooks so please join me for that hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re heading towards the end of section three and i just want to start to round out this section by running through a few other things that we haven’t looked at yet which you can insert into your onenote notebooks and what i’m going to go through in this module is inserting equations and symbols now i will say when it comes to equations this isn’t particularly relevant for the notebook that i’m constructing but you may find there are times where you need to insert some kind of mathematical equation into your notebooks and fortunately onenote provides an equation editor to assist you with this so let’s take a look at some of the things that you can do now again i’m still working on the insert tab and if we go all the way across to the last group that’s called symbols you can see we have in there an equation button and this is a two-part button so i can click on the top half or i can click on the lower half so let’s click the lower half first of all and what you’re finding here is a whole host of predefined equations that you can just click and insert into your notebook so for example if we take the top one just here which works out the area of a circle i can click and it’s going to insert that equation into its own little placeholder in my notebook and of course you can format this however you like using your tools on the home ribbon now when i insert this equation another thing that you’ll notice is that i then get the equation contextual ribbon and remember contextual ribbons are ribbons that only appear as and when they’re needed so from here you have lots of different options for manipulating this particular equation you have a large symbols group in the middle so if you need to change any of the symbols or add symbols then you can definitely do that and then in the structures group there’s all these other different types of fractions that you can add in to your equation now remember all of these buttons are for adding to the current equation that you have you’ll see if i was to click away that equations ribbon disappears so just be aware of that you must be clicked in your equation in order to see this ribbon but for example if i was to press space just here go up to structures and click the fractions drop down i could choose this first option just here which is a stacked fraction if i click it it’s going to add that to my equation and of course then i can add numbers to this and customize it to my needs now if i click away from this equation to get rid of that equations ribbon what i could also do is jump back to my insert tab and i could create my own equation from scratch there’s a couple of different ways i can do this if i click the lower half of the equation drop down you’ll see right at the bottom i have an insert new equation button and the keyboard shortcut for that is alt plus equals alternatively in a much quicker way of doing this is to click the top half of the button which then just gives me essentially a blank placeholder and i can construct my own equation from here and you’ll see once again i get my equation ribbon back again and i can go in and choose whatever equation it is that i want to add in and everything within these equations can be modified simply by clicking in the placeholder and replacing the characters or the operators now if you are somebody who is using a touch screen device then you also have a few extra options so once again let’s jump up to insert and i’m going to insert a blank equation so if you have some kind of stylus that you use with your touchscreen device what you can do is handwrite out your equation and then one note will do its best to convert it to text for you so in this first group here the tools group we have a button called ink equation and it says insert mathematical equations using your handwriting so let’s jump into here and we get our insert ink equation box and what i can do is i can now write my equation using my stylus and get one note to convert it for me now what i’m going to do is i’m going to drag this box out to make it a bit bigger and i’m going to use my stylus because i am using a touchscreen device to write out my equation and let’s just use einstein’s most famous equation e equals m c squared so i’m going to do my best to write this out but there we go and you can see just above it’s giving me a preview of what it thinks i’ve written and in this case that looks to be correct now if i need to make a correction when i’m writing this out you can see at the bottom we have some options for manipulating our handwriting so i could choose select and correct and then i can draw around whatever it is that i want to correct i wonder it’s going to provide me a few different options that it thinks i might want to do from this little menu now in this case i don’t want to correct it i’m just going to click on close and i can also erase any of my handwriting as well so if i click on erase once again i can just drag it over whatever it is i want to get rid of and of course if i want to clear the whole lot and just start again then i have a clear button down here now i’m going to go back into right mode and just add that to back in like so and i’m fairly happy with that so i’m going to insert it into my page and there we go we have our little equation so that’s particularly good if you have a very bespoke long equation that you want to add in instead of going through all of these different structures and symbols you can simply open up the ink equation editor write it down and then onenote will do its best to convert it and you can make any corrections that you need to make so equations probably not something you’ll use all that frequently but just know that it’s there and you can use it if you need to finally let’s jump back up to insert and quickly look at symbols now again this is fairly straightforward this will just allow you to insert any symbols into your onenote pages and you can see there i have a selection of a few that i’ve used most recently if i want to see the full list of symbols i can just say more symbols and it’s going to bring up that full list and i’m going to insert one of these symbols now let’s just move that window out the way because i’m going to go to the offices section i’m going to select the london office and you can see here i have the office address so what i’m going to do is just click at the start of office address and just add in a little symbol i’m going to add this little envelope one so i’m going to click insert close i might want to put a little bit of space in there so it just adds a little bit more interest into my onenote page so don’t forget you have a whole host of different symbols that you can use in your pages as well again this is a feature that’s available across all of the other microsoft applications so that’s it for this module very straightforward equations and symbols use them when you need to that’s it for this module i will see you in the next one hi guys welcome back to the course we’re down into the last module of section three and in this section we’ve been seeing how we can add all different types of content into our onenote notebooks so i’m just going to finish up this section by running through the options that you have when it comes to copying and pasting content from other documents into your notebook the first thing i’m going to do here is create a new page so i’m going to jump into my courses group i’m going to click the plus to create a new section and we’re going to rename this one onenote and hit enter and this page is going to be called training script and what i want to do is i want to take the training script what i’m going to say in this particular course from a word document and paste it into this page in onenote and this is fairly straightforward if you’re used to copying and pasting things across different microsoft applications you’re probably not going to have too many worries but let’s run through it because there are a couple of things when it comes to pasting that you need to be aware of so i’m going to jump across to a word document and all you need to do is make your selection so select the text that you want to copy and paste so i’m going to say i want these first few paragraphs and then of course you need to copy it and you can use whatever method you want to use in order to copy this text so that might be control c if you like your keyboard shortcuts alternatively up on the home ribbon you have a copy button or you could right click your mouse and select copy from the little contextual menu so let’s click copy and jump back to onenote so now what i’m going to do is i’m going to paste this text in now you’ll find your paste options on the home tab in this first clipboard group now again this is a dual button so it’s split into a top half and a lower half now if you click the top half of this button it’s exactly the same as doing a control v to paste and what onenote will do is it will use your default paste option in order to paste that text in if you’re wondering what your default paste option is if you click the lower half of the paste button whatever icon you have showing first is going to be your default paste option so for me that is to keep the source formatting so what that means is if i just do control v it’s basically going to retain all formatting from the source document so if i have my font formatted in times new roman in the source document if i was to choose keep source formatting when i paste it’s still going to be in times new roman in onenote now of course i have a few other options in here i could choose to merge formatting so that means whatever my default fonts are in onenote when i paste text in from another document it’s going to take on the formatting that’s set in onenote the third option i have is to keep text only so that’s going to bring across unformatted text and you can do whatever you like with it or i could choose to insert the text as a picture now i’m just going to do that just to show you the difference with this option let’s select picture and what you’ll see is that within the placeholder if i click i now get these handles around the outside so onenote is treating this as a picture which means i can’t just jump into this text and edit it so just bear that in mind if you decide to use that option now i’m going to control z just to undo that and what i’m going to do is i’m going to select keep source formatting paste that in and there we go and you can see with this option i can jump in and i can make any changes i need to this text and what you’ll also see at the bottom is that i have a link back to the original document if i need to refer to it at any stage so that was copying and pasting text from a word document into onenote let’s run through one more example of copying and pasting something from excel into onenote so i’m gonna go back a level and i’m just going to jump to where it says schedule and click somewhere down here now if i go to excel you can see i have an excel worksheet here that has the course plan table on it so what i could do is select this entire table i can click on copy jump back across to onenote and then once again i have my different paste options so this time i’m going to select merge formatting to pull that through and it’s going to take on the default formatting that i have in this onenote notebook if i control z just to undo that and do it once more but this time i’m going to say keep source formatting you can see i get something slightly different because it’s bringing across the formatting from the original source document so the main takeaway from this lesson is just be aware of those different paste options that you have and how they can affect the look and feel of the content that you’re pasting in that’s it for this module that is it for this section in the next section section four we’re going to move into taking a deeper look at formatting our notes so i’m excited grab yourselves a coffee and i will see you over there hello everyone and welcome back to the course it’s time for us to take a look at some of the options that we’ve run through in this section in onenote for windows 10. so we are pretty much picking up from where we left off in the last windows 10 tutorial and if you remember we created a project called project sierra we created some sections and some pages and then i showed you how you can make sub pages and we also took a look at the main options that we have in the onenote for windows 10 interface so let’s move on a little bit now and start taking a look at how we can insert items into our pages now this is fairly straightforward in onenote for windows 10. all of your insert options are found on the insert tab and from here you can insert various different items like tables files printouts pictures and online video as well as things like links and audio meeting details symbols so on and so forth so fairly similar in that way to the desktop version now when it comes to typing notes this works in exactly the same way you just click somewhere in your page [Music] and type your note and you’ll see that the note appears in a very similar placeholder that you can pick up and move around you can also resize it by dragging it out to give yourself a little bit more room and you can pretty much place this wherever you want on your page now when it comes to formatting text that you have within placeholders if you jump back to the home tab this is where you’re going to find all of your formatting options that you have available so i can make this bold i can make it italic i can highlight it i can even do things like copy the formatting using format painter or add things like bullet points and numbered items now i’m gonna do undo a couple of times just to take that back to the plain text because what i want to focus on in this particular lesson is things that you can insert into your notebook so let’s jump back to the insert tab and let’s start out by taking a look at how we can insert a table so i’m going to click the table button and again this is probably fairly similar to what you’re used to i’m going to select how big i want my table and very quickly i’ve managed to insert a nice table into here and i can now start to add in my required data now i’m going to select that placeholder and just delete that out and just show you a couple of other options that you have on this ribbon because most of them are pretty much the same as the desktop version so let’s click on file and i’ll just show an example of inserting a file into your notebook so i’m going to select this word document just here and click on open and i can choose to upload it to one drive and insert a link to it i can insert it as an attachment or as a printout so i’m going to say insert attachment and just like that we have that document sitting there ready to open we can insert pictures in pretty much the same way we can choose to insert a picture that we have saved off we can choose to select one from a camera or from an online source so if i was to select from online it’s going to open up a pane where i can then search for a particular picture so let’s just say london i can then choose the picture that i want and it’s going to insert that very quickly into my notebook now once again i’m going to click on undo to get rid of that now when it comes to something like online video again this is where you’re going to need to know the exact url of the video that you want to insert so you might have to jump onto youtube or vimeo grab the url paste it in here in order to put your video into your notebook now pretty much everything else in this section is exactly the same in the desktop version as in this one when it comes to copying and pasting you can utilize exactly the same keyboard shortcuts so for example if i press ctrl c to copy click down here and ctrl v to paste that’s going to work nicely now if you’re looking for your cut copy and paste options on that home tab you’re going to need to click on the clipboard and then you’ll see a drop down menu with those three available in there so when it comes to inserting items into this particular version of onenote fairly straightforward insert tab there you have your options and for the most part it works pretty much the same as the desktop version that’s it for this module i will see you in the next one hi everyone welcome back to the course this is still deb and we are down into section four where we’re going to be taking a deeper look at formatting notes now formatting is reasonably simple but it’s a very important process because it makes your text more readable it allows you to emphasize certain points and also gives a bit more structure to content that you have on your page and i’ve been utilizing font formatting throughout this course so far but in this particular module i just want to delve into all of the options that you have so that you’re clear and can format your notes effectively so i’m currently clicked on the onenote section in the training script and you can see here currently i have a few paragraphs of completely unformatted text now i can see in here i have some spelling errors that i might want to correct and i’ll do that later but for now i want to give this a bit more structure make it a little bit more interesting by formatting my paragraphs now in onenote you can choose to format everything that you have on your page or you can select specific paragraphs to format so let me show you examples of both now if i click on my text you can see that i have this placeholder around the outside now if i select that placeholder i’m effectively selecting everything contained within the placeholder so any formatting that i apply at this point is going to apply to everything within the placeholder what you’ll also see is that as soon as i clicked on that placeholder i get my mini toolbar just above and the mini toolbar holds lots of different formatting options to make it a bit more convenient when it comes to formatting now currently i’m clicked on the home ribbon where i have all of my formatting options but it might be that i’m clicked on a different ribbon and i want to format some text so instead of having to jump back to home to get to those formatting options the mini toolbar gives me quick access to them wherever i am so the first thing i’m going to do here is i’m going to change my font style so currently i have this set to calibri and if i click the drop down this is going to give me a list of all of the inbuilt fonts within onenote you’ll see at the top i have my most recently used fonts and then i have a list of all of the fonts within one note in alphabetical order which makes them a little bit easier to find now if you know the particular font that you want to use you can scroll through the list and look for it or alternatively you can just start typing the name of that font and it will jump you to the correct place in that list so for me i’m going to use lato light and you can see as i type it it’s found that in the list it’s the last one just here if i click it it’s going to apply that font to everything i have within that placeholder now currently i have a little title here called what to expect from this course and it doesn’t really stand out from the rest of the text so what i could do is just select that line of text as opposed to the entire placeholder jump up to my font drop down and this one i’m going to select lato again but this time i’m going to choose lato black so what i’m doing here and this is quite important is i’m sticking within the same font family i’ve used lato light for my paragraphs and i’m using latte black for my heading and this ensures that my fonts aren’t going to look too different to each other as they’re within the same family it just gives a more consistent overall look and feel there’s something else i might want to do here is i might want to select that heading again and increase the font size so once again from the drop down menu currently i’ve got 11 point font selected but i could choose something that’s a little bit bigger just to make that heading stand out a little bit more now underneath those two options we have some additional ways of styling up our text we can make text bold and you can see the keyboard shortcut there ctrl b italic we can underline we can add a strikethrough to cross something out and then we have a choice of subscript or superscript so for example if you typed the word h2o you could use superscript to make that look correct so let’s just apply some of these options i’m going to take the let’s just take this first sentence in the second paragraph i can make it bold i can make it italic i can underline it i could strike through and if i type in h2o what i could do is select the number two jump up to my superscript and subscript button and make it superscript so that looks a little bit more accurate now i don’t actually want all of this formatting applied so i’m going to delete out the word h2o and what i’m going to do is i’m going to highlight this whole sentence again and if we go up to our basic text group you can see here i have a clear or formatting button keyboard shortcut ctrl shift n and you can see it says it removes all formatting from the selection leaving only the normal unformatted text so when i click this it’s going to remove absolutely everything including the font style that i selected now in this case it’s a little bit quicker for me to use this button and then just go back in and reselect later light to apply that font but in some cases it might be quicker for you just to highlight the sentence and undo all of the formatting that you applied now a couple of other options in this second group that we have here we have a text highlighter and i showed you how to use this before it’s a really nice little option if you want to highlight or make something stand out in your bulk of text so let me take this sentence here where i’m introducing myself and if i go up to highlighter click the drop down i have a choice of different highlight colors so let’s highlight this in a bright green and there we go and once again if i wanted to remove that i can select the text and i can go back into here and choose no color or i could clear the formatting but remember it’s going to clear that font style as well and take it back to your default and then of course if we highlight this first paragraph i can change the font color and i have a selection of theme colors to choose from and then a selection of standard colors now if i’m not finding the color that i want in this palette i could click on more colors i can choose from a standard color selection or i can go to custom and get super granular about the color that i’m choosing so i can move around this color palette and let’s go for a purple i’m going to go for a lighter purple and you can see in the bottom corner it’s showing me what that color is going to look like click on ok and then it’s going to apply that to whatever paragraph i have selected now i’m going to ctrl z just to put that back to black now the final few options that we have in here are the increase and decrease indent so once again if i wanted these first two paragraphs to be slightly indented from the rest of the text i could select them and choose to increase my indent position and it’s going to indent those and if i want to do the opposite again i can select and i can choose to decrease my indent position to move that back again then finally underneath i have some alignment options so currently my text is all aligned to the left now for this i’m actually going to select the entire placeholder and i’m going to say align to center and you can see i get a completely different layout for my text i could also choose to align to the right and that’s sometimes useful if you want to move your text box over to here it gives it a different look and feel now again i’m going to ctrl z just to pull that back to align left and then right at the bottom we have some paragraph spacing options so currently you can see the spacing in between my paragraphs is reasonably small so it might be that i want to increase that to make it a bit more obvious and prominent so if i go down to paragraph spacing options i can choose how much space i want to set before the paragraph and how much space after and i’m going to say i want 20 point spacing afterwards click on ok and you can see i get a much wider gap after each paragraph and the final button that we have in this little basic text formatting group is the delete item button so this is just another way of being able to very quickly select a paragraph so if i hover over the second paragraph you’ll see i get a little arrow at the side i can click it to select the paragraph i can click delete and it’s pretty much the same as pressing the delete key on your keyboard so that is it a very quick run through of all of those font formatting options that you have available in the next module i’m going to show you how you can utilize format painter so please join me for that hello everyone and welcome back to the course we’re down in section 4 where we’re taking a look at formatting and in the previous module i showed you the different options that you have when it comes to formatting paragraphs of text in your notebooks now in this particular module we’re going to follow on from the previous one i’m going to introduce you to the format painter now again this is something that i use towards the beginning of this course but i want to make sure that you understand exactly how to use it because there are a couple of things that aren’t immediately obvious so once again i am working in the training script page and i’ve added a bit more text into this page now if you take a look at the text that i’ve actually added i have some times 10 to 12 and also 2 to four a bit further down and i want to make those stand out from the rest of the text on the page so once again what i can do is i can hover my mouse over the little arrow that appears in the margin and click to select that piece of text now if i want to select another piece of text i can hold down my control key click to select that line as well and i’m going to make both of these bold like so and then underneath i have a list of items that i’m going to cover and then underneath each of these headings i have essentially a list of agenda items so again what i might want to do here is apply some formatting to make them stand out and give this notebook a little bit of structure so the most obvious thing i might want to do with some kind of list would be to either add bullets or numbering and if we jump back up to our basic text options you can see i have a whole host of different symbols that i can use as bullets so i’m going to pick this little tiny black square click to add that in now an alternative option to adding in just symbols as bullets is that you can number items as well so if i go up to the button next to bullets we have a numbering option and this is going to pull up the numbering library and it shows me all the different styles of numbering that i could choose so again it really depends on what your personal preference is or what matches the overall theme of the notebook that you’re working in so for this one i’m actually going to choose these roman numerals click to add those in and when it comes to things like numbering you’ll notice that if i click on one of the numbered items it selects them all so if i wanted to change to a different style of numbering i can just jump back up to numbering and then choose whatever it is that i need to now the final thing i want to show you in this lesson is how to utilize the format painter so what i’m going to do is i’m going to press enter and you’ll see that automatically it’s going to give me my next numbered item now i don’t want to have a numbered item here i want to create a new heading so all i need to do is i can just click on numbering but you’ll see that it’s going to leave my cursor indented so if i want to pull it back so it’s flush with that left-hand margin this is where i would use my decrease indent position and when i click that it pulls it back to where i need it to be so i’m going to add another heading in here we’re going to say 4 to six and i’m going to add in a few more items now a quick way of me formatting this new list the same as the list that i have above is to utilize the format painter and what the format painter does it allows you to select a piece of text that already contains formatting and then essentially transfer it to another piece of text so in this example i want this heading 4 to 6 to look exactly the same as the one just above two to four now in practice this just contains bold formatting so it’s not too much of a hassle for me to just apply bold but if i had multiple pieces of formatting applied so if i select it and maybe if i change the color maybe i’ve gone in and i’ve made it bigger maybe i’ve made it italic i’ve now applied a number of different steps and so to recreate those manually for this particular title is going to be a little bit time consuming a much quicker way of doing it would be just to select the text that contains the formatting you want to copy and in the clipboard group click on the format painter and you can see the keyboard shortcut there is ctrl shift c now i’m going to click the format painter once and you’ll see that my cursor changes to a paintbrush and now all i need to do is paint over and let go and it’s going to copy that formatting across now one thing you’ll also notice is that as soon as i’ve done that my cursor returns to just that standard cursor so what do i need to do if i want to carry on painting this format so we’re going to do the same again but this time i’m going to copy the formatting to multiple items so it’s the same process i’m going to select the text but this time i’m going to double click on the format painter i can then paint over this heading scroll up and paint over this heading and you can see that my cursor is still showing in paint mode so if you click on format painter once you only get to paint once if you have a lot of painting or copying of formatting that you want to do you need to double click on that format painter once you’re done with your formatting you can just click on format painter to turn it off alternatively you can press the escape key on your keyboard and that will take you back to your regular cursor so format painter is a great way of working a little bit more efficiently saving time and also ensuring that your formatting is consistent throughout your notebook that’s it for this module i will see you in the next one hello everyone and welcome back to the course in this section we’re taking a look at everything to do with formatting notes to give our notebook structure and make it easier for the reader to decipher exactly what they’re looking at and in the previous module i showed you how you can utilize bullets and numbering and also use that format painter to copy formatting to other pieces of content i’m just going to start out by finishing that up so if you remember right at the end of the last lesson i added in another list of items and currently these don’t have any bullets or numbering applied to them like the previous two sections and i want everything in here to be consistent i want everything to have bullets supplied as opposed to numbering so once again i’m going to select the text that contains the formatting i want to reuse and i’m going to double click on my format painter and i’m going to paint over the list below and then i’m going to paint over the final list and then i’m going to click on format painter to come back to my regular cursor so now everything’s starting to look a little bit more uniform and this is a really important point when you’re working in any application not just one note making everything look consistent is really important when it comes to the readability of the document that you’re creating and something that can help you with that is styles and you’ll see on the home ribbon in the middle we have a styles drop down and again this is something we took a look at very briefly in one of the earlier modules but let’s just delve into it a little bit deeper so you understand exactly why these can be useful now styles are essentially pre-formatted pieces of text which are available as standard in onenote and you can see from this drop down you get a little preview as to what each of these will look like when you apply them to any piece of content in your notebook and the idea of these is to give your document consistency and also structure and it also makes it a lot easier for you to very quickly apply formatting without having to manually apply it from your basic text formatting options so let’s take a look at how we might use these now at the top here i have the heading what to expect from this course and i just applied manual formatting to this i changed the font style i increased the font size to 14 and i also made it bold so that’s essentially three clicks to get the result that i want what i could have done instead was select this heading go to styles and select heading 1 and that’s going to apply that heading 1 style and all of the formatting to that heading and if whenever i have a heading in my notebook i consistently use heading 1 that’s going to make my document look a lot more tied together and it also saves me a lot of time because it just requires one click now i’m going to go in and i’m going to add a subheading here called agenda i’m going to select it and i’m going to give this a heading 2. i’m then going to select 10 to 12 and i’m going to give this a heading 3. so you can see that each of these headings as i’m applying them are slightly different from the previous one but they still give a cohesive look so let’s apply heading three to this one as well and also heading three down here now of course i could carry on going and it really depends how many subheadings i have in my document but i can utilize all of these throughout to give a consistent feel you’ll also see that i have some other styles available in here which i could also use so if i have a page title i might decide to apply this particular style if i have a citation or maybe a quote and what you’ll see is if i just show you if i select this paragraph maybe this is a quote and i want to emphasize that i could use the quote style and when i click in it you can see the formatting that’s applied for this style so it’s calibri font it’s size 11 it’s italic and if i click the font color drop down you can see the font color that it’s using highlighted in the theme colors palette so i can see all of the individual properties that essentially make up that quote style now i’m going to control z because i don’t need that to be a quote now i’m going to leave you to have a little play around with these see which ones you like which ones you don’t but they are a super quick way of just applying some kind of structure to your document that’s it for this module i will see you in the next one hello everyone and welcome back to the course in this section we’ll be taking a look at some of the options that we have when it comes to formatting our text notes and i want to move on from that a little bit in this module and run through some options that you have when it comes to organizing information on your page and we’re going to start by taking a look at tables now once again we’re going to be working predominantly on the insert ribbon as that is where we will find add tables option in the second group just here now again if you’ve worked in other microsoft applications such as word or maybe excel you may be pretty familiar with the concept of tables now if you are used to using tables in those applications then you might find the option in onenote a little bit limited there’s definitely not as much that you can do with a table in one note compared to something like word but nevertheless it can still be super useful for organizing text making things easier to read and also lining up items on a page so in this module i’m going to show you how you can insert a table and we’re going to run through the formatting options that you do have so i’m clicked on the training script page and what i’m going to do here is i’m going to add in a table which is essentially going to replace these bulleted items so currently the way i have this laid out these bulleted items take up quite a bit of room so i’ve decided that these would look a little bit better if i organize them in a table so i’m going to click after the word agenda and hit my enter key to put me onto a blank line i’m going to jump up to table and at this point i have a couple of different options i can select how many columns and rows i want in my table simply by dragging over the grid alternatively i can click on insert table and manually type in the number of columns and the number of rows now for me i always find it a little bit easier just to drag over the grid so i’m going to create a table that is seven rows by three columns click to insert and what you’ll see is you get this rather small kind of cramped up table now of course this is a little bit small for me to be able to work with effectively so the first thing i want to do here is resize these columns and it’s a simple case of hovering your mouse over the column boundaries until you get that double-sided arrow and just dragging out to the size that you want and of course you can adjust these later if you don’t have it quite right at the outset so let’s make this table a little bit bigger like so now one thing that you’ll notice again is that when i’m clicked inside this table if you cast your eyes up to the ribbons you can see that i now have a contextual ribbon called table and this ribbon contains all of the options that i have in relation to formatting and organizing this table so i have a select group first of all that will allow me to select the entire table i can select specific columns so wherever i’m clicked it’s going to highlight again i can select specific rows or i can just select a specific cell and all of these selection options are really dependent on where you’re clicked within your table now of course when it comes to selecting you can also utilize this little gray arrow in the margin if i want to select the first row i can click the grey arrow to select it and if i hover just above the table you’ll see that i get that black downward facing arrow which is going to allow me to select different columns i can of course drag my mouse so if i want to select a few different rows i can definitely do it that way or maybe if i want to select a few cells within one column i can do it that way as well so a few different options there when it comes to making selections the next group along is deleting so we can delete our entire table we can delete specific columns that we’ve selected or specific rows and then we have an insert group and this is going to allow us to insert additional rows either above or below where it clicked or additional columns to the left or to the right of where we’re clicked we then have a group that contains some formatting options so if i want to hide all the borders of a table i can do that and that will look a little bit more useful when we actually have some content within the table i can also choose shading so if i want to change the background fill of some of the rows or maybe a specific cell or column then i can definitely do that and then i have alignment options and this relates to the text contained within each cell i can choose to align it to the left to the center or to the right now we have a couple of other options on the end here which i’m going to cover at the end of this module let’s just focus on the ones that we’ve just run through so what i’m going to do here is i’m going to start to add some content in and in this first cell i want to have the text 10 to 12. so i’m going to select that text and i’m going to do control x which will cut alternatively you could have used the cut command on the home ribbon or you could right click and select cut from there i’m going to click in this first cell just here and i’m going to press ctrl v to paste that in and you’ll see that it’s pasted with all of its original formatting because i used ctrl v which essentially invokes my default paste option which is to keep the source formatting now underneath here i’m going to type in agenda item we’re going to have description and then i’m going to have time now one thing you might notice is that the font style has gone back to calibri because calibri is my overall default font it’s not picking up the latter light that i changed everything in this notebook to be so probably what i’m going to want to do here is select the entire table and to do that again i can jump up to the table ribbon and in the first group i can click select table and then i’m going to go to home and i’m going to change all of the font to lato light so that now ensures that everything that i’m going to type into this table is going to have the correct font style now another thing i’m going to do here with these column headings is i’m going to select the entire row and i’m going to make them bold and now i’m going to take these bulleted items and i’m going to cut and paste into the table so let’s select the first one ctrl x to cut ctrl v to paste and i’m going to do exactly the same for all of the others like so now you can see because i’ve just done a direct cut and paste it’s brought across those bullets as well now it might be that once you put them in the table you don’t have any need for the bullets so all you need to do to get rid of those is select all of the bulleted text jump up to the home ribbon and just deselect bullets to put those back now when i talk about tables in onenote being slightly less functional than in other applications i mean for things like this so for example this first row where we have the times if i was working in a table in say word what i would probably do here would be to merge all of these cells so we just have essentially one cell running across the top but you’ll notice if we go to the table ribbon we don’t have any merge options so you kind of have to keep it in this format what i’m going to do now is just go in and type in some text into the description fields so there we go i’ve added in a brief description for each of these agenda items and also the time that each item is going to start now it might be that i want to add another column that contains the room that this course is taking place in so what i might want to do here is first of all i’m going to drag this table board in as i don’t need as much space here i’m going to select this last column and i’m going to say insert right to insert another column now you’ll see as soon as i do that onenote is going to resize my table to accommodate the widest item in that column now normally this is fine but if you want to widen then you’re going to have to go in and manually widen these columns again so i’m going to say room and we’ll say room a room b c d and e now some other things i can do in here to liven up my table if i click in this heading row i can jump up to my select group and say select rows and just to make this stand out a bit i’m going to apply some shading so let’s apply some lilac shading to that heading row i’m also going to click where we have the times i’m going to say select cell and for this i’m going to apply bold formatting and then i’m going to select the time column so all of these items just here just by clicking and dragging my mouse and i’m going to make these italic now something else i also could do is hide these table borders so if i jump up to the format group i have a hide borders option which is just going to give me that so essentially it is still in a table and you can resize still by dragging but you’re just not seeing those table boundaries so sometimes that does tend to look a little bit neater and a bit more professional now just for demonstration purposes i’m going to bring those borders back and remember i can highlight two columns of content and maybe i want to center align those two now another option i have up here is the sort option so i can choose to sort the items in my table in ascending order so a to z or descending zed to a and this is really important here it’s got a tick next to header row my table’s a little bit different to most tables that you might create because my first row isn’t actually my heading row really where i have these column headings that essentially is my heading row so for me if i wanted to sort in ascending order and i have header row ticked one note is going to think that the first row is my header row and so when i sort it’s going to look a little bit strange so for me i can’t actually do that if i just want to sort the items so maybe i want to sort these agenda items into alphabetical order i would need to select them go up to sort and say sort selected rows i’m going to sort by column 1 in ascending order click on ok and now you can see that that has worked so just be aware of that header row option now essentially what i want here is this table for each of these different parts of the training course now what i find is the easiest way is just to copy this particular table i want everything to look pretty much the same so i’m going to click in my table up to my table tools select table and then going to go to the home ribbon and say copy or ctrl c if you want and i’m going to place my cursor where i want the new table to be and i can do control v to paste that in so once i’ve done that i have all my formatting everything that i need and all i would have to do is go through and replace the items in the table so once again i can do a control x but this time i’m going to say paste and merge formatting to take on the formatting of the table let’s do a couple more i’m going to select control x i’m going to do paste and merge formatting i’m going to carry on going through repeating this process for the rest of these agenda items so this now looks a lot more interesting and also a lot neater and more organized now that i’m using tables i’m just going to make a few further changes to these tables so i’m going to click in the second table in that second row i’m going to go up to the select group and select the row and i’m going to change the shading to green i’m going to do the same thing for the final table select the row and let’s change the shading to a yellow color and one thing you’ll notice is that with this table at the bottom we don’t have quite as hefty as schedule in the last part of the day and so i have a blank row at the bottom here that needs to be deleted and again this is a simple process you can either click in the margin to select the row alternatively click on the select rows button and then you can utilize your delete options so i’m going to say delete rows just to remove that and then finally at the top here we have an option to convert to an excel spreadsheet so what i could do is i could click in this table i’m going to say select table and click convert to excel spreadsheet and you can see what i get now i’m now working within essentially a mini excel window and if i click on the edit button it’s going to open that up in excel which then of course widens what i can do with this data because i have all of excel’s functionality to hand so it might be at this point that i choose to merge these cells so i’m going to say merge cells like so click on save and when i close the excel spreadsheet back down again you can see that those cells are now merged so it gives the table a bit of a different look and feel and it really depends what you want to do but this is a great way of having a table in onenote but having access to excel functionality so lots of options you have in there for organizing your data with tables that’s it for this module i will see you in the next one hello everyone and welcome back to the course in this module i want to start to introduce you to the concept of tagging in onenote i’m going to start out with the most basic tag that you can add and probably one that you’ll use most often and that is the to-do item tag now the to-do item is great if you want to create like a to-do checklist so for example for this project project artemis there are lots and lots of different tasks that need to occur before this project can go ahead anything from organizing which team members are going to be sent to the different locations to booking the training rooms organizing flights and hotels writing the training content all of those different kinds of things so in its most basic form what you can do in one note is you can add a list of items or to-do items utilize the to-do tag and then check them off once they’re done so let’s take a look at how this works so i’ve created a new section called to-do list and i’ve called this page to do items i’m going to click my mouse right at the top there and on the home ribbon in this tags group you’ll see that i have a to-do tag now what you also might notice is that to do also appears at the top of this tags list and that’s because it’s probably one of the most popular ones you’re going to use now there is a keyboard shortcut to insert this particular tag of control plus one and we haven’t covered tags yet you can see we have a lot of items in this big long list we are going to go through some of these so you understand what they all do and how helpful they can be for the time being we’re just going to concentrate on this first one so let’s click on to do and you’ll see that it enters in a placeholder with a little checkbox and i can then type in my to-do item so assign team members to locations if i hit the enter key you can see i get another to-do box hit enter again i get another one so on and so forth and i could carry on going adding my different to-do items and that’s pretty much all it is it’s a very simple little utility but it just allows you to keep track of the things that you need to do and once they’re done you can just click in the box to tick those off now you can make some very minimal modifications to how these to-do boxes look so if i right-click my mouse you can see i have options to uncheck the box i can also remove the tag entirely i’m going to talk to you about find tags a bit later on but the one i want to go into is customize tags so i’m going to select the to do tag at the top and i’m going to say modify tag so if i wanted to i could change the display name of this particular tag but i can also do things like change the symbol the font color and the highlight color so you have some limited customization options so for example if i click the symbol drop down you can see i can change to any of these symbols now i actually like having a check box but it might be that i want something that looks a little bit different maybe this green star check box and you can see in the preview below what that’s going to look like it might be that i want to change the font color so let’s change that to a dark green color and if i wanted to i could add a highlight now i don’t particularly want that i’m going to say none and one important thing to know is it says underneath customizations do not affect notes you’ve already tacked so if i click on ok and ok again you can see that the check boxes i’ve already added aren’t affected so i’m not getting that updated formatting but if i was to click somewhere else and then select to do from tags i’m going to get that new style but of course if i did have quite a long to-do list and i wanted to change the formatting i could just select the current tags jump up to my tags group and click the newly formatted to-do tag and that’s going to replace all of those now there’s a whole heap of other things that you can do with tags including the to-do tag which i’m going to show you a bit later on because we have a whole module dedicated to exploring all of the tags that you can see in here and using them in a meaningful way but for now that’s how you create a very simple to-do list with checkboxes that’s it for this module i will see you in the next one hi guys and welcome back to the course we’re heading steadily towards the end of section four in this section we’ve been taking a look at formatting tools and how you can organize your information within onenote effectively and no section on formatting would be complete if i didn’t run you through the options you have when it comes to spell checking nothing makes a document or a notebook look unprofessional quite like misspelt words particularly if you’re going to be sharing this notebook with your team colleagues or maybe even a manager you want to make sure that every time you create a page you do run through a spell check now i want to start out just by taking you into the backstage area just so you can see where all of your spelling options are because that’s really going to determine how you spell check your notebook so let’s go up to file and we’re going to go all the way down into our one no options and the section that we are interested in is the proofing section now i would advise you to jump into here and just review the options that you have turned on but the thing i want to draw your attention to is this section at the bottom so underneath here you can see that i have selected to check my spelling as i type and i’ve also got check grammar with spelling as well so what that basically means is that as i’m typing my notes in one note onenote is checking to make sure i’ve spelt words correctly and if i do spell something incorrectly it’s going to indicate that and i have an option to correct it as i go the same thing applies with grammar because i have this option selected as well now some people don’t like their applications checking their spelling as they go they’d rather just wait until the end and then spell check the entire thing and that’s entirely up to you if you do want to turn off that option make sure you select hide spelling and grammar errors now i’m happy with mine set as they are i’m going to click on ok and just show you what i mean so if i was to type a word let’s spell something incorrect i’m going to say microsoft instead of microsoft and you can see automatically onenote has recognized i’ve spelt that wrong and i have a red squiggly underline so if i right click my mouse you can see straight at the top it’s going to give me some suggestions of what i might have been trying to say and in this case it’s picked up that i probably wanted to say microsoft so i can click to make that correction i can choose to ignore or i can choose to add it to a dictionary now the add to dictionary option is really useful particularly for things like names so onenote won’t necessarily recognize your manager’s name and so might think that that’s an error when you type it into the page and if you’re always typing your manager’s name it is a bit annoying to have to go in and ignore the error each time so what you could do is add the word to the dictionary instead so that the next time you type it one note knows that that’s an actual word and it doesn’t highlight it as an error but in this case i’m going to select microsoft and you can see it updates that word so i’m going to double click to delete that out because i don’t need it but hopefully you get the idea so if you want to check your spelling and your grammar as you go just make sure you turn on those two little options now the alternative thing that you can do is you can spell check each of your pages at the end so if i jump up to the review tab you can see i have a spelling group here and the first option is spelling so let’s click that button and you can see it’s telling me straight away the spelling check is complete so essentially i’ve been pretty good here i haven’t got a misspelt word or a grammatical error on this page at all let’s click on ok to get rid of that now let me jump to a page where i know i do have some errors i’m going to go into my courses section group and on the onenote page let’s run our spell check again now this time you can see that i have the spelling pane opened on the right hand side and it’s picked up the word powerpoint and that’s because i’ve used a lowercase p within this word and it should really look like this and you can see that i’ve got some suggestions underneath which i can choose from so i’m going to say i meant powerpoint with a capital just to replace that word it’s then picked up the word won’t so you can see that i’ve missed out an apostrophe now as i’m going through you can also see that the word that i’m currently spell checking is highlighted in the notebook and this is a good opportunity for you to see the different visual indicators applied to different errors so because this is a grammar error as opposed to a spelling error the word has a blue double underline whereas spelling errors have that red squiggly underline so once again the suggestion i have here is correct i’m going to select it to replace it moves on to the next one and i can see here that this is actually a spelling error so this should say i can’t wait to dive into it so once again the suggestion here is correct i’m going to select to change it to weight and then i have another grammatical error once again i’ve missed out an apostrophe so i’m going to accept this suggestion and now my spelling check is complete now it’s worth noting with this spell check that you can only check one page at a time there isn’t any feature that allows you to define the scope of what you’re checking so i can’t say to one note check the entire notebook which would include all sections and all pages i just have to check each page separately so how you want to manage that whether you want to do it as you go or do it right at the end is entirely up to you now let’s do one final spell check i’m clicked on the schedule tab in the course plan group and i can already see here i have the word sharepoint repeated throughout this little table which is a red squiggly underline so it’s telling me that it’s a spelling error so i can jump back up to spelling i can see that once again it’s because i haven’t capitalized that p so i’m going to select the suggestion and replace that for each of these by simply clicking again there’s no way to replace them all in one go unfortunately so that’s it for this module and also for this section we’re going to be moving across into section 5 now where i’m going to show you some more tools available to organize your content so i’m looking forward to it i hope you will join me hi guys and welcome back to the course so now let’s take a look at some of the things that we’ve learned in this section in the windows 10 version of onenote so the first thing i’m going to do here is i am working in project sierra i’m on the to-do list section and i’m currently clicked on the monday page and currently i have a single note in there that says remember to call the bank now what i’m going to do here is i’m going to press enter i’m just going to add a bit of a title and i’m going to call this important things and what i want to do here is apply some formatting to this title and you’ll see as i highlight important things i get that little mini toolbar pop-up that’s going to give me some of those formatting options that i might find useful and if i click on the three dots it’s going to give me access to a lot more options as well it just so happens that the option that i want to use isn’t on this mini toolbar so i’m just going to select important things and go up to the home tab because what i want to do here is i want to apply one of those heading styles to really make this title stand out from the points below so i’m going to go all the way across this ribbon to where we have heading 1 click the drop down and i’m going to give this a heading 2 heading so once again when it comes to applying styles it works exactly the same way as onenote for desktop now what i want to do is i want to add some tags and again we’re working on our home ribbon and if we go over to this little check box item and click the drop down this is where we can find all of our tags now the list in onenote for windows is not as comprehensive as what you’ll find in that desktop app if you remember we have a very long list of tags to choose from but we have a few really important ones so the to-do list checkbox the important tag questions remember for later and also definition and of course if you want to you can jump into here and create your own custom tag so maybe i want to be able to tag contacts so i’m going to call this one contacts i’m going to select an icon now for this i’m going to jump to all icons and let’s see what we’ve got in here i’m going to select this one click on create it’s telling me my tag was created successfully so now if i click that drop down i should be able to find my newly created tag in here and of course right at the bottom i have the option to delete my custom tags which at the moment is only this context one now i don’t want to delete it so let’s just go back because the one that i want to choose is the to do tag and that’s going to give me that all important check box and then when i hit enter i can carry on going through and typing in my checklist items [Music] now if i wanted to create another list down here i’m going to say medium priority it might be that i want this to take on the same formatting as the important things heading so what i could do is i could jump up to the home tab and just apply heading 2 but i could utilize my format painter so i’m going to select important things because that contains the formatting i want to use and then on that home tab in the middle i have a format painter icon so let’s click it once to activate and then all i need to do is paint over my text to apply the same formatting hit enter and i can now enter my medium priority to do items like so and once again i could tag these if i wanted to i’m going to select both items jump up to my tags and this time i’m going to say that these are important now one other thing we took a look at in this section was utilizing spell check now with onenote for windows 10 if you go through all of these ribbon tabs then you won’t find an option on here for checking spelling and that’s because one note is set up to check your spelling as you type so for example if i was to go into here and make a blatant spelling mistake so let’s say i say [Music] like that once i click away then one note is going to highlight that to me by a red squiggly line letting me know that i have a spelling error just there so what i can do is right click go to proofing and it’s going to give me some suggestions i can also choose to ignore or add to the dictionary from here so i’m going to choose the correct spelling which is priority and it fixes that spelling error for me the same thing is going to apply with grammar now if you want to check what you have set up for your spelling settings if you go up to the three dots in the top corner and then choose settings and go to options if you scroll down you’ll see that underneath proofing you want to make sure that you have hide spelling errors toggled off this means that onenote is going to check as you type so if you know that you have a spelling error but onenote isn’t recognizing it it’s probably because you’ve got this setting toggled on so don’t forget to check that so that is it for this section i will see you in the next one if you’re not a subscriber click down below to subscribe so you get notified about similar videos we upload to get four free courses in excel quickbooks microsoft project and photoshop click over there and click over there to see more videos from simon says it

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Python Programming Fundamentals

    Python Programming Fundamentals

    This comprehensive resource introduces the Python programming language, covering its fundamental concepts and practical applications. It emphasizes Python’s versatility, highlighting its use in AI, machine learning, web development, and automation. The material guides learners from beginner to advanced levels, explaining installation, syntax, and various programming constructs. It underscores best practices for writing clean and maintainable code, while also exploring complex data types, functions, and loops. The training also covers how to effectively use a code editor to streamline the development process. The course then illustrates complex topics such as working with operators, modules, and data structures.

    Python Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Study Guide

    Quiz (Short Answer)

    1. What is the Python interpreter, and what is its role in executing Python code? The Python interpreter is a program that reads and executes Python code, line by line. It translates the human-readable code into instructions that the computer can understand and perform.
    2. Briefly explain the difference between a code editor and an IDE (Integrated Development Environment). A code editor is a basic text editor with features for writing and editing code, such as syntax highlighting. An IDE is a more comprehensive tool that includes a code editor along with debugging, testing, and auto-completion features.
    3. Why is “linting” important in software development, and how does it benefit the coding process? Linting involves analyzing code for potential errors and stylistic inconsistencies before execution. It helps catch syntax errors and ensures code adheres to style guides, making it cleaner and more maintainable.
    4. What is Pep 8, and why is it important for Python developers to adhere to it? Pep 8 is the style guide for Python code, outlining rules for formatting and styling to ensure consistency across different codebases. Adhering to it promotes readability and collaboration.
    5. Explain the concept of a variable in programming and provide examples of different data types that can be stored in variables. A variable is a named storage location in a computer’s memory used to store data. Data types that can be stored in variables include integers, floats, booleans, and strings.
    6. What is the purpose of the len() function in Python, and what type of argument does it typically take? The len() function returns the length of a sequence, such as a string or a list. It takes the sequence as its argument and returns the number of items in the sequence.
    7. Explain the use of escape characters in Python strings and provide a few common examples. Escape characters are special characters in strings used to represent characters that are difficult or impossible to type directly. Examples include \n (newline), \t (tab), \\ (backslash), \” (double quote), and \’ (single quote).
    8. Describe the purpose and syntax of formatted strings (f-strings) in Python and explain their benefits over traditional string concatenation. Formatted strings (f-strings) allow embedding expressions inside string literals, making string formatting more readable and concise. Using an f-string, you can put variables and expressions inside curly braces {} within the string.
    9. What is the difference between functions that “perform a task” versus those that “calculate and return a value”? Give an example of each. Functions that perform a task carry out actions, often with side effects, but don’t necessarily return a value (e.g., print(), which displays output on the console). Functions that calculate and return a value perform computations and return the result, which can then be used elsewhere in the program (e.g., round(), which returns a rounded number).
    10. Explain the purpose and usage of a for loop and a while loop, highlighting the key differences between them. A for loop is used to iterate over a sequence (e.g., list, string, range), executing a block of code for each element in the sequence. A while loop is used to repeatedly execute a block of code as long as a specified condition is true, making it useful when the number of iterations is not known in advance.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the benefits of using Python for various applications, such as data analysis, AI and machine learning, web development, and automation. Explain how Python’s features contribute to its popularity in these fields.
    2. Explain the significance of code readability and maintainability in software development. Discuss how tools like linters and formatters, along with adherence to style guides like Pep 8, contribute to these aspects of code quality.
    3. Describe the importance of variables and data types in programming. Provide examples of how different data types are used in Python and explain how type conversion functions help ensure data compatibility.
    4. Explain the purpose and usage of control flow statements (if statements, loops) in programming. Describe how these statements enable programs to make decisions and perform repetitive tasks.
    5. Discuss the benefits of using functions in programming. Explain how functions help organize code, promote reusability, and improve the overall structure and maintainability of programs.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • AI (Artificial Intelligence): The simulation of human intelligence processes by computer systems.
    • Argument: A value passed to a function when it is called.
    • Auto-completion: A feature in IDEs that suggests code completions as you type.
    • Boolean: A data type with two possible values: True or False.
    • Bytecode: Intermediate code produced by a compiler that is then executed by a virtual machine.
    • Cpython: The default and most widely used implementation of the Python programming language, written in C.
    • Data Analysis: The process of inspecting, cleaning, transforming, and modeling data to discover useful information, draw conclusions, and support decision-making.
    • Debugging: The process of finding and fixing errors in code.
    • Expression: A piece of code that produces a value.
    • Float: A data type representing a floating-point number (a number with a decimal point).
    • For Loop: A control flow statement that repeats a block of code for each item in a sequence.
    • Function: A reusable block of code that performs a specific task.
    • IDE (Integrated Development Environment): A software application that provides comprehensive facilities to computer programmers for software development.
    • If Statement: A control flow statement that executes a block of code if a specified condition is true.
    • Integer: A data type representing whole numbers.
    • Iterable: An object that can be looped over, such as a list, string, or range.
    • Library: A collection of pre-written code that provides reusable functions and classes for performing specific tasks.
    • Linting: The process of analyzing code for potential errors and stylistic issues.
    • Machine Learning: A type of artificial intelligence (AI) that provides computer systems with the ability to automatically learn and improve from experience without being explicitly programmed.
    • Module: A separate file containing Python code that can be imported and used in other programs.
    • Parameter: A variable defined in a function definition that receives a value when the function is called.
    • Pep 8: The style guide for Python code, outlining rules for formatting and styling.
    • Syntax: The set of rules that define the structure of a programming language.
    • Syntax Error: An error in code caused by violating the syntax rules of the language.
    • Tuple: An immutable sequence of objects, similar to a list but cannot be modified after creation.
    • Variable: A named storage location in a computer’s memory used to store data.
    • While Loop: A control flow statement that repeats a block of code as long as a specified condition is true.

    Complete Python Mastery: Course Overview

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key concepts and ideas from the provided text, focusing on the structure of a Python course and fundamental programming concepts:

    Briefing Document: Complete Python Mastery Course

    I. Overview

    The source material is an excerpt from the “Complete Python Mastery” course introduction, outlining the curriculum and key features of the course. The course promises a comprehensive journey from basic to advanced Python concepts, enabling confident application in areas like AI, machine learning, web development, and automation. It emphasizes a practical, easy-to-follow structure suitable for beginners with no prior programming experience.

    II. Key Themes & Ideas

    • Comprehensive Python Learning: The course covers a wide range of topics, aiming to equip students with the skills to use Python in diverse fields:
    • “In this course you’re going to learn everything about python from Basics to more advanced concepts so by the end of the course you’ll be able to confidently use Python for AI machine learning web development and automation”
    • Beginner-Friendly Approach: The course is explicitly designed for individuals with no prior programming knowledge, with step-by-step explanations.
    • “You don’t need any prior knowledge of python to get started I will explain everything step by step in simple terms so you can build a solid foundation”
    • Python’s Popularity and Versatility: The course highlights Python’s widespread adoption and its suitability for various applications.
    • “Python is the world’s fastest growing and most popular programming language not just amongst software developers but also amongst mathematicians data analysts scientists accountants Network engineers and even kids”
    • Advantages of Python: The reasons for Python’s popularity are outlined:
    • Conciseness and Readability: Python allows solving complex problems with fewer lines of code compared to languages like C or JavaScript.
    • Example code snippets are provided to illustrate this.
    • “With python you can solve complex problems in less time with fewer lines of code than many other languages”
    • Multi-purpose Language: Python can be used in different industries such as data analysis, AI and machine learning, writing automation scripts, building web, mobile, and desktop applications as well as software testing or even hacking.
    • High-level language Python takes care of memory management so you don’t have to worry about it like you do in C++
    • Cross-platform compatibility: Python runs on Windows, Mac, and Linux.
    • Large community and ecosystem: Extensive support and resources are available.
    • Career Opportunities: The course emphasizes the potential for high-paying careers, particularly in AI and machine learning.
    • “if you want a high-paying long lasting career in any of these areas especially Ai and machine learning python is the language to put those opportunities at your fingertips”
    • Cites a statistic regarding the average salary of a Python developer.
    • Python 3 Focus: The course teaches Python 3, the current and future version of the language.
    • “There are two versions of python out there python 2 which is the Legacy version of python and is going to be supported until year 2020 and Python 3 which is python for the future in this course you’re going to Learn Python 3”
    • Course Structure: The course guides learners through installation, basic syntax, and using code editors (specifically VS Code) and IDEs.
    • VS Code and Extensions: The course uses VS Code as the primary code editor and demonstrates how to enhance it with the Python extension for features like linting, debugging, auto-completion, and code formatting.
    • “In this lecture I’m going to show you how to convert vs code to a powerful IDE by using an extension called python with this extension or plug-in we get a number of features such as linting which basically means analyzing our code for potential errors we also get debugging which involves finding and fixing errors we’ll look at this later in the course we also get autoc completion which basically helps us write code faster so we don’t have to type every character”
    • Coding style guidelines (PEP 8): The course emphasizes the use of the style guide to maintain cleaner code and automatically formats the code by using AutoPep8.
    • “in Python Community we have a bunch of documents called python enhancement proposals or peps here on Google if you search for python peps you can see the list of all these PS under python.org sdev peps let’s have a quick look here so here are the peps you can see each pep has a number and a title the one that is very popular amongst python developers is Pep 8 which is a style guide for python code a style guide is basically a document that defines a bunch of rules for formatting and styling our code if you follow these conventions the code that you right will end up being consistent with other people’s code”
    • CPython execution: The course describes that CPython compiles Python into Python Byte code then passes the Byte code to the Python virtual machine to be converted into machine code and executed.

    III. Fundamental Concepts Covered (Excerpt)

    • Variables: Used to store data in computer memory. Examples given include integers, floats, booleans and strings.
    • “we use variables to store data in computer’s memory here are a few examples I’m going to Define a variable called students underline count and setting it to a th000”
    • Data Types: Introduction to primitive data types (integers, floats, booleans, and strings) and type conversion.
    • “primitive types can be numbers booleans and strings”
    • “In Python we have a few built-in functions for type conversion we have int for converting a number to an integer we have float we have bull and stir or string”
    • String Manipulation: Demonstrates string slicing, escaping characters, formatted strings, and built-in string methods (e.g., len(), upper(), lower(), strip(), find(), replace(), in).
    • “using a similar syntax you can slice strings”
    • “I’m going to show you a few useful functions available to work with strings”
    • Arithmetic Operations: Covers basic arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /, %, **) and augmented assignment operators (+=, -=, etc.).
    • “for all these types of numbers we have the standard arithmetic operations that we have in math let me show you so we have addition subtraction multiplication division but we actually have two different types of divisions”
    • User Input: Using the input() function to get input from the user and convert it to the correct type.
    • “we use the input function to get input from the user as an argument we pass a string this will be a label that will be displayed in the terminal you’ll see that in a second so let’s add X colon now this function returns a string”
    • Comparison Operators: Used to compare values to form a boolean expression.
    • “we use comparison operators to compare values here are a few examples so 10 is greater than three we get true so what we have here is a Boolean expression because when this expression is evaluated we’ll get a Boolean value that is true or false”
    • Conditional Statements: Demonstrate if, elif, and else statements for decision-making, along with the use of logical operators (and, or, not).
    • “in almost every program there are times you need to make decisions and that’s when you use use an if statement here’s an example let’s say we have a variable called temperature we set it to 35 now if temperature is greater than 30 perhaps we want to display a message to the user”
    • Loops: Explain for and while loops for repetition, including the range() function, break statement, and for…else construct.
    • “there are times that we may want to repeat a task a number of times for example let’s say we send a message to a user if that message cannot be delivered perhaps we want to retry three times now for Simplicity let’s imagine this print statement is equivalent to sending a message in a real world program to send a message to a user we have to write five to 10 lines of code now if you want to retry three times we don’t want to repeat all that code that is ugly that’s when we use a loop we use Loops to create repetition”
    • Functions: Defining custom functions, passing parameters (arguments), returning values, optional parameters, and variable number of arguments using *args.
    • “so far you have learned how to use some of the built-in functions in Python such as print round and so on in this section you’re going to learn how to write your own functions now you might ask but why do we even need to write our own functions well when you build a real program that program is going to consist hundreds or thousands of lines of code you shouldn’t write all that code in one file like we have done so far you should break that code into a smaller more maintainable and potentially more reusable chunks you refer to these chunks as functions”

    IV. Target Audience

    The target audience is individuals with no prior Python or programming experience seeking a comprehensive and practical understanding of Python.

    V. Overall Impression

    The “Complete Python Mastery” course appears to be a well-structured and beginner-friendly resource for learning Python, emphasizing practical application and best practices.

    Python Programming: Frequently Asked Questions

    Frequently Asked Questions About Python Programming

    1. Why should I learn Python, especially if I’m new to programming?

    Python is an excellent choice for beginners due to its clean, simple syntax, making it highly readable and easier to learn than many other languages. It’s versatile, suitable for various applications like data analysis, AI, machine learning, web development, and automation. Its large and active community provides ample support and resources, and Python’s high-level nature simplifies tasks like memory management, allowing you to focus on problem-solving. Big companies like Google and Spotify use it, meaning high-paying job opportunities are abundant.

    2. What are the key advantages of Python over other programming languages?

    Python stands out for several reasons. Its code is concise, enabling you to solve complex problems with fewer lines compared to languages like C or Java. It’s a multi-purpose language suitable for data analysis, AI, machine learning, scripting, web development, and more. Python is also cross-platform, running seamlessly on Windows, Mac, and Linux. It has a massive community that provides great support, with vast libraries and tools available for almost any task. Its high-level nature abstracts away complexities like memory management.

    3. How do I get started with Python on my computer?

    First, download the latest version of Python from python.org. When installing on Windows, be sure to check the box that says “Add Python to PATH.” This step is critical to avoid headaches later. To verify installation, open your terminal (or command prompt on Windows) and type python –version (or python3 –version on Mac) to confirm that Python is correctly installed.

    4. What tools do I need to write and run Python code effectively?

    You have two primary options: code editors or Integrated Development Environments (IDEs). Code editors like VS Code, Atom, and Sublime are lightweight and excellent for general coding. IDEs like PyCharm offer advanced features such as auto-completion, debugging, and testing tools. VS Code can be transformed into a powerful IDE by installing the Python extension from Microsoft.

    5. How can I use VS Code effectively for Python development?

    Install the official Python extension from Microsoft in VS Code. This extension provides features like linting (code analysis for errors), debugging, auto-completion, code formatting, unit testing support, and code snippets. Enable “format on save” in VS Code’s settings for automatic code formatting according to PEP 8 style guidelines. Also, learn to use the command palette (Shift+Command+P or Shift+Ctrl+P) for accessing various commands related to the Python extension, including linting options.

    6. What are variables in Python, and what types of data can they store?

    Variables are used to store data in a computer’s memory, acting as labels for memory locations. Python has built-in primitive data types:

    • Integers: Whole numbers (e.g., 1000)
    • Floats: Numbers with decimal points (e.g., 4.99)
    • Booleans: True or False values used for decision-making
    • Strings: Text surrounded by quotes (e.g., “Python Programming”)

    7. What are functions in Python and how are they created?

    Functions are reusable blocks of code designed to perform specific tasks. They are created using the def keyword, followed by the function name, parentheses for parameters (inputs), and a colon. The code within the function is indented. Functions can either perform a task (e.g., printing something to the console) or calculate and return a value.

    Example:

    def greet(first_name, last_name):

    “””Greets a person by their full name.”””

    return f”Hi {first_name} {last_name}”

    message = greet(“Mosh”, “Hamedani”)

    print(message)

    8. How do loops work in Python, and what are the differences between for and while loops?

    Loops allow you to repeat a block of code multiple times.

    • for loops: Iterate over iterable objects like ranges, strings, or lists.
    • for number in range(5):
    • print(number) # Prints numbers 0 to 4
    • while loops: Repeat a block of code as long as a specified condition remains true.

    number = 100

    while number > 0:

    print(number)

    number //= 2 # Integer division by 2

    `break` statements can be used to exit a loop prematurely.

    Python Programming: A Concise Introduction

    Python is a popular programming language used for various purposes, including AI, machine learning, web development, and automation. Here are some of its basic concepts:

    • Clean and Simple Syntax: Python allows complex problems to be solved with fewer lines of code compared to other languages like C or JavaScript.
    • Multi-purpose Language: Python can be used for data analysis, AI, machine learning, automation, web, mobile, and desktop applications, software testing, and even hacking.
    • High-Level Language: Python handles memory management automatically.
    • Cross-Platform: Python applications can run on Windows, Mac, and Linux.
    • Large Community and Ecosystem: Python has a broad support network and many libraries, frameworks, and tools.

    Setting up Python

    1. Installation: Download the latest version of Python from python.org. On Windows, ensure you check the “Add Python to PATH” box during installation.
    2. Verification: Open a terminal and type python –version (or python3 –version on Mac) to verify the installation.

    Basic Concepts

    • Interpreter: Python code is executed by an interpreter, which can run code directly from an interactive shell or from a file.
    • Expressions: Expressions are pieces of code that produce a value (e.g., 2 + 2).
    • Syntax: Python has a specific grammar, and syntax errors occur when the code doesn’t follow this grammar.

    Code Editors and IDEs

    • Code Editors: VS Code, Atom, and Sublime are popular code editors.
    • IDEs: PyCharm is a popular Integrated Development Environment that offers features like auto-completion, debugging, and testing.
    • VS Code with Python Extension: VS Code can be converted into an IDE by installing the Python extension from Microsoft. This extension provides features like linting, debugging, auto-completion, code formatting, unit testing, and code snippets.

    Writing and Running Python Code

    1. Create a File: Create a new file with a .py extension (e.g., app.py).
    2. Write Code: Use the print() function to display text on the screen.
    3. Run Code: Open the integrated terminal in VS Code (using Ctrl +) and type python app.py (or python3 app.py on Mac/Linux).
    4. VS Code Extension: The Python extension adds a play button to run code directly.

    Code Formatting

    • Linting: Linting analyzes code for potential errors. The Python extension in VS Code uses a linter called Pylint by default.
    • PEP 8: This is a style guide for Python code that promotes consistency.
    • Auto-formatting: Tools like AutoPep8 can automatically format code according to PEP 8. VS Code can be configured to format files on save by enabling the editor.formatOnSave setting.

    Python Implementations

    • CPython: The default implementation of Python, written in C.
    • Jython: Implemented in Java, allowing the use of Java code in Python programs.
    • IronPython: Written in C#, useful for integrating C# code with Python.
    • Execution: CPython first compiles Python code into Python byte code, which is then executed by the Python Virtual Machine. Jython compiles Python code into Java byte code, which is executed by the Java Virtual Machine (JVM).

    Variables and Data Types

    • Variables: Used to store data in the computer’s memory. A variable is like a label for a memory location.
    • Naming Conventions: Use descriptive and meaningful names, lowercase letters, and underscores to separate words.
    • Primitive Types:
    • Integers: Whole numbers (e.g., 1000).
    • Floats: Numbers with a decimal point (e.g., 4.99).
    • Booleans: True or False values (case-sensitive).
    • Strings: Text surrounded by quotes (e.g., “Python Programming”).
    • Strings:
    • Can be defined using single, double, or triple quotes. Triple quotes are used for multi-line strings.
    • len() function: Returns the length of a string.
    • Square brackets: Used to access specific characters in a string. Strings are zero-indexed.
    • Slicing: Extract portions of a string using [start:end] notation.
    • Escape Sequences: Use backslashes to include special characters in strings (e.g., \, \n, \”).
    • Formatted Strings: Prefix a string with f and use curly braces to embed expressions (e.g., f”Result: {2 + 2}”).
    • String Methods: Functions specific to string objects. Accessed using dot notation (e.g., course.upper()). Common methods include upper(), lower(), title(), strip(), find(), and replace().
    • in Operator: Checks for the existence of a character or sequence of characters in a string (returns a Boolean value).
    • Numbers:
    • Types: Integers, floats, and complex numbers. Complex numbers are written in the form a + bj.
    • Arithmetic Operators: +, -, *, / (float division), // (integer division), % (modulus), ** (exponentiation).
    • Augmented Assignment Operators: Shorthand for updating a variable (e.g., x += 3 is equivalent to x = x + 3).
    • Built-in Functions: round() (rounds a number), abs() (returns the absolute value).
    • Math Module: Provides additional mathematical functions. Import the module using import math. Common functions include math.ceil().
    • Input:
    • input() function: Gets input from the user. The input is always returned as a string.
    • Type Conversion: Use int(), float(), bool(), and str() to convert between data types.
    • Truthy and Falsy Values: Values that are not exactly True or False but are interpreted as such. Falsy values include empty strings, zero, and the object None.

    Operators

    • Comparison Operators: Used to compare values. Examples include >, >=, <, <=, == (equality), and != (not equal).
    • Logical Operators: and, or, and not. Used to create complex conditions. These operators are short circuit.
    • Chaining Comparison Operators: A cleaner way to write complex comparisons (e.g., 18 <= age < 65).

    Conditional Statements

    • If Statements: Used to make decisions based on conditions. Terminate the if statement with a colon (:). Use indentation to define the block of code to be executed.
    • Elif Statements: Short for “else if,” used to check multiple conditions.
    • Else Statements: Executed if none of the previous conditions are true.
    • Ternary Operator: A shorthand for simple if-else assignments (e.g., message = “eligible” if age >= 18 else “not eligible”).

    Loops

    • For Loops: Used to iterate over a sequence (e.g., a range of numbers, a string, or a list).
    • Range Function: Generates a sequence of numbers. range(start, end, step).
    • Break Statement: Used to exit a loop early.
    • For-Else Statement: The else block is executed if the loop completes without hitting a break statement.
    • Nested Loops: One loop inside another.
    • Iterable Objects: Objects that can be iterated over (e.g., range objects, strings, lists).
    • While Loops: Used to repeat a block of code as long as a condition is true.
    • Infinite Loops: Loops that run forever. Ensure there is a way to exit the loop (e.g., using a break statement).

    Functions

    • Definition: Use the def keyword to define a function. Follow naming conventions similar to variables.
    • Parameters: Inputs to a function, defined in the parentheses.
    • Arguments: The actual values passed to a function when it is called.
    • Calling a Function: Use the function name followed by parentheses.
    • Return Statement: Used to return a value from a function. If no return statement is used, the function returns None by default.
    • Keyword Arguments: Improve code readability by explicitly specifying the parameter name when calling a function (e.g., increment(2, by=1)).
    • Optional Parameters: Give a parameter a default value to make it optional (e.g., def increment(number, by=1)). Optional parameters must come after required parameters.
    • Variable Number of Arguments: Use an asterisk (*) to collect a variable number of positional arguments into a tuple.

    Python Fundamentals for AI and Machine Learning

    The sources provided focus on the fundamentals of Python programming and do not contain specific information about machine learning. However, they do establish that Python is a language used for AI and machine learning.

    The course aims to equip learners to use Python confidently for AI and machine learning, along with web development and automation. Furthermore, a long-lasting career with high pay is available in AI and machine learning for those who learn Python.

    Beyond what is in the sources, it is important to note that machine learning involves algorithms that enable computers to learn from data without explicit programming. Since the sources do not elaborate, it would be best to independently verify that information.

    Python for Web Development

    The provided source material does not offer specifics on web development. However, it does identify web development as one of the applications for Python. The course outlined in the source aims to equip learners to confidently use Python for web development, along with AI, machine learning, and automation.

    Outside of the provided sources, it is important to note that web development typically involves creating websites and web applications using a combination of front-end and back-end technologies, but since the source does not elaborate, it would be best to independently verify that information.

    Python for Code Automation

    The sources identify code automation as one of the applications of Python. The course is designed to equip learners to confidently use Python for automation, along with AI, machine learning, and web development.

    Outside of the provided sources, it is important to note that code automation involves using programming to automate repetitive tasks. However, since the sources do not elaborate, it would be best to independently verify that information.

    Understanding Python Function Arguments

    Here’s a discussion of function arguments, based on the sources:

    • Parameters vs. Arguments: A parameter is an input defined within a function’s definition, while an argument is the actual value provided for that parameter when the function is called.
    • Required Arguments: By default, all parameters defined in a function are required. If a required argument is missing when the function is called, Python will raise a TypeError.
    • Keyword Arguments: When calling a function, you can specify arguments using the parameter name, which can improve code readability. For example, increment(2, by=1) uses a keyword argument to specify the value for the by parameter.
    • Optional Parameters: To make a parameter optional, provide a default value in the function definition. For example, def increment(number, by=1) makes the by parameter optional with a default value of 1. If the caller omits the argument, the default value is used; otherwise, the provided value is used. All optional parameters must come after the required parameters in the function definition.
    • Variable Number of Arguments: You can define a function to accept a variable number of arguments using an asterisk (*) before the parameter name. This collects all positional arguments into a tuple, which can then be iterated over within the function. For example:
    • def multiply(*numbers):
    • total = 1
    • for number in numbers:
    • total *= number
    • return total
    • result = multiply(2, 3, 4, 5) # result will be 120
    Python Full Course for Beginners [2025]

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Python Tutorial with Generative AI

    Python Tutorial with Generative AI

    This Python tutorial PDF covers fundamental programming concepts, including data structures (lists, tuples, dictionaries), file handling (reading, writing, appending), exception handling (try-except-else-finally blocks), object-oriented programming (classes and inheritance), and basic algorithms (sorting, searching). The tutorial also introduces NumPy arrays and data visualization using Matplotlib and Seaborn. Finally, it explores the creation of simple GUI applications with Tkinter and integrates open AI’s GPT API with Flask for chatbot functionality and Langchain for personalized story generation.

    Python Study Guide

    Quiz

    Instructions: Answer each question in 2-3 sentences.

    1. What is a kernel in the context of Jupyter Notebook?
    2. Explain the difference between the single equal to (=) and the double equal to (==) operators in Python.
    3. What are the basic Python tokens?
    4. What are literals in Python, and give an example?
    5. How do you create a multi-line string in Python?
    6. Explain the difference between the append() and pop() list methods.
    7. What is the main difference between a list and a tuple in Python?
    8. How are key-value pairs stored in a Python dictionary?
    9. Describe the use of if, elif, and else statements in Python.
    10. Explain how a for loop works in Python with an example using a list.

    Quiz – Answer Key

    1. A kernel is the executor of Python code in Jupyter Notebook. When you write code and click “run,” the kernel interprets and runs the code, displaying the output.
    2. The single equal to (=) operator is used for assignment, giving a value to a variable, while the double equal to (==) operator is used for comparison, checking if two values are equal.
    3. The basic Python tokens are keywords (reserved words), identifiers (names for variables, functions, or objects), literals (constants), and operators (symbols for operations).
    4. Literals are constant values in Python that do not change, such as numbers, strings, or boolean values. For example, 10, “hello”, and True are literals.
    5. You create a multi-line string in Python by enclosing the string within triple quotes, which can be either single quotes (”’) or double quotes (“””).
    6. The append() method adds an element to the end of a list, while the pop() method removes and returns the last element of a list, modifying the original list.
    7. Both lists and tuples are ordered collections of elements, but lists are mutable, meaning their contents can be changed after creation, while tuples are immutable and their contents cannot be modified.
    8. In a Python dictionary, key-value pairs are stored using curly braces {} with a colon separating each key from its value, like {“key”: “value”}.
    9. The if statement starts a conditional block based on a condition; elif introduces more conditional blocks to check if the previous if or elif conditions were false; and else executes if none of the preceding if or elif conditions were true.
    10. A for loop iterates over each item in a sequence, such as a list, executing a block of code for each item. For example, for fruit in fruits: print(fruit) would print each element in the fruits list.

    Essay Questions

    1. Compare and contrast lists, tuples, and dictionaries in Python, highlighting their mutability, ordering, and use cases. Provide code examples to illustrate each data structure.
    2. Discuss the different types of operators in Python, providing examples of how each is used. Focus on arithmetic, relational, and logical operators, and how they are utilized in decision-making statements.
    3. Explain the significance of file handling in Python, describing the different modes for opening files (read, write, append). Describe how to read, write, and modify text files, and also discuss how to handle potential errors using try-except blocks.
    4. Describe the concept of looping in Python using both for and while loops. Provide examples that demonstrate how these loops can be used to process lists, and illustrate the utility of nested loops, and include an example showing how to apply a loop to dictionaries.
    5. Discuss the core concepts of the following Python libraries: NumPy, Pandas, Matplotlib, and Seaborn. Explain their primary purposes, how they are used to manipulate, analyze, and visualize data, and offer practical examples of the kind of work they can be used to accomplish.

    Glossary

    Alias: A shorter name given to a library or module when importing it, e.g., import numpy as np uses “np” as an alias for the NumPy library.

    Append (list method): A method used to add an element to the end of a list.

    Arithmetic Operators: Symbols used to perform mathematical calculations such as addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), and division (/).

    Axis (NumPy): A dimension in a multi-dimensional array used to specify operations like summing along rows or columns, where axis 0 is for columns, and axis 1 is for rows.

    Boolean: A data type that has one of two possible values, true or false.

    Box Plot (Seaborn): A type of plot used to visualize the distribution of a dataset through quartiles.

    CBOR (Seaborn): A Python library used to create statistical graphics. It extends Matplotlib and offers a high-level interface for drawing attractive informative plots.

    Column Stack (NumPy): A function used to combine multiple arrays together column-wise.

    Data Frame (Pandas): A two-dimensional, labeled data structure in Pandas with rows and columns, similar to a spreadsheet or a SQL table.

    Dictionary: A Python data structure that stores key-value pairs enclosed in curly braces {}.

    Distribution Plot (Seaborn): A plot that shows the distribution of a single variable using a histogram and a density curve (KDE).

    Else (conditional statement): A block of code that executes only if the previous if or elif conditions are false.

    Elif (conditional statement): An intermediate conditional block that checks if the previous if condition is false before checking if the elif statement is true.

    Exception Handling: The process of anticipating errors and preventing them from crashing a program using try-except blocks.

    File Handling: The process of interacting with files, including opening, reading from, writing to, and closing them.

    Flask: A lightweight Python web framework used for building web applications.

    For Loop: A control flow statement used to iterate over a sequence (like a list, tuple, or string), executing a code block for each item.

    Grid (Matplotlib): A method used to add grid lines to a graph.

    Horizontal Stack (NumPy): A function used to stack arrays side by side horizontally.

    Identifier: A name used to identify a variable, function, class, or other objects in Python.

    If (conditional statement): A control flow statement used to execute a block of code only if a specified condition is true.

    Immutable: An object that cannot be changed after it is created, like a tuple.

    Join Plot (Seaborn): A type of plot that displays the relationship between two variables along with their marginal distributions.

    Jupyter Notebook: An interactive web-based environment for writing and running code, often used for data analysis.

    Kernel (Jupyter): The process that runs your code in a Jupyter Notebook.

    Keyword: A reserved word in Python with a predefined meaning that cannot be used as an identifier.

    Line Plot (Matplotlib/Seaborn): A type of plot that displays information as a series of data points connected by straight line segments.

    List: A mutable, ordered collection of elements in Python, enclosed in square brackets [].

    Literals: Constant values in Python, such as numbers, strings, boolean values.

    Logical Operators: Symbols used for logical comparisons, such as and, or, and not.

    Looping Statements: Control flow statements that execute a block of code repeatedly until a condition is met, including for and while loops.

    Matplotlib: A widely used Python library for creating static, interactive, and animated visualizations.

    Mean (NumPy/Pandas): A function that calculates the average of a set of values.

    Median (NumPy/Pandas): A function that calculates the middle value in a sorted dataset.

    Mode (file handling): Specifies how a file should be opened, such as read (‘r’), write (‘w’), or append (‘a’).

    Multi-dimensional Array (NumPy): An array with more than one dimension, also known as a matrix.

    Mutable: An object that can be changed after it is created, like a list or dictionary.

    Numpy: A core library for numeric and scientific computing in Python, providing support for multi-dimensional arrays and mathematical operations.

    Operators: Symbols used for performing operations, such as arithmetic, relational, or logical operations.

    Pandas: A Python library that provides powerful and easy-to-use data structures and data analysis tools, notably DataFrames and Series.

    Pop (list method): A method used to remove the last element from a list.

    PyCharm: An Integrated Development Environment (IDE) used for coding in Python.

    Relational Operators: Symbols used to compare the relationship between two operands, such as less than (<), greater than (>), equal to (==), or not equal to (!=).

    Replace (string method): A method used to find a specified substring within a string and replaces it with another substring.

    Scatter Plot (Matplotlib): A type of plot that displays the relationship between two numerical values by using points on a cartesian plane.

    Seaborn: A Python visualization library built on top of Matplotlib that provides a higher-level interface for statistical graphics.

    Series (Pandas): A one-dimensional labeled array in Pandas.

    Shape (NumPy): The dimensions of a numpy array.

    Split (string method): A method used to divide a string into a list of substrings based on a split criterion.

    Stacking (NumPy): Combining multiple arrays, either vertically (one array on top of another), horizontally (side by side), or column-wise.

    Standard Deviation (NumPy): Measures the amount of variation or dispersion of data in a dataset.

    Streamlit: An open-source Python library that makes it easy to create custom web apps for machine learning and data science.

    String: A sequence of characters enclosed within single, double, or triple quotes.

    Subplot (Matplotlib): A method to create multiple plots within a single figure.

    Tokens (Python): The smallest meaningful component of a Python program, such as keywords, identifiers, literals, and operators.

    Triple Quotes: Used in Python to create multi-line strings, enclosed in either single or double quotes.

    Tuple: An immutable, ordered collection of elements enclosed in parentheses ().

    Type Casting: Explicitly converting data from one type to another like changing a string into a number.

    Vertical Stack (NumPy): A function used to stack arrays one on top of the other.

    While Loop: A control flow statement used to repeatedly execute a block of code as long as a condition is true.

    Python Tutorial Deep Dive

    Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the main themes and important ideas from the provided Python tutorial excerpts.

    Briefing Document: Python Tutorial Review

    Document: Excerpts from “749-Python Tutorial with Gen AI for 2024 Python for Beginners Python full course 02.pdf”

    Date: October 25, 2024

    Overview:

    This document summarizes key concepts and functionalities of the Python programming language, as presented in the provided tutorial excerpts. The tutorial covers a range of fundamental topics, from basic syntax and data types to more advanced concepts such as control flow, file handling, and data manipulation with libraries like NumPy, Pandas, Matplotlib and Seaborn. This document will review the major topics covered, including code snippets and quotes to support the summarization.

    Key Themes & Concepts:

    1. Basic Python Setup & First Program
    • Jupyter Notebook: The tutorial uses Jupyter Notebook as the development environment. The document shows how to:
    • Save files as HTML or Latex documents
    • Rename notebooks.
    • Add and delete cells
    • Run cells.
    • The “kernel” as the program executor is introduced as well.
    • print() function: The tutorial begins with a basic “Hello World” style program, printing “This is Sparta” to the console using the print() function.
    • “to print something out on the console we would have to use the print command”
    1. Fundamental Data Types & Operators
    • Variables: Shows how to create and assign values to variables (e.g., num1 = 10, num2 = 20).
    • Arithmetic Operators: The tutorial goes through basic arithmetic operations:
    • Addition (+): “if you want to add two numbers you have to use the plus symbol between those two operant”
    • Subtraction (-)
    • Multiplication (*)
    • Division (/)
    • Relational Operators: The tutorial introduces relational operators for comparing values:
    • Less than (<)
    • Greater than (>)
    • Equal to (==): “this is the double equal to operator…helps us to understand if these two values if the operant on the left hand side and the operant on the right hand side are equal to each other or not”
    • Not equal to (!=)
    • Logical Operators: The tutorial explains logical operators such as:
    • and: Returns True if both operands are true.
    • or: Returns True if at least one of the operands is true.
    • Tokens: The tutorial defines Python tokens as the smallest meaningful components in a program.
    • Includes keywords, identifiers, literals, and operators.
    • Keywords: Reserved words that cannot be used for any other purpose (e.g., if, def, while).
    • “python keywords as it is stated are special reserved words…you can’t use these special reserved words for any other purpose”
    • Identifiers: Names given to variables, functions, or objects. There are specific rules for identifiers, like:
    • Can not have special characters except underscores
    • Are case sensitive
    • Can not start with a digit
    • Literals: Constants or the values stored in variables.
    • “literals are just the constants in python…whatever values you are storing inside a variable that is called as a literal”
    1. Strings in Python
    • String Declaration: Strings are sequences of characters enclosed in single, double, or triple quotes.
    • “strings are basically sequence of characters which are enclosed within single quotes double quotes or triple quotes”
    • String Methods: Common string manipulation methods covered include:
    • len(): Returns the length of a string.
    • lower(): Converts a string to lowercase.
    • upper(): Converts a string to uppercase.
    • replace(): Replaces a substring with another.
    • count(): Counts the number of occurrences of a substring.
    • find(): Returns the starting index of a substring.
    • split(): Splits a string into a list of substrings based on a delimiter.
    1. Data Structures: Lists, Tuples and Dictionaries
    • Lists: Ordered, mutable collections of elements enclosed in square brackets []. Lists can be modified after creation.
    • Access elements by index (starting from 0).
    • Extract slices (subsets of the list)
    • Modify elements, add elements using append(), and remove elements using pop()
    • Tuples: Ordered, immutable collections of elements enclosed in parentheses (). Tuples cannot be modified after creation.
    • Access elements by index.
    • Extract slices (subsets of the tuple)
    • Min and Max functions can be used for numerical tuples.
    • Dictionaries: Unordered collections of key-value pairs enclosed in curly braces {}. Dictionaries are mutable.
    • “dictionary is an unordered collection of key value pairs enclosed within curly braces and a dictionary again is mutable”
    • Access values by key.
    • Extract keys using keys() and values using values().
    • Add or modify key-value pairs.
    • Remove elements using pop().
    • Can merge dictionaries using update()
    1. Control Flow: Decision Making (if/else) & Looping
    • if/else/elif statements: Used for conditional execution of code blocks based on given conditions. Examples with comparisons, tuples, lists, and dictionaries are presented.
    • “decision making statements would help us to make a decision on the basis of a condition”
    • “with the help of this [if/elif/else] we can compare multiple variables together or we can have multiple conditions together”
    • for Loops: Used to iterate over a sequence (like a list). The examples include nested for loops.
    • “for loop… would help me to pick a color…inner for loop…would help me to choose an item”
    • while Loops: Used to repeatedly execute a code block as long as a condition remains true. Examples include printing numbers and multiplication tables, and manipulating list elements.
    • “while again would help us to repeat a particular task and this task is repeated on the basis of a condition”
    1. File Handling
    • File Modes: Explains the different modes for opening files:
    • r: Read mode.
    • w: Write mode (creates a new file or overwrites an existing one).
    • a: Append mode (adds to the end of a file).
    • File Operations: Shows how to:
    • Open a file using the open() function.
    • Read the contents using read(), readline() and readlines() function.
    • Write to a file using the write() function.
    • Append to a file.
    • Close a file using the close() function.
    • Length of File Content Using Len()”the length one is used for calculating that basically how many characters you are happen here”
    1. Exception Handling
    • try, except, else, finally: Explain the use of these blocks for handling errors and executing code in all cases.
    • “whenever you are having no error into your program so your try block actually gets executed and when you are having any error in your program so your accept statement gets executed”
    • “whenever you do not have any exception into your program after the execution of the try block you want one more statement to get printed…in that case we simply use out this else clause”
    • “finally is a keyword that would execute either you are having an exception in your program or you are not having an exception in your program”
    1. Implementation of Stack using List, Deque and Queue module
    • Stack using list: Stacks can be implemented using lists. The tutorial demonstrated the use of append() to add elements and pop() to remove elements, and explained last in first out (LIFO) behavior.
    • Stack using Deque: Double-ended queue data structure allows faster append and pop operations.
    • Stack using Queue module: Shows the use of put() to add elements and get() to remove elements, and explained last in first out (LIFO) behavior.
    1. Data Analysis and Visualization
    • NumPy:NumPy arrays can be created using np.array().
    • Multi-dimensional arrays can be created.
    • The shape attribute can be used to determine the dimensions and to reshape arrays.
    • Vertical, horizontal, and column stacking methods (vstack(), hstack(), column_stack()).
    • Summation can be performed using np.sum(), both with default behavior and with an axis attribute for column-wise or row-wise summation.
    • Scalar addition, multiplication, subtraction, and division on NumPy arrays.
    • Mathematical functions on arrays such as mean, median, and standard deviation (np.mean(), np.median(), np.std()).
    • Pandas * Series can be created using pd.Series().
    • DataFrames can be created by reading CSV files using pd.read_csv().
    • The shape attribute shows the dimension of a DataFrames. *The describe() method provides descriptive statistics of numeric columns.
    • Access rows and columns using .iloc and .loc indexers, and through column names.
    • Remove columns using drop().
    • Mathematical functions on DataFrames such as mean, median, min and max(mean(), median(), min(), max()).
    • MatplotlibLine plots are created using plt.plot() and customized with attributes such as color, line style and line width.
    • Titles, axis labels and grids are added using methods like plt.title(), plt.xlabel(), plt.ylabel() and plt.grid().
    • Multiple plots and subplots are created.
    • Scatter plots are created using plt.scatter() and markers, colors and sizes can be set.
    • Seabornlineplot() can be used to create line plots between columns of a DataFrames.
    • displot() creates distribution plots.
    • jointplot() can be used to visualize the relationship between two variables using scatter and histograms.
    • boxplot() creates box plots to visualize the distribution of numerical data across categories.
    1. Development Environment Setup
    • Command Prompt Used to install python libraries via pip install
    • Library Installation Libraries like NumPy, Flask and Streamlet are installed through the pip command. The commands, and the way the console behaves when a package is new, vs when a package already exists are demonstrated.
    1. GUI Development
    • Tkinter: The Tkinter module, a standard GUI toolkit for Python, is discussed.
    • Window Creation: How to create a basic window, and the use of the window attribute, background color (bg) and border width (bd).
    • ListBox Creation: Creation of a ListBox with tk.ListBox
    • Item insertion and removal Adding of items in a list using insert() function and looping, and removal using delete().

    Conclusion:

    The tutorial excerpts provide a comprehensive overview of Python’s fundamental concepts and key libraries. It introduces Python’s basic syntax, various data structures, control flow mechanisms, and fundamental libraries for file handling, data analysis and visualization and GUI creation. The tutorial utilizes a hands-on, example-driven approach, making it ideal for beginners learning Python. The inclusion of code snippets and explanations helps to solidify understanding. It is a good foundation for continued learning of more advanced Python topics.

    Essential Python Programming Concepts

    FAQ

    1. What is a kernel in the context of Python programming, particularly when using a Jupyter notebook?

    A kernel is essentially the executor of your Python code in a Jupyter Notebook environment. When you write a piece of code and want to run it, the kernel is what actually processes and executes that code. You can think of it as the engine that brings your Python code to life, producing results that you can see in the notebook.

    2. How are basic arithmetic operations performed in Python?

    Python uses standard symbols for arithmetic operations. Addition is done with the + symbol, subtraction with -, multiplication with *, and division with /. These operators are placed between two operands, and the interpreter will carry out the specified calculation. For example, num1 + num2 will add the values stored in the variables num1 and num2.

    3. What are relational operators and how are they used in Python?

    Relational operators in Python are used to compare the values of two operands. They help determine if one value is less than, greater than, equal to, or not equal to another. The less than operator is <, greater than is >, equal to is ==, and not equal to is !=. These operators return a boolean value (True or False) based on the comparison result.

    4. What are Python tokens, and what are some of the basic types?

    Python tokens are the smallest meaningful components of a Python program. When combined, they form the executable code. The basic types of tokens include: keywords (reserved words with specific meanings like if, def, while), identifiers (names given to variables, functions, or objects), literals (constant values like numbers or strings), and operators (symbols used for calculations or comparisons).

    5. How can strings be defined and manipulated in Python?

    Strings in Python are sequences of characters enclosed in single quotes, double quotes, or triple quotes (for multi-line strings). Python provides various methods for string manipulation. lower() and upper() convert strings to lowercase or uppercase respectively. len() finds the length of a string. replace() replaces parts of a string. count() counts the occurrences of a substring. find() locates the starting index of a substring, and split() divides a string into substrings based on a delimiter.

    6. What are lists in Python, and how do they differ from tuples?

    Lists in Python are ordered collections of elements, enclosed in square brackets ([]). They are mutable, meaning their elements can be changed after the list is created. Lists support various operations, including adding elements (append()), removing elements (pop()), accessing elements by index, and modifying existing elements. Tuples, on the other hand, are similar to lists but are immutable and are enclosed in round parentheses ().

    7. What are dictionaries in Python, and how are they used?

    Dictionaries in Python are unordered collections of key-value pairs, enclosed in curly braces ({}). Each key in a dictionary must be unique and immutable (e.g., strings, numbers, tuples), and it maps to a corresponding value. Dictionaries are mutable and allow for adding, modifying, and removing key-value pairs. They can be accessed using the key, and various methods exist for extracting keys (keys()) and values (values()).

    8. How are decision-making (if-else) and looping (for, while) statements implemented in Python?

    Decision-making in Python is implemented using if, elif (else if), and else statements, which enable conditional execution of code based on whether a specific condition is true or false. Looping statements allow for the repetition of a task. The for loop is used to iterate over a sequence of items (such as a list or string) a certain number of times, while the while loop is used to repeat a task as long as a specific condition remains true. Both types of loops allow for controlled repetition of code.

    Python Lists: A Comprehensive Guide

    Python lists are ordered collections of elements enclosed within square brackets [1, 2]. Unlike tuples, which are immutable, lists are mutable, meaning their values can be changed after creation [1]. Lists can store elements of different types [3].

    Here’s a breakdown of key concepts and operations related to lists:

    • Creating a List: Lists are created using square brackets and can contain various data types [1, 3]:
    • L1 = [1, ‘e’, True]
    • L2 = [1, ‘a’, 2, ‘B’, 3, ‘C’]
    • Accessing Elements: Elements in a list are accessed using their index, starting from 0 [2]:
    • L1 will extract the first element (1) [2].
    • L1[4] will extract the second element (‘e’) [2].
    • L2[-1] will extract the last element (‘C’) [5].
    • Slicing can be used to extract a series of elements [2]: L2[2:5] will extract elements from index 2 up to (but not including) index 5, resulting in [2, ‘B’, 3] [2, 5].
    • Modifying Lists:
    • Changing values: Existing values in a list can be changed by assigning a new value to a specific index [5]:
    • L2 = 100 # Changes the value at index 0 from 1 to 100
    • Appending elements: New elements can be added to the end of a list using the append() method [5]:
    • L1.append(‘Sparta’) # Adds ‘Sparta’ to the end of L1
    • Popping elements: The pop() method removes and returns the last element of a list [5]:
    • L1.pop() # Removes the last element of L1
    • Other List Operations:
    • Reversing: The order of elements in a list can be reversed using the reverse() method [6]:
    • L1.reverse()
    • Inserting: Elements can be inserted at a specific index using the insert() method, which takes the index and the value as parameters [7]:
    • L1.insert(1, ‘Sparta’) # Inserts ‘Sparta’ at index 1, shifting other elements
    • Sorting: Elements can be sorted in alphabetical order using the sort() method [7, 8]:
    • L3 = [‘mango’, ‘apple’, ‘guava’, ‘lii’]
    • L3.sort() # Sorts L3 alphabetically: [‘apple’, ‘guava’, ‘lii’, ‘mango’]
    • Concatenation: Two lists can be combined using the + operator [9]:
    • L1 = [4, 10, 11]
    • L2 = [‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’]
    • L1 + L2 # Results in [1, 2, 3, ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’]
    • Repeating: A list can be repeated by multiplying it by a scalar number [9]:
    • L1 * 3 # Repeats the elements of L1 three times
    • Checking Data Type: To confirm the data type of a variable, the type() method can be used [2]:
    • type(L1) # Returns that L1 is a list.

    Lists are a fundamental data structure in Python, widely used for storing and manipulating collections of items [1, 3].

    Python List Indexing

    List indexing in Python is a way to access individual elements or a range of elements within a list using their position or index [1, 2]. Indexing starts from zero for the first element, and negative indices can be used to access elements from the end of the list [2].

    Here’s a detailed look at list indexing:

    • Basic Indexing:
    • Elements are accessed using their index within square brackets [] [1, 2].
    • The first element is at index 0, the second at index 1, and so on [2].
    • For a list L1 = [1, ‘e’, True], L1 would return 1, L1[3] would return ‘e’, and L1[4] would return True [2].
    • Negative Indexing:
    • Negative indices allow access to elements from the end of the list, with -1 being the last element, -2 the second-to-last, and so on [2].
    • For a list L2 = [1, ‘a’, 2, ‘B’, 3, ‘C’], L2[-1] would return ‘C’, L2[-2] would return 3, and so on [2].
    • Slicing:
    • Slicing is used to extract a range or series of elements from a list [2].
    • The syntax for slicing is list[start:end], where start is the index of the first element to include, and end is the index of the first element not to include [2].
    • For example, L2[2:5] would return [2, ‘B’, 3], which includes elements at indices 2, 3, and 4, but not 5 [2].
    • If the start index is omitted, slicing begins from the start of the list, and if the end index is omitted, it goes up to the end of the list. For example, L2[:3] will return the first three elements, and L2[3:] will return the elements from the 4th element to the end.
    • You can use negative indices for slicing as well. For example, if you want to extract elements starting from the third element from the end of the list to the end, you can use the slice L2[-3:] [5].
    • Index Out of Range:
    • Attempting to access an index that is outside the valid range of the list will result in an IndexError. For example if L1 has 3 elements, attempting to access L1[6] would raise an error because there is no element at index 3.
    • Modifying elements with indexing:
    • Indexing is not just for accessing elements; you can also modify the value of an element at a given index. For example, with L2 = 100, the first element of L2 is updated to the value 100 [7].

    Understanding list indexing is crucial for effectively manipulating and accessing data within lists in Python.

    Modifying Python Lists

    Python lists are mutable, meaning they can be modified after creation. Here’s how lists can be modified, based on the sources:

    • Changing values: Existing values in a list can be changed by assigning a new value to a specific index [1]. For example, if L2 = [1, ‘a’, 2, ‘B’, 3, ‘C’], then L2 = 100 would change the value at index 0 from 1 to 100 [1].
    • Appending elements: New elements can be added to the end of a list using the append() method [1]:
    • L1 = [1, ‘e’, True]
    • L1.append(‘Sparta’) # Adds ‘Sparta’ to the end of L1
    • Popping elements: The pop() method removes and returns the last element of a list [1, 2]. For example:
    • L1 = [1, ‘e’, True, ‘Sparta’]
    • L1.pop() # Removes ‘Sparta’ from L1, and L1 becomes [1, ‘e’, True]
    • Inserting elements: New elements can be inserted at a specific index using the insert() method [3]. The method takes the index where the new element should be inserted, and the value of the new element as parameters. For example:
    • L1 = [1, ‘a’, 2, ‘B’, 3, ‘C’]
    • L1.insert(1, ‘Sparta’) # Inserts ‘Sparta’ at index 1, shifting other elements
    • # L1 is now [1, ‘Sparta’, ‘a’, 2, ‘B’, 3, ‘C’]
    • Reversing elements: The order of elements in a list can be reversed using the reverse() method [2]:
    • L1 = [1, ‘a’, 2, ‘B’, 3, ‘C’]
    • L1.reverse() # L1 is now [‘C’, 3, ‘B’, 2, ‘a’, 1]
    • Sorting elements: Elements in a list can be sorted using the sort() method [3]. By default, the sort method will sort alphabetically:
    • L3 = [‘mango’, ‘apple’, ‘guava’, ‘lii’]
    • L3.sort() # Sorts L3 alphabetically: [‘apple’, ‘guava’, ‘lii’, ‘mango’]

    These operations allow for flexible manipulation of list data by adding, removing, and reordering list items.

    Python File Handling

    File handling in Python involves working with text files, allowing for operations such as opening, reading, writing, appending, and altering text [1-4]. It is also referred to as IO (input/output) functions [2].

    Here are the key aspects of file handling:

    • Opening Files:The open() function is used to open a text file [5].
    • The open() function takes the filename as an argument, and the mode in which the file is to be opened [6, 7].
    • The file must be in the same folder as the Python file [5].
    • Modes include:
    • Read mode (“r”): Opens a file for reading [7]. This is used when you want to read the text already stored in the text file [8].
    • Write mode (“w”): Opens a file for writing [7]. This is used when you want to add or overwrite text in the file [8].
    • Append mode (“a”): Opens a file for appending [9, 10]. This is used when you want to add text to the end of a file without overwriting the existing content [9, 10].
    • Reading Files:The read() function is used to read the entire content of a file [7, 11].
    • The readline() function reads a file line by line [12, 13]. It can be used to print the text in a file line by line [14, 15]. Each subsequent call to readline() will read the next line in the file [15, 16].
    • Writing to Files:The write() function is used to write text to a file [17].
    • When using the write() function, you must specify the text to be written within the function’s parentheses [17].
    • Appending to Files:The append mode (“a”) allows you to add text to the end of a file without overwriting the existing content [9, 10].
    • The write() function is also used for appending text [18].
    • To add text on a new line when appending, use the \n operator at the beginning of the text to be added [9, 10, 18].
    • Closing Files:It’s important to close a file after it has been opened, using the close() method [17, 19].
    • Closing files is a good practice [19].
    • Counting Characters:The len() function is used to count the total number of characters in a file [10, 20, 21].
    • You must read the file content into a variable, and apply the len() function to this variable [20].

    Important Notes:

    • Online IDEs may not support file handling, as they may not support both .py and .txt files simultaneously [2, 3].
    • Offline IDEs, like PyCharm, VS Code, and Jupyter Notebooks, are recommended for file handling [3].
    • When working with text files, you do not need to use comments, hash signs, or quotation marks, since these are plain text files [22].

    File handling is essential for working with data stored in external files. It involves a few key steps, with different methods for reading, writing, and modifying files.

    Generative AI: A Comprehensive Overview

    Generative AI (GenAI) is a rapidly evolving field of artificial intelligence focused on creating new content, transforming existing content, or generating content based on provided inputs [1, 2]. It differs from traditional AI by using input instructions to produce outputs in various formats, including text, audio, video, and images [1, 3].

    Here are some key concepts in GenAI, based on the sources:

    • Core Function: GenAI employs neural networks to analyze data patterns and generate new content based on those patterns [2]. It is a mimicry of biological neurons, based on how the brain functions [2].
    • Evolution of Computers: Computers initially served as calculating machines but have evolved to incorporate human-like intelligence and creativity [1]. AI is the mimicking of human intelligence, and GenAI combines AI with creativity [1].
    • Discriminative vs. Generative AI:Discriminative AI acts as a judge, classifying data into categories. For example, when given a data set of images of cats and dogs, discriminative AI will classify the images into categories of cats and dogs [2].
    • Generative AI acts as an artist by creating new content. For example, when given a data set of images of cats and dogs, generative AI will create new images of a new species of dogs or cats [2].
    • Generative Models: GenAI works through the use of generative models that are pre-trained on data and fine-tuned to perform specific tasks, such as text summarization, image generation, or code creation [4].
    • Types of Generative AI: There are different types of GenAI models, including:
    • Generative Adversarial Networks (GANs): Two models work together, one to generate content and the other to judge it [4].
    • Variational Autoencoders: These AIs learn to recreate and generate new, similar data [4].
    • Transformers: These AIs produce sequences using context [4].
    • Diffusion Models: These models refine noisy data until it becomes realistic [4].
    • Applications of Generative AI:Content Creation: Generating text, code, and other media [4, 5].
    • Customer Support and Engagement: Improving interactions and service [4].
    • Data Analysis: Assisting in data visualization and analysis [4, 5].
    • Code Generation: Helping to create code [5].
    • Research and Information Retrieval: Helping researchers extract information from various sources [4, 5].
    • Machine Translation: Translating text and audio into other languages [5].
    • Sentiment Analysis: Analyzing text to determine if it contains positive, negative or neutral sentiment [5].
    • Other Domains: Including healthcare and transportation [5].

    GenAI is impactful across many fields because it can work with various forms of inputs to generate new and original content, unlike traditional AI which is dependent on the input format. It is also constantly evolving, making it close to magic [3].

    Python Tutorial with Gen AI for 2025 | Python for Beginners | Python full course

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Pakistan’s Nuclear Program: A Critical Analysis by Pervez Hoodbhoy

    Pakistan’s Nuclear Program: A Critical Analysis by Pervez Hoodbhoy

    This podcast episode features an interview discussing Abdul Qadeer Khan’s role in Pakistan’s nuclear program. The interviewee details Khan’s acquisition of centrifuge technology, his collaboration with Pakistani officials, and the subsequent establishment of a global network to procure materials. The conversation also explores the geopolitical implications of Pakistan’s nuclear capabilities, the controversies surrounding Khan’s actions, and the interviewee’s personal opposition to nuclear weapons. The interviewee also shares personal anecdotes and correspondence with Khan. Finally, the discussion touches upon the lasting legacy and impact of Khan’s work on Pakistan’s national identity and international relations.

    Pakistan’s Nuclear Program: A Study Guide

    Quiz

    Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.

    1. What was A.Q. Khan’s academic background, and why is it significant to understanding his role in Pakistan’s nuclear program?
    2. What was the primary method used by Pakistan to enrich uranium for its nuclear weapons, and how did A.Q. Khan acquire the technology for it?
    3. What role did China play in helping Pakistan develop its nuclear weapons program, and what did they specifically provide?
    4. What was the Khan network, and how did it operate?
    5. Why did A.Q. Khan’s actions lead to scrutiny and house arrest, and what was his official explanation for those actions?
    6. What is the significance of the 1971 separation of East Pakistan in the context of the nuclear program, according to the source?
    7. How was the uranium enrichment program connected to the Uranium Enrichment Corporation in the Netherlands?
    8. What was Project 706 and what was the system of secrecy employed?
    9. What was A.Q. Khan’s relationship to the Pakistani Atomic Energy Commission (PAEC)?
    10. What were the circumstances surrounding the end of US pressure on Pakistan’s nuclear weapons program?

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. A.Q. Khan had a PhD in metallurgy, not nuclear physics or nuclear science. This is significant because his expertise was in high-tensile strength steels, crucial for centrifuge technology, not the theoretical science of nuclear fission.
    2. Pakistan used centrifuge technology to enrich uranium. A.Q. Khan allegedly stole the designs and supplier lists for this technology from the Uranium Enrichment Corporation in the Netherlands, where he worked.
    3. China provided Pakistan with the actual design for a nuclear bomb. They also supplied crucial technology, including uranium hexafluoride gas production and various electronic components.
    4. The Khan network was a global network of underground operatives that procured necessary parts for Pakistan’s nuclear program, circumventing international regulations. It was also a commercial operation that sold nuclear technology to other nations.
    5. A.Q. Khan was implicated in selling nuclear technology to various countries, leading to international pressure on Pakistan. He was then placed under house arrest after a televised apology, in which he admitted to his involvement in the nuclear proliferation.
    6. According to the source, the 1971 separation of East Pakistan (now Bangladesh) fueled a desire for revenge, with some in Pakistan wanting to use nuclear weapons to attack India. This event is cited as a major reason why Pakistan prioritized development of its nuclear program.
    7. The Uranium Enrichment Corporation in the Netherlands was where A.Q. Khan worked, and allegedly stole designs. The secrets included the plans and specifications for centrifuge technology which he translated with his wife.
    8. Project 706 was a code name for the highly secretive nuclear development program. It was kept tightly controlled and compartmentalized in order to prevent information from being leaked.
    9. The Pakistani Atomic Energy Commission insists that all the crucial work in making Pakistan’s bomb was carried out under its supervision. A.Q. Khan and his KRL were only responsible for uranium enrichment, whereas PAEC handled other key components.
    10. The US significantly reduced pressure on Pakistan due to the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979, when Pakistan’s role in the fight against the Soviets was prioritized over its nuclear program. After the Soviet defeat, and prior to 9/11, there were renewed pressures and sanctions. After 9/11, renewed focus on the war on terror brought Pakistan back as an ally.

    Essay Questions

    Instructions: Answer the following essay questions thoroughly, referencing specific examples from the provided text.

    1. Analyze the role of A.Q. Khan in Pakistan’s nuclear program. Was he a hero or a villain? Justify your perspective.
    2. Compare and contrast the perspectives of the Pakistani government (through the Atomic Energy Commission) and A.Q. Khan’s KRL regarding their contributions to the nuclear program. How did these competing claims impact the public perception of A.Q. Khan?
    3. Discuss the international politics surrounding Pakistan’s development of nuclear weapons. What actions by other nations influenced Pakistan’s actions, and how did the global geopolitical climate shape its decisions?
    4. How did the various nationalisms that emerged in the latter half of the 20th Century influence nuclear proliferation?
    5. Evaluate the argument that nuclear weapons ensure peace. How does this argument hold up in the context of the material presented, and what are the alternative perspectives on nuclear deterrence?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Centrifuge: A device that uses centrifugal force to separate substances, particularly used in this context for uranium enrichment.
    • Metallurgy: The science and technology of metals, including their properties, processing, and uses. A.Q. Khan’s area of expertise was in high tensile strength steels for use in centrifuge construction.
    • Uranium Enrichment: The process of increasing the concentration of uranium-235, which is needed for nuclear weapons and reactors.
    • Nuclear Deterrent: A military strategy in which nuclear weapons are used to prevent attack from others by creating a credible threat of a retaliatory strike.
    • KRL: Khan Research Laboratories, the organization founded by A.Q. Khan, responsible for nuclear research and development.
    • PAEC: Pakistan Atomic Energy Commission, the governmental organization also involved in nuclear development.
    • Khan Network: A global network established by A.Q. Khan used to procure parts and technology for Pakistan’s nuclear program, as well as for commercial proliferation to other nations.
    • ECL: Exit Control List, a list of individuals in Pakistan who are restricted from leaving the country.
    • Nuclear Nationalism: The belief that a nation’s nuclear weapons capability is a symbol of national strength and pride.
    • Project 706: The codename for Pakistan’s secret nuclear weapons development program.
    • IAEA: The International Atomic Energy Agency, a part of the UN which seeks to promote the peaceful use of atomic energy while preventing the proliferation of atomic weapons.
    • Uranium Hexafluoride: A compound of uranium which is a gas at elevated temperatures, used in the uranium enrichment process.
    • Marang Steels: Special, high tensile strength steels used in high speed centrifuge construction.

    A.Q. Khan and Pakistan’s Nuclear Program

    Okay, here is a detailed briefing document based on the provided text, focusing on the main themes, important ideas, and key facts, with relevant quotes:

    Briefing Document: Analysis of “How Does It Work” Podcast on A.Q. Khan

    Introduction:

    This document summarizes a podcast episode focusing on the life, career, and legacy of Abdul Qadeer Khan (A.Q. Khan), the Pakistani metallurgist often considered the “father” of Pakistan’s nuclear program. The podcast explores his technical background, the acquisition of nuclear technology by Pakistan, the establishment of the Khan network, and the controversies surrounding his actions, including his involvement in nuclear proliferation.

    Key Themes:

    • A.Q. Khan’s Background and Expertise: The podcast emphasizes that A.Q. Khan was not a nuclear physicist but a metallurgist. His PhD was in “high tensile strength steels” crucial for centrifuge technology. “His PhD was in metallurgy, which he did in Germany, his professor ‘s name was Ralph Brab… his specialty was high tensile strength steels.” This corrects a “very common misconception” about his area of expertise.
    • The Acquisition of Nuclear Technology: Khan’s role in obtaining centrifuge designs and supplier lists from his time at the Uranium Enrichment Corporation in the Netherlands is central. “It is alleged that he had stolen some things from the place where he was working in Netherlands.” The podcast highlights the importance of this information, noting “the centrifuge technology is a very difficult technology,” and emphasizes that “all this important information was brought by AQ Khan with him.” This act is presented as both necessary for Pakistan’s program and controversial due to the nature of classified information.
    • Pakistan’s Nuclear Program: The podcast describes a complex situation: Pakistan sought a nuclear deterrent in response to the 1971 separation of East Pakistan (Bangladesh) and India’s nuclear ambitions. “We Pakistanis will eat grass, even go hungry, but we will have our own nuclear bomb because what happened to us in 71 happened to us so much.” It clarifies that Pakistan’s program relied on both indigenous efforts and external help and acquisitions.
    • The Role of China: The podcast underscores China’s significant assistance to Pakistan. “The actual design used by Pakistan was of a Chinese bomb…China also gave us a lot more like yare yam hexa fluoride which is a gas.” This involved not only bomb designs, but also crucial components and technology for uranium enrichment. This aid is attributed to China’s strategic calculations aimed at containing India.
    • The Khan Network: This international network is portrayed as essential for acquiring components needed for the nuclear program. “a big network had to be spread all over the world, in America, Canada, Europe as well as South Africa”. This network is described as involving underground operatives to procure “electronic parts, it could be inverter, relay” etc. It later became a conduit for proliferation, selling nuclear technology to countries like Iran, Libya, and North Korea.
    • A.Q. Khan’s Proliferation Activities: The podcast discusses A.Q. Khan’s role in selling nuclear technology. “When the bomb was made…then other countries who wanted to make bombs started looking towards Pakistan.” This includes the sale of centrifuge designs and components. This led to his eventual downfall and house arrest.
    • Internal Pakistani Dynamics: The podcast emphasizes a tension between A.Q. Khan and the Pakistan Atomic Energy Commission (PEC). “The people from Atomic Energy Commission will not agree with you on this matter. They say that the work done in 90 is ours.” It also discusses the involvement of the Pakistani military in the network. “The army in it, without the knowledge of the army nothing could move from the cut or from other PEC head quarters.”
    • The US Perspective: The US was aware of Pakistan’s nuclear program, yet its actions were influenced by geopolitical considerations during the Cold War. “Ronald Reagan, who was the President of the US at that time, said let it go, let it go. It is more important for us to defeat the Soviet Union.” This led to a period of tacit acceptance, followed by a crackdown post-9/11 when concerns about proliferation and terror became paramount.
    • A.Q. Khan’s Legacy: The podcast examines A.Q. Khan’s complex legacy as a national hero in Pakistan versus the image of a nuclear proliferator in the West. “I think that he promoted himself as much as he could So even today many people attribute the atom bomb to AQ Khan.” The speaker believes that his legacy is being “blurred” by history and the actions of others.
    • Opposition to Nuclear Weapons: The host, a nuclear physicist, is presented as a longstanding opponent of nuclear weapons, influenced by scientists who helped create the first bomb. “I will always be and till my death I will be against the bomb, whether the bomb is of Pakistan, India, America or Israel.” He makes the case that the bomb does not provide true security to Pakistan since threats to the state are “internal”.

    Most Important Ideas and Facts:

    • Technical Expertise: A.Q. Khan’s specialization in metallurgy, not nuclear physics, is crucial to understand his contributions to the Pakistani program which required specialized steel for centrifuge rotors.
    • Stolen Documents: A.Q. Khan’s acquisition of centrifuge designs from the Netherlands is framed as a critical step in Pakistan’s nuclear program, even though it was based on stolen classified information.
    • Chinese Assistance: China was the most important external actor in assisting Pakistan’s nuclear project.
    • Proliferation Network: The Khan network was a complex, international system involved in both acquiring components and later selling them, earning “millions of dollars, maybe they earned hundreds of millions of dollars.”
    • Internal Divisions: There was a tension between A.Q. Khan and the Pakistani Atomic Energy Commission, with both vying for credit for the country’s nuclear development. The army also played a major, perhaps controlling role, in the network.
    • American Geopolitical Calculations: The US was aware of Pakistan’s nuclear program but initially prioritized containing the Soviet Union over preventing proliferation.
    • A.Q. Khan’s Apology and House Arrest: Following the revelation of his proliferation activities, A.Q. Khan was forced to apologize publicly and was placed under house arrest.
    • A.Q. Khan’s Regrets: The podcast host had personal communications with A.Q. Khan, indicating his regret over the state of education and his disillusionment with the Pakistani military establishment. “if I had known that I would have to hand over these people to these people, I probably would not have made it, because he is a loose man.”
    • Nuclear Nationalism: The program introduces the concept of nuclear nationalism and uses the speaker’s personal history to contrast the idea that nuclear arms contribute to national security and prosperity.

    Quotes:

    • “Americans knew that we were making a bomb…”
    • “we had to take revenge for the father of Pakistan’s atomic bomb we will kill India with the bomb”
    • “the rotor in the centrifuge rotates like that of a washing machine but the rotor rotates very fast, so the steels in it are of a very special kind. These are called Marang steels.”
    • “The biggest challenge in making the first atom bomb was to understand its theory, so it had to be invented at that time because that theory did not exist.”
    • “The actual design used by Pakistan was of a Chinese bomb, the one which The first Chinese test was conducted in Lap Nor, China.”
    • “A.Q. Khan kept many centrifuges made in Malaysia, their parts and completed centrifuges were also kept inside that ship.”
    • “Pakistan army judges a country”
    • “he apologized in English… secondly this had to be shown to the world, it had to be shown to the whites…”
    • “This is a prosperous nation, they are in danger from within.”

    Conclusion:

    The podcast provides a nuanced view of A.Q. Khan and the Pakistani nuclear program. It highlights the complex interplay of technical expertise, geopolitical maneuvering, international networks, and national ambitions. A.Q. Khan’s legacy remains controversial, representing both national pride and the dangers of nuclear proliferation. The podcast also introduces an alternative view that nuclear weapons do not provide true security. This briefing document provides a starting point for further analysis and discussion of this important topic.

    Pakistan’s Nuclear Program: A.Q. Khan and the Khan Network

    FAQ: Pakistan’s Nuclear Program and A.Q. Khan

    1. What was A.Q. Khan’s educational background and how did it relate to his role in Pakistan’s nuclear program? A.Q. Khan held a PhD in metallurgy, specializing in high tensile strength steels, not nuclear physics as is often mistakenly believed. His expertise in metallurgy proved vital in developing centrifuges for uranium enrichment, specifically relating to the materials used in the rotors that rotate at high speeds. He gained access to classified documents through his work at a Uranium Enrichment company, which he later used to help Pakistan in developing its nuclear program.
    2. How did A.Q. Khan acquire the initial designs and technology necessary for Pakistan’s nuclear program? A.Q. Khan worked for a Uranium Enrichment Corporation in the Netherlands and Belgium. He allegedly stole classified documents, including designs of centrifuges, and also the suppliers lists needed for key parts to build centrifuges. He then used these documents, alongside the help of his wife, to help him with translations. This information was instrumental in initiating Pakistan’s uranium enrichment program.
    3. What was the role of China in Pakistan’s nuclear weapons program? China provided Pakistan with the design for its nuclear bomb, specifically the design of the bomb that China first tested at Lop Nor, China. They also provided technology for processing uranium and other electronics and technologies. This close relationship made Pakistan’s nuclear program possible. China helped Pakistan acquire key technologies and materials necessary for its nuclear weapons development.
    4. What was the “Khan Network” and what was its purpose? The “Khan Network” was a global network established to procure materials and technologies for Pakistan’s nuclear program. This network had operatives worldwide whose jobs were to acquire specific components needed for centrifuge technology (like electronic parts, inverters, relays), because these items were not manufactured in Pakistan. It was later used by A.Q. Khan for personal profit. He began selling nuclear technology and materials to other countries like Libya, North Korea, and Iran.
    5. Why did Pakistan pursue nuclear weapons, and what was the primary motivation at the time? Pakistan’s primary motivation for developing nuclear weapons was to establish a nuclear deterrent against India, driven by historical events such as the 1971 separation of East Pakistan, and subsequent wars between the two countries, particularly the 1971 war, and India’s 1974 nuclear test. The aim was also to counter what was seen as a threat from India’s growing military capability and nuclear program. There was a desire to take “revenge” for the events of 1971.
    6. How did the international community, particularly the US, react to Pakistan’s nuclear program, and how did geopolitical events impact these reactions? Initially, the US was concerned about Pakistan’s nuclear program, but this concern was overshadowed by the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan in 1979. The US needed Pakistan’s help in countering the Soviet Union, so they turned a blind eye to Pakistan’s nuclear ambitions, and even provided them with substantial financial aid. This allowed Pakistan to continue developing its nuclear program with minimal external interference. After the Soviet defeat in Afghanistan, the US renewed its concerns, and placed sanctions on Pakistan, however after the 9/11 attacks, there was a new focus in the US on a war on terror and Pakistan once again became a US ally, and pressure surrounding their nuclear program subsided again.
    7. What happened to A.Q. Khan after his role in the nuclear program, and what were the accusations against him? After the exposure of the Khan Network, A.Q. Khan was placed under house arrest by the Pakistani government. He was accused of selling nuclear technology to other countries, which he admitted in a televised confession. Some sources suggest that A.Q. Khan was punished as a scapegoat, because the Pakistani military was also complicit in the proliferation of technology. It is also suggested by some that he also sold nuclear technology to India, however this is unconfirmed.
    8. What is the legacy of A.Q. Khan, and how do Pakistanis generally view his role in the nuclear program? A.Q. Khan is a controversial figure. While some view him as a national hero for developing Pakistan’s nuclear deterrent, others view him as a proliferator who sold sensitive nuclear technology to dangerous actors. Some Pakistanis continue to view him as a national hero, while others view his actions and motivations with more skepticism and criticism.

    A.Q. Khan and the Making of Pakistan’s Bomb

    Okay, here’s the timeline and cast of characters based on the provided text:

    Timeline of Main Events:

    • Pre-1971: Abdul Qadeer (AQ) Khan is born in Bhopal.
    • 1971: East Pakistan separates from West Pakistan, becoming Bangladesh. This deeply upsets AQ Khan, fueling a desire for revenge.
    • Early 1970s: AQ Khan is working in the Netherlands at UranCo (Uranium Enrichment Company). He is tasked with translating centrifuge designs from English/German to Dutch. His wife assists him.
    • Mid-1970s:AQ Khan allegedly steals classified documents from UranCo related to centrifuge technology. He claims his boss permitted him to take the designs home for translation.
    • A case is filed against him, but he escapes punishment by being in Pakistan at the time.
    • AQ Khan procures a supplier list, along with other critical information related to centrifuge components
    • He contacts the Pakistan Embassy and then reaches out to Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto, then Prime Minister of Pakistan, due to his belief Pakistan needed a nuclear deterrent.
    • AQ Khan travels to Pakistan and immediately goes to the Prime Minister’s House, then the President’s House (Awan-e-Sadr).
    • 1974: India conducts a nuclear test in Pokhran.
    • Mid-Late 1970s:Pakistan attempts to acquire a reprocessing plant from France to produce plutonium, but this is blocked by pressure from the US.
    • AQ Khan begins work on uranium enrichment in Pakistan, focusing on centrifuge technology. KUTA (Khan Research Laboratories, later KRL) is established, and becomes an active research facility after the arrival of AQ Khan.
    • China provides Pakistan with the design for their first nuclear bomb which was tested in Lop Nor. They also provide other forms of technological assistance, including Yare Yam hexafluoride which is a gas created from mined and processed uranium.
    • Late 1970s: The US is aware that Pakistan is working on a nuclear weapon program, but downplays it in public reports to maintain relations due to the Soviet Union’s invasion of Afghanistan.
    • 1980s: Pakistan uses the network it created for the nuclear weapons program to purchase goods from around the globe with Pakistani government money, and the Pakistani military’s knowledge.
    • 1990s: AQ Khan begins selling nuclear technology and materials to other countries through a global network. The army was also involved in the network, taking their share of profits.
    • Around 1996, Munir Ahmad Khan shares that he was shown proof of Pakistan’s bomb development by US senators during his time as chairman of the Atomic Energy Commission.
    • 1996: AQ Khan gets the speaker of the podcast, Parvez Hoodbhoy, placed on the ECL (Exit Control List) due to Hoodbhoy challenging a land grab AQ Khan was part of.
    • Later 90s: AQ Khan’s popularity rises in Pakistan, and he is considered a hero to many.
    • 1998: India conducts further nuclear tests. Pakistan responds with its own nuclear tests, which were carried out in Chaghi, Balochistan. It was a point of contention whether AQ Khan would be allowed to travel to the test site.
    • 2001: After 9/11, there is renewed pressure on Pakistan over its nuclear program, however focus shifts to counter terrorism and America’s war in Afghanistan.
    • 2003:A ship carrying centrifuge equipment en route to Libya is intercepted by the US. This exposes AQ Khan’s proliferation network.
    • Under pressure from the US, President Musharraf forces AQ Khan to publicly confess to his role in nuclear proliferation on PTV.
    • Post-2003: AQ Khan is placed under house arrest for the remainder of his life.
    • Later Years: AQ Khan sends several letters to Parvez Hoodbhoy, expressing regret over his role in the nuclear program, and disillusionment with the Pakistani military. He also becomes concerned over the educational conditions in the country. The podcast host was placed on the Exit Control List in 1996, by AQ Khan, because of his involvement in a land grab dispute.

    Cast of Characters:

    • Abdul Qadeer (AQ) Khan: A Pakistani metallurgist, considered the “father” of Pakistan’s nuclear program. He worked at UranCo in the Netherlands before starting Pakistan’s uranium enrichment program. He is celebrated as a hero by some, while others view him as a nuclear proliferator. He is believed to have been disillusioned by his role as Pakistan’s bomb maker later in life, and felt he had not been honored adequately by the government. He also expressed regret over the state of the country’s educational system.
    • Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto: Prime Minister of Pakistan who was contacted by AQ Khan for the development of nuclear weapons as a deterrent, specifically against India.
    • Ghulam Ishaq Khan: Met with A.Q Khan when he first arrived in Pakistan with the stolen designs of centrifuges.
    • Munir Ahmad Khan: Former chairman of the Pakistan Atomic Energy Commission.
    • Riazuddin: Pakistani professor of physics who was tasked with locating information about nuclear technology in the Library of Congress and other American libraries.
    • Ralph Brab: AQ Khan’s professor in Germany, whose specialization was high tensile strength steels.
    • Ayub Khan: Pakistani president who was involved in the discussions about acquiring a nuclear reactor, and subsequent reprocessing plant from France.
    • Professor Abdul Salam: Pakistani scientist who negotiated with France regarding the nuclear reactor acquisition for Pakistan.
    • General Aslam Beg: Pakistani general who advocated for a unified nuclear block comprised of Afghanistan, Iran, and Pakistan.
    • Parvez Hoodbhoy: Pakistani nuclear physicist and the host of the podcast, who opposed nuclear weapons. He had a complicated relationship with AQ Khan, marked by letters they exchanged in later years. Hoodbhoy and his friend also challenged AQ Khan in court.
    • Benazir Bhutto: Pakistani prime minister who had allegedly planned to transfer a portion of Quaid-e-Azam University’s land to MNS.
    • Abdul Hameed Nayyar: Friend of Parvez Hoodbhoy, also challenged AQ Khan in court.
    • General Shoaib Ahmed: General who made a video against Parvez Hoodbhoy, accusing him of being responsible for AQ Khan’s death.
    • Ronald Reagan: US President who did not sanction Pakistan for the nuclear weapons program due to the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan.
    • General Pervez Musharraf: President of Pakistan who forced AQ Khan to confess to nuclear proliferation.
    • David Albright: An American expert on nuclear weapons proliferation who was cited for comparing AQ Khan to Bin Laden.
    • Katherine Collins & Douglas France: Authors of the book “Fallout”, who alleged that the CIA deliberately did not stop AQ Khan’s activities in the 70s in order to gather information.
    • Young Ban (likely a misspelling of Young-Bong): South Korean scientist who assisted North Korea in its nuclear program.
    • Muammar Gaddafi: Libyan leader who sought to develop nuclear weapons and acquired materials through the AQ Khan network.
    • Philip Morrison, Victor Weiss, Cuff, Bernard Feld: Scientists and physicists who worked on the Manhattan Project, and went on to be advocates against nuclear weapons following their use on Hiroshima.
    • Jawaharlal Nehru: Early Indian Prime Minister who was initially against India’s nuclear program, but later changed his mind following the 1962 Sino-Indian War.

    Let me know if you have any other questions.

    A.Q. Khan and Pakistan’s Nuclear Program

    A.Q. Khan was a metallurgist, not a nuclear physicist, who played a significant role in Pakistan’s nuclear program [1]. He obtained his Ph.D. in metallurgy in Germany, specializing in high-tensile strength steels used in centrifuges [1, 2].

    Here’s a breakdown of his role and activities:

    • Acquisition of Nuclear Technology:
    • Khan worked at the Uranium Enrichment Company in the Netherlands [2].
    • He allegedly stole classified documents, including centrifuge designs, from his workplace [2, 3].
    • His wife helped him translate the documents [2, 3].
    • He took these secret documents to Pakistan and shared them with Bhutto [1, 3].
    • The technology he brought was the uranium enrichment method, which was an alternative to plutonium extraction [4].
    • Establishing Pakistan’s Nuclear Program:Khan contacted the Pakistan embassy, and this led to his meeting with Bhutto [3].
    • He was instrumental in setting up the Kahuta Research Laboratories (KRL), which became the center of Pakistan’s uranium enrichment program [4].
    • He brought a list of suppliers, including where to buy ball bearings and inverters, which are essential for centrifuge technology [3].
    • Khan’s work was essential, as Pakistan did not have the capacity to manufacture the necessary components [5, 6].
    • He utilized a global network to acquire parts for the program [6].
    • Controversies and Accusations:
    • Khan was accused of stealing nuclear secrets from his former employer [2].
    • He was accused of selling nuclear technology to other countries including North Korea, Libya and Iran [6, 7].
    • There were allegations of Khan selling nuclear secrets to Israel, America, and India, but this may not be true [1, 8].
    • He was involved in a network that sold nuclear technology and components for personal gain [7].
    • There is a claim that the Khan network was also sold to India, but this is not confirmed [7, 8].
    • Relationship with the Pakistani Government and Military:
    • The army was involved in Khan’s network, and they also took a cut of the profits from selling nuclear information [7].
    • General Musharraf forced Khan to confess his wrongdoings on television [9].
    • Khan was put under house arrest after his confession [10].
    • Legacy:
    • Khan was seen as a hero by many Pakistanis for his role in developing the country’s nuclear bomb [1, 11].
    • Despite his popularity, his role in the bomb’s creation was minimal [9].
    • There are differing views on his legacy; some view him as a national hero, while others see him as a “nuclear jihadist” [1, 12].
    • He also expressed regret for making the bomb [13].
    • Other PointsPakistan’s nuclear program was also supported by China, which provided designs and technology [5, 14].
    • The actual design of Pakistan’s bomb was similar to a Chinese bomb [5].
    • The program also involved the Pakistan Atomic Energy Commission (PAEC), which worked on other aspects of the bomb such as its fabrication and testing [14].
    • The US was aware of Pakistan’s nuclear program but did not intervene due to the Soviet-Afghan war [8, 15].
    • After the 9/11 attacks, pressure was put on Musharraf regarding Khan’s activities because of the fear he may sell nuclear material to terrorists [11].

    Pakistan’s Nuclear Program: From A.Q. Khan to Global Impact

    Pakistan’s development of the atomic bomb was a complex undertaking involving multiple factors, including technological acquisition, political motivations, and international relations [1-4].

    • Motivations:A key motivation for Pakistan’s nuclear program was to seek revenge for the separation of East Pakistan in 1971 [2, 5, 6].
    • The program was also fueled by the desire to match India’s nuclear capabilities, especially after India’s 1974 nuclear test [1, 5, 6].
    • The sentiment was, “we will eat grass, even go hungry, but we will have our own nuclear bomb” [5].
    • Key Figures:A.Q. Khan, a metallurgist, was pivotal in acquiring the technology and establishing the program [1]. He was not a nuclear scientist, but had a PhD in metallurgy [1, 2].
    • Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto was the Prime Minister of Pakistan who supported the nuclear program and reached out to Khan [7].
    • Munir Ahmad Khan, the chairman of the Atomic Energy Commission was also involved in the program [5].
    • Riazuddin, a physics professor at Quaid-e-Azam University, was sent to the Library of Congress in the US to find nuclear know-how [3].
    • Technological Aspects:Pakistan pursued the uranium enrichment method, as opposed to plutonium extraction [4].
    • A.Q. Khan obtained centrifuge designs from his work at the Uranium Enrichment Company in the Netherlands [2, 7]. He allegedly stole these designs [2, 7].
    • He also brought a list of suppliers for necessary components [7].
    • China provided significant assistance, including the design of the bomb and technology for converting mined uranium into gas [3, 8]. The actual design of Pakistan’s bomb was similar to China’s first nuclear test [3].
    • Pakistan used a global network to acquire the necessary parts [9].
    • Secrecy and Development:The program was conducted with a high level of secrecy [6].
    • The Kahuta Research Laboratories (KRL) became the center of Pakistan’s uranium enrichment program [4].
    • The Pakistan Atomic Energy Commission (PAEC) was responsible for the fabrication of the bomb, its testing, and other aspects [9].
    • The bomb was tested in Balochistan [10].
    • International Reactions and ChallengesThe US was aware of Pakistan’s program, but did not intervene due to the Soviet-Afghan war [5, 11, 12].
    • The US put pressure on France not to sell a reprocessing plant to Pakistan [4].
    • After the 9/11 attacks, pressure was put on Musharraf regarding Khan’s activities because of the fear he may sell nuclear material to terrorists [13].
    • Controversies:A.Q. Khan was accused of selling nuclear technology to other countries like North Korea, Libya, and Iran [9, 14]. There was a network through which this was accomplished [8].
    • There were also allegations that he sold nuclear secrets to Israel, America, and India, though this is not confirmed [1, 11, 14].
    • The Pakistani army was also involved in this network and took a cut of the profits [14].
    • Post-DevelopmentAfter Pakistan tested its bomb in 1998, other countries started looking towards Pakistan for nuclear technology [9].
    • Khan was forced to confess his wrongdoing on television and was put under house arrest [10, 13].
    • There was a view that the bomb was meant to empower the Muslim community and countries. For example, General Aslam Beg said that Afghanistan, Iran and Pakistan should become united countries and nuclear powers [15].
    • Legacy:A.Q. Khan was viewed as a hero by many in Pakistan but some consider him a “nuclear jihadist” [1, 16].
    • Khan himself expressed some regret over making the bomb, especially because he felt that he was not sufficiently honored by the Pakistani state [15, 17].
    • There is a view that Khan’s role in the bomb’s creation was minimal [10].
    • The nuclear program was not a guarantee of peace, as seen by conflicts such as Kargil and the ongoing tensions with India [18].
    • There is an ongoing debate as to whether or not the bomb has led to prosperity or stability in Pakistan [19].

    Nuclear Proliferation: Causes, Methods, and Consequences

    Nuclear proliferation, the spread of nuclear weapons, technology, and materials to countries that do not already possess them, is a significant concern that is discussed throughout the sources.

    Here’s a breakdown of nuclear proliferation as it relates to the provided sources:

    • Motivations for Proliferation:
    • Revenge and Security: Pakistan’s nuclear program was partly motivated by a desire to retaliate for the loss of East Pakistan in 1971, and to match India’s nuclear capabilities [1-4]. The sentiment was, “we will eat grass, even go hungry, but we will have our own nuclear bomb” [3].
    • Regional Power: Some countries sought nuclear weapons to enhance their regional power and influence [5]. For example, General Aslam Beg suggested that Afghanistan, Iran, and Pakistan should unite and become nuclear powers to counter the West [5].
    • Deterrence: Some nations seek nuclear weapons as a deterrent against potential aggressors. However, the sources question whether a nuclear bomb is a guarantee of peace, with conflicts such as Kargil and ongoing tensions between India and Pakistan as an example [6, 7].
    • Methods of Proliferation:
    • Stealing Technology: A.Q. Khan allegedly stole centrifuge designs from his workplace in the Netherlands, which were crucial for Pakistan’s uranium enrichment program [2, 8].
    • Global Networks: A.Q. Khan established a global network to acquire the necessary parts for Pakistan’s nuclear program [8-10]. This network was also used to sell nuclear technology to other countries [11].
    • State Support: Some countries, like China, provided significant assistance to other nations’ nuclear programs. China gave Pakistan the design of the bomb and technology for converting mined uranium into gas [9, 12].
    • Purchasing Technology: Countries like Libya attempted to purchase complete nuclear technology and components through intermediaries. [11, 12].
    • Exploiting Existing Technology: India extracted plutonium from a nuclear reactor provided by Canada, which they then used for their first nuclear test [13].
    • Examples of Proliferation:
    • Pakistan: Developed nuclear weapons using a combination of stolen technology, a global procurement network and support from China. [2, 8, 9, 12, 13].
    • India: Developed nuclear weapons through plutonium extraction and later tested a bomb [4, 13].
    • North Korea: Was interested in centrifuges and also had a plutonium-based nuclear program [10]. They were successful in making bombs [11].
    • Iran: Received outdated centrifuges from the Khan network but improved them [5]. They are now considered a potential nuclear power [6].
    • Libya: Tried to purchase nuclear technology from the Khan network, but their efforts were thwarted [11].
    • South Africa: Was mentioned as a possible location for a Khan network base, though no evidence of this was found [9, 10].
    • Allegations of Proliferation to other countries: There were claims that the Khan network sold nuclear secrets to Israel, America, and India, but these remain unconfirmed [1, 11].
    • Role of Key Individuals:
    • A.Q. Khan: Played a central role in the proliferation of nuclear technology through his network that sold nuclear technology to countries like Libya, North Korea and Iran [11].
    • Riazuddin: A physics professor who was sent to the US to find nuclear know-how for Pakistan [12].
    • Munir Ahmad Khan: The chairman of the Atomic Energy Commission was also involved in the program [3].
    • Consequences and Concerns:
    • Increased Instability: The spread of nuclear weapons can heighten tensions and increase the risk of conflict in already volatile regions [6, 7].
    • Arms Race: Proliferation can lead to regional arms races as countries seek to match the capabilities of their neighbors [1].
    • Risk of Use: There is concern that the more countries that possess nuclear weapons, the higher the risk they may be used in conflict [6, 7].
    • Terrorism: There is concern that nuclear material may fall into the hands of terrorists [14].
    • The ineffectiveness of deterrence: The sources present the view that nuclear weapons are not a guarantee of peace, citing conflicts like Kargil and tensions between India and Pakistan [6, 7].
    • International Response:
    • Sanctions and Pressure: The US and other countries have used sanctions and diplomatic pressure to try to prevent nuclear proliferation [15].
    • Monitoring and Intelligence: Agencies such as the CIA monitor the activities of countries that are trying to acquire nuclear weapons [15, 16].
    • Interception of Shipments: The US intercepted a ship carrying nuclear materials destined for Libya, exposing the Khan network’s activities [11, 12].
    • Debate Over Nuclear Weapons:
    • The sources present differing views on the value and legacy of nuclear weapons, especially their role in peace and stability. One view is that the bomb is a necessity to ensure national security. Another view, expressed by a nuclear physicist, is that nuclear weapons do not ensure peace and that a nation’s greatest threats are often internal [6, 17].

    In summary, the sources highlight that nuclear proliferation is driven by complex political, security and technological factors. The case of Pakistan shows how a combination of stolen technology, international networks and state support can lead to the development of nuclear weapons. The sources also indicate that the consequences of proliferation are far reaching and include increased regional instability, the potential for armed conflict and the risk of nuclear materials falling into the wrong hands.

    Nuclear Nationalism in Pakistan

    Nuclear nationalism, the belief that a nation’s identity, security, and prestige are tied to its possession of nuclear weapons, is a theme that is explored in the sources. Here’s a breakdown of how nuclear nationalism is portrayed:

    • National Pride and Identity: The development of nuclear weapons was seen as a matter of national pride for Pakistan [1]. The sources indicate that after the separation of East Pakistan in 1971, there was a strong desire for revenge, and the nuclear bomb was seen as a way to achieve this. This sentiment is captured in the phrase, “we will eat grass, even go hungry, but we will have our own nuclear bomb” [2, 3].
    • Hero Worship: A.Q. Khan was celebrated as a national hero in Pakistan, with his image appearing on posters and trucks [4, 5]. This hero worship highlights the extent to which nuclear weapons were seen as a symbol of national achievement. He was considered by some to be the “father of Pakistan’s atomic bomb” [1]. However, this was not the view of everyone [6].
    • Equating Nuclear Weapons with Security: There is a strong belief that nuclear weapons are essential for a nation’s security, acting as a deterrent against potential aggressors [7]. The idea was that the bomb would give Pakistan “so much protection” [8]. This view was linked to the idea that Pakistan needed to match India’s nuclear capabilities [1]. However, this idea is challenged in the sources, with the argument that Pakistan’s greatest threats are internal [7].
    • Regional Power and Influence: Nuclear weapons were also seen as a means to enhance regional power and influence. For example, General Aslam Beg’s view that Afghanistan, Iran, and Pakistan should unite and become nuclear powers indicates that nuclear weapons were seen as tools for regional dominance [9, 10]. This was seen as a way to counter the West [10].
    • The Link Between Nuclear Weapons and National Status: There was a desire to be recognized on the world stage as a nuclear power. This is illustrated by A.Q. Khan’s disappointment at not being given the same status as Abdul Kalam of India (the “missile man” who became President), highlighting that a nuclear weapons program can be seen as an indicator of national greatness [9]. The fact that A.Q. Khan’s apology was delivered in English, for the benefit of a Western audience, speaks to how important it was for Pakistan to be seen as a nuclear power [11].
    • Internal Opposition: Despite the prevailing view of nuclear weapons as a source of national pride, there were voices of opposition [5, 11]. The sources present the view of a nuclear physicist who was against nuclear weapons on principle, believing that they do not ensure peace and that a nation’s greatest threats are often internal [5, 7, 11]. This position directly challenges the notion that nuclear weapons are essential for a country’s security.
    • Questioning the Benefits of Nuclear Weapons: The idea that nuclear weapons are a guarantee of national security or prosperity is questioned [7]. The sources point out that many prosperous nations do not have nuclear weapons and that nuclear deterrence has not prevented conflicts [7, 8]. This suggests that the view of nuclear weapons as a source of national security may be based on a myth rather than a reality [8].
    • Blurred Legacy: The long-term legacy of nuclear nationalism is uncertain. It is suggested that historical narratives can be blurred over time, and the precise role of individuals, such as A.Q. Khan, may become distorted [10]. The sources suggest that, over time, the national narrative around nuclear weapons and the individuals who develop them is likely to change [5, 10].

    In summary, nuclear nationalism is a complex concept that links a nation’s identity and pride to its nuclear capabilities. While some see nuclear weapons as a source of national security, pride, and regional power, others view them as a threat to global peace and stability. The case of Pakistan, as discussed in the sources, highlights these competing viewpoints, revealing that nuclear nationalism is not a universally accepted ideal.

    Nuclear Proliferation and Regional Instability

    Regional tensions are significantly heightened by nuclear proliferation and nuclear nationalism, as discussed in the sources. The pursuit and possession of nuclear weapons by some nations have led to increased instability, arms races, and the potential for conflict in several regions [1-4].

    Here’s a breakdown of regional tensions as presented in the sources:

    • India and Pakistan:
    • Historical Conflict: The primary driver for Pakistan’s nuclear program was the desire to match India’s nuclear capabilities [3, 5]. This was partly motivated by the separation of East Pakistan in 1971, which led to a desire for revenge [1, 2]. The sentiment was that Pakistanis would “eat grass, even go hungry, but we will have our own nuclear bomb” [2].
    • Arms Race: India’s nuclear program, which began in the 1960s, spurred Pakistan to develop its own nuclear weapons [3]. This has created a continuous arms race between the two countries [5].
    • Kargil Conflict: Despite possessing nuclear weapons, Pakistan engaged in the Kargil conflict with India [6]. This highlights that nuclear deterrence is not a guarantee of peace, and tensions between the two countries remain high [4, 6].
    • Internal Threats: The sources suggest that Pakistan’s biggest threats are internal and that the nuclear bomb has not protected the country from internal conflict and instability [4].
    • China and India:
    • Rivalry: China’s support of Pakistan’s nuclear program was partly motivated by its rivalry with India [7, 8].
    • Border War: The 1962 war between China and India was a catalyst for India’s nuclear program [3].
    • Iran and the West:
    • Nuclear Ambitions: Iran’s pursuit of nuclear technology has led to concerns from the West, who fear that Iran may develop a nuclear weapon [4, 5].
    • Potential for Conflict: The sources also discuss the possibility of conflict between Iran and other nuclear powers [4, 6].
    • North and South Korea:
    • High Tensions: The tensions between North and South Korea are highlighted, and the possibility of these tensions escalating due to nuclear proliferation is raised [6].
    • North Korea’s Nuclear Program: North Korea’s successful development of nuclear weapons has created additional regional instability [6, 9, 10].
    • The Middle East:
    • Libya’s Nuclear Ambitions: Libya’s attempt to acquire nuclear technology through the Khan network further demonstrates the potential for regional instability [8, 11].
    • General Aslam Beg’s Plan: General Aslam Beg’s view that Afghanistan, Iran and Pakistan should unite as nuclear powers to counter the West reveals the regional aspirations of some in the area [12].
    • Other Regional Concerns:
    • Fear of Nuclear Weapons falling into the wrong hands: The fear of nuclear weapons falling into the hands of terrorist groups is also a source of regional tension [4, 13].
    • The Role of Nuclear Nationalism:
    • Fueling Tensions: Nuclear nationalism, the belief that a nation’s identity and security are tied to its possession of nuclear weapons, fuels regional tensions, as countries seek to enhance their regional power and influence [14].
    • Ineffectiveness of Nuclear Deterrence:
    • Conflicts Despite Deterrence: The sources point out that nuclear deterrence has not prevented conflicts [4, 6]. The Russia-Ukraine conflict, and the Israel-Palestine conflict are cited as examples, along with the Kargil conflict between India and Pakistan [4, 6].

    In summary, the sources demonstrate that nuclear proliferation and nuclear nationalism have significantly increased regional tensions. The pursuit of nuclear weapons by various nations has led to arms races, historical rivalries, and the potential for conflict. Despite the idea that nuclear weapons act as a deterrent, conflicts and tensions remain, suggesting that nuclear weapons do not guarantee peace or stability.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Visual FoxPro 7 Commands

    Visual FoxPro 7 Commands

    Supported Visual FoxPro SET Commands

    Unsupported Visual FoxPro Commands and Functions

    Symbols
    & Command

    Performs macro substitution.

    & VarName[.cExpression]

    Parameters

    & VarName Specifies the name of the variable or array element to reference in the macro substitution. Do not include the M. prefix that distinguishes variables from fields. Such inclusion causes a syntax error. The macro should not exceed the maximum statement length permitted in Visual FoxPro.

    A variable cannot reference itself recursively in macro substitution. For example, the following generates an error message:

    STORE '&gcX' TO gcX
? &gcX

    Macro substitution statements that appear in DO WHILE, FOR, and SCAN are evaluated only at the start of the loop and are not reevaluated on subsequent iterations. Any changes to the variable or array element that occur within the loop are not recognized. .cExpression The optional period (.) delimiter and .cExpression are used to append additional characters to a macro. cExpression appended to the macro with .cExpression can also be a macro. If cExpression is a property name, include an extra period (cExpression..PropertyName).

    Remarks

    Macro substitution treats the contents of a variable or array element as a character string literal. When an ampersand (&) precedes a character-type variable or array element, the contents of the variable or element replace the macro reference. You can use macro substitution in any command or function that accepts a character string literal.

    Tip   Whenever possible, use a name expression instead of macro substitution. A name expression operates like macro substitution. However, a name expression is limited to passing character strings as names. Use a name expression for significantly faster processing if a command or function accepts a name (a file name, window name, menu name, and so on). For additional information on name expressions, see Overview of the Language.

    While the following commands are acceptable:

    STORE 'customer' TO gcTableName
STORE 'company'  TO gcTagName
USE &gcTableName ORDER &gcTagName

    use a name expression instead:

    USE (gcTableName) ORDER (gcTagName)

    Macro substitution is useful for substituting a keyword in a command. In the following example, the TALK setting is saved to a variable so the setting can be restored later in the program. The original TALK setting is restored with macro substitution.

    Example

    STORE SET('TALK') TO gcSaveTalk
SET TALK OFF
*
*  Additional program code
*
SET TALK &gcSaveTalk  && Restore original TALK setting

    && Command

    Indicates the beginning of a nonexecuting inline comment in a program file.

    && [Comments]

    Parameters

    Comments Indicates that inline comments follow. For example:

    STORE (20*12) TO gnPayments  && 20 years of monthly payments

    Inserting inline comments to denote the end of the IF … ENDIF, DO, and FOR … ENDFOR structured programming commands greatly improves the readability of programs.

    Remarks

    Place a semicolon (;) at the end of each comment line that continues to a following line. You cannot place && and a comment after the semicolon used to continue a command line to an additional line.

    Example

    NOTE  Initialize the page number;
   variable.
STORE 1 to gnPageNum
* Set up the loop
DO WHILE gnPageNum <= 25  && loop 25 times
   gnPageNum = gnPageNum + 1
ENDDO  && DO WHILE gnPageNum <= 25
    • * Command

    Indicates the beginning of a nonexecuting comment line in a program file.

    * [Comments]

    Parameters

    Comments Specifies the comment in the comment line. For example:

    *   This is a comment

    Remarks

    Place a semicolon (;) at the end of each comment line that continues to a following line.

    Example

    * Initialize the page number;
   variable.
STORE 1 to gnPageNum
* Set up the loop
DO WHILE gnPageNum <= 25  && loop 25 times
   gnPageNum = gnPageNum + 1
ENDDO  && DO WHILE gnPageNum <= 25

    ? | ?? Command

    ??? Command

    @ … BOX Command

    @ … CLASS Command

    @ … CLEAR Command

    @ … EDIT – Edit Boxes Command

    @ … FILL Command

    @ … GET – Check Boxes Command

    @ … GET – Combo Boxes Command

    @ … GET – Command Buttons Command

    @ … GET – List Boxes Command

    @ … GET – Option Buttons Command

    @ … GET – Spinners Command

    @ … GET – Text Boxes Command

    @ … GET – Transparent Buttons Command

    @ … MENU Command

    @ … PROMPT Command

    @ … SAY – Pictures & OLE Objects Command

    @ … SAY Command

    @ … SCROLL Command

    @ … TO Command

    \ | \ Command

    A
    ACCEPT Command

    ACTIVATE MENU Command

    ACTIVATE POPUP Command

    ACTIVATE SCREEN Command

    ACTIVATE WINDOW Command

    ADD CLASS Command

    ADD TABLE Command

    ALTER TABLE – SQL Command

    APPEND Command

    APPEND FROM ARRAY Command

    APPEND FROM Command

    APPEND GENERAL Command

    APPEND MEMO Command

    APPEND PROCEDURES Command

    ASSERT Command

    ASSIST Command

    AVERAGE Command

    B
    BEGIN TRANSACTION Command

    BLANK Command

    BROWSE Command

    BUILD APP Command

    BUILD DLL Command

    BUILD EXE Command

    BUILD MTDLL Command

    BUILD PROJECT Command

    C
    CALCULATE Command

    CALL Command

    CANCEL Command

    CD | CHDIR Command

    CHANGE Command

    CLEAR Commands

    CLOSE Commands

    CLOSE MEMO Command

    COMPILE Command

    COMPILE DATABASE Command

    COMPILE FORM Command

    CONTINUE Command

    COPY FILE Command

    COPY INDEXES Command

    COPY MEMO Command

    COPY PROCEDURES Command

    COPY STRUCTURE Command

    COPY STRUCTURE EXTENDED Command

    COPY TAG Command

    COPY TO ARRAY Command

    COPY TO Command

    COUNT Command

    CREATE CLASS Command

    CREATE CLASSLIB Command

    CREATE COLOR SET Command

    CREATE Command

    CREATE CONNECTION Command

    CREATE CURSOR – SQL Command

    CREATE DATABASE Command

    CREATE FORM Command

    CREATE FROM Command

    CREATE LABEL Command

    CREATE MENU Command

    CREATE PROJECT Command

    CREATE QUERY Command

    CREATE REPORT – Quick Report Command

    CREATE REPORT Command

    CREATE SCREEN – Quick Screen Command

    CREATE SCREEN Command

    CREATE SQL VIEW Command

    CREATE TABLE – SQL Command

    CREATE TRIGGER Command

    CREATE VIEW Command

    D
    DEACTIVATE MENU Command

    DEACTIVATE POPUP Command

    DEACTIVATE WINDOW Command

    DEBUG Command

    DEBUGOUT Command

    DECLARE – DLL Command

    DECLARE Command

    DEFINE BAR Command

    DEFINE BOX Command

    DEFINE CLASS Command

    DEFINE MENU Command

    DEFINE PAD Command

    DEFINE POPUP Command

    DEFINE WINDOW Command

    DELETE – SQL Command

    DELETE Command

    DELETE CONNECTION Command

    DELETE DATABASE Command

    DELETE FILE Command

    DELETE TAG Command

    DELETE TRIGGER Command

    DELETE VIEW Command

    DIMENSION Command

    DIR or DIRECTORY Command

    DISPLAY Command

    DISPLAY CONNECTIONS Command

    DISPLAY DATABASE Command

    DISPLAY DLLS Command

    DISPLAY FILES Command

    DISPLAY MEMORY Command

    DISPLAY OBJECTS Command

    DISPLAY PROCEDURES Command

    DISPLAY STATUS Command

    DISPLAY STRUCTURE Command

    DISPLAY TABLES Command

    DISPLAY VIEWS Command

    DO CASE … ENDCASE Command

    DO Command

    DO FORM Command

    DO WHILE … ENDDO Command

    DOEVENTS Command

    DROP TABLE Command

    DROP VIEW Command

    E
    EDIT Command

    EJECT Command

    EJECT PAGE Command

    END TRANSACTION Command

    ERASE Command

    ERROR Command

    EXIT Command

    EXPORT Command

    EXTERNAL Command

    F
    FIND Command

    FLUSH Command

    FOR EACH … ENDFOR Command

    FOR … ENDFOR Command

    FREE TABLE Command

    FUNCTION Command

    G
    GATHER Command

    GETEXPR Command

    GO | GOTO Command

    H
    HELP Command

    HIDE MENU Command

    HIDE POPUP Command

    HIDE WINDOW Command

    I
    IF … ENDIF Command

    IMPORT Command

    INDEX Command

    INPUT Command

    INSERT – SQL Command

    INSERT Command

    J
    JOIN Command

    K
    KEYBOARD Command

    L
    LABEL Command

    LIST Commands

    LIST CONNECTIONS Command

    LIST DATABASE Command

    LIST DLLS Command

    LIST OBJECTS Command

    LIST PROCEDURES Command

    LIST TABLES Command

    LIST VIEWS Command

    LOAD Command

    LOCAL Command

    LOCATE Command

    LOOP Command

    LPARAMETERS Command

    M
    MD | MKDIR Command

    MENU Command

    MENU TO Command

    MODIFY CLASS Command

    MODIFY COMMAND Command

    MODIFY CONNECTION Command

    MODIFY DATABASE Command

    MODIFY FILE Command

    MODIFY FORM Command

    MODIFY GENERAL Command

    MODIFY LABEL Command

    MODIFY MEMO Command

    MODIFY MENU Command

    MODIFY PROCEDURE Command

    MODIFY PROJECT Command

    MODIFY QUERY Command

    MODIFY REPORT Command

    MODIFY SCREEN Command

    MODIFY STRUCTURE Command

    MODIFY VIEW Command

    MODIFY WINDOW Command

    MOUSE Command

    MOVE POPUP Command

    MOVE WINDOW Command

    N
    NOTE Command

    O
    ON BAR Command

    ON ERROR Command

    ON ESCAPE Command

    ON EXIT BAR Command

    ON EXIT MENU Command

    ON EXIT PAD Command

    ON EXIT POPUP Command

    ON KEY = Command

    ON KEY Command

    ON KEY LABEL Command

    ON PAD Command

    ON PAGE Command

    ON READERROR Command

    ON SELECTION BAR Command

    ON SELECTION MENU Command

    ON SELECTION PAD Command

    ON SELECTION POPUP Command

    ON SHUTDOWN Command

    OPEN DATABASE Command

    P
    PACK Command

    PACK DATABASE Command

    PARAMETERS Command

    PLAY MACRO Command

    POP KEY Command

    POP MENU Command

    POP POPUP Command

    PRINTJOB … ENDPRINTJOB Command

    PRIVATE Command

    PROCEDURE Command

    PUBLIC Command

    PUSH KEY Command

    PUSH MENU Command

    PUSH POPUP Command

    Q
    QUIT Command

    R
    RD | RMDIR Command

    READ Command

    READ EVENTS Command

    READ MENU Command

    RECALL Command

    REGIONAL Command

    REINDEX Command

    RELEASE BAR Command

    RELEASE CLASSLIB Command

    RELEASE Command

    RELEASE LIBRARY Command

    RELEASE MENUS Command

    RELEASE PAD Command

    RELEASE POPUPS Command

    RELEASE PROCEDURE Command

    RELEASE WINDOWS Command

    REMOVE CLASS Command

    REMOVE TABLE Command

    RENAME CLASS Command

    RENAME Command

    RENAME CONNECTION Command

    RENAME TABLE Command

    RENAME VIEW Command

    REPLACE Command

    REPLACE FROM ARRAY Command

    REPORT Command

    RESTORE FROM Command

    RESTORE MACROS Command

    RESTORE SCREEN Command

    RESTORE WINDOW Command

    RESUME Command

    RETRY Command

    RETURN Command

    ROLLBACK Command

    RUN | Command

    S
    SAVE MACROS Command

    SAVE SCREEN Command

    SAVE TO Command

    SAVE WINDOWS Command

    SCAN … ENDSCAN Command

    SCATTER Command

    SCROLL Command

    SEEK Command

    SELECT – SQL Command

    SELECT Command

    SET ALTERNATE Command

    SET ANSI Command

    SET ASSERTS Command

    SET AUTOSAVE Command

    SET BELL Command

    SET BLOCKSIZE Command

    SET BORDER Command

    SET BROWSEIME Command

    SET BRSTATUS Command

    SET CARRY Command

    SET CENTURY Command

    SET CLASSLIB Command

    SET CLEAR Command

    SET CLOCK Command

    SET COLLATE Command

    SET COLOR OF Command

    SET COLOR OF SCHEME Command

    SET COLOR SET Command

    SET COLOR TO Command

    SET Command

    SET COMPATIBLE Command

    SET CONFIRM Command

    SET CONSOLE Command

    SET COVERAGE Command

    SET CPCOMPILE Command

    SET CPDIALOG Command

    SET CURRENCY Command

    SET CURSOR Command

    SET DATABASE Command

    SET DATASESSION Command

    SET DATE Command

    SET DEBUG Command

    SET DEBUGOUT Command

    SET DECIMALS Command

    SET DEFAULT Command

    SET DELETED Command

    SET DELIMITERS Command

    SET DEVELOPMENT Command

    SET DEVICE Command

    SET DISPLAY Command

    SET DOHISTORY Command

    SET ECHO Command

    SET ESCAPE Command

    SET EVENTLIST Command

    SET EVENTTRACKING Command

    SET EXACT Command

    SET EXCLUSIVE Command

    SET FDOW Command

    SET FIELDS Command

    SET FILTER Command

    SET FIXED Command

    SET FORMAT Command

    SET FULLPATH Command

    SET FUNCTION Command

    SET FWEEK Command

    SET HEADINGS Command

    SET HELP Command

    SET HELPFILTER Command

    SET HOURS Command

    SET INDEX Command

    SET INTENSITY Command

    SET KEY Command

    SET KEYCOMP Command

    SET LIBRARY Command

    SET LOCK Command

    SET LOGERRORS Command

    SET MACKEY Command

    SET MARGIN Command

    SET MARK OF Command

    SET MARK TO Command

    SET MEMOWIDTH Command

    SET MESSAGE Command

    SET MULTILOCKS Command

    SET NEAR Command

    SET NOCPTRANS Command

    SET NOTIFY Command

    SET NULL Command

    SET NULLDISPLAY Command

    SET ODOMETER Command

    SET OLEOBJECT Command

    SET OPTIMIZE Command

    SET ORDER Command

    SET PALETTE Command

    SET PATH Command

    SET PDSETUP Command

    SET POINT Command

    SET PRINTER Command

    SET PROCEDURE Command

    SET READBORDER Command

    SET REFRESH Command

    SET RELATION Command

    SET RELATION OFF Command

    SET REPROCESS Command

    SET RESOURCE Command

    SET SAFETY Command

    SET SECONDS Command

    SET SEPARATOR Command

    SET SKIP Command

    SET SKIP OF Command

    SET SPACE Command

    SET STATUS BAR Command

    SET STATUS Command

    SET STEP Command

    SET STRICTDATE Command

    SET SYSFORMATS Command

    SET SYSMENU Command

    SET TALK Command

    SET TEXTMERGE Command

    SET TEXTMERGE DELIMITERS Command

    SET TOPIC Command

    SET TOPIC ID Command

    SET TRBETWEEN Command

    SET TYPEAHEAD Command

    SET UDFPARMS Command

    SET UNIQUE Command

    SET VIEW Command

    SET VOLUME Command

    SET WINDOW OF MEMO Command

    SHOW GET Command

    SHOW GETS Command

    SHOW MENU Command

    SHOW OBJECT Command

    SHOW POPUP Command

    SHOW WINDOW Command

    SIZE POPUP Command

    SIZE WINDOW Command

    SKIP Command

    SORT Command

    STORE Command

    SUM Command

    SUSPEND Command

    SYS(2001) – SET … Command Status

    T
    TEXT … ENDTEXT Command

    TOTAL Command

    TYPE Command

    U
    UNLOCK Command

    UPDATE – SQL Command

    UPDATE Command

    USE Command

    V
    VALIDATE DATABASE Command

    W
    WAIT Command

    WITH … ENDWITH Command

    X
    Y
    Z
    ZAP Command

    ZOOM WINDOW Command

  • Al Riyadh Newspaper: February 27, 2025 Saudi Arabia: Developments, Politics, Culture, and Economy

    Al Riyadh Newspaper: February 27, 2025 Saudi Arabia: Developments, Politics, Culture, and Economy

    These articles from various news sources cover a wide range of topics. One major focus is Saudi Arabia, including the opening of the first phase of the Sports Track project in Riyadh, approval for distributing copies of the Quran internationally, and an overview of investments in agriculture and food security. Reports detail various sectors, from technology and media to the petroleum and petrochemical industries. Additional subjects include a lunar sighting for Ramadan, soccer tournaments, preparations for Umrah season, and even allegations of torture against doctors in Gaza. Many of the articles celebrate Saudi Arabia and achievements by its government.

    Riyadh Review Study Guide

    I. Quiz

    Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each:

    1. What is the “Sports Boulevard” project, and what is its primary goal?
    2. According to the text, what are the main aims of Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030 plan?
    3. What was the main topic of discussion during a meeting by the King Fahd National Library, according to a segment of the source document?
    4. What is the main argument of the article titled “Rational Emotions”?
    5. What is the essence of the article titled, “Memory of the Foundation of the State… A pioneering step in documenting the national history and promoting the Saudi identity”?
    6. What is the central goal of the Saudi Cup, according to the source?
    7. What is the “Ramadan Basket” initiative, and what is its purpose?
    8. What was the reason for the delay in the start of the Al-Nasr and Al-Wahda soccer game, according to the source?
    9. According to the document, how was Saudi Arabia’s national football team, Al-Akhdar Al-Shabab, successful?
    10. What is the opinion of doctor Khalid Al-Khadari about King Salman’s interest in culture and heritage?

    II. Quiz Answer Key

    1. The “Sports Boulevard” is a project in Riyadh aimed at transforming the city into one of the world’s most livable cities. It focuses on creating a healthy lifestyle and a positive, attractive environment for residents and visitors through various sports and recreational activities.
    2. Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030 plan is intended to promote economic diversification by reducing reliance on oil and promoting growth in other areas including tourism, technology and manufacturing. It also aims to develop infrastructure, achieve sustainable development, and promote national identity.
    3. The main topic of discussion in the King Fahd National Library was the science of history and its language. In the discussion, attendees determined the importance of a historian’s awareness of the language of the era they are studying.
    4. The main argument of “Rational Emotions” is that true rationality involves balancing emotions and critical thinking. It argues for acknowledging and managing emotions in a healthy way, which requires awareness, effort, and consistent practice.
    5. The essence of the article is that commemorating the founding of Saudi Arabia represents a crucial step in documenting national history and strengthening Saudi identity. It emphasizes that the day signifies the start of unity and harmony in the country.
    6. According to the source, the Saudi Cup is the world’s richest horse race. This race is viewed as an important event for promoting Arabian horses in Saudi culture and tradition.
    7. The “Ramadan Basket” initiative involves gathering basic food items and providing full food baskets for needy families during the month of Ramadan. It reflects the spirit of brotherhood and provides aid during an economically demanding time.
    8. The Al-Nasr and Al-Wahda soccer game was delayed because Al-Nasr’s bus was delayed due to mechanical issues. The match was therefore pushed back to a later time that evening.
    9. The Saudi national team, Al-Akhdar Al-Shabab, successfully made it to the continental finals by defeating South Korea. The team’s goalkeeper, Hamed Al-Sanqiti, won MVP.
    10. Doctor Khalid Al-Khadari thinks that King Salman places great importance on culture and heritage and believes that the King is among the top leaders who prioritize that. He thinks the King understands the significance of cultural identity in building nations and strengthening national belonging.

    III. Essay Questions

    Consider the following questions and formulate well-organized essays in response. Be sure to utilize specific examples and details from the source texts to support your arguments.

    1. Analyze the role of cultural initiatives and projects, such as the “Sports Boulevard” and the “Saudi Cup,” in Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030. How do these initiatives contribute to the broader goals of the vision, such as economic diversification, improved quality of life, and promotion of national identity?
    2. Discuss the challenges and opportunities facing the Saudi media landscape as reflected in the “International Media Forum” event. How are digital transformation, artificial intelligence, and the need for creative content reshaping the industry, and what strategies are being employed to adapt and thrive in this environment?
    3. Examine the concept of “rational emotions” as presented in the provided text. How does it relate to decision-making, personal well-being, and social relationships, and what strategies can individuals use to develop emotional intelligence and achieve a balance between reason and emotion?
    4. Compare and contrast the historical narratives presented in the articles about the founding of Saudi Arabia and the Al Saud dynasty with aspects of the present day. To what extent do historical legacies inform contemporary Saudi identity, culture, and governance?
    5. Assess Saudi Arabia’s investment in agriculture and food security as described in the articles. How are these investments aimed at bolstering the kingdom’s role in the global market, ensuring sustainable food supplies, and addressing future challenges in the food sector?

    IV. Glossary of Key Terms

    • Vision 2030 (روؤية 2030): A strategic framework and reform plan launched by Saudi Arabia to diversify its economy, develop public services, and enhance its global standing.
    • Sports Boulevard (المسار الرياضي): A project in Riyadh aimed at creating a world-class sports and recreational destination, promoting a healthy lifestyle, and improving the quality of life for residents.
    • GPCA (جيبكا): The Gulf Petrochemicals and Chemicals Association, a regional organization representing the petrochemical and chemical industry in the Arabian Gulf.
    • Salic (سالك): An agricultural investment company focused on contributing to global food security through strategic investments in various agricultural sectors.
    • NEOM (نيوم): A planned smart city in Saudi Arabia that will rely entirely on renewable energy and aim to be a hub for innovation, technology, and sustainable living.
    • Edelman Trust Barometer (مقياس إيدلمان للثقة): An annual survey that measures public trust in institutions such as governments, businesses, NGOs, and media across various countries.
    • Diriyah (الدرعية): A town in Saudi Arabia that was the original home of the Saudi royal family and served as the capital of the first Saudi state.
    • The Saudi Cup (كأس السعودية): An annual horse race held in Riyadh, considered the world’s richest horse race, and a significant event for promoting Arabian horses in Saudi culture.
    • Al-Akhdar Al-Shabab (الأخضر الشاب): The Saudi youth national football team, a term used to refer to the team’s performance in youth-level competitions.
    • Ramadan Basket (سلة رمضان): An initiative to provide food baskets for needy families during the month of Ramadan, containing essential food items and supplies.
    • rational emotions (المشاعر العقلانية): The ability to acknowledge and manage emotions in a healthy and constructive way.
    • King Fahd National Library (مكتبة الملك فهد الوطنية): A cultural institution that houses numerous texts.

    Al Riyadh Newspaper: Saudi Arabia, February 2025

    Okay, here is a briefing document summarizing the main themes and ideas from the provided sources.

    Briefing Document

    Subject: Analysis of Articles from “Al Riyadh” Newspaper (February 27, 2025)

    Overview:

    This document summarizes key themes and specific articles from an issue of the Saudi Arabian newspaper “Al Riyadh.” The articles cover a diverse range of topics including Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030 initiatives, regional politics, economic developments, cultural events, and social issues. The overall tone emphasizes national pride, progress, and the Kingdom’s growing role on the world stage.

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    • Saudi Vision 2030 and National Transformation: A major recurring theme is Saudi Arabia’s ambitious “Vision 2030” and the various projects and initiatives aimed at diversifying the economy, improving quality of life, and enhancing the Kingdom’s global standing.
    • The Sports Boulevard Project: The opening of the first phase of the “Sports Boulevard” project in Riyadh is highlighted as a key achievement. This project is designed to promote a healthy lifestyle, enhance the city’s appeal, and contribute to making Riyadh one of the world’s most livable cities. As the article mentions, the project aims to create “a positive and attractive environment for the residents and visitors of the city of Riyadh,” and will act as an “environmental artery” for the city. This is directly linked to the goals of Vision 2030. The Sports Boulevard is open to the public starting February 27, 2025 and features a website: http://www.SportsBoulevard.sa.
    • Economic Diversification and Investment: The articles emphasize efforts to move away from reliance on oil, with investments in sectors like tourism, technology, and entertainment. The Public Investment Fund’s (PIF) acquisition of a significant stake in the agricultural company “Olam” is cited as an example of this strategy, aiming to “enhance the Kingdom’s position on the global arena.”
    • Improved Image and Global Trust: Reforms are said to be enhancing Saudi Arabia’s image and attracting foreign investment. The Edelman Trust Barometer 2025 is cited, noting that Saudi Arabia has the highest level of public trust in government globally (87%), reflecting the success of Vision 2030 programs. It also mentions a high percentage of citizens feeling optimistic about the future: “69% of citizens believe that the next generation will enjoy a better life, which is a much higher percentage than in most other countries.”
    • Cultural Preservation and Promotion: Several articles focus on preserving and celebrating Saudi heritage and culture.
    • Naming of Public Squares: There is focus on naming public squares in honor of imams and kings is described as “a pioneering step in documenting national history and strengthening Saudi identity.”
    • “Year of Traditional Handicrafts” Initiative: The Ministry of Culture’s “Year of Traditional Handicrafts 2025” initiative is highlighted, with events showcasing Saudi craftsmanship both domestically and internationally. This aligns with the goal of promoting Saudi culture and supporting local artisans.
    • The Role of Horses: The importance of Arabian horses in Saudi culture and history is emphasized.
    • Regional and International Relations: The newspaper covers Saudi Arabia’s diplomatic activities and its role in regional issues.
    • Saudi-Azerbaijan Relations: The King and Crown Prince received written messages from the President of Azerbaijan, discussing bilateral relations.
    • Gaza Conflict: The newspaper reports on a ceasefire agreement between Hamas and Israel, including prisoner exchanges and negotiations for a second phase of the agreement.
    • Economic Development: The newspaper covers investments into domestic infrastructure, including plans for urban expansion.
    • Social Issues and Values: Some articles touch on social issues such as consumerism and the importance of charitable giving during Ramadan.
    • Combating Food Waste: An article discusses a national initiative to reduce food loss and waste, promoting responsible consumption and highlighting the economic and ethical implications of food waste.

    Specific Articles and Key Points:

    • “Opening of the First Phase of the Sports Boulevard Project”:Details the opening of the first phase of the Sports Boulevard project in Riyadh.
    • Highlights the project’s goals of promoting a healthy lifestyle, enhancing the city’s appeal, and contributing to making Riyadh one of the world’s most livable cities.
    • “King Approves Distribution of 1.2 Million Copies of the Quran in 45 Countries”:Announces the King’s approval for distributing copies of the Quran in various countries, reflecting Saudi Arabia’s role in promoting Islamic values.
    • “The Grand Mufti Receives a Report on the National Cohesion Initiative from ‘Ifta’ Jazan’”:Reports on the Grand Mufti receiving a report on a national initiative promoting social cohesion and unity.
    • “Kingdom Seizes Opportunities To Invest in Agriculture and Food Sector Globally”:Reports on the acquisition of a major stake in “Olam” by the Public Investment Fund. It also mentions the aim of enhancing the Kingdom’s food security and its role in the global grain market.
    • It highlights SALIC’s (Saudi Agricultural and Livestock Investment Company) investments in Ukraine, Australia and Canada. SALIC plans to invest in 16 strategical commodities.
    • “GEPCA Welcomes the Cabinet’s Decision to Host its Headquarters in Riyadh”:Reports on the Gulf Petrochemicals and Chemicals Association (GIPCA) welcoming the Saudi Cabinet’s decision to host its headquarters in Riyadh.
    • Highlights Saudi Arabia’s dominant role in the region’s petrochemical industry.
    • “Local Competitions Delayed Because of Club’s Late Arrival”:Reports on a domestic football (soccer) match being delayed because of the club’s (Al Nassr) delayed arrival to the stadium.
    • “Al Akhdar Al Shabab (Green Youth) Crosses Korea to the Continental Finale”:
    • Reports on Saudi Arabia’s Youth Soccer team winning an important match.
    • “Patna: Every Game is The Final”:Reports on a soccer player discussing the current season.

    Overall Tone:

    The tone of the articles is generally positive and optimistic, highlighting Saudi Arabia’s progress, development, and growing influence. There is a strong emphasis on national identity, cultural pride, and the Kingdom’s commitment to Vision 2030.

    This briefing provides a comprehensive overview of the key themes and articles found in the provided “Al Riyadh” newspaper excerpts.

    Saudi Arabia: Vision 2030 and Cultural Transformation

    ### What is the “Sports Boulevard” project in Riyadh?

    The “Sports Boulevard” project is a major initiative in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia, designed to transform the city into one of the most livable in the world. It involves creating a vast green space and recreational area that stretches across the city, promoting a healthy lifestyle, enhancing community engagement, and attracting both residents and visitors. It will connect the Eastern and Western parts of Riyadh and include spaces for various sports. The first phase includes five destinations including Wadi Hanifa.

    ### What are the key goals of the Saudi government’s economic reforms, as mentioned in the source?

    The Saudi government’s economic reforms, under Vision 2030, aim to diversify the economy away from oil dependency, promote private sector growth, attract foreign investment, and create new job opportunities for citizens. Key sectors targeted for development include tourism, technology, entertainment, and manufacturing.

    ### What is the significance of establishing the “Al-Masar” (The Path) sports foundation?

    The establishment of the “Al-Masar” sports foundation and the opening of its initial phases signifies a commitment to improving the quality of life for Riyadh residents and visitors. This initiative is in line with the goals of Saudi Vision 2030, which focuses on creating a vibrant society with a healthy lifestyle and a positive environment.

    ### What is the purpose of creating new squares named after historical figures?

    Creating new squares named after historical figures serves multiple purposes, including commemorating the nation’s history, reinforcing national identity, and creating attractive public spaces. These squares are designed to become landmarks that reflect the Kingdom’s heritage and offer interactive experiences for visitors.

    ### What is the role of Salic in strengthening Saudi Arabia’s food security?

    SALIC plays a crucial role in strengthening Saudi Arabia’s food security by investing in agricultural and food production companies globally. The acquisition of a significant stake in “Olam Agri” is a strategic move to diversify sources of grain supply and cover a substantial portion of the Kingdom’s needs, thereby ensuring long-term food security.

    ### What does the relocation of GPCA headquarters to Riyadh signify?

    The relocation of the Gulf Petrochemicals and Chemicals Association (GPCA) headquarters to Riyadh underscores Saudi Arabia’s growing influence and leadership in the petrochemicals sector in the region. It also highlights the Kingdom’s commitment to supporting innovation, sustainability, and the development of a thriving petrochemical industry.

    ### How is Saudi Arabia promoting its cultural heritage to the world?

    Saudi Arabia promotes its cultural heritage through initiatives like cultural weeks organized in countries like Qatar and Greece. These events showcase the Kingdom’s traditions, handicrafts, and historical connections, such as the relationship between humans and camels, to a global audience. The country is also showcasing their modern art in other nations, strengthening international relations and fostering collaboration.

    ### What is “rational emotion” and how is it applicable to the current day?

    “Rational emotion” refers to the balance between emotion and reason in decision-making and managing feelings. It involves recognizing emotions, understanding their causes, and responding in a constructive way rather than being impulsive or suppressive. It means to avoid the extremes of both the extreme of indifference and unchecked passion and impulsiveness. In everyday life, it’s applicable to dealing with challenges, strong emotions like anger or grief, and making informed decisions. It’s also the ability to be aware of your emotions and thoughts and to act on them without judging them. This helps us to look at the probable consequences in our decisions while remaining rational.

    Saudi Arabia: Vision 2030 and Ongoing Development

    Saudi Arabia is undergoing considerable development and change. Here’s a summary of Saudi Arabia, based on the provided sources:

    • Vision 2030: Saudi Arabia is working to achieve the goals of its Vision 2030, which includes becoming one of the best cities in the world to live in by improving the environment and promoting healthy lifestyles.
    • Al المسار الرياضي Project: There is an effort to translate this vision into reality. The first phase of the المسار الرياضي project has been completed and includes the opening of five destinations.
    • Economic diversification: There’s a focus on strengthening the economy, including the petrochemical sector, and promoting the Kingdom’s leading position. This involves enabling the contribution to a competitive and sustainable petrochemical industry, supporting economic growth.
    • Cultural and national identity:
    • There’s an emphasis on preserving the Kingdom’s history and culture.
    • “فن المملكة” Art Exhibition: Which reflects the richness of the cultural identity of the Kingdom. The exhibition explores the role of art, especially contemporary art, in building the community and memory.
    • The importance of culture: The importance of culture in strengthening national identity is stressed by King Salman.
    • Week of Saudi Culture: The “الأ�سابيع الثقافية الدولية” (“International Cultural Weeks”) initiative is a channel for strengthening cultural relations with other countries by showcasing Saudi culture and promoting cultural exchange and cooperation.
    • Founding Day: It is a national occasion that affirms the establishment and stability of the institution.
    • Philanthropy: Supporting charitable work is a prominent feature of Saudi society, reflecting values of compassion and solidarity.
    • Developments in Al Madinah Al Munawwarah: Al Madinah Al Munawwarah is planning to launch tenders for projects in 1446 AH, including construction, operation, and maintenance of facilities such as a sand washing plant and recreational complexes.
    • The Two Holy Mosques: Great efforts are being made to facilitate pilgrims’ performance of rituals with ease.
    • Media landscape: The Saudi media landscape is evolving, and the Saudi Media Forum is playing a role in shaping the future of media in the region.

    Food Security in Saudi Arabia: An Overview

    Here’s what the sources say about food security in Saudi Arabia:

    • National Security: Ensuring food security is considered vital to protecting the state’s interests and national security.
    • Government Initiatives: The Saudi government is aware of the importance of food security and has taken steps to address it. This includes transforming the General Grain Corporation into the General Authority for Food Security, which is responsible for regulating, developing, and promoting food security.
    • Extravagance and waste: There’s an increasing concern regarding excessive consumption of goods, especially food items, and this is considered an issue, especially during Ramadan. Factors contributing to food waste include weak purchasing habits and a lack of awareness of saving.
    • Investment: There is investment in the agricultural and food sectors.

    Al Hilal Football Club: History, Players, and Season Highlights

    Here’s what the sources say about the Al Hilal Saudi football club:

    • Al Hilal’s level in the current season is related to the coach’s tactics.
    • A former Al Hilal defender, Badah Al-Qahtani, shared memories of starting his sports career in Al Riyadh. He began playing at Tareq Bin Ziad School and then joined a team in the Al- مضجع neighborhood. He joined Al Hilal in 1387H as a central defender, playing for the second-division team.
    • Al Hilal has produced many stars throughout its seven-decade history.
    • In the 1397H season, Al Hilal’s defense, which included Abdulrahman Basheer (Al-Goul) and Badah Al-Qahtani, was outstanding. The team reached the King’s Cup final that season but lost to Al-Ahli.
    • After defeating Al-Kholod with five goals in a recent match, Al Hilal (“Al-Zaeem”) resumed training to prepare for a match against Al-Ahli.
    • The players took commemorative photos with the FIFA World Cup during the tour with the clubs.

    Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030: Goals, Components, and Progress

    Vision 2030 is a transformative plan for Saudi Arabia’s future. Here’s what the sources say about it:

    • Overall Goals:
    • Vision 2030 aims to make Saudi Arabia one of the best cities in the world to live in. This involves improving the environment and promoting healthy lifestyles.
    • It includes achieving sustainable development.
    • The plan is intended to diversify the Saudi economy and reduce reliance on oil.
    • Key Components:
    • Quality of Life: Aims to build a society where individuals enjoy a good quality of life with a healthy lifestyle in an attractive environment.
    • Economic Development:
    • Focuses on enabling the contribution to a competitive and sustainable petrochemical industry and supporting economic growth.
    • Diversifying the economy by developing sectors like tourism, technology, and transformative industries.
    • A goal is to increase the participation of women in the workforce.
    • Cultural and National Identity:
    • Vision 2030 seeks to promote national identity.
    • The plan recognizes the importance of culture in strengthening national identity.
    • Tourism and Investment: Vision 2030 focuses on attracting foreign investment by streamlining procedures and providing incentives.
    • Progress and Achievements:
    • Project completion: 87% of Vision 2030’s initiatives and programs have been completed or are on track.
    • Milestone achievement: 81% of the vision’s performance indicators have met or exceeded their goals for 2024-2025.
    • Foreign direct investment: The Kingdom attracted 96 billion riyals in foreign direct investment in 2023, exceeding its annual target.
    • Projects that align with Vision 2030:
    • المسار الرياضي: The المسار الرياضي project’s first phase has been completed. This project helps to improve the environment, promote a healthy lifestyle, and make the city more attractive for residents and visitors.
    • Real estate developments: Encouraging real estate and commercial investments in areas surrounding these locations such as cafes, restaurants and local markets.
    • The “فن المملكة” (Art of the Kingdom) exhibition: Which reflects the richness of the cultural identity of the Kingdom.
    • The Founding Day: Which aims to enhance national identity.
    • NEOM: NEOM is one of the initiatives to attract investment.

    Ramadan: Crescent Moon Sighting and Observance

    Here’s what the sources say about Ramadan and the sighting of the Hilal (crescent moon):

    • Determining the Start of Ramadan:
    • The sighting of the new crescent moon (Hilal) is essential in determining the beginning of Ramadan.
    • The Supreme Court makes the final decision on the start of Ramadan based on the received evidence.
    • Astronomical Calculations and Sighting:
    • Astronomical calculations are used to predict the birth of the new moon.
    • جمعية آفاق لعلوم الفلك (Association of Horizons for Astronomy): This association provides calculations regarding the visibility of the new crescent.
    • صفيان (Al-Safian): He stated that the new crescent would be born on Friday, شعبان 29, 1446 AH.
    • د. خالد الزعاق (Dr. Khaled Al-Zaaq): He is an expert in crescent sighting, and the Supreme Court relies on his observations. Though primarily an observer, not an astronomer, he offers precise analyses on the possibility of seeing the crescent, considering optimal conditions.
    • عمر كحيل (Omar Kuhail): He prepared and reviewed the material related to the astronomical calculations.
    • Technological Advancements:
    • The use of advanced technologies is increasing in crescent sighting.
    • Modern observatories equipped with specialized telescopes and high-precision electronic guidance are used to determine the location of the crescent.
    • Ramadan as a significant time:
    • Muslims focus on the Quran during Ramadan.
    • Ramadan is described as a blessed month.
    • General Authority for the Care of the Affairs of the Grand Mosque and the Prophet’s Mosque: The authority prepares and organizes the Grand Mosque for Ramadan.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Her Silent Cries: An Unputdownable Gripping Kidnapping Mystery Thriller by SHAYNE HOUSE

    Her Silent Cries: An Unputdownable Gripping Kidnapping Mystery Thriller by SHAYNE HOUSE

    This text presents excerpts from “Her Silent Cries: An Unputdownable Gripping Kidnapping Mystery Thriller” by Detective David Fox Myster. The narrative follows detectives Collins and Fox as they investigate the disappearance of Ursula Bates, a teacher with a complicated personal life and sister to someone that has been accused of black mail. Their investigation takes them to various locations and involves a number of people with possible connections to the crime, including high school students and the Governor of Pitmedden. The detectives uncover clues and secrets, exploring themes of kidnapping, blackmail, political influence, and the supernatural. The investigation leads them down different paths, looking at a variety of different people and locations, trying to discover the whereabouts of Ursula and if her disappearance is merely a runaway or a sinister plot.

    Her Silent Cries: A Study Guide

    Character List

    • Ursula Bates: A teacher who disappeared.
    • Detective David Fox: A detective investigating Ursula’s disappearance.
    • Collins: A detective working with Fox.
    • PomTom: A wealthy and potentially shady individual.
    • Richard Brenguahm: The nephew of Lord Brenguahm and a suspect in the investigation.
    • Alexander Jackson: The Governor of Pitmedden.
    • Flora Jackson: The Governor’s daughter.
    • Rebecca: A high school student interviewed by Collins.
    • Mrs. Nelson: A history teacher at the high school.
    • Hilda: Rebecca’s friend.
    • Sofia: Another student interviewed by Collins, a friend of Rebecca’s.
    • Nick: A student interviewed by Collins, dating Rebecca.
    • Timmy: Collins’ partner at the precinct.

    Plot Summary

    The novel centers around the disappearance of Ursula Bates, a teacher. Detectives David Fox and Collins investigate, uncovering a web of potential suspects and motives, including connections to wealthy and influential figures in the town of Pitmedden, such as PomTom and Richard Brenguahm. The investigation also leads them to a high school, where they interview students and teachers, revealing secrets and potential leads. The detectives encounter various obstacles, including uncooperative witnesses, misleading information, and their own personal struggles, as they try to piece together the truth behind Ursula’s disappearance. The investigation also focuses on potential connections to blackmailing, and the detectives explore leads involving the Governor of Pitmedden and illicit activities. The investigation ultimately leads to the discovery of Ursula and confrontation with the people involved in the abduction.

    Key Themes

    • Deception: Characters often hide their true intentions and identities, making it difficult for the detectives to uncover the truth.
    • Power and Influence: The wealthy and powerful figures in Pitmedden exert their influence, potentially obstructing the investigation and protecting their own interests.
    • Obsession: Obsession and revenge seem to be the main motifs for people committing crime.
    • Blackmail: The potential blackmail of Alex Jackson might play into the abduction.
    • Social Class: The story explores the divisions between social classes and how wealth impacts the investigation.
    • Trust and Betrayal: The detectives must navigate a complex web of relationships, where trust is easily broken, and betrayal lurks around every corner.

    Quiz

    1. What is Ursula Bates’ profession, and why is she the center of the investigation?
    2. Describe the working relationship between Detectives Fox and Collins.
    3. Who is PomTom, and what is his potential connection to the case?
    4. How is Richard Brenguahm connected to the investigation?
    5. What is the significance of the high school in the investigation?
    6. What is the red fabric and how is it connected to the crime?
    7. What role does Alexander Jackson, the Governor of Pitmedden, play in the story?
    8. Describe the significance of the town of Pitmedden as the setting of the novel.
    9. What are some of the personal struggles that Detectives Fox and Collins face during the investigation?
    10. Briefly describe the relationship between Rebecca and Nick.

    Quiz – Answer Key

    1. Ursula Bates is a teacher who has disappeared, triggering the investigation. The detectives hope to learn why she was abducted and to track down the perpetrator.
    2. Fox is a more experienced detective who is training Collins. They have a somewhat adversarial relationship, but they are effective in combining their skills.
    3. PomTom is a wealthy individual who has the means to carry out a crime. The detectives investigate him because he is shady and might have been romantically interested in Ursula.
    4. Richard Brenguahm is the nephew of a powerful man and is tied to the case because of his history with Ursula. He appears to have threatened her and is viewed as a possible suspect.
    5. The high school is important because Ursula was a teacher there, and the students might have been able to provide insight into her whereabouts. Additionally, Rebecca saw a ghost at the high school, and this might relate to the crime somehow.
    6. Ursula’s neighbor has red fabric that could be related to the case.
    7. Alexander Jackson is the governor, but he may have been involved in blackmailing. Because of this, the detectives investigate to see if this has anything to do with the crime.
    8. Pitmedden is an old town with a sense of aristocracy. It is a place where the powerful look down on everyone else.
    9. Fox and Collins don’t like one another very much, but they are willing to work together to see the job done. Fox has seen some things that he’d rather not have seen.
    10. Rebecca and Nick are teenagers dating in high school. The breakup and ghost story might relate back to the abduction.

    Essay Questions

    1. Analyze the role of social class in the novel and how it affects the investigation.
    2. Discuss the significance of the setting, Pitmedden, in creating atmosphere and influencing the events of the story.
    3. Compare and contrast the characters of Detectives Fox and Collins, examining their strengths, weaknesses, and working relationship.
    4. Explore the theme of deception in “Her Silent Cries,” providing specific examples of how characters mislead or hide the truth.
    5. Discuss the role of the supernatural elements in the novel, such as the ghost sightings, and how they contribute to the overall mystery.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Blackmailing: The act of extorting money or favors by threatening to reveal damaging information.
    • State Car: A car owned by the state and assigned to a government official.
    • Detective: A law enforcement officer whose primary job is to investigate crimes.
    • Precinct: A police station or headquarters for a specific geographic area.
    • Surveillance: The close observation of a person or group, especially one under suspicion.
    • Motive: A reason for doing something, especially a hidden or unacknowledged one.
    • Evidence: The available body of facts or information indicating whether a belief or proposition is true or valid.
    • Suspect: A person thought to be guilty of a crime or offense.
    • Alibi: Evidence that a suspect was elsewhere when a crime was committed.
    • Witness: A person who sees an event, typically a crime or accident, take place.

    Her Silent Cries: Kidnapping in Pittmedden

    Okay, here is a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided excerpts of “Her Silent Cries: An Unputdownable Gripping Kidnapping Mystery Thriller (Detective David Fox Myster…)”.

    Briefing Document: “Her Silent Cries: An Unputdownable Gripping Kidnapping Mystery Thriller”

    Overall Themes:

    • Kidnapping Investigation: The central plot revolves around the kidnapping of Ursula Bates, a school teacher. Detectives David Fox and Collins are leading the investigation.
    • Web of Suspects: The investigation quickly reveals a complex network of potential suspects with intertwined relationships, including ex-boyfriends, ex-husbands, students, teachers, and influential figures within the town of Pittmedden and Jacobsville.
    • Blackmail and Secrets: Blackmail appears to be a recurring motif, suggesting hidden secrets and motivations among the characters. The author, “PomTom” might be involved.
    • Corruption and Power: The investigation uncovers potential corruption linked to powerful individuals, including the Governor of Pittmedden and members of prominent families like the Jacksons and the Bremguahms.
    • Supernatural Elements: There are subtle hints of possible supernatural elements, involving ghosts, rumors of hauntings, and references to ancient legends.
    • Small-Town Dynamics: The narrative explores the complexities of relationships and rivalries within small towns, where secrets are difficult to keep.

    Key Individuals and Facts:

    • Ursula Bates: The victim of the kidnapping. A teacher who recently transferred from another school. She was divorced.
    • “Missing Person. Age 34. School. Teacher. Name: Ursula Bates. Divorced twice. She was transferred to Jacobsville High School but never reported. They found her car near the crossing of T123.”
    • Detective David Fox: One of the lead investigators. He is portrayed as experienced but somewhat unorthodox.
    • “Detective David Fox was a tall, bronzed, well-built, muscular man, serving the police investigation unit for over ten years.”
    • Detective Collins: Fox’s partner. He is depicted as more by-the-book and intellectual.
    • Working with Fox on a case meant “sleep deprivation, food deprivation and, basically, deprivation of all sorts.”
    • PomTom: A local author who writes erotic or controversial material. He is a person of interest in the investigation. Described as possibly a rapper
    • “Fox made a face, ‘and his name is PomTom? Oh, God! it sounds like a pet or worse-a Youtuber.’ ‘Can you stop being a boomer today? He is a rapper.’ Collins checked his mobile. ‘Let me check if he is awake now.”
    • Timothy Palmer (Lord Palmer of Pentegrave): Known as the rapper “PomTom.” He’s a person of interest in the investigation
    • “Timothy Palmer…known as PomTom, the rapper.”
    • Richard Bremguahm: Appears to be a potential suspect. He knows Ursula and is connected to the powerful Bremguahm family. Also is the nephew of Lord Bremguahm, the art teacher
    • “Richard Bremguahm is rich enough to buy a publishing house. He doesn’t need to blackmail a writer.”
    • Alexander Jackson: The Governor of Pittmedden. Potentially connected to some of the illegal activities surrounding the case.
    • “Alexander Jackson was the only son of the previous governor of the city.”
    • Rebecca: The Governor’s daughter
    • Pitmedden: An island, and one of the biggest and most exotic tourist spots of the country.

    Plot Points and Unresolved Questions:

    • The Red Fabric: A piece of red fabric was found connected to Ursula’s disappearance, but it could not be linked to the victim’s house
    • “None of the Ursula’s friends or colleagues could recognize the red fabric. An official search of her house also didn’t give any clue to the origin of the mysterious red fabric. As per Collins, they could not even prove that the red fabric had any connection to the case.”
    • The Car and the Crossing of T123: Ursula’s car was found near a specific crossing point which the detectives are investigating
    • “‘Wait, where is T123 where the car was found?’”
    • Connection to Jacobsville High School: Ursula was slated to teach at Jacobsville High School before her disappearance. The detectives suspect she met the kidnapper on her way to school.
    • “Double chances of getting caught. It proves my theory that she is kidnapped. She met the kidnapper on her way to school.”
    • Motel: A motel is only forty miles away from where they started. The reception immediately recognized a picture of Ursula Bates.
    • “The motel was only forty miles away from where they started. The man at the reception immediately recognized a picture of Ursula Bates.”
    • What was the motive for the kidnapping? Possible motives include romantic obsession, revenge, blackmail, and money. There is also a suggestion that Ursula’s writing may have put her in danger.
    • “It can be a part of the story. Kidnap of a teacher who falls in love with her kidnapper.”
    • The State Car: A state car is somehow connected, and the detectives need to trace the access of these vehicles.
    • “Our best bet is to trace the access of state cars by anyone at school.”
    • “Why would the want to show that she is kidnapped?”

    Quotes Highlighting Key Ideas:

    • “It is a part of the story. She is an author. Maybe she wants to try some new story like My Charismatic Kidnapper.” (Collins, suggesting a possible motive)
    • “You are an idiot. You see it her entire life as the life of an erotic writer because you want to have some spice in the case. A teacher’s kidnap will bore you. I see is as a kidnap of a teacher because she is kidnapped as a teacher. It will be foolish to ignore her teaching life.” (Fox to Collins, highlighting the contrast in their investigative approaches)
    • “There are many small things about him which can be explained separately. But when you put them together, it gives you a strong vibe of unfamiliarity. Do you know the biggest thing I have found about him? Make a guess. It is nothing. Absolutely nothing. No one knows him for a long time. He has got people who know him just for one sport or one hobby. No one knows him completely. No buddies, no girlfriends, no friends with benefits. It is like he is sprouted out of earth suddenly.” (Collins, describing Richard Bremguahm as suspicious)

    Next Steps:

    • Investigate the connection between Ursula and Jacobsville High School further.
    • Examine the role of PomTom and the blackmail allegations.
    • Research the Bremguahm and Jackson families for potential corruption or illicit activities.
    • Explore the rumors of hauntings and supernatural occurrences in Pittmedden.
    • Trace the movements of state cars and identify potential connections to the kidnapping.
    • Determine what information Richard Bremguahm is withholding.

    This briefing document provides a summary of the complex plot and characters in “Her Silent Cries.” It highlights the key themes, individuals, and plot points that require further investigation to solve the mystery of Ursula Bates’s disappearance.

    Detective David Fox: Ursula Bates Kidnapping Investigation

    Detective David Fox Mysteries FAQ

    • What is the central mystery or crime being investigated in this narrative?

    The core mystery revolves around the kidnapping of Ursula Bates, a teacher who had recently transferred schools. Detective David Fox and his partner Collins are investigating the case, facing various leads, suspects, and strange connections.

    • Who are the main detectives involved in the investigation, and what are some of their characteristics?

    The primary detectives are David Fox and Collins. Detective David Fox is depicted as someone who works on cases involving sleep deprivation and appears to be thorough in his work, checking security cameras, schools, and teachers. He also has a sharp and sometimes cynical wit. Collins appears to be the more level-headed of the two.

    • Who are some of the key people they interview during the investigation, and what connections do these people have to the victim or the case?

    Key people interviewed include PamTom (who is asked about a diamond guitar and a state flag on a vehicle), school teachers and students (some for possible connections on highways, toll plazas and state entry points), and the ex-husbands of a woman suspected of writing erotica. Richard Brenguoahm is also a key player.

    • What is the significance of the red fabric mentioned in the investigation?

    A piece of red fabric is found at Ursula’s home and also in a car being investigated. The detectives are trying to understand if this fabric has any connection to the kidnapping, as none of Ursula’s friends or colleagues could identify it.

    • What is the significance of Pitmedden and Jacobsville in the story?

    Pitmedden is an island community where much of the story takes place, including the Governor’s House and surrounding areas. Ursula was moving from Jacobsville. This move is a focal point of the investigation.

    • What is the dynamic between Fox and Collins like?

    Fox and Collins have a complex dynamic, marked by contrasting personalities and approaches to the investigation. Fox is intense and sometimes unorthodox, while Collins appears more grounded and methodical. Their dialogue often involves banter and philosophical discussions about crime and human nature.

    • What are some of the more unusual or supernatural elements mentioned in the story?

    The story hints at paranormal aspects, with mentions of ghosts, hauntings, and a general sense of unease surrounding certain locations, such as the castle and the Governor’s House. Also, one witness states, “Ever since she began seeing ghosts here. First at the castle, then she hallucinated again on Christmas party.”

    • What are some of the possible motives or theories being considered for Ursula’s kidnapping?

    The motives being considered range from a simple runaway situation, to a sexually motivated crime, or a situation that was part of a story or plan by Ursula herself. Blackmail has also been thrown around as a motive for the crimes.

    The Kidnapping of Ursula Bates

    The mystery revolves around a kidnapping.

    Key points about the kidnapping mystery:

    • Ursula Bates is worried as the story starts. She had not reached her destination of Jacobsville.
    • Ursula was a teacher who had recently transferred to Jacobsville High School.
    • The first clue Home Office has to the crime is the access of state cars by anyone at school.
    • Collins and Fox are working the case, and consider whether the kidnapping is a result of a sexually motivated crime.
    • Collins thinks it is a kidnapping which someone wants to look like a runaway.
    • Fox and Collins trace the route to Jacobsville.
    • Detectives Fox and Collins are looking for a person who knows Ursula and has access to a $350. Guy or girl doesn’t matter.
    • Richard Brenguahn is an interesting case study.
    • They are also investigating the angle that Ursula was getting blackmailed by PomTom.
    • The governor is completely linked to the abduction of Ursula Bates.

    Detective Fox and the Ursula Bates Kidnapping

    Detective Fox is a key figure in the kidnapping mystery of Ursula Bates. Here’s a breakdown of information about him from the sources:

    • General characteristics: Detective David Fox is described as tall, bronzed, and well-built. He is part of the police investigation unit and has earned the respect of his superiors through his work.
    • Working style: Fox is portrayed as dedicated and disciplined in his approach to law enforcement.
    • Skills and observations:Fox puts his team to screen school teachers and students for any connections with government officials and state entry points.
    • He is hopeful that a Mercedes-Benz can be easily recognized on camera footage.
    • Fox is good at gleaning information from suspects during interviews.
    • He is observant, noticing details like red fabric.
    • Theories and hunches:Fox considers whether the case is a serial killer or a personal vendetta.
    • He suspects someone wants to make the kidnapping look like a runaway.
    • He also considers the angle that Ursula was being blackmailed by PomTom.
    • Relationship with Collins: Fox works closely with Collins on the case. Their interactions reveal Fox’s personality and working style.
    • Connection to the Governor: The governor is completely linked to the abduction of Ursula Bates.
    • Last Seen Fox was last seen working with the team to make sure they are stumbling in the team.

    Ursula Bates Kidnapping: Character Profile and Investigation Details

    Ursula Bates is central to the plot as the victim in the kidnapping mystery. Here’s what the sources reveal about her:

    • Initial Situation: Ursula is worried at the start of the story because she has not arrived in Jacobsville and realizes she must have taken a wrong turn.
    • Background: She is a teacher who recently transferred from her local school to another school in Jacobsville. She found the new school through a mutual friend, and good feedback motivated her to accept the offer.
    • Description: In the story, Fox is shown a picture of Ursula, who is described as a young blonde woman.
    • Personal Information: Ursula’s missing person age is 34. Her school is teacher. Her marital status is divorced twice.
    • Possible Motives for Kidnapping:
    • Collins and Fox consider whether the kidnapping is a result of a sexually motivated crime.
    • Collins thinks it is a kidnapping which someone wants to look like a runaway.
    • They are also investigating the angle that Ursula was getting blackmailed by PomTom.
    • Vehicle: She was found near the crossing of T123.
    • Connection to the Governor: The governor is completely linked to the abduction of Ursula Bates.
    • Richard’s Feelings: Richard claims he didn’t want to breakup with Ursula, but she was insistent on living on the state. After a while, she realized this would not happen, so she broke up. He tried to get her back, and, in that attempt, he threatened her once.
    • Last Seen: Someone saw her accompanying a guy in a Mercedes.

    Ursula Bates Kidnapping: Governor’s Involvement

    The governor appears to be a key figure in the Ursula Bates kidnapping mystery.

    Here’s what the sources indicate about the governor’s involvement:

    • Link to Abduction: The governor is “completely linked to the abduction of Ursula Bates”.
    • Possible Motives: Ursula’s abduction may have been motivated by the governor’s connection to her.
    • Possible Connection: Rebecca’s mother was also attending the party. The new Mrs. Governor apparently didn’t mind the presence of ex-Mrs. She was a young college graduate who looked hardly a day older than Rebecca.
    • Residence: The Governor of Pitmedden lives at the castle.

    Ursula Bates Kidnapping: Police Investigation

    In the Ursula Bates kidnapping mystery, the police officers involved are key to solving the case.

    • Detective David Fox: He is described as tall, bronzed, and well-built and has earned the respect of his superiors. He is portrayed as dedicated and disciplined in his approach to law enforcement. Fox puts his team to screen school teachers and students for any connections with government officials and state entry points. He is observant, noticing details. Fox considers whether the case is a serial killer or a personal vendetta. He suspects someone wants to make the kidnapping look like a runaway. He also considers the angle that Ursula was being blackmailed by PomTom. The governor is completely linked to the abduction of Ursula Bates.
    • Collins: He works closely with Fox on the case. Collins thinks the kidnapping is someone who wants to look like a runaway. Collins and Fox consider whether the kidnapping is a result of a sexually motivated crime. Collins checked his mobile, there were still no signals.
    • Other Police Officers: The story mentions other police officers who may have been involved in the investigation.

    David Fox: Detective with a Taste for Green Living

    Imagine a metropolitan city with all its nuances, add some love of aesthetical interiors and green living. This is the world of David Fox.  He may be a hardcore detective with no sympathy for shrewd criminals, but he also had a sensitive side with a taste of natural living, cozy interiors and warm friendships.  His relation with Collins Hemsworth may look like of a standard hero and his loyal sidekick, but it is not true. If David Fox is an investigative machinery in himself, then Collins gives that machinery a sense of humor and a subtle recklessness. He is the much-needed spontaneity needed in the carefully crafted world of Fox. He is the sunlight that sneaks through the plush curtains covering the windows.  Let there be light!  Voila!

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Office 2021 Basics: Outlook & Teams

    Office 2021 Basics: Outlook & Teams

    This comprehensive video course covers Microsoft Office Basics, focusing on Outlook and Teams. The Outlook segment teaches users to manage emails, schedule meetings, and organize their inbox using folders and search features. It also explains how to format content, attach files, track messages, and utilize recall and resend functions. The Teams portion introduces the collaboration platform’s purpose and navigation. Users will learn to create teams and channels, chat with colleagues, share screens and files, schedule meetings, and adjust notification settings. The goal is to improve efficiency in managing mailboxes, facilitating team collaboration and communication.

    Office Basics: Outlook and Teams Study Guide

    I. Review Topics

    • Outlook Interface: Navigation of the Ribbon, Folder Pane, and Preview Pane.
    • Creating and Sending Messages: Addressing messages, subject lines, automatic spell check, and sending to multiple recipients.
    • Formatting Message Content: Using basic text formatting options, styles, and paragraph formatting.
    • Attaching Files and Items: Attaching files from your computer and OneDrive, and attaching Outlook items.
    • Tracking Messages: Requesting delivery and read receipts (and understanding the difference), and setting tracking as a default.
    • Recalling and Resending Messages: Understanding when recall is possible, and using the resend feature.
    • Organizing Messages: Marking messages for follow-up, and using folders (including creating new folders).
    • Search Folders: Creating and using search folders for unread mail, flagged items, and messages with attachments.
    • Outlook Calendar: Scheduling meetings and appointments, printing the calendar, and integrating email with the calendar.
    • Teams Purpose and Navigation: Understanding the purpose of Teams as a collaboration platform and navigating the Teams interface.
    • Setting up a Profile: Setting a profile picture and status.
    • Chatting with Colleagues: Engaging in one-on-one and group chats, and using video and audio calls.
    • Screen Sharing: Sharing your screen during a chat or meeting.
    • File Sharing via Chat: Sharing files with colleagues via chat.
    • Creating a Team: Creating a team from scratch and adding members.
    • Creating Channels: Creating channels for different topics within a team.
    • Creating a Post: Posting messages within a channel.
    • Searching in Teams: Searching for posts, files, and messages.
    • Scheduling Meetings: Scheduling meetings from Teams and Outlook (and understanding the benefits of each).
    • Notification Settings: Adjusting notification settings in Teams.

    II. Quiz

    Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.

    1. What are the key components of the Outlook interface, and how do you navigate them?
    2. How can you ensure that Outlook automatically checks your spelling and grammar before sending an email?
    3. Explain the difference between a delivery receipt and a read receipt in Outlook.
    4. Under what circumstances can you successfully recall an email in Outlook?
    5. How can search folders help you manage your email more efficiently?
    6. What is the difference between a meeting and an appointment in the Outlook calendar?
    7. What is the primary purpose of Microsoft Teams as a collaboration platform?
    8. How can you initiate a video call with a colleague in Teams?
    9. How can you share a file with your teammates using Microsoft Teams?
    10. What is a channel in Microsoft Teams, and what is its purpose?

    III. Quiz Answer Key

    1. The Outlook interface includes the Ribbon (with tabs like Home, Send/Receive, etc.), the Folder Pane (for navigating mailboxes), and the Preview Pane (for reading messages). You navigate by clicking on tabs in the Ribbon and selecting folders in the Folder Pane, or clicking on an email in the Preview Pane.
    2. To ensure automatic spell check in Outlook, go to File > Options > Mail and check the box labeled “Always check spelling before sending.” This will automatically check the spelling and grammar when you click the Send button.
    3. A delivery receipt confirms that an email has reached the recipient’s mailbox. A read receipt, on the other hand, is supposed to notify you when the recipient has opened and marked the email as read, though there is no guarantee that the email was actually read by the recipient.
    4. You can successfully recall an email in Outlook only if the recipient has not yet opened and marked the email as read. Additionally, the recipient must be using an Outlook account within the same Exchange environment.
    5. Search folders automatically organize emails based on specific criteria, such as unread messages, flagged items, or messages with attachments. This allows you to quickly access relevant emails without manually sorting through your inbox.
    6. A meeting in the Outlook calendar involves multiple people and requires sending an invitation to attendees. An appointment, conversely, is a personal event or reminder on your calendar that does not involve inviting others.
    7. Microsoft Teams is designed to be a persistent chat-based collaboration platform that facilitates document sharing, online meetings, and various other features for business communications and is used for organizing colleagues into work groups around topic-based discussion boards.
    8. To initiate a video call in Teams, first open a chat with the colleague and then click the video camera icon at the top right of the chat window. This will start a video call with that person, and the video call screen will open.
    9. Files can be shared with your teammates through file sharing functions of Microsoft Teams. Either upload a file to a chat by clicking the paperclip icon or upload the file to the general file sharing location associated with the specific Team.
    10. A channel in Microsoft Teams is a dedicated conversation board within a team, focused on a specific topic or project. Channels help organize communication and discussions within a team.

    IV. Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of email management in a professional setting, and explain how Outlook features like folders, search folders, and marking messages can enhance efficiency.
    2. Compare and contrast the benefits of scheduling meetings from Outlook versus scheduling them from Microsoft Teams. In which situations might one be preferable over the other?
    3. Describe the various ways Microsoft Teams facilitates collaboration among team members, and explain how these features can improve communication and productivity.
    4. Imagine you are training a new employee on how to use Outlook and Teams. Outline the key features you would emphasize and explain why those features are essential for effective communication and collaboration.
    5. Analyze the impact of Microsoft Teams on remote work and virtual teams. How does Teams address the challenges of remote collaboration, and what are its limitations?

    V. Glossary of Key Terms

    • Channel (Teams): A dedicated section within a team focused on a specific topic, project, or department. It serves as a conversation board for team members.
    • Delivery Receipt (Outlook): A notification confirming that an email has reached the recipient’s mailbox.
    • Folder Pane (Outlook): The section in Outlook that displays your mailboxes, folders, and navigation options.
    • Meeting (Outlook): An event on the Outlook calendar that involves multiple attendees and requires an invitation.
    • Outlook Item (Outlook): An item from your email, calendar, contacts, or tasks that can be attached to an email message.
    • Persistent Chat (Teams): An ongoing chat history that is saved and accessible to all participants.
    • Preview Pane (Outlook): The section in Outlook that displays the content of an email message when selected.
    • Read Receipt (Outlook): A notification requesting confirmation that an email has been opened and marked as read by the recipient.
    • Recall (Outlook): An attempt to retract an email message that has already been sent.
    • Ribbon (Outlook/Teams): The strip at the top of the application window that contains tabs with various commands and options.
    • Search Folder (Outlook): A virtual folder that automatically organizes emails based on predefined criteria.
    • Team (Teams): A group of people in Microsoft Teams who work together on a common project, goal, or area of interest.

    Office Basics: Mastering Outlook and Teams

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text, which is a transcript of a video course on Office Basics, specifically focusing on Outlook and Teams.

    Briefing Document: Office Basics Video Course (Outlook & Teams)

    Overview:

    This document summarizes the key themes and learning objectives of a “Learn It” video course on Office Basics, with a focus on Microsoft Outlook and Teams. The course aims to improve user efficiency and collaboration through practical demonstrations and step-by-step instructions. The instructor is Trish Connor Cato.

    I. Outlook Module:

    A. Core Themes & Learning Outcomes:

    • Efficient Mailbox Management: The course aims to improve the management of an Outlook mailbox. “Our learning outcomes here are that you will be more efficient when managing a mailbox.” This includes organizing messages, using folders and search folders, and effectively managing attachments.
    • Email Composition & Formatting: A key element is learning how to create, format, and send emails effectively. “We will ensure that spelling and grammar check happens automatically to avoid sending out messages with typos or poor grammar. We’ll learn how to format message content and attach files and items to messages.”
    • Message Tracking and Recall: Understanding features like read receipts, delivery receipts, and the ability to recall or resend messages.
    • Calendar Scheduling: Mastering the Outlook calendar for scheduling meetings and appointments. “We’ll switch over to the Outlook calendar and learn how to schedule meetings and how to print the calendar.”

    B. Key Concepts and Functionality:

    • Outlook Interface Navigation: The course begins with a tour of the Outlook interface, including the ribbon, folder pane, and preview pane. “So let’s discuss the interface here in Outlook so at the top you have a search box and underneath that you have your Ribbon right Outlook ribbon…”
    • Email Creation and Addressing: Covers how to create new emails, add recipients, and use the address book. “We’ll create a new message and add recipients.” Also, explains the use of semicolons to separate multiple recipients.
    • Automatic Spelling and Grammar Check: Emphasis on enabling automatic spell check before sending emails. “You’ll learn how to set the system to automatically check your spelling and grammar when you go to send a message so you never forget…” The setting is found in File > Options > Mail, under “Always check spelling before sending.”
    • Formatting Message Content: Explores formatting options similar to Word, including font styles, sizes, and paragraph formatting.
    • Attaching Files and Items: Demonstrates how to attach files from a computer or cloud storage and how to insert Outlook items (e.g., other emails) into a message. “You’ll learn how to attach files in an email and we’ll get there by exploring these topics…”
    • Message Tracking and Receipts: Covers requesting delivery and read receipts to confirm message delivery and viewing. “For this one we want to make sure that the recipient receives and reads the message so we’re going to go to the options tab on the ribbon and in the tracking group we’re going to request a delivery receipt and request a read receipt…”
    • Recalling and Resending Messages: Explains how to recall a message (if unread) or resend it with modifications. “So Outlook has another feature that we’re going to learn about now and this one is the recall or resend feature maybe you click send on an email accidentally and you weren’t done typing it or you send the email to the wrong person…”
    • Organizing Messages with Folders: Demonstrates creating and using folders to organize emails. “Having organization in your outlook mailbox is critical as such we will learn how to how to Mark messages and how to organize messages using folders.”
    • Using Search Folders: Introduce “search folders”, to be able to get flagged messages in a cohesive manner, unread mail from all folders to improve efficiency.
    • Calendar Management: Scheduling meetings and appointments, and printing the calendar in different formats. “We’ll switch over to the Outlook calendar and learn how to schedule meetings and how to print the calendar.”
    • Integration of Email and Calendar: Shows how to drag an email to the calendar to create an appointment with the email’s content. “You can drag an email onto your calendar and have all the details right there instead of having to retype them and I think that’s just a cool thing to know.”

    II. Teams Module:

    A. Core Themes & Learning Outcomes:

    • Understanding Teams Purpose: To understand the purpose of teams, chat-based collaboration platform, document sharing, online meetings and useful features for business Communications.
    • Collaboration: Focuses on using Teams for collaborative work, including chat, video conferencing, and screen sharing. “The last part of this course dives into teams Microsoft’s chat based collaboration platform…”
    • Team and Channel Management: Learning how to create and manage teams and channels for different projects and topics. “Then we move into creating a team which is a group of colleagues with a related purpose creating a channel which is a conversation board between teammates so you can have different channels for different topics and ultimately we will create a post.”
    • Effective Communication: Using chat, video, and screen sharing features to communicate effectively with colleagues. “The learning outcomes are using call video conference and screen sharing features as well as setting up collaborative teams and topic channels…”

    B. Key Concepts and Functionality:

    • Teams Interface and Navigation: Touring the Teams interface, including activity, chat, teams, calendar, and files sections. “I’m going to start on the left side of the screen and you have this navigation panel and I can click on activity and so it shows my feed at that point and I’ll see mentions replies and other notifications there…”
    • Setting up a Profile: Customizing profile picture and availability status. “One of the first things you may want to do when you start working in teams is setting up your profile.”
    • Chatting with Colleagues: Initiating and participating in chats, including group chats. “We’ll get into the team’s chatting feature by chatting with a colleague having a group chat making a video or phone call during a chat sharing your screen and sharing files via chat.”
    • Video and Audio Conferencing: Making video and audio calls, screen sharing during chats. “You have online video calling and screen sharing capabilities so a lot of my remote trainings are via Microsoft teams and I’m able to share my screen and the students are able to see it and follow along with what I’m doing…”
    • Sharing Files via Chat: Uploading and sharing files within chat conversations.
    • Creating and Managing Teams: Creating new teams and adding members. “Then we move into creating a team which is a group of colleagues with a related purpose…”
    • Creating Channels: Creating channels within a team for specific topics or projects. “Creating a channel which is a conversation board between teammates so you can have different channels for different topics…”
    • Posting Messages and Searching: Creating posts within channels and using the search feature to find information. “We’ll learn how to search for posts files and messages…”
    • Scheduling Meetings from Teams: Scheduling team meetings using the Teams calendar and scheduling assistant. “We’ll learn how to schedule meetings from teams before ending with adjusting our notification settings…”
    • Notification Settings: Configuring notification preferences. “Before ending with adjusting our notification settings.”

    Conclusion:

    The Office Basics video course, particularly the segments on Outlook and Teams, aims to equip users with the essential skills for effective communication, organization, and collaboration in a modern office environment. The course combines practical demonstrations with clear explanations of core functionality, making it accessible for users of varying skill levels.

    Mastering Microsoft Outlook and Teams: A Practical FAQ

    FAQ: Mastering Microsoft Outlook and Teams

    1. What are the primary functions covered within Microsoft Outlook, as discussed in the provided text?

    The text focuses on several key Outlook functions. These include navigating the interface, creating and sending new emails, managing recipients, ensuring automatic spelling and grammar checks, formatting message content, attaching files and items to emails, tracking messages (including recall and resend), marking messages for follow-up, organizing emails into folders, scheduling meetings using the Outlook calendar, and printing the calendar.

    2. How can you ensure that spelling and grammar are automatically checked in Outlook before sending an email?

    To enable automatic spelling and grammar checks, navigate to the File tab, select Options, then choose Mail. In the Compose messages section, ensure that the box labeled “Always check spelling before sending” is checked. With this setting enabled, Outlook will automatically perform a spelling and grammar check every time you click the Send button.

    3. What are “search folders” in Outlook, and how do they enhance email organization?

    Search folders are virtual folders that display emails based on specific search criteria, regardless of their location within your mailbox. The text recommends creating search folders for unread mail, mail flagged for follow-up, and mail with attachments. These folders allow you to quickly access all emails meeting those criteria without manually browsing through numerous subfolders, thereby increasing efficiency. For example, the ‘mail with attachments’ search folder helps to quickly identify large attachments that might be eating up mailbox space.

    4. What is the difference between a “meeting” and an “appointment” in Outlook, and how do you schedule a meeting?

    In Outlook, a meeting involves multiple attendees, whereas an appointment is a single event in your own personal calendar. To schedule a meeting, navigate to your calendar, select a time slot, and then click “New Meeting.” Add the required attendees, set the time and location, include a message if neccessary, and send the invitation. Recipients will receive the meeting request and will be able to accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation.

    5. What is the general purpose of Microsoft Teams, and what are its main features?

    Microsoft Teams is a chat-based collaboration platform designed to enhance business communication and teamwork. It offers features such as persistent chat (between individuals, groups, and teams), file sharing, online meetings, video conferencing, screen sharing, and the ability to create collaborative teams and channels for focused discussions. Teams supports integration with other apps, and Audio conferencing provides phone access to meetings

    6. How do you create a new team and a new channel within that team in Microsoft Teams?

    To create a team, click “Join or create a team” at the bottom of the Teams section, and select “Create team.” Choose to create it from scratch, and select whether the team is private or public. Give your team a name and description. After creating the team, you can add members from within and outside of your organization. To create a channel within a team, click the ellipsis next to the team name and select “Add channel.” Name the channel and determine its privacy settings (standard for all team members or private for specific teammates).

    7. How can you use the search function effectively in Microsoft Teams?

    The search bar at the top of the Teams window allows you to search for messages, files, people, and more. Typing a keyword (e.g., “Excel”) will return relevant results. The slash (“/”) command provides a list of actions you can take, such as starting a chat or viewing recent files. Search can be used to quickly find information or content within Teams.

    8. What steps are involved in scheduling a meeting using the Teams calendar, and how does it integrate with Outlook?

    To schedule a meeting from the Teams calendar, navigate to the Calendar tab, select a desired time slot, and click “New meeting.” Add required attendees, set the time, add a channel to the meeting, and enter details. Send the invitation. Scheduled meetings will appear on both your Teams calendar and your Outlook calendar, demonstrating the seamless integration between the two platforms. You can also schedule from Outlook and include an attachment that isn’t possible when scheduling from within Teams.

    Outlook Interface Overview

    In Outlook, the interface includes several key components:

    • Search Box At the top.
    • Ribbon Located beneath the search box, the ribbon contains tabs such as Home, Send and Receive, Folder, and View. Depending on the context, such as when composing a message, the ribbon changes to display relevant tabs like Message, Insert, Options, Format Text, and Review. The ribbon can be customized.
    • Quick Access Toolbar Usually displayed above the ribbon, but can be customized to appear below it.
    • Folder Pane Situated on the left side of the screen, the folder pane contains folders such as the inbox. It can be minimized, expanded, and pinned to remain open. The folder pane also provides access to the mail icon for the inbox, calendar, contacts, and to-do list.
    • Mail Section In the middle section of the interface, the mail section displays a preview of messages.
    • Preview Pane Located on the right, the preview pane allows users to view the content of messages without opening them.
    • Status Bar At the bottom of the screen, the status bar displays information such as the number of items in the inbox and connection status. It also includes view buttons for normal and reading views, as well as a zoom slider.

    Outlook Email Formatting Guide

    When composing emails in Outlook, the message content can be formatted similarly to working in Word.

    Where to find formatting options:

    • Message Tab The message tab on the ribbon provides basic text formatting options in the ‘Basic Text’ group.
    • Format Text Tab The ‘Format Text’ tab also has a ‘Font’ group (previously named ‘Basic Text’ group) with styles and formatting options, and a ‘Paragraph’ group.

    How to format:

    • To format text, select the desired text in the message body.
    • Use the tools in the ‘Font’ group to modify the font, size, color, and style (bold, italic, underline). For example, the letter “I” can be selected to italicize, or the font size can be increased using the large letter “A”.
    • Styles can be applied to titles or headings to change their appearance. On the ‘Format Text’ tab, hover over different heading styles in the ‘Styles’ group to preview their impact on the text.
    • Normal formatting or pre-defined styles can be applied.

    Teams Chat: Features and Usage

    The Teams chat feature allows for communication between individuals and groups.

    Key aspects of using chat in Teams:

    • Starting a Chat To begin a new chat, click the new chat button, and enter the name, email, group, or tag of the person you want to message.
    • Chat Features You can format messages, set delivery options, attach items, use emojis, GIFs, and stickers, schedule meetings, access Stream, give praise, use approvals, and more.
    • Group Chats You can include additional people in a chat by clicking “Add people” in the upper right corner of the chat screen. Adding someone to an existing chat creates a group chat. You can name the group chat using the pencil icon. Note that adding an external user to a chat may disable video and audio call, and screen sharing functions.
    • Chat Organization Your most recent chats appear at the top of the chat list. You can pop out a chat into a new window using the arrow icon.
    • Video and Audio Calls In a chat with members of your organization, you can initiate a video or audio call using the corresponding icons in the upper right corner.
    • Screen Sharing During a call, you can share your screen by clicking the share button. A red border appears around the screen being shared.
    • File Sharing You can share files via chat by clicking the paper clip icon below the message input area and uploading a file from your computer or OneDrive.

    Outlook Calendar: Meetings, Appointments, and Integration

    To schedule meetings and appointments using the Outlook calendar, remember that meetings involve multiple people while appointments are for personal scheduling.

    Accessing the Calendar

    • In Outlook, the calendar can be accessed by clicking the calendar icon at the bottom of the folder pane.
    • To view the calendar and email inbox simultaneously, right-click the calendar icon and choose to open the calendar in a new window.

    Scheduling a Meeting

    • Select a time slot on the calendar and click ‘New Meeting’ on the ribbon.
    • Add a title, invite attendees, set the duration, and type a message.
    • A location can be specified for the meeting.
    • Files can be attached to the meeting invitation via the insert tab.
    • The scheduling assistant can be used to view the availability of attendees.
    • Once the details are complete, click ‘Send’.
    • The meeting will then appear on the calendar.
    • Invited attendees will receive a meeting invitation. The meeting is added to their calendar once they accept the invitation.

    Scheduling an Appointment

    • To create an appointment, double-click on a time slot in the calendar.
    • Enter the details of the appointment, such as the subject and time.
    • An appointment is for personal scheduling and does not involve inviting others.

    Printing the Calendar

    • To print the calendar, use the Ctrl+P shortcut key to access the print preview.
    • Select a print style, such as daily, weekly, or monthly.
    • A date range for printing can be specified in the print options.
    • Click ‘Print’ to print the calendar.

    Integrating Email and Calendar

    • Emails can be dragged directly onto the calendar to create an appointment.
    • Click and hold on an email, then drag it to a date and time on the calendar.
    • This creates an appointment with the email subject as the title and the email content in the body.
    • The appointment can then be turned into a meeting by inviting attendees.

    Scheduling Teams Meetings from Outlook Calendar

    • When scheduling from the Outlook calendar, select ‘Teams Meeting’ on the calendar ribbon.
    • This creates a Teams meeting, and invitees can be added.
    • Files can be attached to the meeting invitation, a feature not currently available when scheduling a Teams meeting from within Teams itself.

    Microsoft Teams: Notification and Settings Guide

    In Teams, notification settings can be adjusted to control how you are alerted to different activities.

    To access the notification settings:

    • Go to the settings and more ellipses to the left of your profile picture and go into settings.
    • Go to Notifications.

    Key settings and options include:

    • Missed Activity Emails: Choose how often you receive emails about missed activities or turn them off.
    • Notification Style: Choose “Teams built-in.”
    • Message Preview: Choose whether to show message previews in notifications.
    • Play sound for incoming calls and notifications: Turn on or off notification sounds.
    • Teams and Channels: Customize notifications for all activity, mentions, and replies. Choose to receive desktop and activity notifications or customize the settings.
    • Custom Notifications: You can customize what you’re getting notifications for and how you receive them. For example, you can choose to get a banner and a feed, only show in feed, or turn notifications off.
    • Mentions: Choose to be notified when you’re mentioned in a channel, including pop-up banners if you are working in Outlook.

    Other settings that can be accessed include:

    • File settings: Set files to always open Word, PowerPoint, and Excel files in Teams.
    • General Tab: You can change the theme, chat density and language and enable spell check, and schedule out of office.
    Office 2021 Basics: Outlook & Teams

    The Original Text

    welcome everyone I’m Trish Connor Cato and this is the office Basics video course the first part of the module covers Outlook the email calendaring program from Microsoft as with all applications will be introduced to the interface and learn how to start a new message and add message recipients we will ensure that spelling and grammar check happens automatically to avoid sending out messages with typos or poor grammar we’ll learn how to format message content and attach files and items to messages then we’ll move on to tracking messages and how to use the recall and resend message feature of Outlook having organization in your outlook mailbox is critical as such we will learn how to how to Mark messages and how to organize messages using folders we’ll switch over to the Outlook calendar and learn how to schedule meetings and how to print the calendar the last part of this course dives into teams Microsoft’s chat based collaboration platform we’ll start by gaining an understanding of the purpose of teams then we’ll learn how to navigate in teams and set up a profile we’ll get into the team’s chatting feature by chatting with a colleague having a group chat making a video or phone call during a chat sharing your screen and sharing files via chat then we move into creating a team which is a group of colleagues with a related purpose creating a channel which is a conversation board between teammates so you can have different channels for different topics and ultimately we will create a post we’ll learn how to search for posts files and messages and how to schedule meetings from teams before ending with adjusting our notification settings as mentioned module 2 begins with Outlook and ends with teams so we’re going to get started with Outlook now our learning outcomes here are that you will be more efficient when managing a mailbox and you’ll be able to attach files in an email and we’ll get there by exploring these topics we’ll start by navigating the Outlook interface like we did with Excel and PowerPoint will create a new message and add recipients you’ll learn how to set the system to automatically check your spelling and grammar when you go to send a message so you never forget and you’ll learn how to format the message content we’ll attach files and items to emails you’ll learn how to track messages recall and resend messages and Mark messages then we’ll get into organizing messages using folders scheduling meetings on the Outlook calendar and how to print the calendar so I’ve already launched Outlook I launched it from my taskbar and again you can go to your office your Windows button or your search button to search for it and launch the application so let’s discuss the interface here in Outlook so at the top you have a search box and underneath that you have your Ribbon right Outlook ribbon you have your Home tab send and receive tab folder tab view tab you may or may not have your developer tab up there you have a help Tab and you may or may not have acrobat and you don’t need developer or acrobat for what we’re doing in here I’m back on the Home tab underneath the ribbon here I have a little bit of a quick access toolbar and normally the quick access toolbar shows above the ribbon right but this one here if I go to the down arrow next to it I can tell it to show above the ribbon so now it’s above the ribbon and that of course can be customized like any other office program on the left side of your screen you have your folder Pane and I can minimize it by doing that left Arrow at the top of it and expand it again by doing the right arrow and then if I want it to stay open I can pin the folder pane by using the push pin there so it’s back to the way it was when we came in here so these are the folders that you have in your folder pane now on mine I have a lot of folders underneath my inbox and you’ll learn how to do that but your basic folders are here I have multiple emails coming into I actually have three different email addresses that come into this Outlook so I have personal and then I have this training one as well as my main one and so at the very bottom of the folder pane you have the mail icon where in the inbox you can get to your calendar from there you can get to your contacts you can get to your to-do list from there as well at the bottom and then in the middle section you have your mail this is where your mail comes up and you’re seeing a little bit of a preview of all of the messages and then over on the right you have a preview pane so if I click on any of the messages in my inbox then I can actually see the message in the preview pane I don’t actually have to double click to open the message if I don’t want to so you have a little bit of a status bar at the very bottom so it tells me I have 121 items right now in this particular inbox and then over to the right it lets me know all my folders are up to date I’m connected I have a couple of view buttons normal view which we’re in and reading view which will expand the screen a little bit more or it should and then you do have a zoom slider over there so that is your navigation you know getting used to navigating an Outlook I mean you’re going to use the ribbon you’re going to use the folder pane to switch to different things so now we’re ready to create an email message so the first button on the Home tab is new mail or when you’re sitting in your inbox you can do control and the letter n as in New to bring up a new mail window and by the way in Outlook if I was in the calendar and I did control and it would bring me a new appointment window so depending on where you are you’ll get a different result so now I’m in this Untitled message right and notice the ribbon has changed when you’re in a message it starts with the message tab you have insert tab options format text review and help so to address your message you can simply type an email address if the email is already in your contacts it will pop up so I’m going to type an email address here that is not in my contacts and it’s not even a real email address it’ll give me a suggestion but that doesn’t mean that it’s a real email address it just means that it’s accepting it and it’s formatted that way so you can use an email even if the person is not in your contact list I’m going to change that one I want to address it to my training email which is in my contacts right and so that one shows up with the little yellow icon on it because it’s in my contacts and it’s letting me know that that person is you know free for the next eight hours kind of thing so that’s because they’re in my contact list and I can close that so you should put a subject for your email and this is going to be Outlook communication and then you click in the body and you type your email so I’m going to say hello Trish this is an Outlook communication for the learn it video course of office basics and then I’ll just type my name I know it’s weird sending it to Trish from Trish but it’s a different email address and you have a message now notice when we address the message to training it put a colon after training and that means I can just keep adding more recipients if I wanted to put another email address up there I can just click it there here’s my recent people but I can just click there and I can type another email address or start typing a contact name and pop it in there so they just need to be separated by semicolons if you want to send it to multiple people and so now I am actually going to click Send and notice that spell check happens automatically I’m going to show you the setting to ensure that that happens automatically for you if it’s not happening right now your message is already sent but we want to get it set so that when you click Send spell check happens so learn it is correct so I’m going to just say ignore all and it sent the message now how do I know that it sent the message well I can go to my sent items folder and you can see that sent message there let me collapse all these groups and just expand today so you can see my Outlook communication message has been sent and I went back to my inbox so everything you send goes into your sent items I believe the setting is a default setting now but I want to show you the setting that causes spell check to happen as soon as you click Send on a message so we’re going to go to the file tab on the ribbon and on the bottom left we’re going to go to options and then Outlook options on the left you’re going to click on mail so this setting right here always checks Spelling before sending is what enables that and you want to make sure that is checked otherwise you would have to go within your message you’d have to go to the review tab before sending and check the spelling this will make it happen automatically so always check Spelling before sending and we can cancel out of Outlook options foreign so since I sent that message to my other account I want to show you what it looks like when I receive a new email if I go to my inbox I already clicked on it but if I go to my inbox here you’ll see this email right that I sent from my other self and I can just with it being selected I can look at it and the preview pane over on the right now I’m going to go back to my normal inbox and we’re going to do another new email and I’m going to address it to my other self again and by the way you can send emails to yourself I’m using a different account but you can actually send emails to the account that you’re sending an email from and so I have it addressed and the subject for this one is going to be format message content and I’m gonna type please let me know the progress on the slideshow again the presentation is scheduled for Tuesday and I’d like it in my hands by Monday so I can rehearse thank you all right so when it comes to formatting message content it’s very similar to working in word I’m going to just select the text of my message and right there on the message tab of the ribbon you have your basic text group right you also have a format text tab on the ribbon which has the basic text group it’s now called the font group as well as all kinds of styles and other formatting things you have your paragraph group there as all of that kind of stuff so in the font group I’m going to just make the font italicized right I use the letter I I could have done control I there right and I want to make the font size a little bit larger so I’m going to use the big letter A here to increase the font size just one click so that now it’s 12 point and I’m not going to give it a font color go ahead and make it bold as well so something like that so normal formatting or you can use some Styles and stuff and I’m not going to use the style for this email but just simple basic formatting right and I’m going to go ahead and send and let’s immediately do another new email address it to whoever you’ve been addressing them to even if it’s yourself right and this subject is going to be more formatting and in the message type the word Monday press enter twice and type review slash rehearse presentation enter enter Tuesday presentation day Wednesday feedback collected and analyzed Thursday and I’m just making this up off the top of my head Implement changes Friday present to company something like that and then what you’re going to do is you’re going to select Monday now if you hold down your control key you can go ahead and select Tuesday Wednesday and I’m double clicking on these days you can double click a word to select it my control key down Thursday and Friday and then we’re going to go to the format text tab on the ribbon and in the Styles group hover over heading one and you’ll see how it’s impacting the days of the week in your message hover over heading 2 and it’ll be like yeah that’s a better one so I’m going to give that a heading to style for those titles and you can go ahead and send that message so now we’re going to create a new message and we’re going to attach the Excel file that we used in module one to that message before we do that I want to point out your indicator when you have new messages in your inbox if you look at my inbox over here you’ll see that I have two unread messages if I click on that inbox those are the format message content and more formatting messages that we created and sent if I click on more formatting and I can read the message in the preview Pane and then I click on format message content more formatting becomes marked as read as soon as I move away from it it will mark it as red so now it says I only have one unread item in this inbox and when I click away from format message content that is marked as red so now I don’t have any new messages in that inbox gonna go back to my main one and we’re going to do new email again address it and the subject is going to be Excel Essentials yeah the subject is going to be Excel Essentials the body of the message I’m going to type hi I’ve attached the Excel Essentials file for your review if there are any changes needed I have to have them by Monday thanks and then Trish now there are two places where you can attach a file from on the message tab you have attach file right it also includes attaching an item which we’ll talk about separately if the file is on OneDrive or SharePoint you can get to those locations or you can browse your computer that’s one place where you can attach or you can go to the insert tab of the ribbon and they have the include group there you have attach file and that gives you the web locations in your PC but a separate item there is Outlook item so I’m going to just use that attach file browse this PC and I’m in the directory where I save that Excel Essentials file and I’m going to just double click it so let’s say I attached a wrong file right underneath the subject you can see your attachment and I could do the drop down arrow and choose remove it if I had double clicked the wrong file I’m not going to do that I’m going to leave it there and now I’m going to send now let’s go ahead and do another new email and address it and the subject is going to be Outlook item and I’m going to just type in the body please review and let me know what you think thanks Trish I’m gonna go to the insert tab of the ribbon and this time instead of attach file I’m going to choose Outlook item and so basically it’s showing me stuff from my inbox or I could navigate to different folders right so you can forward an email to somebody but this is another way of getting an email to someone if you don’t want to do the forward so I’m going to just select from last week I had this Microsoft power automate July newsletter is what I’m going to select right that’s what I want so I double clicked it and it inserted it into this message and we’re going to go ahead and send so it shows me I have the two unread items in my other mailbox and when you get an email with an attachment it will show the paper clip right so you’ll see the paper clip that indicates it has an attachment so I’m going to click on the Excel Essentials one and one of the best pieces of advice I can give you when you’re working in Outlook is if you receive an attachment and you need to keep it get rid of it in your outlook so I’m going to go over to the preview pane I’m going to do the down arrow next to excel Essentials and I can save if I had five different files attached to this email I could then save all attachments so you want to get in the habit and I’m going to just say save as right and I’m just going to throw it onto my desktop real quick I don’t want to put it in the same directory where I got it from so I’m going to just put it on my desktop save it there and once I have it saved on my system I can remove the attachment in Outlook large attachments can eat up the space in your inbox so you want to get in the habit if you need to keep an attachment save it to your computer and then remove it from the email so I’m going to go to the drop down arrow and I’m going to choose remove attachment and I’m going to confirm that I’m removing it and that way I still have the email but I don’t have the attachment that attachment takes up space in my inbox and so you you have a limited amount of space right depending on your organization setup and what will happen if you start getting you know to that limit you won’t be able to receive emails ultimately so if you get in this habit that will help you from getting to that limit as quickly as possible so the Outlook item this is the newsletter here and I can save this as well or I can just remove it once I open it and look at it so I’m going to open it I won’t remove this one I’ll open it and it shows me the newsletter right and everything now notice that some of the like icons the pictures are not showing so up here it’ll give you this blue band if there’s an issue so you click there and you choose download pictures and then you’ll see that it looks better and I’m going to go ahead and close that message and so I’m going to save the changes yeah it’s not going to let me but that’s okay so I’ll just say no and that’s because we told it to download the pictures and stuff like that I’m going to click away from that message so it’s marked as red and I’m going to go back to my main inbox go ahead and bring up a new message and address it and the subject is going to be tracking a message and I’m going to type hi would you please let me know if you can meet for lunch on Wednesday at Applebee’s I’ll just put in Applebee’s for this thanks Trish now for this one we want to make sure that the recipient receives and reads the message so we’re going to go to the options tab on the ribbon and in the tracking group we’re going to request a delivery receipt and request a read receipt so the delivery receipt really only means that the email hit the recipient’s inbox so it’s in their inbox the read receipt is supposed to track when the message has been read don’t it doesn’t mean that the recipient read the message so you know when we click on a message and then go to another message it marks the previous message as read well did they really read it that’s the case but anyway you’ll get a notification in either case and we’re going to go ahead and send if your spell check comes up I’m going to just add Applebee’s to the dictionary and so immediately almost immediately I get my delivered response right it hit my email it hit the recipient’s inbox so you get that delivered message okay great I know it’s in their inbox now I’m gonna go to my other inbox and I’m gonna actually reply to this message and I’m gonna say absolutely what time works for you and I’m gonna send it when I go back to my other inbox you’ll see well it’ll update in a moment so I delivered my tracking message and I got my response and I should get my read receipt as well because it’s marked as red now another little thing if you go to descend and receive and you can do send and receive all folders it does it periodically I mean when you send something it initiates that process but if you think something is stuck you can click that send receive all folders and it will sync everything and if there’s anything hanging out there it will come through so I’ll let that send and receive process happen it’s still hourglassing for a minute and I’m not sure why my system is being crazy right now but I should have gotten a read receipt which would say your message has been read by the following recipient because that is marked as read I don’t know why that didn’t happen I hope it happened for you but again the delivery receipt only means it’s in the recipient’s mailbox the read receipt would mean that they actually read the message and again I apologize I can’t get my read receipt to show up now we did that from within the new message window if you want to track messages all your messages you won’t have to go to that options Tab and check the boxes if you set it up as a default and I’m going to show you how to do that now let’s go back to file options and click mail again on the left side and you’re going to scroll down so notice we have different topics here compose messages Outlook pains we’re going to scroll down until we see track messages tracking rather and in track message you can for all messages sent you can request a delivery and a read receipt here and that way it will happen automatically all the time if you want that enabled go ahead and check those two boxes and click ok I’m going to actually uncheck mine and click ok so that way you won’t have to do it on a message by message basis it will always do that for all the messages that you send foreign so Outlook has another feature that we’re going to learn about now and this one is the recall or resend feature maybe you click send on an email accidentally and you weren’t done typing it or you send the email to the wrong person as long as that person doesn’t read the email you will be able to recall it or another situation is you send out an email to a person and then after you click send you realize that you wanted to send that email to multiple people so in that case you can use the resend feature and either change the recipients or the content of the email now we’re going to set up to do this now let’s do another new email message and address it and we’re going to call this one recall email as the subject and I’m gonna type this is a demo for the video course and we will attempt to recall this email and I’m going to click Send so it’s saying you may have forgotten to attach a file sometimes this will pop up sometimes it’s useful sometimes it’s not I didn’t want to attach anything I’m going to choose send anyway now in order to try to recall that message I’m not going to go to my other email and read it I’m going to just make believe I haven’t seen it and I need to go from my inbox to my sent items and then I’m going to open that recall email message and sent items and go to the file tab of the ribbon and this is where you will find the message resend and recall features so I’m going to click on resend or recall and we’re going to select recall this message so it will tell you that some recipients may have already read this message and if they haven’t right you can tell it to just delete unread copies of this message or you could delete unread copies and replace with a new message we’re going to leave it on delete unread copies of this message and we’re going to leave the Box checked at the bottom tell me if the recall succeeds or fails for each recipient so if I sent this to 10 recipients and five of them read it it should be able to recall it from the five who haven’t read it and I’m going to click ok so it lets me know in the scent item that I tried to recall this message and it gives me the date and time I’m going to go ahead and close that message go back to my inbox up here and it lets me know that I got a message recall success so that message has been removed from my other inbox right because I didn’t read it in there and that’s why the recall was successful and I got that recall message now we’ll do it again let’s do another new email address it and we’ll call this recall message two we are going to attempt to recall this message and then send this time I’m going to go to my other inbox and I’m going to mark that messages read by clicking on it and away from it so I’ve made it red it’s marked as red I’m going to go back to my sent items folder and I’m going to open up the recall message to I’m going to go to the file tab resend or recall and I’m going to choose recall again I’m going to leave the same options and click ok I’m going to close that sent item go back to my inbox and you’ll see that I got a message recall failure this time because it was already read now we’re going to do another one let’s do another new email here address it and we’re going to call this resend and I’m going to type I’d like to and then make believe that my phone rings somebody comes in the office I get distracted I need to switch to a different screen and I actually accidentally on purpose click Send okay so in my sent items I’m going to open up that resend message go to the file tab and I’m going to go to resend or recall again and this time I’m going to choose resend this message and so it gives me the option to add more recipients or finish the sentence I’d like to finish typing this message contents and then I can go ahead and send it and I’m going to close the original sent item and so if I go to my other inbox I could have recalled the original one and then did a resend but they’re gonna get both right so the I like to and then this one so recall and resend can be very handy for you it’s just not foolproof meaning that if you send the message and somebody reads it or it’s marked as read you will not be able to recall it so you have the ability to Mark messages important messages that you might need to follow up on or you know for a variety of reasons you might want to mark your messages you’ll notice in my inbox I have several messages in here that have these flags on them and that’s what happens when you mark a message so I’m going to show you how to do this I have a message in my inbox you could do this on any message in your inbox it doesn’t matter I’m actually going to go to my other inbox where I some of the messages we sent are and I’m going to hover over a message and on the right side when I hover over the message when I see the flag I’m actually going to right click on the flag so I can set a flag for today tomorrow this week next week no date custom whatever right and so I’m gonna say this Outlook communication I want to take a look at this again next week so I’m going to just put the next week flag on there right and for another message the more formatting message now if I click just click on the flag right it just puts a flag it didn’t have just follow up right if I right click then I get to say so when I don’t right click it will give me the today flag if I do right click then I can choose next week or a custom option and thing like that right so one of the things I want to introduce here that will make it easier for you to find your flag messages and I’m going to kind of add this to the course we’re going to talk about search folders in a little while and it’ll be a great way for you to be able to get to all of your flagged messages quickly so hold that thought it’s not like you’re going to want to go through your inbox and scroll down to see every flag and then look at the flag to see what’s going on with it right that’s not how this is going to work that’s not very efficient so you’ll learn about search folders in just a little while and then you’ll be able to see how to get these flags in a cohesive manner so marking messages is one way of organization which you’ll see when we learn about search folders but another organization technique the most typical one is organizing using folders so in my main mailbox under my inbox I have that expand arrow in front of it I have a bunch of different folders different topics some of them are clients some of them are just like my LinkedIn stuff my Microsoft stuff that comes in and that way I can organize my messages now I’m going to show you how to set up folders underneath your inbox so you can literally right click on inbox and choose new folder and then you just type the name of the folder and we’re going to call this office basics and it puts it in your folders lists mine because I had other folders there it’s an alphabetical order and when I click on that folder it’s empty I’m going to go back to my inbox right and I am going to just move some these message recalls and the delivered one I’m gonna move those to that folder right so I can select the first one and just drag and drop it on top of office basics I can select I’m gonna actually do the rest of these three for today so I’m gonna select the first one hold down shift and click on the last one for today and I’m gonna drag those to the office Basics folder so now those are not in my regular inbox anymore they’re in a subfolder of the inbox for organization purposes now this is the tricky part right I have all of these different folders and so if I get and I have some rules set up so if I get email from this particular client the Netherlands it goes directly into that folder and then that folder will have the number one or two however many unread emails are in there if you’re going to use the folder structure that’s not going to be as efficient as it can be because you don’t want to have to go to each of your folders to read your mail items and this is where search folders come in so what I’m going to do is I just collapsed my inbox real quick and you’ll notice in your folder pane you have search folders I’m going to click on search folders and I’m going to choose new search folder so the one that I always always recommend to people well there’s a couple that I always recommend but unread mail so I’m gonna just that’s already selected I’m going to click ok so now I have an unread mail folder right click on search folders and choose new search folder and then I’m going to select mail flagged for follow-up and click ok and then there’s one more that I recommend right click on search folders new search folder and I’m going to say mail with attachments under organizing mail and click ok so this is how this works let me get out of this with attachments I’ll just go back to my regular inbox first right so first of all I have five things marked for follow-up here if you wanna in your inbox in this inbox in your inbox if you want to Mark a few things for follow-up then all of them can be accessed from this four follow-up folder so I don’t have to look through my inbox to see everything with a flag right it’s all in one folder and then my unread mail so I’m gonna go to my other inbox and I’m gonna send myself a new email I’m just going to call it unread mail search folder and send so one of the things that happens is that email came into my inbox and it’s showing me I have one unread message in my inbox but I have one unread message an unread mail unread mail is not just the inbox it’s any of the other folders that you created so if I get something from the Netherlands and it goes into that folder and it’s unread or this Lan project that I’m managing if that’s unread all I have to do is go to my unread mail to see all my unread messages and I can handle them from within that unread mail folder right so if I open it and I close it or even if I had replied to it notice now I have no unread mail it’s marked as red so when I click away from that folder and go back to it there’s nothing in there so these are efficiency tools your search folders doesn’t matter what subfolder the stuff is coming into or resides in your search folder is for everything in your mailbox so any items that are flagged for follow-up will show up in that for follow-up search folder all your unread mail will show up in your unread mail folder and the reason why I recommend with attachments folder is because we talked about your mailbox capacity at some point and I said as you receive emails with attachments if you need those attachments you should save them to your system and then detach them from your email well if you start getting that you’re reaching your quota message in your email you would want to find the emails that have attachments and they would all be in your with attachments folder so you can then detach and save and do what you need to do to gain more space in your mailbox and so now we’re going to switch our Focus to the Outlook calendar now one of the biggest complaints I hear from people about Outlook is once I open the calendar I can’t see my email well you actually can so let’s do it like this we’ll do it two ways if you go down to the bottom of your folder painting you have those icons the second one is calendar click on it and it takes you into your calendar and now you just have your calendar open right let me get rid of something in here but you can’t see your email at the bottom of that pane go back to the mail icon and now you’re back in your inbox so these are like different views right the inbox the calendar but you can actually have both open at the same time and this is how you do it this time right click on that calendar icon at the bottom and choose open and new window so now I can have my calendar open and I can have my inbox open and if you have multiple screens you can have one-on-one screen one on the other so that’s how I normally work in here so we’re in the calendar and I’m going to show you how to set up a meeting in the calendar so I’m going to say today is Thursday the 21st I don’t know what date you’re watching this but I’m going to just go to the next day right and so Friday in the 11 A.M slot is where I’m gonna click here on my calendar and so Friday at the 11 A.M slot I am going to go up to the ribbon and choose new meeting so the title is going to be reviewing presentation and I am going to invite my other email so the email I’ve been in emailing all the time right so to be me and that person and I’m going to set it for an hour so I did the drop down and changed it to one hour there type in something like let’s finally get some resolution on the this presentation so I have some text in there now I can also attach a file I’m going to go to the insert Tab and choose attach file I’m going to browse my PC and I’m going to grab that PowerPoint essential slide presentation that we made in module one and attach it so then I’m going to do send so I don’t have a location I’m going to say don’t send sometimes you set up locations right like I have some location set up in here I’m going to just type in my office as a location and then I’m gonna send okay so the meeting immediately shows up on my calendar the name of the meeting where it’s going to be held and it has the paper clip letting you know that it has an attachment so I switched back to my inbox window right and I went to my other account and in the inbox sure enough here’s the meeting invitation so when I click on it here right it shows me that the meeting is going to be on this date at this time and I can accept I can tentatively accept or I can decline this meeting is not on this calendar until I accept it so let me just do this a little bit clearer I’m going to switch back to my calendar right and this is the calendar for my primary email address if I go to my calendar for my other email address right this is kind of on there tentatively because I’ve been invited but if I hover over it it tells me it has not been accepted so it’s kind of like a placeholder but until I accept it I won’t really really be on my calendar so I’m going to go back over to my email window and in that message I’m going to go ahead and accept and I’m going to just I can send a note with my acceptance or just send the response now and so that meeting email disappears from my inbox once I accept it or if I had declined it whatever if I declined it it wouldn’t show on my calendar at all so now I’m going to go back over to the calendar and you can see that it’s this is the person who invited who set up the meeting this is the person who is attending so it’s on that calendar their calendar as well if they declined it it would not be on their calendar and it would disappear from the inbox as well so that’s kind of how you schedule a meeting I’m going to close this other calendar now what’s the difference between a meeting and an appointment and an Outlook well a meeting involves more than one person and you invite people to a meeting with an appointment it’s just you on your calendar so Friday at 2PM I’m going to just type directly on the calendar and I’m going to say off early today exclamation point so something like that just a note for myself that I’m off early at two o’clock I’m out is basically what it’s saying didn’t ask me to invite anybody right if I double click on a time slot on the calendar it opens up the appointment and this is just an appointment it doesn’t have a meeting now I can make it into a meeting right by clicking invite attendees and then it becomes a meeting like you saw before and I’m gonna just get rid of that and sometimes you may want a paper print out of your calendar and you can do that as well so I’m gonna just go Ctrl P that’s the print shortcut key and I’m in the calendar so it takes me to print preview right and notice on the left it’s showing it has the weekly agenda style is the default style so I’m seeing a weekly agenda style you can look at Daily Style and see what that looks like weekly calendar Style you have monthly Style and I used to be in a habit of printing my calendars I used to print monthly calendars because I was doing a hundred percent business travel and I wanted to see all that stuff on a monthly calendar so I’m going to leave it on monthly calendar and then you would simply print now some other things before you print you can go to print options right and it’s carrying over the style that you have monthly calendar right monthly Style and I can print a range so I might want from July to September so I’m going to change my start date to July 1st and I’m going to change the end date to September 30th and then if I click preview down at the bottom you’ll see that it has one of three pages there’s July if I go to the next page there’s August and then there’s September and that’s what I would get if I were to print we can do the back arrow at the top to get back into your Outlook calendar and you can actually close that calendar window because you had your inbox open in another window now I want to show you one other thing an integration between your email and your calendar so let’s do this let’s do one more new email message and actually I’m in the wrong account but I can change it here from okay no I’m going to send it to my other account and the subject is going to be let’s do working dinner on and I’ll just pick a date I’ll say uh July 26th and I’ll do a question mark let’s try to meet on the 26th for a working meeting for a working dinner at and I’ll put hmm we’ll put Olive Garden for this one I don’t know I’m my restaurant game is is not very good I mostly cook so let’s try to meet on the 26th for a working dinner at Olive Garden and I’m gonna just go ahead and send it now this is really cool I’m going to right click on my calendar icon at the bottom of the folders Pane and open it in a new window again and then I’m going to arrange these windows side by side effects on this side okay okay so I just received an email in my other account right my inbox there working dinner on July 26th so I would apply to that email and say yay or nay or something like that right but I know I’m gonna go so and I have my calendar open on one side of my screen in my calendar I’m going to navigate to the following week by using this right arrow and I can see the 26th and what I’m going to do is I’m going to click and hold on this email and I’m going to drag it to the calendar on the 26th at around 6 pm and drop it so it creates an appointment with the name of the email subject line and the contents of the email in it which is really cool right and then for location there I’ll just type Olive Garden and instead of replying to the email I’m actually going to turn this into a meeting and just invite the person who wants to do this so I’m going to go up and I’m going to do invite attendees and I’m going to put in my other person and then send it so it shows up on my calendar right and I should have made it like longer I’m going to double click it on my calendar and I’m going to change the end time to like 8 o’clock and then I’m going to send an update so because I already sent it and then I changed it it’s going to get an update so here is I’ll go back to my other inbox all right oh this is where they accepted reviewing the presentation so they should get an email inviting them to that dinner which they can will be added to their calendar eventually it’ll come through eventually so that’s kind of how that works you can drag an email onto your calendar and have all the details right there instead of having to retype them and I think that’s just a cool thing to know so that completed the first part of module two Outlook 2021 and just by way of review at this point you should be more efficient when managing your mailbox you know how to do folders search folders how to flag messages all of that stuff and you can attach files in an email those were the two main learning outcomes you got a lot more than that out of this segment the final Topic in this office Basics video course is collaborating with teams the learning outcomes are using call video conference and screen sharing features as well as setting up collaborative teams and topic channels and we’ll get there by covering these topics we’ll Begin by understanding the purpose of teams and then how to navigate in teams and setting up your profile then we’ll move on to chatting with a colleague group chats making a video phone call during a chat sharing your screen and sharing files via chat you’ll also learn how to create a team create channels create a post searching for posts files and messages scheduling a meeting from teams and will review notification settings let’s start by gaining an understanding of the purpose of teams so Microsoft teams is a persistent chat-based collaboration platform complete with document sharing online meetings and many more extremely useful features for business Communications let’s talk about teams and channels you can have multiple teams think of them as work groups so you and related colleagues will be members of particular teams and teams are also made up of channels which are conversation boards between teammates so think of channels as like different topics maybe you have a team of colleagues and you’re working on two separate projects that would have two separate channels you can have conversations within channels and teams and all team members can view and add to different conversations in the general Channel and can use the at function to invite other members to different conversations the basic chat function is commonly found within most collaboration apps and can take place between teams groups and individuals you have online video calling and screen sharing capabilities so a lot of my remote trainings are via Microsoft teams and I’m able to share my screen and the students are able to see it and follow along with what I’m doing and then you have the online meetings feature which can enhance your Communications can be used for company-wide meetings and even trainings with online meetings online meetings can host up to 10 000 users they can include anyone that’s inside or outside of your business and online meetings also includes a scheduling Aid a note-taking app file uploading and in meeting chat messaging and there’s one thing that’s not on this slide that can also be included in teams and that is audio conferencing now I don’t have audio conferencing set up for my company and team I don’t need it but and you would have to be the admin to set that up but it’s a feature that you won’t find in many collaboration platforms with audio conferencing anyone can join an online meeting via phone with a dial-in number that spans hundreds of cities even users that are on the go can participate with no internet and it requires additional licensing and setup like I said by an administrator so that is the general purpose of teams let’s get working in it so I’ve launched teams from my taskbar I have the desktop application of teams on my computer versus the online teams and when I go into teams let’s do a tour of the environment I’m going to start on the left side of the screen and you have this navigation panel and I can click on activity and so it shows my feed at that point and I’ll see mentions replies and other notifications there if I do the drop down where it says feed I can go to my activity and I’ll see my sent messages there now after activity you have chat and this is where you’ll see all of your chats right and then I have teams and I actually have two teams in my teams the team for my company and then I have a project that I’m working on in here as a team then you have your calendar your team’s calendar and notice if you did the Outlook portion of this course on the calendar I put a couple of appointments when we were doing Outlook and they show on my team’s calendar I can schedule meetings for teams in Outlook or I can schedule them from the team’s calendar and I’ll show you how to do it both ways and I’ll then when we get to that part I’ll show you which way I prefer and then you have calls so if you have that audio conferencing setup you can receive phone calls and your call history will show here if it’s set up you can get voicemail messages into that number people can call using that number for meetings and stuff like that so if you’re going to have that set up you’ll have your calls you have your phone calls and then you would have your contacts on the other tab then you have files so it shows recent files that you used right it could be files from cloud storage it could be files that are on your computer these are going back I’m going to come in and clean some of these up right you can get to your downloads from here so you’re looking at recent then I have Microsoft teams as another category here so these are files that were used in teams then I have downloads if any if I’ve had any downloads in here and then I can get to my OneDrive cloud storage from in here as well underneath files you have an ellipsis for more added apps so you have a bunch of apps that can integrate really well with teams you have Excel you have a Wiki app OneNote tasks power bi all kinds of different apps word that you can use and there’s even more apps down here so this is how you get to all of the apps that you can gain access to you can even have YouTube arcgis Maps if you’re doing that you have various polls that you can use so it’s very app integration friendly and now so we were on the Ellipsis and then we went into more apps so now we’re on apps down here and then you have a help button at the bottom where you can get topics training what’s new suggest a feature as well as give feedback so at the top of your screen you have a search so you can if you click in the search box at the very top of your screen you can look for messages files and more or you can type the Slash there and you’ll get more commands right so if I type the Slash and I go to chat I can send a quick message to a person or if I type files or go to files I can see my recent files so it has that slash integration as well over to the right of the search box you’ll see a settings Ellipsis that says settings and more so we’ll review settings a little bit later but I have Google Chromecast right so I’m on my computer screen but I could literally cast this to one of my TV screens if I want to we’ll come back and review these a little bit later and after you look at that Ellipsis to the right of it you’ll see your initials and if you click on that that’s your profile you can get into managing your account and stuff like that from there and then you have your traditional window operations button minimize maximize restore so on and so forth so one of the first things you may want to do when you start working in teams is setting up your profile so I’m going to go up and click on my initials in the upper right hand corner and I’m going to click on my initials again now if you have a photo that you want to use as your profile photo on your system that’s what I’m getting ready to do I have a picture on my desktop that I’m going to put as my profile photo so I’m going to click on my initials and I’m going to upload the picture now if I put a picture in here for teams it’s going to be the same picture that shows in my other office apps so I’m going to just select this photo that I chose on my desktop and then I’m going to do save and once it’s saved I’m going to close that and you can see my picture instead of my initials up there now we’re going to go back to our picture or initials if you didn’t put a picture in click on that again and underneath that it says it has your email your name email then it says available do the drop down where it says available so I can set myself right now I’m available but I can say that I’m busy I can say do not disturb be right back if I step away I can be sitting at my desk working but appear as though I’m away and I can also appear as though I’m on offline so that’s your availability and then to the right of that you have set status message go ahead and click on that so you don’t have to use the at to mention someone in your status but you could or you could just type a status message if you want when you have a status message you can have it show when people message you in teams and you can clear your status message after today or never a couple of hours this week or a custom you can also schedule your out of office from in here so I’m going to just put in a status message saying I’m going to do an at mention for my other account and I’m just typing in a message my other person I hope you’re having a wonderful week it has been awesome on my side of this operation I could do that I’m not going to show it when people message me well I’ll do that I’ll check that box and I’ll just do done at the bottom you can always go back and edit your status message and I’m going to just click away from that so now we’re ready to explore the chat feature and before we do so look under your search box at the top of your screen it says your status message is showing in chat and channels when people message or mention you until 11 59 pm and I can change the status from there from that link at the end as well on the left side we’re going to go to chat and at the top this is your new chat button this icon here is a filter right so here’s your new chat button and when you click it you enter a name an email a group or a tag I’m going to put in my other self so that’s who it’s to and then it shows my automated message because I did my status before in here right so that was because this person was mentioned it’s showing up in here but I’m going to go ahead and click and type a new message and I’m going to say do you have time now for a quick chat and I’ll say about James I don’t know who James is but I’m just making it up so do you have time now for a quick chat about James and underneath it you’ll see that you have all of these icons I can format I can set the delivery options I can attach items to a chat looping components you have a bunch of emojis and gifs and stickers that you can add you can schedule a meeting from here you can get to stream from here you can give praise approvals all kinds of stuff Viva learning updates and then there’s more right we just want to send a chat so we’re going to use the send button and it shows up on our screen now I have teams open as my other self on my other computer so my other self just replied I sure do and you can see that reply in this chat right right there and I can maximize my chat window if I just want to focus on that kind of thing so pretty cool just chatting back and forth and you have two people in your chat yourself and the other person so now I chatting with the colleague we’re gonna have they have time for a quick chat about James and I’m gonna type a message back and I’m gonna say I’m going to include and I’ll just make up a name Teresa in this chat as well and I’ll go ahead and send that to my other self right so you’re getting the ones that you send are on the right side of the screen the ones that you’re receiving in the chat are on the left side of the screen so now if I want to include someone else in this chat I can go up here so let’s talk about the icons in the upper right corner of your chat screen I can go from here to a video call or an audio call I can do screen sharing from in here and I can also add people to the chat I’m going to click on ADD people and when I do that and I type the letter T right it brings up my contacts I have another self and it’s external so I’m gonna choose my external self and create so this is me my training self and my external self now it is a group chat with all three people in it and it’s like a new conversation here right so this is how you do a group chat you can be in a regular chat just go and add more people and now you’re in a group chat and so I’m going to type what do you think should be done about James at this point and I’m gonna go ahead and send it and so for my other computer I responded from my training account James has been awesome I think he has taken initiative and should be promoted I’m sure he can manage the team my external one I’m not going to go to my external one and log in and reply but you can have many people in a group chat just chatting back and forth all right and I’ll just do a reply here saying thanks for your feedback I’m on the same page and send that one so one thing I want to point out one of the users that I added to this chat is an external user meaning outside of my organization when I did that that disabled the video and audio call and screen sharing features for this chat so you need to kind of be aware of that based on team settings external users may not have those abilities so it disabled it now the other thing I want to point out here if I look at my external user here’s Trish right it has the offline symbol to the left of it so that user is offline training is available my other user is available here but the green check mark right and I could actually name this group chat so I’m going to click that little pencil icon and I’m going to call it teams video course that’s just what I’m gonna name it teams video course so you can see that name update there now the other thing I’m going to do because I maximize this window I’m going to just restore the window and I’m going to close the chat now I can open this chat again it’s sitting right here it’s my top chat right it’s top of the list I can open this chat again if I want to pop it out into a new window I can use that arrow and it does it and then I’m going to close that window so now I’m going to go to the second chat on my list so your most recent chat will be at the top of the chat list the second one is the first one we did before we did the group chat and this one since both of the people in this chat are in my organization I have access to the video audio call and screen sharing features now I’m not going to be able to do an audio call again my organization does not have a phone number set up for that but we’re gonna do a video call so we’re chatting and I’m gonna just type a message and I’m gonna say I’m going to transfer us to video and I’ll go ahead and send that and then I’m going to do it I’m going to click on the video icon [Music] Okay so we’re gonna get some kind of feedback here I had to mute my other computer to make the feedback go away so what you were hearing before I muted it is I was calling my colleague and they answered the call that was the ringing sound that you were hearing you were just hearing it from my microphone as well as from my other computer so I muted the other computer now on my screen I have my camera on and I can see the little mini me right and while I’m here I could do something like share my screen so I’m gonna go ahead and click on the share button and I can see my screens in different windows that I have open right so I’m gonna go to my screen and now you’re seeing like the desktop screen right you’re just seeing some folders on my screen and I’m gonna stop sharing that I’m going to go back to share and because I have teams I’m going to have to move my teams first pardon me one second here yeah I had to move some windows around so now I’m going to click on share again and I can see the screen where I have that Excel file open from the Excel portion of this course and now I am able to share that screen and I’m looking at my other computer and that’s what it’s showing on that screen as well because I’m sharing it when you’re sharing a screen it puts a red border around the screen so you’re aware that you’re sharing and you get this presenting toolbar going across the top right so I can give control if I allow it in my organization I can give control to a user somebody else I can do annotations and I can stop presenting and so that’s kind of how the share feature works you can share different screens now I’m going to bring my teams back up and bring it back over to the screen so now you’re seeing me share my team screen right and I’m going to click on the share button to say stop sharing so now in the recording that I’m doing for the video course you’re still seeing my team screen but I’m not sharing it now it’s just in the video and so I also can bring up the chat by using chat up here and it brings up the chat and so we’re seeing the chat that we were in from which I generated the video call right so I’m seeing that chat and I can continue to chat here and I’m gonna type how’s the video quality on your end and press enter that’s kind of how that works right and I just responded from my other account great and then you can mute your mic when you’re in teams you can turn your camera off if you don’t want to be on screen and then it will just show your profile pic right and that type of thing if you want to make sure that you look good before you turn your camera on if you hover over the button you’ll see a preview a private preview of what you look like and you can put background effects and stuff on it if you’d like so when you’re done with your video call you can click leave to get out of it and that’s what I am going to do I’m going to leave the call and then I can minimize Excel and so even though I don’t have the capability of doing phone calls from here only video calls if I go over on the left to my calls I’ll see that outgoing call even though it was a video call it will still show here in the log on the phone and then I’m going to go back to chat on the left you can also share a file via chat so I’m still I’m now on what’s now the top chat in the list the one where we did the call from and underneath where it says type a new message I’m going to click on the paper clip and I’m going to choose upload from my computer I could go to OneDrive but I’ll upload from my computer and on my desktop I have that Excel file so I’m going to just grab that and then I’m going to send so you can actually share files via chat as well and you get the notification down here that you shared Excel so on and so forth and I just shared a file from my other account with this account so I just uploaded another file there so you can see how it comes in so you can share files via chat as well so now we’re gonna go ahead and create a team I don’t believe there’s a limit to the number of teams you can have in teams so on the left side I’m going to go to teams and I already have my two teams down at the bottom you’ll see join or create a team and I’m going to click there so I’m going to choose create team and I’m going to just do it from scratch instead of using a template I can make it private so people will need permission to join public anyone in my organization can join or org-wide everyone in my organization automatically joins right so I’m gonna leave it on private well let’s do public anyone in your organization can join and right now we’re going to give it a team name of learn it video course and a description is this is how you create a team in teams and then you’re going to click the create button so let you know you created it you got good job and all of that and now you can add members right so I could type a name a distribution list a security group I can also add people to this team outside of my organization as guests so I’m gonna go ahead and add an in-person in organization person and an outside organization person and then I’m going to click add on the right and then I’m going to close and of course I’m a member of the team because I created the team so when you get a team when you create a team it gives you the general page right which shows some posts you can add more people you can create more channels you can open the frequently asked questions if you look up at the top there’s files tab so you can actually upload files to the team so everybody in the team has access to those files I’m going to go ahead and upload files and I’m going to upload the Excel Essentials and the PowerPoint essentials from earlier in module one into this team so it lets me know this is just like OneDrive it’s uploading two items right lets me know that I’m doing that it kind of looks like OneDrive it also looks like SharePoint right so all of the office integration is here it really does and so everybody that has access to this team will be able to see those files now a Wiki page is kind of like used for documenting stuff so you can create multiple Wiki pages and you can add images to them I did a training several years ago and it was for a sheriff’s department and they use their Wiki to document the proper procedures for arresting somebody and they had pictures and videos and stuff like that as a resource for their internal team we are going to go back to post and we’re going to create so we have that General is really a channel right that’s a channel it’s a open Forum discussion board for team members we can create more channels so click on create more channels and we’ll just name it for video and the Privacy everyone on the team has access is to standard privacy setting right or you could say only specific teammates have access and you’d have to give them access to it we’re going to leave it on standard and we’re going to say automatically show this Channel and everyone’s channel list so they don’t have to go searching for it and then we’re going to add so different channels for different conversation topics for your team on a general Channel I’m gonna go to the bottom and select new conversation and I’m going to just type our channels are completed and you can press enter by the way to post you don’t have to click the button you can post so that shows up right on the general Channel under post and I can go to the four video channel and do a new conversation and I’m gonna type the office basics video course has lots of great information and techniques and enter and you can see that my other self replied to my post here and when I hover over their reply I get these little I can give thumbs up all these little emojis just give a thumbs up to it and that shows on their end as well and now we’re going to use the search feature in teams let’s go up to the search box and click and type Excel and as you’re typing Excel you’ll see the top hits the files the apps all that kind of stuff and if we wanted to find where that file was I can click directly on the file and what it’s going to do is it’s going to open it in kind of like an Excel interface right here so I can see the details of that file that’s kind of how that works and I can use the back button up here right to go back now let’s go up to search and type James and press enter and it brings up the messages where the word James is or the name James is it tells you there’s no files and no people by that name but it found three messages for that search result so you can see that search is pretty powerful on the right side of the search box Duty X and then just a reminder type your slash there because you have that at everything that you can use by using the slash so you can slash and then go to keys and you can look at all the keyboard shortcuts that can be used in teams for example and you’re going to go ahead and close that and I’m just going to go back over to teams on the left or I could have actually going to calendar because that’s where we’re going to go next to get rid of the search results so let’s go ahead and click on calendar on the left and let’s navigate to Next the following week and you can see that working dinner on July 26 Olive Garden thing that I put on there from Outlook let’s go to Monday the 25th and 10 a.m slot and click on it so it comes up with new meeting right and that you’re on the details Tab and there’s a scheduling assistant tab once you have your require ease in here your required attendees you can see their schedule if they’re in your organization so I’m going to go back to details first and I’m going to say the name of this meeting is follow up learn it office basics course I’m going to go down to add required attendees and put in my Other Self that’s within my organization and we’ll make it a 30-minute meeting that’s the default right and so it’s going to be from 10 to 10 30. it gives you some suggested 30 minute blocks and this is based on schedules for myself and this other person it’s not a recurring meeting it doesn’t repeat I can add a channel to the meeting so I’m going to add the learn it video course for video channel to the meeting location it’s going to be an online meeting so that’s fine A team’s meeting and down at the bottom I have a text box details for the next meeting and I’ll type in review what was learned in Excel PowerPoint Outlook and teams and then I’m going to go ahead and well we could take a look at the scheduling assistant at the top right so this is I’m viewing my work hours so it’s only going to show working hours it’s showing that our current status for both attendees is available it doesn’t look like there’s any conflicts for that time frame so I’m good I’m gonna go back to details now you can see response options here request responses allow forwarding if you send a team’s meeting request to someone and they fall with it to someone else you will get an email letting you know that it was forwarded and I’m not requiring any registration so I’m going to just send it so it will show up on my team’s calendar once it’s finished loading and once it’s on my calendar on a day of the meeting I can come in here and click on it and just join the meeting that’s how that kind of works now I’m going to switch over to my Outlook calendar and show you something because you’ve already seen that the two are integrated with each other so let me just bring up my Outlook calendar and show you this and so in Outlook it’s on my calendar in there as well and in Outlook I can double click it and I can click here to join the meeting right so that’s kind of how that works now I can also schedule meetings from Outlook and to be honest with you I normally schedule all of my meetings including teams meetings from Outlook and I’ll show you the reason why so I’m going to just do this one I’m going to set it for one o’clock on Monday the 25th and on the Outlook calendar ribbon I’m going to choose teams meeting so both of these is teams meeting group meet now instantly will give you an instant team meeting that you can invite people to if I want to schedule it new teams meeting so this is a little bit different in doing it in teams right so I’ll give this a I’ll just call it review apps and I’ll invite my other self as required you can invite optional people right and we’ll leave it at a half hour now what I like about doing it in Outlook like I can put text down here I can type stuff in but I can also attach documents if I wanted to which I can’t do in teams at this point so I can go up to insert and I can attach a file to the invitation right and I’ll just attach this PowerPoint one and I don’t have the capability of attaching a file to a team’s invite in teams so I’m going to go ahead and send this it shows up on my calendar Microsoft teams and it says Microsoft teams meeting when I schedule it from within Outlook right and if I go back it’s still sending it the invitation out but if I go back to teams here go away from my calendar come back to my calendar navigate to next week and it shows on my team’s calendar as well and last but not least we’re going to go over notification settings in teams so I’m going to go up to the settings and more ellipses to the left of my profile picture and I’m going to go into settings okay so you have all different types of settings so the default theme in teams is the what we’ve been looking at the white background with the blue borders and everything you can have a dark theme high contrast theme you can change your chat density back here and this is just on the general tab so I’m going to do a little bit more than just notification settings here if you want teams to start automatically when you go into Windows you can auto start the application I’ve registered teams as my chat app for office and you would have to restart office applications for that right you can have a new chat open in a new window or in the main window I like doing it in a new window you could set your languages and stuff like that and I also have spell check enabled and once you enable that you would have to restart teams for it to take effect I can schedule my out of office stuff from here and I’m getting suggested replies showing in my chat which could be helpful you have all of these other categories on the left let’s go to Notifications so if I’ve missed any activity emails right it checks once per hour here right I can change that or turn it off I have my notification style which is teams built in I show message preview and I can play that sound for incoming calls and notifications so you heard that sound when I was doing the call the video call from my other computer you heard the ringing sound so then you have your teams and channels you will get desktop and activity notifications for all activity mentions and replies or custom so if I click on custom you can see what I’m getting notifications for here I’ll get a banner and a feed the banner shows up in the lower right corner of your screen it’s like a pop-up right I don’t want to be notified there’s a new Post in every any in this Channel or any channel right so I have that off and then I’ll get a banner and a feed as opposed to only showing feed or off for any time i’m mentioned in this channel you want to be notified so you’ll get a pop-up if you’re working in Outlook you’ll see the banner pop up and stuff like that so you get to control your notification settings we can go back to settings and I would encourage you to go through some of your other settings you know like the file settings always open word PowerPoint and Excel files in teams when we open that Excel file it opened it in teams when we selected that Excel file that we put in here so that’s why that’s happening go ahead and do the X on your settings and that concludes this module so just to recap what we covered in the teams portion of this we weren’t able to use the call feature because I don’t have audio conferencing set up but you saw where the phone icon is if you do have it set up you can place the call that way we used video conferencing and screen sharing features we also set up collaborative teams and topic channels I’d really like to thank everyone for viewing this learn it video course on office Basics again my name is Trish Connor Cato and it’s been my pleasure recording this video for you to take a few moments to recap what was covered in this course we started out with Outlook and we were introduced to the interface we learned how to start a new message and add message recipients we ensured that spelling and grammar check would happen automatically as soon as we click Send on a message we learned how to format message content and attach files and items to messages then we moved on to tracking messages and you learned about the recall and resend message features of Outlook you also learned how to flag messages and also how to organize messages using folders and you saw all of the folders I have under my inbox folder for organization purposes I also introduced you to a few search folders which gives you more efficient use of your mailbox then we went over to the Outlook calendar you learned how you could have the calendar and your inbox windows open at the same time and you learned how to schedule meetings from your calendar and how to print the calendar and then we got into teams we started out by getting an understanding of the purpose of teams and then we learned how to navigate it in it I we set up our profile or we added a picture we checked our status message and our availability and then we started using the chatting feature by chatting with a colleague then we added on and had a group chat and we were able to make a video call during the chat and share the screen we also shared files via chat then we created a team and we created an additional Channel other than the general channel that comes with a team and we created some posts in those channels we moved on to searching for post files and messages and you learned about that backslash that you can use to search for a bunch of different things and we learned how to schedule meetings from the team’s calendar as well as from our Outlook calendar and with Outlook again you can attach files to the teams meeting invite and then we reviewed teams settings again thank you for your attention and I hope that you will view more videos out here for learn it thanks for watching don’t forget we also offer live classes and office applications professional development and private training visit learnit.com for more details please remember to like And subscribe and let us know your thoughts in the comments thank you for choosing learn it [Music]

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

  • Microsoft Word: A Comprehensive Guide

    Microsoft Word: A Comprehensive Guide

    This text is from a Word 2021 training course. It covers essential functions like navigating documents and using different viewing modes. The course also explains text manipulation techniques, including formatting, organizing, and selecting. Furthermore, it explores paragraph formatting options, such as indents and lists, and highlights ways to improve efficiency using keyboard shortcuts and the quick access toolbar. Finally, the material includes exercises designed to help users practice and master these skills.

    Microsoft Word 2021 Study Guide

    Quiz

    Answer each question in 2-3 sentences.

    1. What is the primary difference between Microsoft Word 2021 (standalone) and Word as part of a Microsoft 365 subscription?
    2. Where can you typically find the files used by the instructor during the Word 2021 tutorials?
    3. Explain how to pin Word 2021 to the taskbar in Windows.
    4. Where can you create blank documents and open existing documents?
    5. What is the function of the search bar located in the title bar of Word 2021?
    6. How can you hide or show the ribbon in Word 2021?
    7. How do you display rulers within a Word 2021 document and change the units of measurement?
    8. Describe how Word 2021 flags spelling and grammar errors as you type.
    9. How can you find keyboard shortcuts in Word 2021, and how do you use the Alt key to access commands?
    10. How can you access the Help files in Word 2021?

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. Word 2021 is a one-time purchase where you own the software, while Word for Microsoft 365 is a subscription-based service where you rent the software monthly. With Microsoft 365, you get ongoing updates and features, often including access to mobile apps and the ability to share the subscription with multiple users.
    2. The files used by the instructor are usually found under the course resources tab associated with the tutorial. There are typically two links available: one for exercise files and another for instructor demo files.
    3. To pin Word 2021 to the taskbar, open the Start menu, find Word in the list of applications, right-click on the Word icon, and select “Pin to taskbar.” This will create a shortcut on the taskbar for easy access.
    4. You can create blank documents and open existing documents by clicking the “File” tab and then selecting “New” for blank documents or “Open” to access existing ones. The “New” page also allows you to access document templates.
    5. The search bar in the title bar of Word 2021 allows you to find specific commands within the program. It also provides access to help files and more information about each command.
    6. You can hide or show the ribbon by clicking on the ribbon display options button located in the top right corner of the Word window. You can choose to auto-hide the ribbon, show only tabs, or show tabs and commands.
    7. To display rulers, go to the “View” tab and check the “Ruler” box in the “Show” group. To change the units of measurement, go to “File” > “Options” > “Advanced” and find the “Display” section, where you can select the desired units.
    8. Word 2021 automatically flags spelling mistakes with a red squiggly underline and grammatical errors with a blue double underline as you type. You can right-click on these underlined words or phrases to see suggested corrections.
    9. Keyboard shortcuts are displayed in screen tips when you hover your mouse over a command on the ribbon. Pressing the Alt key displays letters and numbers over the commands, which can then be pressed to navigate and execute those commands via the keyboard.
    10. You can access the Help files by clicking the “Help” tab on the ribbon or by pressing the F1 key. This opens a pane on the right side of the screen where you can search for help topics or browse categorized help articles.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using Microsoft Word 2021 as a standalone product versus subscribing to Microsoft 365, considering factors such as cost, updates, and collaborative features.
    2. Explain the importance of understanding the Word 2021 interface (title bar, ribbons, status bar) for efficient document creation and editing, and describe how customization options can improve workflow.
    3. Discuss the benefits of using templates in Word 2021 for creating professional documents, and explain the process of customizing and saving templates for reuse.
    4. Analyze the impact of accessibility features like Immersive Reader and Dark Mode in Word 2021 on document usability for individuals with different needs and preferences.
    5. Describe how to effectively use Find and Replace, tab stops, indents, and other formatting tools in Word 2021 to create well-structured and visually appealing documents.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Ribbon: The command bar located at the top of the Word window, containing tabs and groups of commands for various functions.
    • Template: A pre-designed document format that can be customized with your own content.
    • Quick Access Toolbar: A customizable toolbar located above or below the ribbon for quick access to frequently used commands.
    • ScreenTip: A small pop-up box that appears when you hover the cursor over a command, providing a description of the command and any associated keyboard shortcuts.
    • Contextual Ribbon: A ribbon that appears when a specific object is selected, providing relevant commands for that object.
    • Status Bar: The bar at the bottom of the Word window, displaying information such as page number, word count, and language.
    • Ruler: A horizontal and vertical guide used for aligning and measuring elements in a document.
    • Non-Printing Characters: Hidden formatting symbols (like paragraph marks, spaces, and tabs) that can be displayed to aid in document formatting.
    • Tab Stop: A specific point on the horizontal ruler that you can set to control the alignment of text when you press the Tab key.
    • Indent: The distance a paragraph is shifted to the right or left of the margin.
    • Immersive Reader: A tool in Word designed to improve reading accessibility by adjusting text spacing, column width, and providing read-aloud functionality.
    • Dark Mode: A display setting that inverts the color scheme, using dark backgrounds with light text to reduce eye strain in low-light environments.
    • WYSIWYG: Short for “What You See Is What You Get,” a principle of formatting that displays a document exactly as it will appear when printed.
    • Boilerplate Text: Standardized text that can be reused in multiple documents without modification.
    • Clipboard: A temporary storage area for items copied or cut from a document, allowing them to be pasted elsewhere.
    • File Extension: A suffix at the end of a file name (e.g., “.docx”) that indicates the file type.
    • Paragraph Spacing: The amount of vertical space between paragraphs.
    • Line Spacing: The amount of vertical space between lines within a paragraph.
    • Word Styles: Predefined sets of formatting attributes that can be applied to text for consistent formatting throughout a document.

    Microsoft Word 2021 Tutorial: A Comprehensive Guide

    Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided transcript:

    Briefing Document: Microsoft Word 2021 Tutorial

    Overview: This transcript is from a tutorial course on Microsoft Word 2021, led by Deborah Ashby, an experienced IT trainer. The course aims to guide users through the features and functionalities of Word 2021, focusing on practical exercises and real-world applications. The content covers everything from basic setup and interface navigation to more advanced formatting techniques. It also highlights new features specific to Word 2021.

    Main Themes and Important Ideas:

    1. Word 2021 vs. Microsoft 365: The course emphasizes that Word 2021 is a standalone version for users who prefer a one-time purchase over a Microsoft 365 subscription. Deborah highlights the key difference: “Word 2021 is the latest standalone release from microsoft and it’s really designed for people who still want to use word and have all of the latest functionality but don’t necessarily want to commit to a microsoft 365 subscription” The tutorial encourages viewers to check Microsoft’s website for a comparison between the two options.
    2. Getting Started and Setup: The initial exercises focus on ensuring users have a working, legitimate copy of Word 2021 downloaded and installed, along with the course exercise files. Deborah provides guidance on how to locate and launch Word within Windows 10 or 11. “The first exercise of this course is a very simple and straightforward one I’d like you to ensure that you have a working copy of word 2021 downloaded and installed onto your pc and I’d also like you to make sure that you’ve got the course and the exercise files downloaded and stored somewhere that’s easily accessible”
    3. Interface Familiarization: A significant portion of the tutorial is dedicated to familiarizing users with the Word 2021 interface. This includes the title bar, ribbons, status bar, and the “File” tab (backstage view). “That is the word interface make sure you’re familiar with it and comfortable as we move forward through this section” The tutorial explains the purpose and function of each element, such as the ribbon display options and the quick access toolbar.
    4. Navigation and Document Management: The course covers essential document management skills, such as creating new documents (blank or from templates), opening existing documents, saving, and closing files. Deborah explains different ways of opening documents, both from within Word and from external locations (File Explorer, OneDrive). “We’re pretty clear on the basics of creating a brand new document opening existing documents and also doing things like save and close let’s now talk about templates because templates are a great thing to use if you want to create a document quickly and you don’t want to start from a blank”
    5. Templates: The use of templates is promoted as an efficient way to create various documents, such as resumes or flyers. The tutorial demonstrates how to search for templates, customize them, and save modified templates for reuse.
    6. Navigation Pane: The tutorial introduces the Navigation Pane as a tool for navigating documents by headings, pages, or search results. “I’m not going to go too far off down this road in this particular lesson because then we kind of move into the arena of using find within word and we have a whole other lesson dedicated to that but just know that from here you can navigate your document using any headings by going to any of the pages or by searching for specific terms”
    7. Finding Tools (Search Bar): Deborah emphasizes using the search bar (activated with Alt+Q) to quickly locate commands within Word if users are unsure where they reside on the ribbon. “Add commands that you use frequently to the quick access toolbar for anything else if you’re not sure where that command lives remember to press alt q to jump to the search bar and then simply search for it”
    8. Views: The course explores different document views (Print Layout, Read Mode, Web Layout, Outline, Draft) and their specific purposes. “Web layout is going to show me how my document would look as a web page”
    9. Focus Mode and Immersive Reader: New features in Word 2021, such as Focus mode (for distraction-free writing) and Immersive Reader (for improved accessibility), are highlighted. Deborah explains how to customize these features, like changing background color or adjusting text spacing. “If you do have any kind of visual impairment you can turn on read aloud and word will read the document back to you”
    10. Dark Mode: The tutorial also touches on the dark mode feature in Word 2021, and how to customize the ribbon to easily switch in and out of it.
    11. Text Formatting: A significant portion is devoted to text formatting techniques, including font selection, size adjustment, case changes, bolding, italicizing, underlining, applying strikethrough, subscripts, superscripts and highlighting. “Another point to note here is that you can modify the case that you’re using”
    12. Format Painter: Format Painter for efficiently copying formatting from one piece of text to another, including the double-click method for applying formatting multiple times.
    13. Paste Options: The tutorial emphasizes the importance of using paste options when copying text from external sources (like websites) to control how the formatting is handled.
    14. Find and Replace: It covers how to use the Find and Replace utilities (Ctrl+F and Ctrl+H) to locate and modify specific words, phrases, or formatting within a document. The use of wildcards is also explained. “If i wanted to use a wild card maybe i want to look for everything that starts with the word united if i put an asterisk after it that’s our wild card character and hit enter it’s going to find united united states united kingdom united arab emirates it’s basically going to find everything that starts with united”
    15. Paragraph Formatting: The course details paragraph formatting options, including alignment (left, center, right, justify), line spacing, paragraph spacing, and indentation.
    16. Non-Printing Characters: It highlights the usefulness of displaying non-printing characters (paragraph marks, spaces, tabs) for troubleshooting formatting issues. “Those paragraph markers are a lot more important than simply just to mark where the end of a paragraph is the paragraph marker actually contains all of the formatting information for that line of text”
    17. Bulleted and Numbered Lists: The creation and customization of bulleted and numbered lists are explained, including multi-level lists and the use of custom bullet symbols (pictures).
    18. Tab Stops: The tutorial covers the use of tab stops for aligning text in columns, including different tab types (left, center, right, decimal, bar) and the concept of leaders.

    Target Audience:

    The course is suitable for both novice and experienced Word users, particularly those who are new to Word 2021 or who are transitioning from older versions.

    Overall Tone:

    The tone is friendly, encouraging, and practical, with Deborah providing clear instructions and helpful tips throughout the tutorial.

    Microsoft Word 2021: Features and Functionality

    Microsoft Word 2021 FAQ

    • What is Microsoft Word 2021, and who is it designed for?
    • Microsoft Word 2021 is the latest standalone version of Word from Microsoft. It is designed for users who want to use Word with the latest features but do not want a Microsoft 365 subscription. It is a one-time purchase, allowing you to own the software rather than rent it monthly.
    • How does Word 2021 differ from Word for Microsoft 365?
    • Word for Microsoft 365 is a subscription-based service, where you pay a monthly fee (typically between $5 and $8). It includes ongoing updates and features, allowing access on multiple devices (desktop, web, mobile) and often includes collaboration features where multiple people can share one account. Word 2021 is a one-time purchase for a specific version of the software, with no ongoing feature updates.
    • Where can I find training and exercise files for Word 2021?
    • Training and exercise files for Word 2021 are often available with training courses, which might be located under a “course resources” tab.
    • What are ribbons in Word 2021, and how can I customize them?
    • Ribbons are located under the title bar and house commands categorized into different tabs and groups (e.g., Home tab with Clipboard, Font, and Paragraph groups). You can customize the ribbon display options by clicking the “Ribbon Display Options” button in the top right corner, allowing you to show tabs and commands, show tabs only, or auto-hide the ribbon. You can add frequently used commands to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT) for easier access. You can also customize which ribbons are visible by going to File > Options > Customize Ribbon.
    • How do I turn on and customize the ruler in Word 2021?
    • To turn on the ruler, go to the “View” tab and check the “Ruler” box in the “Show” group. To change the measurement units (inches, centimeters, etc.), go to “File” > “Options” > “Advanced,” scroll to the “Display” section, and select your preferred units in the “Show measurements in units of” dropdown.
    • How can I effectively use “Find and Replace” in Word 2021?
    • Access “Find” using Ctrl+F or “Replace” using Ctrl+H (or find both under the Editing group in the Home tab). “Find” opens the Navigation Pane, while “Replace” opens a dialog box. You can search for specific text, match case, find whole words only, use wildcard characters (like asterisk), or find text based on formatting (font, bold, etc.). The Replace function allows you to replace found instances with new text or specific formatting. Remember to start the search from the beginning of the document.
    • How can I create and customize bulleted or numbered lists in Word 2021?
    • Select the list items, then go to the “Home” tab, “Paragraph” group, and click either the “Bullets” or “Numbering” dropdown. Customize bullet styles using the “Bullet Library,” define new bullets (using symbols or pictures), and create multi-level lists. The Tab key indents items to a lower level, while Shift+Tab unindents.
    • What is the “Immersive Reader” in Word 2021, and what are its features?
    • The Immersive Reader is a new feature in Word 2021 that helps improve focus and accessibility. It offers features like column width adjustment (narrow, moderate, wide), page color modification, line focus (one, three, or no lines highlighted), text spacing adjustments, syllable display, and a “Read Aloud” feature that highlights and reads the text. You access it via the “View” tab, in the immersive group and exit it using the close button.

    Word 2021: Text Formatting Comprehensive Guide

    Text formatting in Word 2021 encompasses a wide range of options, from basic font adjustments to advanced character spacing and styling.

    Basic Formatting Options:

    • Font selection The default font in Word is Calibri, but it can be changed for the entire document or selected portions. A live preview helps to visualize the font before application.
    • Font size, bold, italics, and underline These can be applied via the font group on the Home tab or the mini toolbar that appears upon text selection. Underlines can be customized with different styles and colors.
    • Strikethrough: Applies a line through the selected text.
    • Subscript and superscript: Useful for chemical formulas or mathematical equations.
    • Text effects and highlighting: Enhancements such as shadows, reflections, and glows can be added. Highlighting emphasizes text, with various colors available.
    • Font color: The color of text can be modified using theme colors or standard colors, with more options available.
    • Clear Formatting: Removes all applied formatting, reverting to the default font (Calibri).

    Selection Techniques:

    • Selecting all text: Use Ctrl+A or the Select All command in the Editing group on the Home tab.
    • Selecting lines or paragraphs: Click in the left margin or drag the mouse.
    • Selecting non-contiguous paragraphs: Select the first paragraph, hold Ctrl, and select additional paragraphs.
    • Selecting individual words: Double-click the word.

    Advanced Formatting Options:

    • Access advanced font settings by clicking the diagonal arrow in the Font group or using the Ctrl+D shortcut. This opens a dialog box with additional options.
    • Character spacing: Adjust the spacing between characters using the Advanced tab in the Font dialog box. Options include expanded or condensed spacing.
    • Text Effects: The text effects button in the advanced options allows you to apply a text fill, a text outline, and other effects as well.

    Mini Toolbar:

    • A floating toolbar appears when text is selected, providing quick access to common formatting commands.
    • The mini toolbar can be disabled in Word options under the General tab.

    Styles:

    • Styles are pre-designed formatting sets that can be applied to text. They ensure consistency and can be customized.
    • The Styles gallery is located on the Home tab.

    Copying and Pasting Text:

    • Cut, copy, and paste: Standard commands with keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V).
    • Clipboard: The clipboard stores cut or copied text and can be accessed from the Home tab.
    • Format Painter: Copies formatting from one piece of text to another. Single-click applies formatting once; double-click allows multiple applications.
    • Paste Options: When pasting text from external sources, choose how to handle formatting. Options include keeping source formatting, merging formatting, or keeping text only.

    Find and Replace:

    • Find: Locates specific text or formatting. Advanced Find allows searching for specific formatting.
    • Replace: Replaces text or formatting. Use wildcards for more flexible searches.

    Word 2021: Paragraph Alignment Guide

    Paragraph alignment is a key aspect of formatting documents in Word 2021, influencing the visual structure and readability of the text. A paragraph in Word is defined as any text followed by a press of the Enter key.

    Word provides several alignment options, each serving a distinct purpose:

    • Left Alignment: The default setting, aligning text to the left margin with a ragged right edge.
    • Center Alignment: Positions text in the center of the page.
    • Right Alignment: Aligns text to the right margin, creating a ragged left edge.
    • Justify: Distributes text evenly between both margins, creating straight lines on both the left and right sides. Word achieves this by adjusting the character spacing within the paragraph. Newspapers often use this alignment.

    These alignment options are found on the Home tab, in the Paragraph group. Each alignment type also has a corresponding keyboard shortcut:

    • Left Alignment: Ctrl + L
    • Center Alignment: Ctrl + E
    • Right Alignment: Ctrl + R
    • Justify: Ctrl + J

    To change the alignment of a paragraph, it is sufficient to click anywhere within the paragraph and select the desired alignment option. It is not necessary to select the entire paragraph.

    Creating and Customizing Lists in Word

    Bulleted and numbered lists are used to make documents easier to read and highlight specific items.

    Creating Lists

    • Bulleted lists can be created by selecting the list items and clicking the “bullets” button in the paragraph group on the Home tab. Clicking the drop-down arrow next to the button will give you access to the bullet library, where you can select different bullet styles.
    • Numbered lists are created similarly, using the numbering button in the same paragraph group. You can select different numbering styles from the numbering library.
    • To remove bullets or numbering, select the list and choose ‘None’ from the respective library.

    Customization

    • Once a list is created, Word recognizes it as such, and changes to the bullet or numbering style will apply to the entire list.
    • You can create different levels within a list by using the tab key to indent. Shift + Tab will indent back out again.
    • It is possible to define a new bullet by using a picture or a symbol. To do so, select “Define New Bullet” and browse for a picture or select a symbol.

    Multilevel Lists

    • Word has a button for creating a multi-level list. This allows you to customize what the different levels look like. When you press the tab key, the next item will be 1.1, and if you press tab again, the next item will be 1.1.1.

    Word 2021: Indents and Tab Stops

    Indents and tab stops are important for structuring documents in Word 2021. Indents are used to move entire paragraphs, or the first line of a paragraph, further from the margin. Tab stops are custom positions along a line of text, useful for creating columns and aligning text.

    Indents

    • Basic indentation: Located on the home tab, the “Increase Indent” button will move a paragraph farther away from the margin. The “Decrease Indent” button will move the paragraph closer to the margin.
    • Advanced indentation: Opens the advanced paragraph options to allow granular control of indentation.
    • You can set the indentation by specifying a measurement.
    • First line indent will indent the first line of the paragraph and leave the rest at the margin.
    • Hanging indent will leave the first line of the paragraph at the margin, and indent every other line.
    • Ruler: Indents can also be adjusted using the ruler. The tab stops on the ruler indicate the indent settings.

    Tab Stops

    • Purpose: Tab stops are used to align text in columns.
    • Types of Tabs: In the top left corner of the screen, a symbol is visible that represents different types of tabs. Clicking the symbol will cycle through the different style options. The different types are:
    • Left tab
    • Center tab
    • Right tab
    • Decimal tab
    • Bar tab
    • First line indent
    • Hanging indent
    • Usage: After selecting the desired tab type, click on the ruler to insert the tab stop. Pressing the tab key will move the cursor to that tab stop.
    • Tab stop customization: Double-clicking a tab stop opens the “Tabs” dialog box, which shows tab stop positions for the current line, and allows you to make changes. You can also set new tab stops, clear existing ones, and add leaders.
    • Leaders: Dotted lines that fill the space preceding the tab stop.

    Word 2021: Document Views and Reading Options

    Document views in Word 2021 allow you to see your document in different ways, each suited for a particular purpose. You can typically find these options on the View tab.

    Available Views:

    • Print Layout: This is the default view, and is used 99% of the time. It shows you how the document will look when printed, including margins, headers, and footers.
    • Read Mode: This view is designed for reading, as opposed to writing. It presents the document like a book, with minimized ribbons to maximize screen space. You can navigate the document by clicking arrows on either side.
    • In Read Mode, you can use tools designed for reading. For example, you can search for specific text, translate selected text, and bring up the navigation pane.
    • In the View dropdown, you can customize the column width, change the page color, and choose between column and paper layout.
    • Web Layout: This view displays how the document would appear as a webpage. It is useful if you intend to upload the document to a web server.
    • Outline: This view shows the document in an outline form, with content displayed as bulleted points. It is useful for creating headings and reorganizing paragraphs. The Outline view has its own contextual ribbon that allows you to organize your document.
    • Draft: This view displays only the text of the document, which makes editing easier. Headers, footers, and certain objects are not visible in this view.

    Additional Viewing Options:

    • Focus: This mode eliminates distractions, allowing you to focus on the content. It minimizes all distractions so you only see your document.
    • In Focus mode, you can change the background color.
    • Immersive Reader: This mode is designed to improve reading skills and is helpful for those with visual impairments. It allows you to adjust text spacing, column width, and page color.
    • The Immersive Reader also has a Read Aloud option that reads the document aloud and highlights each word as it is read. It can turn on syllables, which adds tiny little dots within words whenever there are multiple syllables.

    Dark Mode:

    • Dark mode helps you view your document if you struggle to see black text on a white background. It changes the background of the document to black with white text but does not affect the overall theme of the application.
    • To use dark mode, you may need to add the “switch modes” command to the ribbon. This can be done by going to File > Options > Customize Ribbon and adding the command to a custom group on the View tab.

    You can also switch between different views by using the buttons in the status bar in the bottom right-hand corner.

    Microsoft Word for Beginners: 4-Hour Training Course in Word 2021/365
    MS Word Full Course in Hindi | Microsoft Word Tutorial for Beginners | #mswordcourse #mswordtutorial
    MS Word Basic to Advanced Full Course for FREE with Certificate | Hindi

    The Original Text

    [Music] simon says subscribe and click on the bell icon to receive notifications we’ve made the files the instructor uses in this tutorial available for free just click the link below in the video details to get these hello everyone and welcome to this course on microsoft word 2021 my name is deborah ashby and i’m a microsoft i.t trainer with over 25 years of experience not only using but also training all the different versions of word and i am super excited to be your host for this course now word 2021 is the latest standalone release from microsoft and it’s really designed for people who still want to use word and have all of the latest functionality but don’t necessarily want to commit to a microsoft 365 subscription now it might be that you’re coming to this course after having used a slightly older version of word or maybe a much older version of word if that is the case then i would definitely recommend jumping onto the microsoft website and having a quick look at the what’s new in word 2021 page you’re going to find so much information here which is going to take you through some of the main differences the main changes since the last version of word and fear not we will be going through a lot of these as we work through this course now if you’re still a little bit unsure as to what the difference is between word 2021 standalone and word for microsoft 365 then i would highly recommend you check out this webpage just here this basically goes through a comparison of office 2021 versus microsoft 365 and can really point you towards the main differences and the pros and cons of each so if we take a look down this web page you can see some of the differences between microsoft 365 and office 2021 if you want to use word for microsoft 365 you’re going to need to pay for a monthly subscription and that generally tends to be somewhere between five and eight dollars and whilst this is a low-cost fee each month it is a monthly commitment and what you essentially do is you rent the software from microsoft as opposed to actually owning the software yourself some of the advantages for word for microsoft 365 are that six people can share one account and you can access your applications on the go via the mobile app so on and so forth it also means that any upgrades that are made to word by microsoft are automatically deployed to your pc so you don’t have to keep buying the latest version of word now whilst that suits a lot of people it doesn’t suit everybody and you’ll find that a lot of larger companies it’s not so easy for them to just switch everybody across to a microsoft 365 subscription so if you’re somebody who prefers to buy a license for word 2021 own that copy and just make one payment and not sign up for a monthly commitment then the standalone version of word is going to be the best choice for you you’re still going to get things like all of the security updates but you’re only making one payment and remember that one payment is going to be higher than the monthly charge for word for microsoft 365 but you only make that payment once and it’s definitely worth shopping around different websites because you can get some really good deals if you do want to buy the standalone version of what so this training course is designed for users of word 2021 now there is a lot of crossover between word 2021 and word for microsoft 365. so if you have maybe been using the word 365 version and you’re coming across to word 2021 then it’s going to be a pretty seamless transition this is the latest version with all of the new stuff in it so with all that said let’s take a look at what we’re going to run through throughout the balance of this course so we’re going to start out with a brief introduction that is pretty much what we’re doing now and we’re then going to move on to running through some of the basics so this course is designed for people who have little to no knowledge of word even if you do have a bit more knowledge of word it’s definitely worth running through those basics to make sure that we’re all starting from the same base so we’re going to take a look at things like how to open how to close how to save documents in word i’m going to show you where you can go to get help and run through some of the keyboard shortcuts that you can access once we’ve been through those basics we’re going to move on to working with documents so this is where we’ll take a look at how to create documents based off of templates how we can find the tools that we need to truly work with our documents next we’re going to move on to talking about viewing documents i’m going to show you how you can switch between different document views and use some of the newer features in word 2021 like the immersive reader and also dark mode in the next section we’re going to start inputting text into a document we’re going to run through some of the basic and more advanced formatting options that we have i’m going to show you things like cut copy paste paste special and how you can make selections and also align different things within your document we’ll then move on to working with paragraphs and this is really where we’re going to talk about indenting changing the layout and working with tab stops we’ll then talk about themes in our document and i’ll show you all the different ways that you can change the look and feel of your document such as changing the colors that you’re using the font and also the effects the next section is a really important section and that is word styles we’re going to walk through what exactly word styles are and why they’re useful and i’ll show you how you can quickly apply styles throughout your document to organize it and also make it a lot easier for you to do things like create a table of contents we’ll then move on to talking about pictures tables and objects i’ll show you how you can liven up your document a little bit by adding in images icons 3d models characters things like that and also how you can organize data using tables we’ll then also take a look at some other types of objects that you can insert such as smartart diagrams charts and screenshots next we’ll take a look at formatting our pages we’ll dive into the page setup options such as how to change the margins the orientation the paper size and set up things like headers and footers in the references section we’ll walk through how you can create things like a table of contents or maybe even an index at the end of your document i’ll show you how cross references work citations and how we can create bibliographies tables of figures and also tables of authority in the next section we’ll run through a classic in microsoft word and that is mail merge i’ll show you how to use the step-by-step mail merge wizard to quickly create multiple letters and we’ll also take a look at how we can generate envelopes and labels as well next we’ll move on to talking about spelling and grammar in a little bit more detail i’ll run through some of the settings that we need to change in order to get that to work correctly and we’ll also take a look at how we can create our own auto text entries next we’ll move on to talking about track changes and comments i’ll walk you through exactly what track changes are and how they can be useful when multiple people are making changes to a document i’m also going to show you how you can compare two documents together and how you can add comments to your document and then the final working section of this course is finalizing a document for this we’ll run through how you can send your document to print how you can change all of your printer options i’ll also show you different ways that you can share your documents with other people and also co-author documents in word 2021 again that is a brand new feature now we are going to cover a lot more than the things that i’ve mentioned there throughout this course i’ll be throwing in little tips and tricks that i like to use as well as referencing keyboard shortcuts wherever possible throughout this course i’ll be using different course files to work through the examples so if you want to follow along with me then you’re going to find all of the course files that i use available to download from the course files folder and for each lesson there is a starting course file and a completed course file so when you start the video open up the starting file and if for some reason you get lost or you just want to skip to the next lesson there’s also a completed version of the course file as well so you should be able to pick up this course at any given point using the course files so make sure that you have those downloaded from the website before we begin you’ll also find at the end of each section an exercise file and this is going to help you practice some of the skills that you’ve learned throughout that section and you’ll find all of the exercise files in the exercise files folder so once again make sure you have those downloaded if you’d like to work along with me so with all that said it’s time to dive into word 2021 once again my name is deb and i hope you enjoyed this course the first exercise of this course is a very simple and straightforward one i’d like you to ensure that you have a working copy of word 2021 downloaded and installed onto your pc and i’d also like you to make sure that you’ve got the course and the exercise files downloaded and stored somewhere that’s easily accessible once you’ve done both of those two things then you’re pretty much ready to start the course now if you’d like to see my answer to this exercise then please keep watching the first thing i asked you to do for this exercise was make sure that you have a copy of word 2021 downloaded and installed and there are numerous different websites you can go to in order to download a copy of word 2021 just wherever you go to do this make sure that it is a legitimate copy once you’ve downloaded it and install it onto your pc depending on which operating system you’re using and i’m currently using windows 11 but it is very similar on windows 10 go down to your taskbar open up the start menu and you should be able to see word in your list of applications if you can’t see it there immediately then you’ll need to search for it simply by typing in word and you can launch it from there if you’d like to go a stage further and pin it to your taskbar then you can simply right click and choose pin to taskbar mine says unpin because i already have it pinned down there so that makes word super simple for you to access every time you want to open it once you’ve got a copy of word installed the next thing to do is download the course and exercise files that you’re going to need to run through each lesson with me now you’ll find the course files for this course underneath the course resources tab and you should find two links just here one for the exercise files and one for the instructor demo files now this example is for word 2019 but if you’ve bought the 2021 course you’ll see the exercise and demo files for that version listed just there that is pretty much it once you’ve done both of those things then you are ready to start the course for the next section you’ll want to download the course exercise files click the link below in the video description to get these you can also scroll through the details to find timestamps for each section in this course if you’re enjoying this training please leave us a comment so let’s start out in word 2021 by firing up the application and having a little explore of the interface now when you first open up word 2021 it’s going to take you directly to what we call the start screen and you only really ever see this screen in this format this layout when you first open word and it’s a very simple screen to navigate around on the left hand side we have a very small menu the three main buttons we’re interested in here are home new and open so if we start out with the home page which is what we’re looking at now this is where you can come to create a new blank document you can see i’ve got that highlighted at the top here or i can select a template to create a document from and there are hundreds of templates in word that you can use which really takes all of the hard work and the stress out of creating certain types of documents i’m going to talk a lot more about templates later on but just know that you can access them from here and if you want to see the full list we have a more templates link all the way over on the right hand side we’re just going to open up our template gallery and allow us to search for specific templates but as i said more about that a bit later on let’s jump back to home and take a look at what we have in the lower half of this screen well this is where you’re going to find all of the documents that you’ve recently accessed and the number of documents that you see in this list very much depends on what you have set in your word options and i’ll show you where to go to change this in a moment so this is just a super quick way of seeing the last documents that you access the last documents that you used and being able to get back to them quickly if i want to open one of these i can simply double click and it’s going to open that up in word so really nice and straightforward now that i’ve got a document open if i try and get back to that start screen you’ll find that you actually can’t if i jump up to file which takes us into the backstage area we get to a similar screen but it’s not exactly the same as the start screen so i just wanted to highlight that in case you were wondering well how do i get back to the start screen if i’ve opened a document you actually can’t you need to close down all of word and then re-open word again to get back to that page now what you’ll also notice with all of these recent documents is if you select one of them and right click notice that we get a right-click menu so again we can open we can open a copy we can delete the file we can even remove the file from this list so if there’s something in your recent list that you don’t really need you could choose simply to remove it it doesn’t delete the file it’s just going to remove it from your recent list but the one that i want to focus on here is pin to list because if you select this option what it’s going to do is it’s going to pin that particular document notice that we also have a pinned category just here so if i click on pinned you can see that any documents that i’ve pinned will appear in their own exclusive list you’ll also notice that if we go back to recent anything that you pin is going to appear at the top of your recent list it’s not going to move as we open more documents so this is super useful if you have a few documents that you find yourself accessing all the time you can simply pin them to the top of the list and they’re always going to be there notice that when you do pin a document you get the little drawing pin icon just here and of course if you want to do the reverse and unpin any documents you can simply just click on the drawing pin icon to unpin the item from the list or you can right click your mouse and unpin it from that right click menu so that is pretty much what you have on that home page let’s jump across to new and take a look at what we have in here well as you might expect this is where you would come if you want to create a new document and that might be a blank document you can see that’s the first one in the list or we might choose to create a document based off of a template for example if i am writing a cv or a resume i might want to start from a template as opposed to from a blank document and you can see here we have a template for a resume just below now as i mentioned word does contain hundreds of different templates all divided down into different categories which makes them a lot easier to find and we are going to cover templates how we use them how we save them in later lessons so at this stage the only thing you really need to remember is this is where you can come to create blank documents or documents based off of a template the next button we have in this left hand menu is open and this is where you can come to you guessed it open documents and you can pretty much access any location where you might have documents stored and yours might not look exactly the same as mine it depends what type of cloud storage you use and if you’ve connected that to word so you can see here right at the top i’m clicked on recent and on the right hand side it’s showing me a list of all of my recent documents and if i click across to folders i can see all of my most recent folders that i’ve saved into so this is just here to help me find the document that i want to open so if it’s something in the last week i’m more than likely going to find it somewhere in this list and i can simply double click to open it or i can right click my mouse and choose open now underneath recent i then have some connections set up to the cloud storage that i use so i generally tend to save all of my files not just word files all types of files into onedrive for safe storage i also have a sharepoint site that i sometimes save files into so i have both of those connected to word to make it really easy for me to access any of the folders that i have in my cloud storage you’ll notice if i click on onedrive it’s opening up my teams folder this is the only folder that i have in this particular onedrive account but i can navigate through the different folders and choose to open a file from there also notice i have onedrive personal storage here as well so this is for my more personal files but if you do want to open a file from your pc so maybe it’s in your my documents folder or save to your desktop you have a this pc option as well which is going to allow you to navigate through those folders and find the file you want to open if you don’t like this particular structure and you prefer to open your files through file explorer you can also click on browse which is going to open that file explorer window for you and you can then navigate to open the file that you need and then finally here we have an add a place button and this will really just help you set up a link to your onedrive cloud storage account so if you do have one drive and you want it to appear like mine do in word you can simply choose add a place and then select if you have a onedrive personal or onedrive for business and then just walk through the process of adding that in so that is pretty much everything you have underneath open super easy to find and open your files the last three menu options that we have at the bottom here account feedback and options let’s quickly click on account and take a quick look at what we have in here well as you might expect this is where you can come to take a look at your user information so for example if i want to change my photo i can do that from here if i want to sign out of this account or sign into a different account i can do that from here as well i can do things like change my office background so if you take a look all the way up in the right hand corner notice i kind of have this circle and stripes pattern i can change that from here to something completely different if i want to i can see my connected services again and again i get the opportunity to add onedrive or onedrive for business services on the right hand side we can see a little bit of information about the office product that we’re using so you can see here i’m using microsoft office professional plus 2021 this is also where you would come to update your version of word now updates are automatically downloaded and installed but if you want to manually check for an update you can do that from here now feedback at the bottom this is just if you want to send some feedback to microsoft about something you like something you don’t like or you might even want to suggest a new feature and then finally at the bottom we have options and this is where all of your settings for word live and making changes here really allows you to customize and set word up so that it works in the best way for you now again we’re going to be diving in and out of word options as we go throughout this course so we’re not going to go through each of these headings the only thing i want to show you is how you can modify how many documents you’re seeing in that recent documents list on the start screen so if we jump down to the advanced section and use our mouse to scroll down once we get to the display category here it is the first option just here show this number of recent documents i have mine set to 50 but you might find that that is a little bit excessive and you might want to set that to something else so let’s just say 25 and click on ok but that is basically a quick run through of the start screen in word 2021 so now that we’re a little bit more familiar with the start screen it’s time to load up a blank document and get ourselves comfortable with the word interface now there are a few different ways that you can create a new blank document we’re going to take the easiest route as we clicked on the home page up in this new section we’re simply going to double click on blank document now that’s going to load a blank document into the main word screen and this is the screen you’re going to be working in the majority of the time so let’s get ourselves comfortable with what we’re looking at just here now if you’re already a word user or you use other microsoft applications like excel or powerpoint then you’re probably already very familiar with the ribbon structure layout it’s been around for quite a few years now and most people are using versions of word which have this same layout now what you’ll find is right at the top of the screen where we have the blue bar this is what we call add title bar and you’re going to see a couple of pieces of information in this title bar if you cast your eyes all the way over to the left hand side notice i have a very tiny little drop down just here now this is actually the quick access toolbar and we have a whole lesson dedicated to what the quick access toolbar is and how we can customize it for now just be aware that currently our quick access toolbar is located in the top left hand corner we then move across and we have the title of this document now because i haven’t saved this document as yet i’m just getting the generic name of document one we’re going to save this in a couple of lessons time we then have a handy search bar and this search bar is really useful if you are struggling to find a particular command on one of the ribbons it’s also where you can come to read more about a specific command and access the help files and then finally all the way over on the right hand side we have these little buttons that are fairly consistent across all of the microsoft applications we can see our account information up here we have some ribbon display options as well which i’ll come back to in a moment after we’ve spoken a bit more about ribbons and then finally we have the minimize button so if we want to minimize word down into the taskbar we can do that and we can even snap the layout i can choose to snap my copy of word to the left hand side of my screen and then choose another application to open up in the right hand side of the screen and then finally we have a close button all the way in the top right hand corner now the thing you need to remember about this close button in the top right hand corner is that it will close down all of word so if you have a few different documents open it’s going to close all of the open documents if you simply want to close the document that you currently have open this is where you would go to file and down to close so it’s still going to leave word open it’s just going to close down that one particular file whereas if we click the cross it’s going to close down all of word now let’s just fire word up one more time and just create a new blank document now underneath that title bar this is where we have our ribbons and the ribbons are really there to house all of the commands that we use in word and all of the commands are categorized not only onto different ribbons but also into different groups for example on the home ribbon we have a clipboard group that contains things like cut copy paste we have a font group with all of our font formatting options paragraph group for alignment and then we have a group for different word styles and then an editing group at the end where we can do things like find specific pieces of text and replace them and all commands are categorized in similar ways and in general you’ll find your most commonly used commands on the home ribbon if we click across to insert and just take a quick look at some of the things we have on here this is where you would come to insert different things into your document that might be a table or a cover page or maybe a shape or an icon or maybe something like a comment or a link or a header and footer the draw tab is where we’re going to find all of our drawing tools particularly useful if you work with a touch screen device and a stylus we have a design tab to help us control the look and feel of our documents a layout tab where we can do things like change the orientation add margins add line breaks things like that a references ribbon for adding things like tables of contents footnotes and endnotes or even an index at the end of our document the mailings tab is where we come to do good old mail merge so if we need to create a lot of letters or envelopes or labels addressed to different clients or customers this is where we can come to do that we have a review tab which is a tab that you tend to access towards the end of completing your document so it houses things like spelling and grammar the thesaurus and we can do things like track changes and also compare documents the view tab is where we can come to adjust how we’re viewing our document and just note here that in the views group at the beginning currently i have print layout selected it’s worth noting that print layout is predominantly the view that you’re going to be using when you’re putting your document together and then finally we have a help tab and we’ll come back to this later on in this section when we discuss where you can go to get help in a bit more detail so just remember these are called ribbons we then have groups which contain all of our commands now one tab i haven’t really mentioned is the file tab and that is because it’s not really considered to be a ribbon this gives us access to what we call the backstage area and this kind of looks a little bit similar to the start screen but we have a lot more options so this is where you would come to do your more admin style tasks for your document it’s where you come to create new documents to find your templates to open new documents we can also do things like save from here print our document share it export it so on and so forth and we’ll be diving in and out of here as we go throughout the course now notice if you want to get back to your document all the way at the top on the left hand side we have a back arrow we can simply click that to take us back to that document a couple of final points before we end this lesson obviously in the main bulk of this screen we can see our blank document our cursor is flashing which means we are ready to type and then right at the bottom we have the status bar and the status bar is really there to show you different pieces of useful information for example currently i can see all the way over on the left hand side that i am on page one of one i’ve typed zero words i can see the a language that i’m using so in this case english united kingdom it’s checked my accessibility so how accessible is my document to people with disabilities well i haven’t put anything in the document yet so it’s telling me that it’s good to go and then all the way over on the right hand side we have a zoom slider to help us zoom in and out of our document and we can also switch the way that we’re viewing our document from down there as well now the final point to note here as i mentioned i would come back to it is related to these ribbons so currently i’m displaying my ribbons which is perfectly fine because i want to be able to see all of my commands but if we go all the way up to the right hand side remember we’ve got a little ribbon display options button just here and if i click it i have a few different options in relation to how i’m viewing these ribbons for example if i want a little bit more room on the screen a little bit more real estate to work with my document i can choose to auto hide the ribbon which is going to collapse up those ribbons and give me more space to see my document if i click on the three dots again it’s going to bring that back down if we click on ribbon display options again i might choose to just show the tabs so this time i can still see the tabs but i can’t see the actual commands underneath if i want to access them i can click on insert and it’s going to drop that ribbon down and if we click on ribbon options again i can choose to show tabs and commands which is the default and if i’m honest probably the option that i use the majority of the time so that is the word interface make sure you’re familiar with it and comfortable as we move forward through this section when we start working with word documents what we generally tend to find is that we spend quite a bit of time aligning and positioning different objects on our pages for example i might want to align different paragraphs or different words i might want to align pictures or shapes on my page and one thing that’s really going to help with this is the ruler now currently i don’t have my rulers turned on so i just wanted to take a quick moment to show you where this setting is so that you can make sure that you have your rulers turned on now when it comes to rulers we can choose to have a horizontal ruler or a vertical ruler or we can choose to have both and you’ll find the ruler option on the view tab at the top so let’s click on view in the show group in the middle here notice we have an option for ruler now look what happens when i hover over ruler i’m getting what we call a screen tip appear on the page and screen tips are so useful because they give you an idea as to what this command does and you’ll notice that these pop up whenever you hover over any of the commands on the ribbon so this tells me that this is going to show rulers next to the document we can see tab stops move table borders and line up objects in the document also you can measure stuff so pretty useful let’s click in the box to turn the rulers on now notice here we have a horizontal and also a vertical ruler now take a look at the measurements here currently my measurements are set to inches in the uk we tend to still use inches slightly more than we use centimeters but that might be different for you you might be somebody who much prefers to use centimeters well the good news is that we can change the measurements that we’re using for our rulers so where do we go to change our measurement units well if we go to file we’re going to find this in options because effectively we’re customizing how our copy of word works for us and we’ll find this underneath advanced again now if we use the scroll bar to scroll through some of these options because we do have quite a lot in here we’re going to find it underneath that display section again so this is where we were previously when we modified the number of recent documents that we could see now notice here it says show measurements in units of and then mine is set to inches but if we click the drop down we can choose centimeters millimeters points or peakers so if we select centimeters and click on ok notice that my ruler has now changed so make sure you get your rulers set up to display a measurement that’s meaningful to you now the other thing i just wanted to mention very quickly in this lesson so you’re familiar with it as we’re going to use it quite a bit as we move through this course is how to zoom and when we say zoom i mean zooming into the document or zooming out of the document now to demonstrate this i’m just going to add some text to this document and this is a quick little trainer trick in order to get a few paragraphs of dummy or test text into a document we can type in equals rand and then we can specify how many paragraphs and how many lines we want so i’m just going to say 5 comma 5 and that’s going to give me five paragraphs of five lines each of random text now if i want to zoom into this document there are a few different things i can do if we cast our eyes all the way down to the bottom right hand corner of the screen we have what we call the zoom slider and you can see that currently i’m zoomed in to 110 percent in this document but if i want to change that i can simply drag the slider to zoom in or drag it all the way out to zoom out and of course the one in the middle there is going to be 100 alternatively if you are using a mouse that has a scroll wheel you can hold down the ctrl key and use your scroll wheel to scroll in and back out again and then the final way that you can zoom is again up on the view ribbon so in the zoom group we have a zoom button and then we have a 100 button so if we click on zoom this is where we can define or choose the exact percentage that we want to zoom to so i have options for 200 percent 100 or 75 or i can be very granular about how much i want to zoom in or out and use this little percent box just here to select my zoom level i also have some other presets here i can zoom to exactly the page width i can zoom to the text width or the whole page so if i choose text width and click on ok it’s going to zoom in so that the text is exactly at the end of the page now if i quickly want to zoom back out to 100 instead of using the zoom slider or trying to get it right with the scroll wheel this is where we can use the 100 button to take the document back to that zoom level and again in this zoom group we can zoom into one page so it’s kind of going to zoom out and just show me one page of my document i can zoom to multiple pages which doesn’t work for me at the moment because i only have one page or i can zoom in to exactly the page width so a few different zoom options in there for you to play around with so the main takeaways from this lesson are to make sure that you have your rulers turned on and they’re displaying a unit of measurement that’s meaningful to you and also know the different options that you have for zooming in and out of your documents another important thing to make sure that you have turned on when working with word documents is check spelling as you type this is a super helpful option that really keeps a check on your spelling as you’re working through your documents if it finds that you’ve spelt a word wrong or even if you have a grammatical error it’s going to flag it to you immediately so that you can correct it so if we’re correcting all of our errors as we’re working through our document it really diminishes the need to do a blanket spell check at the end of the document now i would always recommend that you do do a final spell check before you send this document off to someone important but you’ll find that it’s a lot quicker if you’ve already been checking your spelling and your grammar as you’ve been typing the document now check spelling as you type is another one of those little options that we need to toggle on or toggle off depending on if we want to use it so let me first show you a little example of how spelling and grammar flags in word now the first thing i’m going to do here is i’m simply going to delete out all of this junk text that i added in the previous lesson so a couple of little shortcuts coming up here to delete all of this text i just need to make sure i’m clicked somewhere in this document i can press ctrl a which is going to select all of the text and then i can simply press the delete key so now i’m going to type a sentence but i’m going to make a grammatical error and also a spelling mistake now notice what happens now that i’ve typed that sentence i’ve typed in word we can use and tremplate to create and document so that’s not a particularly great sentence but it is an accurate representation of the types of words that we can type if we’re typing really fast now notice what’s going on here where we have the spelling mistakes those are underlined and automatically flank to me with a red squiggly underline now notice what word’s done here it’s flagged not only the spelling mistake but also the grammatical errors so spelling mistakes are going to appear with a red squiggly line underneath them and your grammatical errors are going to appear with a blue double underline and the cool thing about this is that we have the option to correct these on the fly as we’re working with the document so what i can do here is where we have an which is a grammatical error i can right click my mouse and it’s going to give me a choice at the top here of what this word should be and yes it should be a in word we can use a template so now i need to correct the spelling mistake we can right click i’m getting my choices at the top here and i’m going to select template and finally we have another spelling error just here let’s right click and yes this should be two and now that i’ve corrected those and word has this sentence in context in its brain it’s also picked up that the an is a grammatical error and again that is correct it should be a so let’s right click and choose a from the list now if you go through and check your spelling as you type when you get to the end of your document you can still run a blanket spell check and in fact you can run a spell check at any point so let’s just take a quick look at how we would do that there is a shortcut key to invoke spell check and that is f7 notice that it’s come up spelling and grammar check is complete now we’re going to do this a bit later on with another document so you can see how you can work with the internal dictionary but also remember that you can find your spelling options on the review tab as well in the proofing group so if we click spelling and grammar that’s basically the same as pressing the f7 key because i have no spelling mistakes because i’ve been checking as i’ve typed i’m just getting a message saying that the check is complete now if you find that when you’re working and typing text into your document it’s not flagging up any spelling errors or grammatical errors it might be that you don’t have check spelling as you type turned on your word options so let’s jump across to file down to options and this time we want to go to the proofing page and right at the bottom here this is the option you’re looking for check spelling as you type and also mark grammar errors as you type and i also like to have frequently confused words turned on and also check grammar with spelling as well so in general i’ll have these four turned on what you’ll probably find if it’s not picking it up that this option has been deselected so make sure you have a tick in that box click on ok and then you can correct your errors as you go at the start of this course when we were taking a quick whiz around the word interface i mentioned very briefly the quick access toolbar in this lesson that’s exactly what we’re going to focus on because it is such a great tool to help you with efficiency now if you recall all the way up in the top left hand corner i highlighted to you this little drop down arrow notice if i hover over it it says customize quick access toolbar now at the moment this isn’t particularly interesting we just have a drop down arrow so what exactly is this toolbar and how do we add things to it well the quick access toolbar is a way that we can create shortcuts to commands that we use most frequently so instead of hunting through the different ribbons looking for the commands that we want to use if it’s something we use all the time it’s much easier just to add it to the quick access toolbar and have it easily available and we can add any command that’s available in word to the quick access toolbar now if we click this little drop down notice what we have here we have a selection of 10 to 15 or so commands that we can automatically add to the qat and i guess these are commands that microsoft have deemed useful to everybody so most people will create new documents on a fairly frequent basis most people will save most people will print at some point and in particular a lot of people like to use the undo and redo buttons so we have a small selection here of commands that we can very quickly add to the qat or the quick access toolbar with one click so i’m going to add new and you can see as i do that the icon appears i’m also going to add let’s do undo and also redo and i’m also going to add automatically save to give myself this little slider i’m going to talk more about auto save when we get to the part about saving documents but hopefully you get the idea of what we’re doing here we’re simply just adding default commands to the quick access toolbar to make them easy to access now obviously when we click this drop down we only have 15 commands that we can add to the qat from here but what if i want to add something completely different maybe i am always inserting tables into my documents how can i add the table command to the quick access toolbar well what we can do is we can jump across to the insert tab here is the table command i can simply right click and choose add to quick access toolbar to put that up there so you can basically right-click on any of your commands on any of these ribbons and add them to the quick access toolbar if they have little drop-downs those will come with them as well now what about if i want to add a command to my quick access toolbar that doesn’t show on any of the ribbons you’ll see in a moment as we start to go through this course not every command is visible all the time in word so what about those hidden commands or commands that are on menus that aren’t currently active well we can click the drop down again and we can go down to more commands now this screen will probably look familiar because it’s basically just jumped us into our word options and it’s placed us into the quick access toolbar page and this is where we can add any command available in word to that qat now if we start on the right hand side notice that this is showing my quick access toolbar and all of the commands that i currently have on this toolbar also notice that next to this area we have up and down buttons so i can rearrange the order of my commands so maybe i want to move undo and redo up to the top because i use those most frequently now over on the left hand side this is where i can find all of my commands in word and they’re split down into different categories so currently i’m viewing all of the popular commands in word and notice that the commands are listed out in alphabetical order which does make it a little bit easier to find them if i want to see a list of the commands that are not in the ribbons i can choose that group or maybe i just want to see a big long list of all commands available in word i can choose all commands and now i can scroll through and find absolutely everything so the idea here is to find the command you want to add so i’m going to say let’s add some alignment tools so i’m going to select align center and then i’m going to click the add button in the middle to add that to my quick access toolbar let’s also do a line left and also a line right and obviously you can probably see how this works if you want to remove anything from the quick access toolbar you can do that from here you can just select it and click the remove button in the middle and now maybe i want to reorganize these so let’s move auto save up to the top and then i think i’m fairly happy with the order of the rest of these so now if i click on ok it’s going to update my quick access toolbar into the order that i’ve specified it’s also worth noting that if you want to delete commands from the quick access toolbar without having to go into options you can simply right click and choose remove from quick access toolbar now another thing you might want to do here is change the actual position of the quick access toolbar currently it’s kind of up there in the title bar it’s nice and tucked away so it’s not getting in the way of my document but if you find that you kind of forget that it’s there when it’s up in the title bar you can click the drop down and choose show below ribbon to place it underneath your ribbons and this is generally how i prefer to have my quick access toolbar the final thing you can do here is you can add or organize your commands by using separators this isn’t something you have to do but if you want to sort these into groups of commands that are related together then separators work quite well once again if we click the drop down and jump into more commands notice at the top of every one of these groups so it doesn’t matter which one we select we always have a separator option so i’m going to add a couple of separators let’s just select it and i’m going to add a couple of these and then i can move them into position so maybe i want to separate off save undo and redo from my other commands and maybe i want to separate off my alignment tools from my new file command now when i click on ok you can probably see very faint separator lines between these different groups of commands which just helps me keep my quick access toolbar a little bit more organized but that’s how you can add commands to your quick access toolbar or qat for short to improve your efficiency when you’re working inward keyboard shortcuts are another way to help yourself become a lot more efficient when you’re working with word keyboard shortcuts allow us to execute different word commands without touching the mouse and you might think well why would i want to do that we have to remember that when you’re working in a word document and you have your hands on the keyboard and you’re busy typing away sometimes it can be a bit of a pain to keep having to reach for your mouse to select your commands from the different ribbons what is sometimes a lot quicker is to be able to use the keyboard to execute a shortcut to perform a task and in word we have lots and lots of different shortcuts and the good news is that if you’re coming from an older version of word or even if you’re coming from another microsoft application like excel or powerpoint many of the keyboard shortcuts are exactly the same in word now as i mentioned there are hundreds of keyboard shortcuts in word and you’re definitely not going to be able to remember all of them in general what i tend to find is that most people have a selection of about 10 to 15 that they use all of the time and most of those are to execute really common tasks for example if i want to copy this line that i have in this document i can highlight the sentence and press the keyboard shortcut ctrl c which is going to copy it i can then move somewhere else in the document and use the keyboard shortcut ctrl v to paste it if i want to make a word in one of these sentences bold i can simply select it by double clicking and use the keyboard shortcut ctrl b to make it bold what about if i now want to make it italic well i have a keyboard shortcut for that as well of control i or maybe i want to align the entire sentence into the middle of my document ctrl e to do that and if i want to print ctrl p is going to take me to the print preview area so that’s a selection of a few common keyboard shortcuts there are a lot more but really what i want to focus on in this lesson is where you can find a list of the keyboard shortcuts and how you can really work efficiently using shortcuts and the ribbons now when it comes to finding shortcut keys for different commands there are a couple of different places you can go to a lot of the commands when you hover over them will show a screen tip and if it has a keyboard shortcut you’re going to be able to see that shortcut for example if i go to the home ribbon and the font group notice here we have the bold icon if i hover my mouse over it it tells me that it’s going to execute bold it’s going to make the font bold and it’s showing me that keyboard shortcut ctrl b if i hover over let’s say the new document icon on the quick access toolbar i’m also seeing the keyboard shortcut there of control n what about if i hover my mouse over the center alignment well we’re seeing that keyboard shortcut there as well control e and another keyboard shortcut we looked at if we jump to the review tab and hover over spelling and grammar we can see the keyboard shortcut there of f7 so if the command does have a keyboard shortcut you’re going to see in the screen tip in brackets unless you’ve turned screen tips off more about that in the next lesson now aside from looking at these screen tips where else can we go to find a list of keyboard shortcuts well we can use the help files now i’m going to use the search bar at the top of the screen and notice when i hover over the search bar this itself has a keyboard shortcut of alt q so if i’m clicked somewhere else down here in my document and i quickly want to jump up to that search bar i can press alt q and my cursor is going to move up to that area what i can do from here is i can simply type in keyboard shortcuts and what i’m going to choose here is get help on keyboard shortcuts this is going to open up the help files it’s going to open up this pane on the right hand side and we are going to explore help in a little bit more detail in a couple of lessons time so what we can do here is we can click on this top link and that’s going to take us directly to a very comprehensive list of all of the keyboard shortcuts in word now because there are so many of them they are divided down into different topics so let’s take a look in frequently used shortcuts so this is where you’ll find the most common shortcuts so ctrl o to open a document ctrl s to save a document ctrl w to close we’ve got our cut copy and paste control x control c and control v a shortcut you saw me use earlier when i deleted all the text from the document ctrl a to select all ctrl b to apply bold ctrl i to apply italics so on and so forth so my advice to you here is to write down a few keyboard shortcuts for commands that you find yourself using frequently and you’ll find that over time you’ll commit these to memory and it becomes very instinctive to use the keyboard shortcut as opposed to clicking on the icon on the ribbon so you can find keyboard shortcuts in the help files the final thing i want to show you here is a really cool way of basically completely working with keyboard shortcuts as opposed to using your mouse so if you are someone who likes to keep their hands on the keyboard at all times this might be a good option for you if we press the alt key notice what comes up on the ribbons pretty much everything that we have in this top part of the screen now has its own shortcut key assigned so if i want to go back to the home ribbon i can press the h i then get an entirely new set of keyboard shortcuts so if i now want to type in bold i could press number one and now when i type notice that it’s all in bold i can press alt again to bring that list back up maybe i want to go to the insert tab so i can press n and insert a table let’s press t it’s going to give me that drop down and then i can then hold down shift and define using my arrow keys what size table i want to insert hit enter to accept so you can pretty much work with keyboard shortcuts the entire time simply by pressing that alt key if you have your alt keys displayed and you want to come out of there you can simply press the escape key on your keyboard in this lesson i want to speak to you in a little bit more detail about screen tips text your menus and contextual ribbons now we’ve briefly spoken about screen tips in previous lessons if we hover our mouse over any command on the ribbon we get a screen tip pop-up which gives us an idea as to what that command actually does it will also show us in brackets if there is a keyboard shortcut assigned to this particular command now i find screen tips really useful sometimes if i’m just looking at a particular icon i don’t really know what it does but i can get an idea by reading the information in those screen tips now it might be over time as you become more familiar with word you don’t necessarily want to see these screen tips popping up all of the time because some of them are quite large and they can kind of get in the way now you do have control over not only the information that you can see in these screen tips but also if you have them turned on or turned off so again let’s take a quick look at that as you might have guessed we’re going to find this in our word options so let’s go to file let’s go back down to options and this time we want to click on general now the first group here is user interface options and you’ll see right at the bottom of this group it says screen tip style so i have my screen tips set to show the feature descriptions in my screen tips but we do have some other options in here i could say don’t show feature descriptions in screen tips let’s see what that looks like so we can click on ok and now if i hover my mouse over format painter for example notice it’s still telling me the keyboard shortcut but it’s not showing me any information as to what this command does let’s go back to file and into options the other option we have in here is to not show them at all so again if we click on ok when i hover over any command i’m not getting any type of screen tip showing there now as i said i find screen tips really useful so i always like to make sure that i show feature descriptions so that’s what screen tips are but what about contextual menus well those are pretty much what they say on the tin they’re menus that come up but they’re menus that are within the context of wherever it is that you’re clicked so for example my mouse is currently clicked in this line of text that we have at the top of the page now to access contextual menus you right click your mouse and when we’re talking about contextual menus it’s this menu we’re talking about here so all of the commands that i can see in this right click or contextual menu are related to wherever i’m clicked so because i’m just clicked in text i can change the font i can change the paragraph i can maybe create a link or add a new comment now this contextual menu is going to be different depending on what it is that i’m clicked on for example i inserted a table using shortcut keys in the last lesson now if i click inside this table and then right click my mouse i get a different type of contextual menu because this time it’s showing me things that are specifically related to tables such as inserting columns and inserting rows so contextual menus change depending on where you’re clicked now another thing you might have noticed there when i right clicked my mouse is that not only do we get this contextual menu we get what we call a mini toolbar and this mini toolbar will pop up whenever you right click and it just contains commands that people generally tend to use frequently in their documents and really this is just here to make it a little bit easier for you to access those commands you don’t have to stretch your mouse quite as far you’ll also notice that that mini toolbar will come up when we make a selection on the screen so if i select the word template notice that that toolbar pops up again so i can very simply make it bold maybe i want to add a highlight color or do something else now again this is one of those features that some people really like and find useful and other people just find simply annoying and i will say that i do find this a little bit annoying sometimes if i’m just making different selections this toolbar keeps popping up and covering some of the words that i’m trying to read now if you want to turn off the mini toolbar you can do that now be aware of what i’m saying here when we turn off the mini toolbar we’re simply turning it off for when we make selections in a sentence we’re not turning it off when we right click it’s always going to show when you right click but the setting toggles off if it shows or not when you select a word or a paragraph or something else so let me show you where that setting is once again you guessed it up to file and into options with staying on the general page in user interface options it’s this option just here show mini toolbar on selection so if we deselect that and click on ok notice that when i right click it still comes up but now if i select a specific word i’m not getting that toolbar so it really is a personal choice as to whether you want to display that or not now the final thing to speak about in this lesson is contextual ribbons and again these are ribbons that are only displayed when they’re needed so for example if we take a look at the ribbons that i currently have let’s just do a quick review of the current layout of my ribbons the last ribbon i have here is the help ribbon now take a look what happens to these ribbons when i click inside the table so i’m going to move my mouse down click inside notice i now have two additional ribbons table design and layout so if i click on table design i now have lots of different design options for formatting my table and if i click on layout this is where i can come to do things like delete the table or maybe insert new rows or columns or split the cells now these two ribbons are considered contextual ribbons because as soon as i click my mouse somewhere else in the document outside of the table they disappear so it’s a great way of making sure that your word isn’t cluttered with lots of different ribbons that you don’t necessarily always need it only shows them when they’re relevant and you’ll find this depending on what you’ve selected so if i’ve got maybe a picture or an icon inserted into my document i’m going to get contextual ribbons so let me show you that very quickly we haven’t covered inserting things yet but just to give you an idea i’m just very quickly going to insert an icon i’m just going to choose this plain icon from the icons library notice that when i have it selected i now have a new contextual ribbon called graphics format and this is going to allow me to change the color change the outline change the alignment grouping so on and so forth of this particular selected object also note that if you right click on this you’re then going to get a contextual menu related to graphics and again this is going to contain different options to when we simply right click on something like text so just start to be aware of this concept of contextual menus and contextual ribbons in the final lesson of this section i just want to revisit because this is a really important thing to know particularly if you’re new to word or you’re still learning word you’re probably going to find yourselves diving in and out of the help files all the time so it’s good to know the different options that you have and how you can best work with the very comprehensive library of help files now the first thing that’s most obvious when it comes to accessing help is that we have a help ribbon just here now if for some reason you can’t see this help ribbon it’s worth checking in your word options that you have the help ribbon selected i know sometimes help isn’t added as a default ribbon when you first open word so let’s quickly check where that option is so you can make sure that you can see this ribbon so once again we’re going to go back to file and into options and this time we’re going to choose the customize ribbon page now over on the right hand side this is where you can see all of the ribbons you have access to and the ones with ticks next to them are the ones that are currently displaying so if for some reason you can’t see help it might be that you have it deselected so make sure that you have a tick there click on ok and then you can see that help ribbon now the first button here is where we can access the help files notice the keyboard shortcut here of f1 and you can invoke f1 at any time when you’re working in your document so let’s click on help it’s going to open up a pane on the right hand side and it’s worth noting that this pane is what we call a pop-out pane so you don’t have to have it docked to the right-hand side the entire time if you would prefer to have it as its own separate window you can simply click somewhere in this header and drag it and it becomes this little pop-out window that you can resize make bigger or smaller and sometimes it’s a little bit easier to see than when it’s docked over on the right hand side if you want to re-dock it you can simply grab it by the title bar again and drag it all the way over to the right hand side and it will re-dock itself now when we first dive into the help files we’ll find that all of them are categorized to make it a bit easier for us to find things so for example i have some popular topics up here so things like getting started if we expand this we’re going to have a few topics here of how to create documents in word how to add and format text and pictures shapes smart arts so on and so forth if we want to go back a screen we can click the back arrow to take us back to that main help page so we can browse through these different sections and find help on a vast array of different topics you also might find that throughout these help files you have useful video demonstrations as well to show you how to use a particular command and if we scroll down to the bottom we’ll always find things that kind of related to what we’re looking at underneath so if i want to know how to show or hide the ruler which is something we did a bit earlier i can click on that link to jump to that specific help file now aside from clicking back we also have a home icon here which again is just going to take us back to this main page now if you’re looking for something very specific and you don’t necessarily want to have to browse through all of these different categories we can search through the help files so maybe i want to insert a table and i need some help to be able to do that i can simply type in whatever it is i’m trying to do and press return and it’s going to search through for that particular phrase and would you take a look at that the first item in the list is insert table i just need to click on the link i have a useful little video just here which is going to show me that process and then i have some instructional text underneath with helpful screenshots so really easy to find what you’re looking for in those help files remember shortcut key f1 once you’re done with help you can click on the cross which is going to close down that pane another way that we can get help is by using the search bar up there in that title bar and this is pretty much what we did earlier when we were searching for that comprehensive list of keyboard shortcuts so i’m going to use the shortcut alt queue to put my cursor up in that search area and from here i can search for what i’m looking for so let’s use the same example if i go insert a table now notice here in this search area it divides it down into different categories so if i was looking for the command to insert a table it’s going to show me that underneath actions so there it says add table and i can simply insert a new table directly from this search area which is super useful but in this instance i don’t necessarily want to insert a table i just want some more information and you’ll notice right at the bottom we have a group called get help so if i want to find help on inserting a table i can choose that from here and again it’s going to jump me into the correct section of the help files so that search bar is really useful if you’re looking for something specific now aside from those two locations we also have a few other icons on this help ribbon some of these more useful than others we have a contact support button now you’ll notice here that for me because i’m in the uk contact support doesn’t really work if you’re in the us you’re going to find that you’re going to see some kind of number a way to contact microsoft support so just be aware of that we also have a feedback button so this is if you want to provide microsoft with some feedback so if you really like something you can let them know if you don’t like something you can also let them know or maybe you have a suggestion for a new feature you can share that with them from here as well and then the final icon we have here which is actually a very useful icon is we have access to some training files and learning content so this is really a library of different types of video which will walk you through the process of doing different things in word so again let’s use the same example if i want to insert a table i have a little video just here and i can just follow through these links to get to the correct area within the help files and this is the video that we were looking at earlier of course aside from that you have multiple resources for getting help outside of word so youtube videos community forums word forums microsoft forums all of these things are super useful if you have a particular problem in word and you’re looking for help in exercise two we’re going to practice some of the skills that we’ve learned in this section of the course so the first thing i’d like you to do is i’d like you to open word and simply load up a brand new blank document i’d like you to make sure that you have your rulers turned on and change the unit of measurement if required to suit you so if you use centimeters then make sure that is how your ruler is displaying i’d like you also to ensure the help ribbon is visible and also make sure that you’re checking spelling and grammar as you type and then finally i’d like you to add the following commands to the quick access toolbar italics dark mode find and format painter and i’d like you to move the quick access toolbar so that it’s displayed below the ribbon so see how you get on with that if you’d like to see my answer then please keep watching so the first thing i asked you to do here was simply to open word and load up a brand new blank document so i’m going to go down to my start bar and we’re going to open up word and i’m going to choose a blank document from the home page the next thing i asked you to do was to make sure that you have rulers turned on and they’re displaying in the unit of measurement that’s appropriate for your location so all we need to do here is jump up to the view ribbon make sure that we have a tick in ruler and if for example i wanted to change this from centimeters to inches i would need to dive into my word options and in the advanced area underneath display this is where i can come to change my unit of measurement the next thing i asked you to do was to make sure that the help ribbon is visible in your copy of word so again we need to jump into file and options and this time we go across to customize ribbon and make sure that we have a tick next to help i also asked you to make sure that you are checking your spelling and your grammar as you type and if you recall that is also something that we’re going to find in our word options as i said we dive in and out of here all the time so for this we need to go across to the proofing page and at the bottom here in the section when correcting spelling and grammar in word we need to make sure we have check spelling as you type selected and also mark grammar errors as you type and then the final two parts of this exercise were really all centered around the quick access toolbar so i asked you to add four different commands to this quick access toolbar so the first one was italics now i’m going to find that on the home ribbon i’m going to right click and add to quick access toolbar the next thing i asked you to add was dark mode so you might have had to hunt around a little bit for this now i specifically chose this command because we haven’t talked about this at all so instead of hunting through the ribbons you might possibly have gone into more commands in order to find dark mode so if we switch to all commands remember these are then in alphabetical order it’s going to make it a lot easier for us to find and there it is just there dark mode let’s click on add and click on ok next i asked you to add find and we’re going to find that on the home ribbon all the way over at the end let’s right click and add to quick access toolbar and the final one was format painter right click add to quick access toolbar and then to finish off this exercise i simply asked you to make sure that the quick access toolbar is displayed below your ribbons so all you would need to do here is click the drop down and make sure that you choose show below the ribbon mine says show above because i’ve already moved mine below but that was pretty much it i hope you got on okay with that exercise you are now ready to move on to the next section so let’s start out in the first lesson of this section by talking about some of the basics and that is creating brand new blank documents and also saving them now the first thing i’d advise you to do before we get into the bones of this course is to create some kind of folder to store all of the documents that you’re going to be creating throughout this course in you might decide to create a folder in my documents or even on your desktop like i have here and i’ve just called mine word documents but you can call yours whatever you like because we are going to be creating a lot of documents in this course so you want to have a nice consistent place to save them now when it comes to creating brand new documents there are a few different methods that we can use and by far the quickest and easiest is simply to use the keyboard shortcut control n that’s going to open up a brand new blank document if you take a look at the title bar you can see it it currently has the very generic name of document 2 but we’re going to save this in a moment so that name is going to change now if you want to close a document again we don’t want to use the cross in the top right hand corner because that’s going to close down all of word if we just simply want to close the document that we currently have open we can go up to file and select close from here or alternatively we can use another keyboard shortcut control w that’s going to close down that document but leave word open now what other methods can we use to create brand new documents well we’ve seen some of these in previous lessons aside from the keyboard shortcut we could jump up to file and from the home page we can double click on blank document or alternatively we can go to new and create a blank document from here double click again notice the title bar we now have document 3 up there let’s control w to close down the final method you can use depends on if you’ve added new document to the quick access toolbar now i have it’s this icon just here so once again i can simply click on this to create a brand new document so really nice and straightforward and you’ve got four different methods there as i said by far the quickest is to use control n now once we’ve created a new blank document the first thing we’re going to want to do here is save this document because we don’t want to just leave the default names of document 1 2 3 and 4 because that’s going to make it a bit of a nightmare if we’re ever looking for a particular file and once again there are a few different methods when it comes to saving now if we jump up to the file tab notice here we have two options save and save as and save as is really the default or it’s what you use when you’re saving a document for the first time now that is the scenario that we have here i just have document 4 open i need to save it for the first time so it doesn’t matter if i select save or save as it’s going to basically do a save as so let’s click on save as i then get to select a location to store this file in yours mine looks slightly different to mine depending on if you have cloud storage set up or not now for the purpose of these examples i’m going to save into that word documents folder that i have on my desktop so the easiest thing for me to do here is simply click on browse which is going to pop open file explorer and i can then choose desktop from here and then open the folder i want to save this document to now notice underneath the save as type is docx and this is the default file type for all documents that you create in what if you click the drop down you’ll notice that we do have lots and lots of different file types that we can save at and we’re definitely going to explore some of these a bit later on in the course but for the time being let’s just choose the default of docx now we can give our document a name and i would advise that when you’re naming your documents try and make the name meaningful try make the name as meaningful and descriptive as possible because that’s just going to help you out a lot if you’re ever searching for a very specific file now i’m just going to call this my first document and then we can click on the save button now once this document has saved it’s going to take us into the document but there are a couple of changes here if you glance up to that title bar notice that it says my first document now instead of document two and also notice that the auto save button on my quick access toolbar has toggled itself on now if you can’t see this auto save button it might just be that you didn’t add it to the quick access toolbar so if you haven’t i would very quickly jump into here and make sure you have a tick next to automatically save and this button is amazing because it basically saves your document for you as you type and just a note the keyboard shortcut for saving is control s so i’m going to type a quick heading in here my first document notice in the title bar it says saving and then once it’s saved you’re going to see that indicated up there as well so i haven’t had to save myself it’s automatically saved and this is great because if something unexpected happens as it occasionally tends to for example maybe word suddenly crashes in the middle of a document if you have auto save on it means that you’re not really going to lose any work because it’s saving as you’re doing things now just a final note on saving there are some settings that you can review and customize and as you might expect we’re finding those underneath word options we have a save page just here where we can make some adjustments so for example i’ve got my default format as docx that’s absolutely fine and i definitely recommend not changing that i’ve got save auto recover information set to five minutes which is pretty much the maximum that i would have so if anything unexpected does happen i’m not going to lose any more than five minutes of work and i can also do things here like set my auto recover file location so occasionally if you’re in the middle of a file and maybe word crashes or maybe you accidentally close word down word will actually auto recover the last file you’re working on and place it into this folder here so if you want to change that location you definitely can we also have a default local file location here as well and this can be changed to whatever you like so if you always have a folder that you save files into you can set the default local file location to that so that when you go to save that’s the first folder it’s going to pop open so definitely worth coming in here reviewing your settings and making sure that everything is set up for you the final thing i’m going to do here is i’m just going to add some random text using my little trainers trick again so we’re going to say three paragraphs of three lines notice in the title bar it is saving and we should find that that switches to saved after a few seconds so now if we close this document down control w we should find that when we reopen this file in the next lesson all of the information that we’ve added is going to be there we finished up the previous lesson by adding some text to our first document and then closing that document down so in this lesson i just want to talk briefly about opening existing documents because there are a few different ways that you can do this some from within word and some from outside of word now once again there is a keyboard shortcut for opening documents and that is control o and this is going to jump you directly to that backstage area so this is within that file tab and to the open page and we can then simply jump in here and select a location from which to open an existing file now remember we have access here at the top to all of our most recent documents and folders so as you might expect right at the top of this list because we opened it a few minutes ago is my first document the document we created in the last lesson so this is super easy i can simply double click to open this document and take a look at that auto save has worked because it saved all of our changes let’s close this document down again control w i’m going to do ctrl o to jump back to that same page also if i jump across to folders notice that the top folder here is the folder that i saved that document into so i could double click to open the folder there’s the document double click to open it so really nice and straightforward to open from recent locations let’s control w again and ctrl o one more time the final point to note about this documents and folders list is that if we’re always using my first document we have the ability to pin this to the top of the list as well so if i click on the drawing pin icon it’s going to move that to this pinned area at the top so it’s always going to be there so i quite like to pin documents that i use frequently now aside from accessing existing documents from the recent list it might be that we’re trying to access a document that we haven’t used for a while so it’s not going to appear in this recent list of documents if that’s the case then we need to find it elsewhere now if you have files saved to onedrive or some other storage system as long as you have it added to word you can simply navigate through your folder structure from within here so i can click to open my onedrive i can see my folders i can double click on documents navigate through my folder structure and open something from here and then of course if i have it saved to the desktop like we do i can go into browse which is going to open up file explorer and this then opens up the ability to search for documents so if you are struggling to find something you can use the capabilities of file explorer to search for the specific document that you’re looking for so there is my file i can click on open and once again it’s going to load that into the main window so super easy to open existing files from within word now we can also have multiple word files open at the same time so let’s create another brand new document control n i’m going to call this my second document and let’s just add let’s add some different texts this time and i’m going to save it notice at this stage the auto save is toggled off because that doesn’t kick in until we save so let’s quickly save the file so we’re going to jump up to file save as i’m going to save it in the word documents folder which i have at the top of my recent list and let’s call this my second document now notice that it’s picked that up from the line of text that i have in the first line of the document and this is perfect because this is what i want to call this document so quickly i can click on save so now the document that i’m seeing is my second document but my first document is still open behind because i didn’t close it down and we can very quickly toggle between all documents that we have open by clicking on the view tab and utilizing the switch windows option just here this is going to show you all of the word documents that you have open and you can simply toggle between the two of them by using that little drop down so really nice and straightforward now i’m going to close down my second document ctrl w and underneath we have my first document let’s close this one down as well ctrl w now aside from opening files from directly within word we can also open them from external locations for example if you prefer to navigate or find files in file explorer you can open word files from there so here i’ve opened file explorer i’ve selected my desktop there’s the folder if i double click i’m going to find that in there i have both of the documents that i’ve created in word and because these files have docx file extensions windows knows to open the word application because that’s the application that’s associated with this file type so we can simply double click it’s going to know which application to open and there’s a document similarly if you are using onedrive to store a lot of your files if you log into onedrive online and that’s exactly what i’ve done here i can see there is my folder and there are both of my documents so i can open documents from online as well directly within word so if i click to open my second document it’s going to open it in a browser first of all and if i want to open it in the full copy of word i can click the drop down underneath editing and choose open in desktop app and there we go so a few different methods of opening files there let’s just finish off by closing down both of these so we’re going to say control w and ctrl w again so now we’re pretty clear on the basics of creating a brand new document opening existing documents and also doing things like save and close let’s now talk about templates because templates are a great thing to use if you want to create a document quickly and you don’t want to start from a blank sometimes it can be a little bit intimidating to just start from a blank document particularly if the document that we’re being asked to create is a little bit more complex for example maybe i need to put together some kind of flyer or maybe i want to create a really nice looking resume for potential employers well i could start with a blank and design it from scratch or i could choose a template where a lot of the work is already done for me so let’s take a look at that example let’s pretend that we need to create a resume so let’s jump up to file and we’re going to go into the new page because this is where we can find all of our templates and this is referred to as the template gallery now there are hundreds of free templates available in word and fortunately microsoft has categorized them so we can browse through the categories or if we’re looking for something specific we can simply use the search bar so take a look at the top i can see the different popular categories up here so things like resumes and cover letters or letter templates or templates for flyers or cards or businesses things like that so i could choose any of these categories click and take a look at the templates contained within that category let’s click on back because we’re searching for something quite specific now we have a category here called resumes and cover letters but let’s just use the search so i’m going to type in resume so let’s type that in click on the little magnifying glass or press enter to start the search and this is going to pull back everything it can find in the template library related to resumes you might also find you get some related templates in there as well so things like cover letters so you can have a little look through and choose whichever template you like so i’m going to go through and i think we will let’s choose this one this one looks kind of fun notice also here that when i hover over the template i get that little drawing pin icon so i can choose to pin this template to the top of the list as well so let’s do that let’s pin it and let’s open it so let’s click once i’m going to get a preview of what that template looks like so i can make sure that that is the one that i want to use i can see the title who the templates provided by so in this case microsoft and then i get a little bit of a description about this template so if you’re happy with everything there we can simply click on the create button to load that into the word window and all templates in the templates gallery are free templates and they’re also completely customizable so for every element of this template i can do things like change the color i can switch out the picture and of course i can edit the text and one of the advantages of using a template is that they can be reused so i’m going to make a couple of changes to this template off-camera join me back here in a couple of seconds and we’ll talk about reusing and saving templates so i’ve made a couple of changes to this template i’ve changed some of the colors i’ve added my photo and i’ve added my name at the top but notice that i haven’t added anything else all of this still has what we call the boilerplate or template text and fields now the reason why i haven’t updated this is because it might be that i want to reuse this template at another time and maybe the information will change the next time that i use it however i don’t want to have to create the template again replace the image and add my name and apply formatting so what i could do is in its current form where it just has the updated colors the updated picture and my name i could choose to save this as a template and then i can reuse it next time i want to create a resume now when you save documents as templates it’s a slightly different process so let’s jump up to the file tab and down to save as now i’m going to save this in the word documents folder again and because i’ve pinned that folder i can simply double click to select and the first thing i want to do here is i want to change the type of file i’m saving this as so instead of saving as just a docx file type i need to save this as a word template which has a dot x file type now notice what happens to the folder location when i switch to this file type can you see it’s completely changed it’s taken me directly to a folder called custom office templates and you can see that i have a few other templates stored in here now you don’t necessarily have to save this template in the default templates folder as suggested by word you could choose a completely different folder i could go back to desktop and save it in there but there is one major advantage of saving in the default templates folder so let’s give this template a name i’m going to call this debra ashby resume and click on save so let’s close this document down control w now if we want to reuse this template if we go to file and down to new in the templates section notice we have an office and a personal tab and if we click on personal we should find that our resume is listed just here so this makes it super quick and simple to find templates that you’ve created so that is the advantage of saving the file to the custom templates folder and of course if we want to we have the opportunity to pin this to the top of the list as well now when we reopen the template so let’s double click to load it into the word window notice that it basically loads up as a brand new document if we take a look at the title bar it says document 8 which means we can then make our changes resave this as the updated version of the resume and we’re not overwriting that original template so that is kind of how templates work you can load them up you can redesign the template and then you can reuse them as many times as you like in this lesson we’re going to talk about some of the different techniques that you can use to navigate efficiently around a document and this is particularly useful if you are somebody who works a lot with very long documents now what i’ve done here is i’ve just created a another document and you’ll find this file in the course files folder if you want to open that up and this is a slightly longer document than the documents we’ve looked at so far in fact if you take a look down in the status bar all the way over on the left hand side notice that this document is 19 pages long and currently we’re clicked on page one now what are some of the techniques that we can use to navigate effectively well let’s start out by talking about keyboard shortcuts because there are a few really useful ones which will help you jump between different points of your document for example if we click our mouse just up here in the title area if i want to very quickly jump to the end of my document i can press ctrl end and it’s going to take me all the way down to the end of page 19. if i want to jump back up to the beginning of the document control home if i want to jump to the end of the particular sentence that i’m currently clicked in i can simply press end without using control and home will take me back to the beginning if i want to scroll through my document page by page i can use my page up and page down keys so if i press page down we move down a page so on and so forth and the same works for page up if we click in the paragraph below to jump through a sentence by each word if you press ctrl and then the right arrow on your keyboard you can jump by word and if you want to jump down to the third paragraph for example control down arrow allows you to jump between the different paragraphs in your document so those are a few keyboard shortcuts that can come in really useful but what else do we have in word to help us navigate well we have the find button so up on the home tab all the way over in the editing group notice we have a little find button just here next to it we have a drop down arrow so when we click this we have a go to option notice here that there is a keyboard shortcut of control g to get directly to go to so let’s click on go to and this is going to help us jump to specific parts of our document now we haven’t spoken at all about sections lines bookmarks things like that so for the time being we’re just going to stick to page because i think everybody understands what a page is so what i can do here is enter in a specific page number that i want to jump to so maybe i want to go to page 8. i can type that in click on the go to button and it’s going to jump me exactly to that page if you’re ever not sure what page you’re on remember to always check down in the bottom left hand corner because that’s going to tell you so go to control g a great way of navigating to different pages in your document now the final utility that i’m going to show you in this lesson for navigating effectively is the navigation pane so if we jump up to the view tab in the show group notice we have an option here for navigation pane and if we take a look at the screen tip it says it’s like a tour guide for your document click a heading a page or a search result and it will take you right there so let’s select this box to open up that pane now notice here you can navigate using headings pages or results now currently this document just contains text it doesn’t have any actual headings in it which is why we’re not seeing any headings listed below now we are going to come back to this a bit later on once we’ve added headings into our document and talked about word styles for the time being let’s focus on the pages tab because this is going to show some thumbnails of all of the pages within your word document and if you want to jump to that page you can simply select it from here and it’s going to load it up in the main window and then finally we have a results tab over here so i can search through my document to find a particular piece of text or maybe even a particular graphic now i don’t want to go too far off down this road in this particular lesson because then we kind of move into the arena of using find within word and we have a whole other lesson dedicated to that but just know that from here you can navigate your document using any headings by going to any of the pages or by searching for specific terms once again this navigation pane is one of those pop-out windows so i could click to pull it out and have it more as a floating panel as opposed to docked over to the side now i prefer mine to be over here and if we close this down we don’t necessarily always have to go back to toggle the navigation pane on we can simply click in the bottom left hand corner where we have our pages listed and that’s going to open up that navigation pane as well so a few different ways there to navigate effectively around your document you’re going to see these in action a lot throughout this course as we build up our documents in this very short lesson i just want to reiterate the point as to how you can find your tools in word and when i say tools i’m basically referring to commands now we’ve already seen in previous lessons how we can make this a little bit easier by adding commands we use frequently to the quick access toolbar and that is a great way to manage your frequently used commands but what if i very quickly wanted to insert a table into this document and maybe i’m not particularly sure where the insert table option is amongst all of these ribbons what i could do instead is use the search bar to do all the hard work for me now remember the search bar is located at the top in the title bar and if we press the keyboard shortcut alt q it’s going to put our cursor in that box so what i can do here is i can type insert table and underneath the action section i can choose what i want to do so i could add a table of contents from here i could insert a table of figures i could add a table or insert a table of authorities so it’s taken my search terms and pulled back all of the different features or utilities within word that match so i want to insert a basic table so if i hover over add table i can then go and choose the number of rows and the number of columns so let’s just say i want a four column three row table when i let go it automatically inserts that into the document for me so that search bar can be really useful what about if i want to insert a shape well again i could use the search bar i could maybe type in insert shape if i’m not sure where that’s located on the ribbons i can take a look through my different actions and i can say yes i want to draw a shape and it basically gives you access to the command and all of the options without actually having to find it on the ribbon so i’m going to choose a rectangle shape and i’m just going to draw that in here now that obviously doesn’t look too great so i’m going to immediately delete that but the whole point of that demonstration was just to show you how simple it is to find your different tools within word so my two efficiency tips here add commands that you use frequently to the quick access toolbar for anything else if you’re not sure where that command lives remember to press alt q to jump to the search bar and then simply search for it in this exercise we’re going to practice some of the skills that we’ve learned in this section of the course so i’d like you to complete the following tasks first i’d like you to create a new blank document and save it to a folder of your choice as training underscore document 1 dot dot x i’d then like you to create another new blank document and save it to a folder of your choice as trainingunderscoredocument2.docx i’d then like you to use the technique that i showed you to practice quickly switching between those two open documents once you’ve done that i’d like you to close down both documents but leave word open next i’d like you to open the file blog how to create a healthy workplace environment.docx from the exercise files folder and i’d like you to use your preferred method to quickly jump to page five and the final task to complete in this exercise is i’d like you to create a new document for an event based off of a template so i’d like you to take a look in the templates gallery and find the template called circle flyer i’d like you to open the template and then save the template to the default templates folder as charity underscore event dot dot x once you’ve done that i’d like you to close all open documents so that should give you a good opportunity to practice a lot of the skills that we’ve learned in this section if you’d like to see my answer then please keep watching so the first thing i asked you to do here was to create a brand new blank document so ctrl n and i’m just gonna call this let’s just put in here training document one and i asked you to save this so we’re gonna select file and save as and i didn’t really mind which folder you saved it to so i’m just going to save mine to my word documents folder and i asked you to save this as training underscore document one let’s click on save i then asked you to create another new blank document so ctrl n and this time we’re going to save this as training document 2. so let’s just give it a little heading so we know where we’re at let’s click file save as i’m going to choose my word documents folder from my recent list and this time it’s picked up the title let’s just make a couple of modifications let’s add an underscore remove that space and click on save so now we’ve created those two documents i then asked you just to practice switching between them so for this we can jump up to view and go across to switch windows i can see all of my open documents and it makes it very simple for me to switch between those documents i then asked you to simply just close down both of these documents so you could go up to file and choose close or you could have used the keyboard shortcut ctrl w and ctrl w again the next task was to open an existing file and the file i asked you to open was a file that’s available in the exercise files folder so wherever you’ve downloaded it to will be the location that you open it from so let’s jump up to file and go to open i’m going to click on browse to open up file explorer and now i just need to navigate to the folder i have this file saved click on it and choose open i then asked you to use your preferred method to quickly jump to page 5 of this document and there are a couple of different ways that you could do this so maybe you went up to find and go to and selected page and entered in page five to jump to that page if you use that method that is totally fine alternatively you could have used the navigation pane if we jump up to view turn on the navigation pane we can then go to the pages section find page five and jump to it that way so either method is completely valid the final thing i asked you to do in this exercise was to create a flyer for an event based off of a template so for this we’re going to jump up to file we’re going to go into new and you could have chosen to browse through the flyers category or you could have searched for the template using the specific name so this flyer that i asked you to use was called circle flyer let’s click on the magnifying glass there’s the template we can click once to load it up and then choose create finally i asked you to save this template as a template file type into the default templates folder so once again we’re going up to file we’re going down to save as and we’re going to choose browse now remember as soon as we select the template file type the dot x file type it’s going to switch us into our custom office templates folder i asked you to save this flyer as charity underscore event and click on save the final thing to do here is close down all open documents so that’s simply a case of using the keyboard shortcut ctrl w that is it i hope you got on okay with that i will see you in the next section in this section of the course we’re going to shift our focus to viewing our document or document views as they’re more commonly known now as i mentioned previously when you’re working in a word document as we are here we generally tend to work in the print layout view how do i know i’m in print layout view well if we jump up to the view ribbon notice we have a views group and the print layout button is toggled on because it’s showing in that dark gray color and print layout view just gives you a really nice way of viewing your document you can see everything that you’re adding to the document and you can see how that document is going to print so i can see how much space i have for my margins how much space i have in my header and my footer so it’s the best view for really getting a comprehensive overview as to what your final document is going to look like and in general this is the view that i use 99 of the time when i’m working in word but we do have some other views that we can use so let’s take a look at some of those now sticking in this views group the first view that we have here is read mode and this is one of those newer views that was added to word a couple of years ago now if we take a look at the screen tip it says that this is the best way to read a document including some tools designed for reading instead of writing so if you’ve been sent a document to read you might want to switch across to read mode and this view is more like you’re reading a book we scroll through it horizontally as opposed to vertically so it’s a bit like turning the pages of a book also notice that the ribbons are completely minimized so we have a lot more space on the screen and we can see more of our document so all of these types of things really aid reading as opposed to writing when we want to move to the next page notice we have these arrows on either side so i can simply click the arrow to move it along and it’s just a really nice consistent way of flowing through this document now we do have some additional tools if we cast our eyes up towards the title bar we have a file drop down which is going to take us into that backstage area we have some tools in here as well and these are much more consistent with reading as opposed to typing so i might want to find something specific in this document a piece of text for example so maybe i want to find the word document i’m probably going to get loads of matches here it’s going to highlight throughout that view wherever that word comes up i can also search and translate any text that i select into a different language we then have a view drop-down as well and this is where you can really go to town and customize this reading view now i could choose to edit the document if i click on edit notice it’s going to switch me back to print layout view let’s jump back into read mode go back into view we’re going to talk about focus in a moment but i can bring up the navigation pane if i want to so this is good again if i want to navigate by heading by page or by specific search words i can choose to show any comments now we haven’t spoken about comments yet so we’re going to skip over that for the time being but what i could also do here is i could choose the column width so currently i’m looking at the default but i could choose to switch this to a narrow column width so i can see a little bit more on the page alternatively i could choose wide where i’m basically getting one page on the screen i can even change the page color this is quite helpful for people with visual difficulties or just people who find it easier to read text when it’s on a darker background now i’m not one of those people so i’m going to switch it back to none and we can also choose the layout so currently we’re in column layout but i can choose to have paper layout as well so this looks a little bit more like print layout view but again it’s minimized all of the ribbon so that we have the maximum amount of space on the page so reading view is really great if you just need to read a document and you want the best mode for doing that now i’m going to switch back to print preview so i’m going to go to view and edit document and i’m now back in print layout view the next view we have is web layout so this is going to show me how my document would look as a web page so if my intention is to eventually display this information as some kind of web page maybe i’m going to upload it to my company server web layout view is going to show me how this document is going to look if it’s uploaded to the web now another view that we have is outline view and this allows us to see our document in an outline form where the content is shown as bulleted points and you can see here it says this view is useful for creating headings and moving whole paragraphs within the document so in general i’ll go into outline view if i have a very long document and i need to start reorganizing paragraphs notice here that that every paragraph is a bullet point effectively and we get our own new contextual ribbon when we’re working in outline view and this ribbon really lets us organize our document for example if i go to this paragraph just here i can use some of these outline tools to do things like promote the paragraph to make it bigger or demote it to make it smaller and indent it a little bit more now in order to really understand how outline view works it’s a good idea to know about word styles before doing this so i’m not going to linger too long on this at the moment we will come back to this later after we’ve discussed word styles so for the time being let’s close outline view the final view that we have here is draft view and this is just going to show you the text in your document so you can see here it says that this is useful for quick editing because things like headers footers and certain objects won’t show up just allowing you to focus on the text so if we switch to draft if i had lots of images and various other things in here i’m just really getting to see the text which makes editing a little bit easier so those are the main views or the main ways that you can view documents in word 2021 another way that you can switch between different views is by using the buttons in the status bar in the bottom right hand corner notice currently that i’m clicked on print layout view but from here i can switch to read mode and also web layout view as well in the previous lesson we saw how we can view our document in different ways and in word 2021 and these are new for word 2021 we have two additional ways that we can work with our document focus and immersive reader so let’s take a look at focus first of all again on the view tab if we take a look in the immersive group we have a button here called focus if we hover our mouse over it it says that it eliminates distractions so you can really focus on your document so if we click this it’s a very simple tool it’s basically going to minimize all distractions so we can’t see anything around the outside and we just get to see our document with no ribbons or anything distracting us from the content and we can scroll through this document we can read and our attention is always focused in the right place now what you might notice is that if you are working in this mode right at the top of the screen we have three tiny dots in the middle and if we hover our mouse over these it’s just going to drop down that ribbon and what you’ll notice is that when you’re actually in focus mode and you pull the ribbons back down again we get an additional option here of background so if we don’t particularly like the default black background we can change this to something completely different so maybe a pale rust gradient and the whole idea of this view is really just to allow you to focus on the content itself so that might be a view that you find useful now to come out of focus mode it’s a very simple case of just clicking on focus again and it’s going to take you back to print layout view now the second option we have in this immersive group is to utilize the immersive reader and if we hover our mouse over immersive reader and take a look at the screen tip it says switch to an immersive editing experience that helps improve your reading skills adjust how text is displayed and have text read aloud to you so this particular option is really useful if you struggle to see words when they’re a little bit closer together or if you have any kind of visual impairment you can choose to have the document read aloud to you as opposed to you actually trying to read it now notice when we click on immersive reader we get we get a new contextual ribbon and all of these options are really here to allow you to customize exactly how you’re viewing your document within the immersive reader so currently you can see all of my text looks a little bit different the words and even the letters are spaced a little bit further apart to assist with reading and also notice that my text is kind of in the middle of the page which means i’m not really having to move my head around a great deal to get to the end of a line now we do have some things that we can customize here for example we can customize the column width so mine is set to narrow i could choose very narrow to make it even thinner i can choose moderate or we have a wide option as well i can even change the page color so if i prefer something that’s a little bit more contrasty if i find that easier to read i can choose anything from these palettes so let’s just go with light green i can even turn on line focus so if i really just want to focus on my document line by line i could choose one line and it’s going to highlight just that line and i can use my up and down arrows to move line by line through this document we have other options in here so i could choose three lines if i find that a bit better and again i can use my down arrows just to focus on those three lines now i’m going to set this back to none we can also adjust the text spacing so i can increase the spacing between words characters and lines so if i click this button it’s going to put it back to how it was originally or i can choose text spacing to make those words and characters appear further apart now another thing that we can do is we can turn on syllables and this is going to add tiny little dots within our words whenever we have multiple syllables for example the word provides has two syllables pro and then vites so this is really great if maybe english isn’t your first language and you want to know where the emphasis of a word is or you require some assistance with how to pronounce particular words and then of course we have the read aloud option so if you do have any kind of visual impairment you can turn on read aloud and word will read the document back to you also notice there is a keyboard shortcut for this of alt control space the other thing it’s going to do when we turn this option on is not only read aloud the text it’s also going to highlight each word as it’s read so let’s take a quick look at that video provides a powerful way to help you prove your point when you click online video you can paste in the embed code for the video you want to add so that’s a really nice little option that aids accessibility if you want to come out the immersive reader we have a close button just here and then it’s just going to take us back to our print layout view so those are two brand new options that we have in word 2021 to really help you read through and focus on the content of your word documents in the previous lesson we got to see a couple of the newer features in word focus and immersive reader but there is one other newer feature that’s really useful to know about and that is called dark mode so what exactly is dark mode well dark mode is there to help you view your document if you struggle to see black text on a white background a lot of people find the contrast of a black background with white text a lot easier to read and many people report that they feel like they have less eye strain and less fatigue when reading long documents it’s worth noting that when it comes to working in word we can change the overall theme of word to a darker theme but changing the theme to dark is different to changing to dark mode so let me show you what i mean by that if i wanted to change the overall theme of word to a dark theme i would simply go up to the file tab go into account and notice here underneath office theme i currently have this set colorful but i could click the drop down and choose black or dark gray now if i choose dark gray you’re going to notice immediately what that does it changes the entire application to a dark gray color which again some people prefer but it doesn’t actually change the document the document is still black text on a white background so dark mode has been introduced to combat that with dark mode we can change the background of our document to black and have white text but it doesn’t affect the overall theme that we’ve applied to the application so to demonstrate this i’m just very quickly going to switch back to the colorful setting and let’s take a look at how dark mode works now the first thing you need to know about dark mode is that you might not be able to see it by default on any of your ribbons dark mode is available in word but it’s not a command on a ribbon by default so if this is something that you want to use and toggle between you’re going to need to add it to the ribbon and this is where we move into customizing ribbons in word now normally i would say that this is a bit early on in our journey through learning word to start talking about how to create our own ribbons and ribbon groups but it is really straightforward i think you can handle it and it’s a good opportunity to practice how to do this so what we’re going to do is we’re going to add the switch modes command which will allow us to switch to dark mode to the view ribbon in its own little custom group so let’s jump up to file and we’re going to go into options now to do this we need to jump across to the customize ribbon page and this is very similar to when we modified the quick access toolbar now the first thing i’m going to do here is i’m just going to bring up a list of all commands that are available in word so now i can see every single command ordered alphabetically and because i’m looking for a command called switch modes i know that it’s going to be somewhere towards the bottom of this list underneath s so let’s scroll through to s w and there it is just there switch modes if i hover over it says view with a dark page color that’s exactly what we’re looking for now on the right hand side this is going to show all of the tabs that i currently have in word so i want to add this to the view tabs so let’s expand view i can then see underneath all of the different groups so the first group is views which it is the second group is immersive so on and so forth now i can’t just select one of these groups and then add the new command to an existing group if i try and do that it’s going to tell me that commands need to be added to custom groups so effectively i need to create my own little group here so underneath i’m going to say i want a new group and i’m going to rename this group so let’s select it click on rename and i’m going to give it a display name of switch modes you could call it dark mode or whatever you like i can then choose an icon that i want to represent this group now i’m not going to bother with that at this stage let’s click on ok so now i have my custom group i can add the switch modes command to this group simply by clicking on add there it is let’s click on ok and now take a look at my view ribbon i have a new little group here with the switch modes command and if i hover over we can see that it says see how this document will look in dark mode so if i click this button it’s going to do exactly that you can see the page of the document has turned to black and we have white text but the actual application itself hasn’t changed theme at all and this button is simply a toggle so if i want to toggle back to how it was originally i can just click it again in exercise 4 we’re going to practice some of the skills that we’ve learned in this section so the first thing i’d like you to do is to open the document blog how to create a healthy workplace environment dot dot x and you’re going to find that file in the exercise files folder once you’ve got that file open i’d just like you to practice switching between different views so maybe switch across from page layout view to draft view to outline view and then back to page layout view and make sure you understand what each view represents once you’ve done that i’d like you to switch into focus mode and change the background color of the page to overcast i’d then like you to switch to the immersive reader and change the column width of the document to narrow i’d also like you to turn on syllables and then just practice reading the document aloud once you’ve had a good play around with some of these features i’d then like you to switch back to print layout view so give that a go if you’d like to see my answer then please keep watching so i’ve opened up the document titled blog how to create a healthy workplace environment from the exercise files folder and the first thing i asked you to do with this document open is just practice switching between different views now of course there are a couple of different ways that we can do this we can jump up to the view ribbon and in the first group just here notice we’re in print layout view but we can switch into read mode we can switch to web layout view and remember this view is going to show us what our document will look like once it’s uploaded to a website we can switch into outline view and this is where we can see the outline of our document and we can also switch into draft view from here as well and draft view is going to show us any styles that we’ve got applied to our document so make sure you know how to switch between these different views now there is an alternative way to do this and that is to use the icons that you have down in the bottom right hand corner of the status bar notice down here we can switch to read mode focus mode print layout and also web layout from down here so whichever way you did this is absolutely fine now i’m going to switch back to print layout view the next thing i asked you to do was to jump into focus mode and change the background color to overcast so if we jump back up to the view ribbon in the immersive group we have focus mode just here so let’s click this and if you recall focus mode really eliminates any noise around our documents so that we can just focus on whatever it is that we’re reading now notice i have a teal background color just here but i want to change this to overcast so how do we do this when we’re in focus mode well we need to push our mouse all the way up to the top of the screen where we have those three tiny dots notice that the ribbons will now drop down and from here we can change the background color to this one just here which is overcast and the final thing i asked you to practice in this exercise is some of the things that you can do with the immersive reader so let’s switch into immersive reader mode notice we now get an immersive reader ribbon and i asked you to change the column width of the page to narrow so let’s select that from the drop down i also asked you to turn on syllables so we just need to toggle on this button just here which is going to show us the syllable breaks within each word and then finally i asked you to read the document aloud and what i meant by that is to use this read aloud button just here to help you prove your point remember this will read out the text you have on your screen and it will highlight each word as it’s read in this section we’re going to take a look at some of the options that we have when it comes to working with and formatting text so i’m starting out with a new blank document and if you want to download this document you’ll find it in the course files folder alternatively you can just fire up a new blank document and work along with me now when it comes to entering text into a document it is as straightforward as you might think if we click on the page we can see our cursor is right at the top there remember we have margins down either side we’re going to see how we can modify how wide those margins are a little bit later on and we also have some space at the top and the bottom of the page for a header and footer again we will take a look at those a bit later on so let’s type in some text into this document so i’ve just typed in a very basic line of text there if we press enter it’s going to move us down to the next line now notice that when we press enter we do have a certain amount of default space between the first line and the second line if i was to type something else in here you can really see that default space now we can adjust what we call line spacing so if we don’t want quite as much space in between these two lines or we want a little bit more we can modify that again we’ll take a look at that when we talk more about working with paragraphs for the time being we’re just going to focus on entering and formatting text now i’m going to move to the next line let’s press enter and i’m going to use my little trainers trick again just so i can get a lot of information into this document quickly so let’s type in equals i’m going to say lorem this time and let’s say that we want let’s go for five paragraphs of four lines each close the bracket and hit enter and there we go once we have text in a document we’re probably going to want to apply some formatting and the first thing you’ll notice is the font style that i’m using and if you glance up in the font group notice that i’m using calibri body font and this is the default font when i open word now of course if you don’t particularly like this font or you want to use something completely different there are a few different ways that you could go about this for example if you just want to change the font style for the text that we have on this page we could select all of the text and then just choose a different font so here’s another little shortcut key that i find very useful and we did look at this a bit earlier on if we click somewhere on our page and press ctrl a that’s going to select all now if we go up to the font group we can click the drop-down and we can choose something else and all of the fonts in here are free to use and if you have your own fonts that you want to use of course you can download fonts from whichever font website you use make sure they’re in the correct folder and then you’ll be able to access them through word now also notice as i start to hover my mouse over these different types of font i’m getting what we call a live preview as to what that font is going to look like so this can be really helpful because it means that you get an idea as to what that font’s going to look like before you actually click on it now when it comes to live preview if you decide that you don’t actually like that and you want to turn it off you can do that through word options so let’s quickly look at that let’s go to file down to options and on the general page it’s this option here enable live preview now i always like to have live preview on because i find it quite helpful to be able to get a preview before i actually select but if you find that annoying or you just don’t like it then you can just deselect this option just here so let’s select everything again and i’m going to change my font to cigo ui now that’s going to change the font just for the text that i have selected if i wanted to use cigo you iphone every time i load up a new document or every time i create a new document i would need to set cigo ui as my default font and i’m going to show you how to do that when we talk about advanced font editing for the time being we’re just going to leave it as it is i’m going to keep this text highlighted because i can then also go in and i can change the size of the text as well so if i want to make it a bit bigger i can and again we’ve got that live preview kicking in and with this font size you can also type in exactly what you want into this box you’ll notice that these font sizes kind of go up by two so 14 to 16 16 to 18. if i wanted font size 17 i can simply click up here and just change it and hit enter we also have next to the font size drop down two little buttons which allow us to increase and decrease the font size incrementally and you’ll notice that there are keyboard shortcuts for these of control shift right arrow and ctrl shift left arrow so if i decrease the font size if i click this button it’s going to take it down one and it’s going to carry on going i can also choose from here if i want to use sentence case which is basically what i have now where the first letter is capitalized after a full stop i could change everything to lowercase if i wanted to everything to uppercase i can capitalize each word or i can toggle case so a really nice quick way of being able to change the type of case that you’re using some other font formatting options that we have in this little group of commands are things like bold italic and underline so we can select an entire line of text simply by clicking in the margin or we can select an entire word and you can double click on the word to select it we can then click on bold keyboard shortcut ctrl b to bold that word i can make words italics so if we double click on another word we have our italics button just here keyboard shortcut ctrl i or we could choose to maybe underline an entire paragraph keyboard shortcut control plus u so when i click this it’s going to put one underline underneath that paragraph but if i wanted to change that or maybe have a double underline or even a dotted underline i have those options in this drop down as well we can even change the underlying color so maybe i want to underline in red i can just select it from the palette maybe i want to apply a strikethrough to certain paragraphs so again we can select and then we have a strikethrough button just here so let’s click and there we go the next two buttons relate to subscript and superscript so for example if i was typing something like let’s type in h2o normally the two in this word is slightly below the line so we could select the number two and then we can click on subscript to make that a lot smaller the next three buttons are already related to applying color and effects so for example if i select the first line in this document and click the drop down next to text effects and typography i can choose some of these inbuilt styles to apply to that particular text and if i don’t want to use one of these presets i can be a bit more granular about what i’m applying so maybe i just want to apply a shadow to the text maybe i want a reflection to my text maybe i want to add a glow around the outside so on and so forth what about if i want to highlight this text so maybe i want this text to look like i’ve got a big old highlighter pen to emphasize something in the document well that’s what this little drop down is for and you can see we have a few common highlighter pen colors in here so let’s highlight this in yellow and then of course finally we have our font color and this is going to change the color of the text in the document so if i select this third paragraph click the drop down i have access to two different palettes i have theme colors and standard colors now i’m going to talk more about the difference between these two when we talk about themes but just know that whenever you’re working in a word document you’ll be using a theme and if you haven’t selected to change your theme you’re going to be using the default office theme and these are the colors that are part of that particular theme we then have some standard colors which are your standard red green blue so on and so forth and if you don’t like any of those you can click on more colors and you have access to a wider palette of colors or you can really customize the colors that you’re using by moving this around and choosing a color in this way so if i go for this little purple color i can adjust it whether it’s lighter or darker by moving this up and down and click on okay now what about if i decide that i actually don’t really like that purple how do i get rid of the formatting that i’ve applied well again we can select the paragraph that contains the formatting that we want to remove and in the font group we have a clear all formatting button so if i click this it’s going to clear the formatting it’s also going to clear the font style that i applied and take me back to my default font of calibri so just be aware of that when you’re using that clear formatting button before we move on any further let’s quickly take a look at the different ways that we can select text in word now we’re working in this practice document and in the previous lesson we did apply some different pieces of formatting now the first thing i’m going to do here is i’m going to remove all of the formatting and this gives me a chance to showcase once again how you can select all text in your document very simple control a alternatively if you would prefer to use a command on the ribbon on the home tab all the way over at the end here in the editing group we have a select drop down and this is where we can select different types of object within our word document but if we choose the first one select all that’s basically the same as doing a control a so you can use either of those methods so with my text selected i’m going to just clear all of the formatting that we applied in the last lesson so let’s go up to the font group and click the clear or formatting button to take that back now a couple of things have happened here it has removed the majority of the formatting and taken that font back to calibri it hasn’t removed the highlighted text though so if we want to remove this highlighted text we need to basically select this entire line so how do we select lines in a word document well it’s very simple we can just click and drag our mouse over the piece of text or alternatively if we want to make sure that we have the entire sentence or the entire line if we hover our mouse over in the left hand margin until our cursor points diagonally right if we click in the margin next to where the line is it’s going to highlight that entire line so now i have that highlighted or selected i’m going to jump up to the highlighter tool and i’m going to say that i don’t want any color just to remove that the other thing you’ll also notice is that because we’ve just got some junk text in here words spell check is picking up these words so it’s not recognizing many of these words which would be correct now we’ve seen how to spell check a document and there are quite a few words in here but if we press the f7 key we can then go through and i’m just going to say ignore all to all of these just so we can remove those red lines from the screen and there we go so we’ve seen how to select all text we’ve seen how we can click in the margin to select a line and this also applies if you want to select more than one line for example i can click in the margin drag down and that’s going to select that entire paragraph alternatively i can just drag my mouse down for as far as i like to select consecutive lines now what about if i want to select non-contiguous paragraphs so paragraphs that aren’t together well that’s fairly straightforward we can select the first one hold down the control key and then i can simply click in the margin and that’s going to allow me to make selections that aren’t necessarily next to each other so now i have these three paragraphs selected i might want to apply some bold formatting control b keyboard shortcut maybe i now want to make those a different color so let’s click the font color drop down and i’m going to say that i want these to be blue and then just click anywhere else on the document to deselect making selections of individual words is also really simple you can double click your mouse and it will select the entire word i can also easily make selections of paragraphs using keyboard shortcuts so if i click my mouse at the beginning of the first sentence and press ctrl shift down arrow i can just carry on pressing the down arrow to select all of the paragraphs that i need control up arrow is going to do the reverse so those are some of the techniques that you can use when you’re making text selections in a word document aside from the text formatting options that we have available on the home ribbon in the font group we do have some advanced text formatting options as well now before we get on to that i just want to go off on a tangent very slightly related to the mini toolbar if you remember in one of the earlier lessons i showed you how to disable the mini toolbar when you have text selected so what that means is that if i select something so let’s say we select the word lazy i don’t see the mini toolbar pop up because i disabled it so let’s go back in and just turn that on so you can see the options that you have on this mini toolbar in a little bit more detail so let’s jump up to file go back into options and on the general tab i’m going to reselect show mini toolbar on selection so let’s click on ok now when i select anything in this document a piece of text for example i’m going to see that little floating toolbar and as we mentioned this is just a quick way to apply formatting to pieces of text so you don’t have to keep going back up to that home ribbon so from here i can change the font style that i’m using i can change the font size i could do things like bold underline italic so on and so forth so let’s leave that on for the time being now when it comes to your advanced font formatting options you’re going to find these in a dialog box that’s kind of really hidden from view when you look at the ribbons now if you take a close look at the home ribbon notice that in the corner of some of these groups of commands we have this little diagonal arrow and if we hover over this diagonal arrow we get a screen tip that tells us that clicking this is going to allow us to customize our text using advanced font and character options notice there is also a shortcut key for this of control d so if we click the diagonal arrow in the corner of the font group it’s going to take us into our advanced font formatting options notice at the top we have two tabs font and advanced now on the font tab you’re going to find a lot of the things that you already have in the font group on the ribbon for example i can come in here and change the font that i’m using i can change the font style so if i want italics bold or even bold italic that isn’t an option that we have on the ribbon i can modify the size i can choose my font color from my palettes from here and if i want an underline style and i can even choose an underline color from here as well i can then apply effects so things like strikethrough double strike through that’s superscript subscript small caps so on and so forth so many of these options we already have in the font group on the home ribbon but one thing that’s useful in here and i did mention this in a previous lesson is that we can choose to set default options in here so if i decide that i want to use a specific font throughout my entire document i could set it as the default even if i wanted to use maybe let’s say century font bold size 12 i can select all of these options and then i can choose to set that as my default and i’m just going to turn off the underline style so if i choose set as default i then get a choice if i want to apply this default to this document only or all documents based on the normal.m template now the normal.m template is basically the default template that you get when you create a new blank document in word so effectively for all new documents so i’m going to say for this document only let’s click on ok and you can see that that’s updated now let’s reopen up that pane and this time i’m going to use the shortcut key of control d i also have a text effects button down here so this is going to allow me to apply a text fill a text outline and other types of effects as well and we saw those earlier those are available in the font group on the home ribbon now what about if we jump across to the advanced tab what do we have in here well this is where we can do things like adjust the character spacing so if i click the drop down next to spacing i can choose to set expanded spacing for my text and if you take a look at the preview at the bottom can you see that we now have a little bit more space in between each of these letters and i can choose by how many points i want to expand this by so if i increase this it’s going to make the characters further and further apart and of course we can do the reverse as well i can choose to have condensed characters so that makes those characters extremely close together and i can modify this so they’re slightly further apart now i will say that most of the time you’ll probably be using normal but sometimes when you’re working in the document it can be quite a nice effect to have a little bit more space in between characters or a little bit less space in between now i’m going to set mine back to normal and simply click on ok the final thing that’s worth noting here is that when we went into the advanced options for font by clicking this diagonal drop down arrow the diagonal drop down arrows in these other groups won’t bring up that same window because these will be the advanced formatting options for whichever group they’re part of so if i click this one we’re going to get the advanced formatting for paragraphs as opposed to font now there are other ways that you can change the look and feel of text in your document for example using word styles now we’re not going to get into styles in this particular lesson but just to kind of give you a little bit of an introduction if you cast your eyes up onto the home ribbon notice that we have a very large styles group just here if we click the drop down it’s going to open up the styles gallery now from here we can apply different types of style depending on what text we have highlighted all of these styles are completely customizable so you can get them to really look and feel the way that you want i’m going to spend quite a bit of time later on talking about word styles because they are so important to use in a document not only do they change the look and feel of your document and allow you to update font styles quickly they’re also super useful when you’re trying to put together things like tables of contents so just keep that in the back of your head that we can apply formatting to fon using styles as well it’s time now to talk about organizing text in our document by moving it or copying it and you may already be familiar with some of these commands if you’ve used other microsoft applications because cutting text copying text and pasting text pretty much works exactly the same way in word as it does in other applications so if you know what the keyboard shortcuts are for these commands then they’re the same in word now in this example again i’ve just created a practice document and this is a very straightforward document it’s just one page long we have a heading at the top and then we have various different subheadings throughout this document now currently this document is completely unformatted i’ve simply just typed in the text and i haven’t really styled it up yet so currently when we’re trying to read this document things like headings don’t really stand out from the paragraph text now when it comes to applying headings in a document the best way to do this is using styles and we’re going to get onto styles in a later lesson but just for argument’s sake in this particular lesson i’m going to apply to some basic formatting so that these headings and subheadings stand out so this is where we get to practice some of our selection methods now the title is going to be the biggest so let’s select it by clicking in the margin and i’m going to make this a bit bigger so let’s take this up to 20 and i’m also going to make it bold i’m then going to select the subheading video by clicking in the margin i’m going to hold down my control key and select all of the other subheadings that we have in this document so now that i have them all selected maybe i want to make these slightly bigger so let’s take those up to 12 maybe i want those to be bold but maybe this time i want these to be red so now at least i have a little bit of differentiation between my main heading my subheadings and my paragraphs of text so already this document looks a bit more organized and it is definitely easier to read now that we have headings and subheadings in our document you might think that this means that you can now use those headings to navigate around this document what you’ll notice is that if we open up the navigation pane and take a look at the headings group it’s not listing out those headings or subheadings and that’s because word currently doesn’t recognize these as headings and subheadings because to do that we need to apply styles to our headings as opposed to just applying what we call direct formatting which is what i did just here so keep that in the back of your mind for a little bit later on so now that we have this document organized a bit better we might review it and think to ourselves well actually i want to start moving some of these paragraphs around maybe the video section needs to go before when we have online video so i can move this text into the correct location and of course as with everything microsoft there are a couple of different methods that we can use so with the text highlighted what i could do is i could jump up to the home ribbon and in the clipboard group i could choose to cut this text and notice there is a keyboard shortcut for this which you might already be familiar with of control x so if we click on cut it’s going to remove that text that we selected and that context is held on what we call the clipboard until we choose to paste it somewhere and if you want to see the clipboard you can simply open it by clicking on the diagonal arrow in the corner of the clipboard group notice that the text that we just cut out is now sitting there waiting for us to do something with it now you can work with this clipboard open if you like some people really like this and it is useful if you’re cutting lots of things you can store them all on the clipboard and then choose which ones you want to paste so i’m going to go down to just before online video so about there and what i could do here is i could choose to paste it from the clipboard or i can choose the paste button up here now in this example we’re going to paste it from the clipboard so let’s click the drop down and choose paste and that’s now inserted that paragraph in that new location what about if i now decide that actually i want this video section to go after online video well i could move it again by using the method that we just used or alternatively i can simply drag and drop it so this is a second way that you can move things around in your document i can highlight the text and then i can simply click on it and drag it and place it wherever i want it to be so if i place it at the beginning of themes it’s going to insert that paragraph so another really simple way to move things around in your document so that’s moving text but what about if i want to copy text maybe i decide that i want to copy this first paragraph down to the bottom of the document well again on the home ribbon we have a copy button shortcut key control c so let’s select this first paragraph this time i’m going to use the keyboard shortcut ctrl c notice that it leaves it there i can then use my shortcut key ctrl end to jump to the bottom of the document and i can simply paste that copied text in remember whenever you cut or copy something it’s going to be held on the clipboard and there you can see the last thing i copied so i could choose to paste again from the clipboard or alternatively i have a paste button just here and i can click the top half just to paste that in with the original formatting now what about if i want to move multiple items that aren’t together so maybe i want to move this styles paragraph so let’s select it the online video paragraph let’s hold down control and select that and also the themes paragraph again hold down control when you’re making your selection now i’m going to move these so i’m going to use the keyboard shortcut control x again notice it’s held them on the clipboard i can then move to whichever point in the document i want to paste them so let’s just do it at the end i can paste directly from the clipboard or simply use the keyboard shortcut key control v and the clipboard really does come into its own when you’re gathering lots of different items together so if i select the cover page paragraph let’s press control x to grab that onto the clipboard and let’s choose the views paragraph ctrl x to copy that to the clipboard and then finally let’s choose these styles paragraph control x to copy that to the clipboard i can then choose where i want to paste these so if i want one of them just in here i can simply move my cursor there select the item from the clipboard and choose paste i can then move down go to the next location and choose something else that i want to paste from the clipboard like so so the point i’m really trying to make here is that clipboard is so useful if you’re trying to manage and organize items that you’ve cut and copied from the document format painter is a really useful facility in word 2021 that allows you to quickly copy formatting from one piece of text to another so the best way to understand this is really to see a demonstration so what i’m going to do here is i’m going to apply some formatting to just a sentence in this document so let’s just select any sentence i’m going to go for this one so we’re going to highlight it and let’s apply some formatting now i’m going to make this a little bit crazy just so we can demonstrate this let’s change the font to let’s go for arial black let’s give it a bit of a highlight and also let’s underline it now what about if i want to apply this exact same formatting to another sentence further down this document well i could move down to the sentence i could select it and i could go through those steps again i could select the highlighter i could change the font i could apply the underline but that’s a lot more work than we need to be doing instead we can use the format painter to copy all of the formatting that we have applied and effectively paint it over another piece of text and this is really straightforward all we need to do is select the text that we’ve applied the formatting to and i will say you don’t necessarily have to highlight the entire line i could simply select a word and then up on the home ribbon in the clipboard group we have the format painter notice the keyboard shortcuts here of control shift c and ctrl shift v now if we click on format painter notice that when we hover our cursor over the document again it’s changed this small paintbrush icon so we’re now in format painter mode and all we need to do is effectively swipe this paint brush over the piece of text that we want to apply the formatting to so let’s just say we want to apply this formatting to the first line of the video paragraph i can simply click at the beginning drag all the way across let go and it’s going to paint that formatting how much easier and quicker was that if you want to use the keyboard shortcut it’s very similar to copy and paste we’re just adding in the shift key so what i can do here is ctrl shift c select the line that i want to apply it to and ctrl shift v now notice that it only lets me apply that formatting once as soon as i’ve applied it my cursor goes back to normal i’m no longer in format painter mode but what if i want to apply this formatting to multiple lines or multiple words in this document well we can also do that but we need to make sure that we double click on the format painter first so once again i’m just going to select the word save we’re going to double click on the format painter icon in the clipboard group so now i can go in and i can paint across whatever text i want to apply notice that the format painter doesn’t deactivate once i’ve painted the formatting once so i can carry on going once i finish my painting i can either click on the format painter button again to deactivate it or i can press the escape key on my keyboard paste options effectively allow you to choose exactly how you’re pasting text and other pieces of information in your document and this is particularly useful if you are copying and pasting information into a document from an external source for example i might find something on the web and i want to grab it and paste it into my word document so what we’re going to do here is we’re going to jump onto wikipedia i’m just going to pull up the wikipedia page for the united states of america and we’re going to copy some of the text and paste it into this document because you’ll see that it looks very different than you might expect now the first thing i’m going to do is make sure that i have my cursor in the correct place and now i’m going to switch across to wikipedia so i’ve just pulled up the wikipedia page for the united states and i am simply going to copy some of this information so let’s select let’s select a good chunk let’s select all the way down to here and all we need to do is use the keyboard shortcut control c let’s jump back to our word document so now if i want to paste this in i can simply click the top half of the paste button or alternatively i can press ctrl v now notice what’s happened here it’s brought across all of the information it looks pretty good but it’s also brought across all of the formatting from that wikipedia page so if i now click in this text notice that the font that wikipedia uses is arial in size 10.5 now this might be absolutely fine for you but it might be that you want this text to kind of match the style of your document so as i mentioned normally in my documents i like to use calibri font and in general i’ll have that font at size 11. so now effectively what i need to do is reformat this information so that it matches what i want now there are various different ways i could do this i could select all of the information maybe press ctrl a and then go through and manually change the font and the size but take a look at what you get when you paste something in from an external source we get this little drop down menu in the corner and if we click it it’s going to open up our paste options and this is basically where we can choose how we want to paste this information so the default which is currently selected is to keep the source formatting which is why i’m seeing all of the formatting from the wikipedia page the second option we have is to merge the formatting so that’s going to merge it into this document and use whatever formatting i have applied so that would work quite well in this instance because it’s just going to change it to my default font alternatively the third option we have here is just to keep the text only and that will remove practically anything it’s going to set it back to the default font it’s going to set it to your default font size but it’s also going to remove things like any pictures that have accidentally come across or possibly any hyperlinks that you have in that text so in general i tend to use keep text only if i want the information to be in the word document but i want to completely reformat it and apply my own formatting so let’s choose keep text only so now i can go through and tidy up this document maybe i want to remove some of these erroneous spaces again these have been brought across from the wikipedia page what i also might want to do is a quick spell check so let’s do an f7 so let’s change the spelling of kilometers i’m gonna take this suggestion for islands and also for others and again we’ve just got a difference here between american and uk spelling so let’s change it and now my spell check is complete so don’t forget about those paste options now that little tag which came up at the bottom when i pasted this text into the document that disappears if you don’t use it immediately so if i start clicking around and doing other things and then try to go back to the bottom of the document you can see that it’s nowhere to be seen fortunately we can also access paste options by clicking on the home ribbon the lower half of the paste button we have those paste options in here now we haven’t really discussed images pictures graphics things like that so far in this course but i just want to briefly show you how you can copy and paste an image from an external website so let’s go back to our wikipedia page so maybe i decide that i want to grab this image of the united states and paste that into my document well i can simply select it by dragging my mouse over it we can then ctrl c and jump back to our word document i’m going to find a space to paste this in so i think just about there ctrl v to paste again notice we get that little tag pop up so we can choose exactly how we want to paste this in so once again we can choose to keep source formatting we can merge it with the current formatting or we can keep text only now notice if you choose keep text only when you’re trying to paste in an image you’re just simply not going to see that image you’re only going to see whatever alt text or caption text has been added for this image so in this scenario i would probably choose merge formatting because it’s going to take on the formatting of the document that i’m in but it’s going to allow me to see that image and any of the captions so just be aware of that difference when you’re using paste options find and replace are two separate utilities in their own right but you’ll often hear people speak about them together and that’s because they kind of really work together the first one will find text in your document and the second one allows you to replace it quickly so let’s deal with both of them separately let’s talk about find first of all now quite often particularly if you’re working with a longer document you’ll want to find something in that document so maybe that is a very specific phrase or maybe it’s a specific word it could even be a specific piece of formatting well if we want to do anything like that then we have an option called find which will help us out now there are a couple of different ways that we can use find the first one we already briefly saw when we were taking a look at the navigation pane so if we jump up to view and turn on the navigation pane if you remember we can basically search our document from here so if i click in the search document bar at the top i can type in a phrase or a specific word so let’s say capital it’s going to go through that document and highlight wherever it finds the word and i can see here that i’ve got two results and if i click on the results heading it’s going to show me exactly where that word occurs in my document and this will allow me to very quickly jump to that point in the document so if i click on the second one you can see it jumps me all the way down and the word capital is highlighted in yellow making it super easy for me to see now what about if i want to find a phrase that has more than one word well let’s clear the search by clicking on the cross and maybe i want to find the words united states does it work let’s try we’ve got two words here yes it does so 16 results if i click on the results tab i can see every time i mention that phrase and i can jump to that specific point in the document so you can utilize the navigation pane to simply find words and phrases now the other way that we can utilize find is we can jump across to the home ribbon and all the way over in the editing group at the end notice we have a find button and if we click the drop down next to it we have find advanced find and go to now we already saw what go to allows us to do we can quickly jump to pages sections lines so on and so forth and we also have find and advanced find now if we hover over find notice that it has a keyboard shortcut of control f and if we click on find it is simply going to reopen that navigation pane now if we go into advanced find this is going to open up the find and replace dialog box we’re currently clicked on the find tab and in the find what field notice that it holds in it the last term that you searched for so for me that was united states now i’m going to backspace to get rid of that and i’m going to try and find something else so this time i’m looking for the word coast now notice the options that i have underneath i can choose where i want to find it and in this case i don’t have too many options i’m finding it in the main document now if i just hit enter here it’s going to highlight in the document everywhere i have the word coast but if i just want to step through each occurrence of the word coast i could say find next and that’s going to leave this dialog box open but it’s going to highlight in the document where we have the word coast if i click find next again it’s going to carry on searching and jump to the next one now in this case i only have one occurrence of the word coast so it’s finished searching the document i also have other advanced options down here so i can choose to match the case so if i wanted to look for the word let’s say usa and specifically usa all in uppercase i could say that i want to match the case so that’s only going to find instances of usa where it’s in capitals as opposed to if it’s in lower case let’s do find next there it is there’s the first one highlighted and i only have that mentioned once as well i can choose to find whole words only or even use wild card characters so if i wanted to use a wild card maybe i want to look for everything that starts with the word united if i put an asterisk after it that’s our wild card character and hit enter it’s going to find united united states united kingdom united arab emirates it’s basically going to find everything that starts with united i could even do a find for something that sounds like something else so if we say let’s pick a word that we can rhyme another word with so here we have the word five so i’m going to say let’s type in sounds like live let’s select our option click on find next and it’s picked up the word life and in fact it hasn’t picked up five but it is picking up life so don’t forget about these advanced options that you have at the bottom now something else you can do is you can find not only words and phrases but you can find specific pieces of formatting so i’m going to cancel out here for one second and i’m just going to apply some formatting to some text in this document so let’s just choose a few random words and make them bold so now what we can do if we jump back into advanced find we can remove all of our current search terms go down to format and because i’m looking for all bold words in the document i can choose font and i can say find everything with bold formatting click on ok simon says subscribe and click on the bell icon to receive notifications find next and there we go it’s found that first bold word if we move across it’s found the second one so on and so forth and we have lots of different options in here so we don’t have to stop at just bold formatting if i’m looking for a piece of text that’s maybe in a specific font or maybe it’s a specific size or has other specific formatting i can choose my options in here and find it that way we can also find certain special characters in our document as well now i’m not going to linger too long on this we’re going to talk about this a bit more when we move into the paragraph section but i can do things like find all of the line breaks in a document or wherever we have a paragraph character so on and so forth so those are the options that you have for find now because this box will always retain the search that you’ve just done i’m going to choose no formatting just to remove all of the search terms now whilst find might be useful a lot of the time you might be looking through your document for a specific word in order to replace it with another word so maybe i want to replace the words united states of america with usa throughout this document well this is where we can do a replace now notice because we have this dialog box already open we have a replace tab up here if we don’t have this dialog box open we can simply go back to the editing group and there is the replace command keyboard shortcut control h let’s click on replace i already have some search terms in here so i’m going to choose no formatting to remove them and this time i’m going to say i want to find the words [Music] united states of america and i want to replace with usa i can choose to replace just one occurrence or replace all occurrences of this phrase in the document so let’s say replace all now notice here i have united states of america quite often throughout this document so if we say replace all it’s telling me it’s made zero replacements now why is that well it’s because my cursor is currently clicked right at the end of this document and it’s always going to search down from the top if you take a look underneath where i have my search term it says options search down so do i want to continue searching from the beginning yes i do let’s go for it again it’s made two replacements and if i take a look at that i can see it’s changed it in the title and also in this first line a lot of the time in this document it just says united states as opposed to united states of america so what probably would have been a bit quicker for me to do here is to use a wildcard instead so if i change this to search for everything that starts with united states it’s going to replace united states and united states of america effectively so i’m going to say use wild cards let’s replace all and it’s made five replacements yes i want to search from the beginning the final tally is 14 replacements let’s click on ok and i can see that now i don’t have united states or united states of america anywhere in this document in this exercise we’re going to practice some of the skills that we’ve learned throughout this section so the first thing i’d like you to do is to open the file the solarsystemexplained.docx from the exercise files folder once you have that file open i’d like you to select the document title only and apply the following formatting properties i’d like you to make the font size of the title 28 points i’d like you to make it bold and i’d like you to center align it on the page i’d also like you to change the font color to red once you’ve done that i’d like you to find all instances of the word sun in the document and change them to bold next i’d like you to scroll down in the document and find the section titled in a solar system i’d like you to select the entire section cut it and then paste it after the section titled outer solar system and when you paste i’d like to make sure you choose keep source formatting so a little bit of work to do there see how you go and if you’d like to see my answer then please keep watching so i’ve opened up the file the solarsystemexplained.docx from the exercise files folder and the first thing i asked you to do was to select the title and apply some formatting so i’m going to hover my mouse over in that left hand margin click once to select that entire title i then asked you to change the font size to 28 points and you could use the mini toolbar just here alternatively you can go up to the home ribbon click the drop down and choose 28 points from there i asked you to also make the title bold so you could go to the font group and click on the b or alternatively you could use the keyboard shortcut ctrl b to apply that i asked you to center align the title so for this we need to go to the paragraph group and it’s this option here that we want again if you use the keyboard shortcut ctrl e that is absolutely fine and i also asked you to change the font color to red so let’s go up to our font color drop down and we’re going to go with one of the standard colors here i’m going to go for the darker red now i didn’t mind which shade of red you selected that’s not particularly important just as long as you know where you need to go to access your color palettes the next task to complete this exercise was to use find and replace to find all instances of the word sun and make them bold so from the home ribbon all the way over in the editing group let’s click on replace and again if you use the keyboard shortcut ctrl h that is absolutely fine so this time we want to find the word sun and we want to replace it with the word sun but we want to replace it with sun in bold so for this we need to expand more go down to format and font and choose bold from here let’s click on ok and then we can choose replace all you can see it’s made 89 replacements let’s click on ok and if we go back to the beginning of the document control home we should find that every instance of the word sun is now showing in bold the last task to complete in this document is to practice cut and paste so i asked you to scroll down until you find the section titled inner solar system and it is a little way down this document so let’s find what we need here it is just here on page number five so i’m going to select everything all the way down to outer solar system which is all of this text just here i then asked you to cut this text out now again you could use the cut option in the clipboard group on the home ribbon or alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcut control x now that you’ve cut that out i asked you to paste it after the outer solar system section so let’s scroll all the way down to the end of the document and i asked you to paste this and keep the source formatting now again there are a couple of different ways you could do this you could jump up to the home ribbon click the lower half of the paste button and choose keep source formatting alternatively if you want to use the keyboard shortcut ctrl v you can then click on the little smart tag at the bottom and choose keep source formatting from there it’s time now to shift our focus away from text very slightly and start talking about paragraphs because there are a whole heap of different options that we can use in word 2021 to format entire paragraphs now the first thing we need to establish if you’re not sure what exactly is a paragraph well in the context of word a paragraph is basically wherever the writer the typer has hit the enter key so this information that we have in this particular document if you remember we just copied and pasted it in from wikipedia it doesn’t necessarily have paragraphs in the correct places so if i have a quick read through and maybe i decide that there needs to be a new paragraph after the word area i can click my cursor hit the enter key and now word considers this block of text to be a brand new paragraph incidentally even the title in this document is considered to be a paragraph and i think in general we wouldn’t normally think of that but because we’ve hit the enter key after the title this first line is a paragraph in itself the first paragraph in this document now there are different ways that we can format entire paragraphs in our word document and i guess some of the more common things you might want to do with paragraphs is change the alignment so if you notice by default if we take this first paragraph as an example the text is aligned to the left hand side and we have what we call a raggedy edge over on the right hand side so everything is always going to be nicely lined up to the left because the default is left alignment and if we take a look up on the home ribbon in the paragraph group you can see that i have left alignment selected by default notice the keyboard shortcut there of control plus l but what if i wanted to align this text to the middle well if we move across to the next icon we can change this to center alignment keyboard shortcut control plus e and that’s just going to place that text in the center of the page and as you might have guessed we do have a right alignment as well control plus r which will give us a nice straight line on the right hand side and the raggedy edge on the left now if you’re wondering what the other alignment tool up here is this is justify keyboard shortcut control plus j and justify will basically distribute your text evenly between the margins so if we click this option we’re basically going to get a nice straight line on both edges we don’t get that raggedy edge as we call it and what you might notice is that in order to achieve this word will kind of extend the character spacing in the paragraph and if you’ve ever read a newspaper which i think most of us have justified is the alignment that newspapers use so you get a nice clean crisp look in columns now for this particular document i want this to be aligned to the left but interestingly although i have been selecting the entire paragraph each time i don’t actually have to do that if i want to change the alignment all i need to do is click somewhere in the paragraph and either use the keyboard shortcut or click on align left in order to change that entire paragraph now there’s lots of other things that you can do with paragraphs which we’re going to take a look at throughout this section but let’s just finish by taking a look at a couple of other little options that we have in here with regards to formatting paragraphs so once again i’m clicked in this first paragraph if we jump up to the paragraph group notice here that i can click the drop down and i can apply a background fill color to my paragraphs so maybe i want to change this to a blue color i could even put a border around particular paragraphs so i’m going to say all borders and that really makes this first paragraph stand out from the rest of the text so your alignment tools and your paragraph formatting tools can really make a huge difference when you’re putting together a word document aside from aligning and changing the formatting of our paragraphs we can also adjust line spacing and paragraph spacing and these two have a distinct difference for example if i click my mouse somewhere in this second paragraph in the paragraph group on the home ribbon notice we have some options here for line and paragraph spacing so if i click the drop down i can choose how much space i want between the lights and because we have live preview turned on it means that when i hover over a specific item in this list it’s going to give me a preview of what that’s going to look like and you can see it’s only applying line spacing to the paragraph that i was clicked in it’s not applying it to all of the paragraphs in the document so i can choose to have less space between the lines in a paragraph or more space between the lines and if i want to further customize how much space i have between the lines i can jump into line spacing options now we have quite a bit of information on this page but if we take a look at this last group for spacing this is where we can get very granular about how much space we have between our lines for example i could say that i want 12 point spacing before this paragraph and if you take a look at the preview at the bottom when i start to adjust this you can see it’s going to move that paragraph further away from the paragraph above so this is line spacing before the paragraph begins i can do the same and adjust the spacing after so if i want less of a space i can pull that down or i can add more of a space in there i can then make further customizations in this line spacing drop down currently i have this set to single but i could go for 1.5 lines and again you can see how that changes the paragraph spacing in the preview below or i could say i want the spacing exactly and then specify a number of points so maybe i want this to be let’s just put it up to something rather large so let’s go for 21 points and you can see how that’s going to affect my paragraph so just be aware of the options that you have in this paragraph dialog box when it comes to spacing also note that if you want to apply a space before or a space after the paragraph you don’t necessarily have to jump into that dialog box you can click the drop down and we can say add space before paragraph or remove space after paragraph and you can see as i’m hovered over that the map of the united states is a lot closer to the paragraph above now that’s dealing with the spacing of lines within a specific paragraph whichever paragraph i’m clicked in but what about if i want to adjust the space between paragraphs as opposed to lines for the entire document or for that we need to go into a slightly different area i’m going to click on a ribbon that we haven’t really taken a look at yet so this is going to give you a bit of a preview now if we jump across to the design ribbon notice in the document formatting group we have some paragraph spacing options and currently i’m using the default style set but we do have some other built-in style sets that we can use to change the spacing between paragraphs as opposed to lines so if i hover over no paragraph space i’m not going to get any spaces in there and you can see the properties of that particular style set so no spacing before no spacing after and line spacing is set to one i could go for compact which adjusts that spacing after to four points i could go for tight or maybe even open or relaxed i even have custom paragraph spacing options just here so what i could do is make some amendments just here so maybe i want to have more space before and i could choose to apply this to only this document or all new documents based on this template now remember new documents based on this template means it’s going to apply these changes to the normal.x template which is basically the template that’s in use when you create a new blank document so if you need to be very specific about the amount of space you have in between your paragraphs and you want that to apply to all new documents that you create you can come in here you can make your adjustments and then you can select new documents based on this template now i’m not going to do that i’m just going to leave everything on the default so i’m going to cancel out of here but just be aware of that difference between line spacing and paragraph spacing something that can be really useful when you’re working with word documents is to turn on non-printing characters so what exactly are non-printing characters well as you might expect they are characters that exist in your document but are effectively invisible to the reader for example if i said to you take a look at this document and tell me where the non-printing characters are you’re not really going to have too much of an idea and that’s because we haven’t got non-printing characters turned on so let’s turn them on first of all and then i’ll explain to you why they can be so useful now turning on non-printing characters is a really simple thing to do we need to go up to the home ribbon in the paragraph group it’s this little icon that you’re looking for this paragraph mark and it’s actually called show hide notice the keyboard shortcut of control plus asterix to toggle it on and if we take a quick look at the screen tip it says it’s going to show paragraph marks and other hidden formatting symbols this is especially useful for advanced layout tasks so if we click to turn on and non-printing characters a couple of things have changed on this page notice that we now have these paragraph marks symbols at various different points throughout this document now what this paragraph symbol means is basically it’s the end of that paragraph so every time we’ve pressed the return key word will automatically think that we’re starting a new paragraph and it places a paragraph marker there and these paragraph markers are a lot more important than simply just to mark where the end of a paragraph is the paragraph marker actually contains all of the formatting information for that line of text now i find these particularly useful if i’m trying to format a document because they really do let me know where the beginning of the paragraph is and where the end of the paragraph is so if i just want to apply formatting to one specific paragraph it makes it a lot easier for me to see for example i can see in this paragraph here we have a paragraph marker at the end of this paragraph and then another one at the end of this paragraph so if i’m clicked in this paragraph just here i know that any formatting i apply and for argument’s sake i’m just going to increase the indent is just going to apply to the text that falls between those two paragraph markers another thing that we can see when we toggle on show hide is we can see these little dots in between each word and as you might expect these are there to represent every time we have a space now why is that useful well let’s turn off show hide for one moment to hide those non-printing characters if i scroll down a bit further in this document you can see here i haven’t really applied any formatting at all there’s no paragraphs in there there’s no formatting but take a look at something that we can see there’s a few words here that have a double blue underline and as we saw in a previous lesson this means that there’s a grammatical error in this particular point of the document if i just take a look at these i think well actually you know what this sentence sounds like it makes sense as does this one down here so why is word flagging these as a grammatical error well this is where turning on show hide is going to help because take a look at this i can see very clearly that i actually have two spaces in between the words united and nations and that’s why word is picking this up as an error so all i need to do here is just delete out one of the spaces and the same thing down here so toggling on show hide can be really useful when you’re formatting your documents now we’ve just seen a couple of examples there of paragraph marks and spaces but non-printing characters consist of a lot more things than that and we’ll be taking a look at these as we work through the course now the final thing to mention here is that if you find these really useful and you want to have them turned on permanently you can choose in word options to permanently display paragraph marks so let me just very quickly show you where that setting is so if we go up to file down to options we’re going to find this underneath the display page and it’s this second section here always show these formatting marks on the screen so if you want to permanently see your paragraph marks your spaces your tab characters your hidden text optional hyphens you could turn all of these on so when we click on ok even if we toggle off as show hide markers we’re still going to see those marks on the screen because we’ve chosen to permanently display them in this lesson we’re going to take a look at how you can quickly and easily create a bulleted or numbered list and these are really useful if you have certain list items that you want to stand out in your document and it makes your document a lot easier to read now i’m working in a completely different document and you’ll find this document ready to go in the course files folder so make sure that you have this downloaded now all of the information in this document i’ve just grabbed off of wikipedia and paste it in and i haven’t applied any formatting to this document as yet now i can see in the bottom left-hand corner that this document is 15 pages long and the page that i want to work on is actually page 13. so let’s use go to to jump directly to that page control g is the shortcut key to bring that up let’s type in 13 go to and now i’m in the spot that i want now here i have a list of countries and this basically shows the top 10 coffee consuming countries measured per capita and per annum and this looks kind of fine but i want to make this a bulleted list so that it really stands out and makes it easier to read now if i click in the first line item here finland jump up to the home tab notice in the paragraph group we have a row up here which relates to bullets and numbering so let’s take a look at this first one just here this is where we can create a bulleted list now if i click the drop down i gain access to the bullet library so this really allows you to customize the style of bullet that you’re using now the most common one is the first one just here a plain old bullet so let’s select it and now it’s bulleted just that first line item now i really want to have bullets applied to this entire list so do i have to go through selecting each one and applying bullets no i don’t i can make my selection first of all and then apply bullets in all one go so let’s undo i’m going to do control zed to undo that let’s select the entire list of countries and then i can just click the bullets button and if i just click the button as opposed to clicking the drop down and selecting from the bullets library it’s going to apply that first default bullet so now my list looks a lot neater now the difference here is that once you’ve applied bullets to the entire list if you want to change these bullets so maybe i decide i want a different type of symbol i don’t have to highlight the entire list again because word recognizes it’s already a list so i can simply click my cursor anywhere in this list click the drop down and let’s choose something else from the bullet library and it changes for everything and the cool thing about bulleted lists is that if i click at the end where we have canada and press the enter key it’s automatically going to give me another bullet point so i can carry on typing in the next item in my list now another thing to be aware of is that you do have different levels of bullet so maybe underneath each of these countries i want to break it down by their major cities so what i could do is click at the end of finland if i press enter i’m going to get another bullet on the same level but if i press my tab key it’s going to indent and give me a different style of bullet so this is kind of for your secondary list items so maybe i want to put in here some information specifically related to the city of helsinki and i could carry ongoing so if i click at the end of norway press my tab key i can then type in the next item so on and so forth we even have a third level list if i press tab again it’s going to carry on going so the tab key is going to give you different levels of indented bullet if you want to indent back out again shift tab will take you backwards now what about if i want to remove bullets well all i need to do here is click the drop down and choose none and that’s going to remove the bullet from that line only but what about if i want to remove the bullets from the entire list well i need to select the list and then choose none from the bullet library now i’m going to tidy this list up a little bit let’s remove those cities to take it back to how it was previously so bullet points are really simple to apply but what about if i want to turn this into a numbered list instead maybe this would make more sense because it is effectively a top 10 list or a top 11 list as we’ve added a new item because this is the first time that i’m applying a numbered list i need to make sure that i select the entire list first and then i can go up to the numbering option now if i click the drop down here we do have a numbering library so again this depends on what type of numbers you want to apply to this list you might want one two three you might want one two three with a bracket around it you might want roman numerals you might want uppercase lowercase so on and so forth so let’s apply this one just here one two three and it applies to the entire list if i hit enter again i’m going to get the next bullet and if i press the tab key it’s going to give me my indented bulleted item so really nice and straightforward now i’m going to select this entire list again and let’s choose none to reset it the final thing i want to show you here is how you can use a picture as your bullet instead so once again i’m going to select the entire list let’s click the drop down and notice at the bottom we can choose to define a new bullet so if you decide you don’t like any of these bullets available in the bullet library we can pretty much use any picture as a blip so if you have a little picture or a logo or something like that saved off to your hard drive you could choose picture and then browse for it in that way alternatively and sometimes this does work a little bit better we could choose a symbol from words inbuilt symbol gallery so let’s click on symbol it’s going to open up all of the symbols that we have available and i could choose something from here to use as a bullet so let’s use a star i’m going to select it from the gallery click on ok i’m getting a preview as to what that’s going to look like when i click on ok it’s going to use stars as bullet points instead the final thing to mention here is the little button that we have at the top here and this is for a multi-level list so currently i basically have a single level list if i select all of the items and click the drop down i can choose one of these options so this is where i can really customize what those different levels look like so if the top level has a one next to it if i press the tab key the next item is going to be 1.1 tab key again the next item is going to be 1.1.1 and we have various different inbuilt preset styles that we can apply so if i choose this one i have my numbered list 1 to 11 but if i have other items in this list when i press the tab key it’s going to give me 1.1 if i press the tab key again i get 1.1.1 so you really do have a whole list of different styles that you can use not only for bullets but also when you’re trying to construct a numbered list in your document indenting paragraphs can be a really helpful way of adding structure to your document and there are numerous different ways that we can indent paragraphs in word so let’s take a look at a few of them once again i’m working in the document the comprehensive guide to coffee and we’re going to click in this first paragraph after the heading and the sub heading now if we jump up to the home tab in the paragraph group we have two little buttons just here if i hover over this first one this is the decrease indent button and this is going to move your paragraph closer to the margin now currently in this document all of my paragraphs are as close to the left hand margin as they can go but what about this other button well this is going to increase the indent so it’s going to move our paragraph farther away from the margin so let’s click this one and see what happens well as you can imagine it’s just going to indent that paragraph to the default first indent and you can see by looking at the ruler that is just over one centimeter if i want to remove this i could then decrease the indent and it’s going to take it back to the left margin and i could click the increase indent button again if i click it again it’s going to move further and carry on going so i can really adjust these as i wish now notice that these changes are really just being applied to the paragraph that i’m clicked in and if we turn on our show hide markers we can see exactly where the end of that paragraph is now if i want to apply indentation to numerous different paragraphs i would need to make sure that i select all of the paragraphs that i want to indent and then i can use my increase indent button to indent the whole lot now as we’ve just seen when we increase the indent it increases it to the default measurement but what if we want to use our own measurements or maybe we want a different style of indent maybe we want to indent the first line but not the rest of the paragraph and that is a technique you often see in novels in books the first line will be indented but the rest will be back at the margin so how can we do things like that well let’s take our paragraphs back to the left margin by decreasing the indent and we’re going to open up our advanced paragraph options so let’s click on the diagonal arrow and you can see automatically it’s taken us across to the indents and spacing page and the second section here is all related to indentation so let’s move this over here so we can see the text underneath so this is where i can get very granular about the amount of indentation i want to apply so if i want to put this up i can click the up arrow and if you notice in the preview window it’s just showing me where that’s going to indent to so this gives me a little bit more control when it comes to how far away from that left margin my paragraph is i could even indent from the right margin so if i put this up notice it’s going from the other side and if i want to manually change this i can simply click in the box type in the exact indentation level i want and press enter so really nice and straightforward now i’m going to click in this first paragraph one more time and re-open up our advanced paragraph editing because we do have some other options here underneath this special drop-down so this is where i can choose if i want a first line indent or a hanging indent so if i say first line indent take a look in the preview this is what you see in novels if i click on ok it’s going to indent just the first line of the paragraph and leave everything else at that left margin and i can even customize exactly how far across i want that indent to be so if i need it to be a little bit further along i can adjust this click on ok and i get a completely different effect now i’m going to control z just to undo this and take it back to how it was let’s open up our options again and take a look at the other thing that we have underneath this special drop down and that is a hanging indent which is kind of the opposite of the first line indent this time it’s going to leave the first line of the paragraph at the margin but it’s going to indent everything else and once again we can adjust exactly by how far we want to indent if we click on ok we get a completely different effect so really this is entirely up to you how you want to manage indents in your document just remember if you’re just clicked in the paragraph it will only apply the indent to that paragraph if you want to apply it to multiple simply select the paragraphs jump into the advanced options and then you can choose whatever level of indentation you want in the previous lesson we took a look at how we can indent paragraphs in our word document and just to pick up where we left off if we take a look at this first paragraph where we have a first line indent i want to draw your attention up to that horizontal ruler notice that where this line indents i have what we call a tab stop and that is this little triangle icon that you can see there on the ruler now if i hover over it’s telling me that i currently have a first line indent set in this document and this is basically showing me how far across the page this indent is this is where that first line is going to start now tab stops are really important when it comes to how your document is laid out and if we double click on this tab stop it opens up our advanced options for paragraph and right at the bottom we have a tabs button now if we click on this this is going to allow us to define where our tab stop position is now i’m going to cancel out of here just keep that in the back of your mind because we’re going to jump into here a bit later on in this lesson now these tab stops that you can see on the ruler we can adjust these manually so for example if i wanted to move this first line back to the left margin i can simply click and drag it all the way back if i click in the second paragraph notice again i have my tab stop position i can simply drag it all the way back to change that indentation now whilst we’re here looking at these tab stops on the ruler we saw that if we hover over the first one this is the first line in den but what about if we hover over the one below this is the hanging indent and if we hover over the little rectangle underneath that one represents a left indent so what happens if i click on left indent and drag it in it’s going to move that entire paragraph so this is very similar to applying an indent the lower half controls the left indent what about if i move the hanging indent tab stop well this is going to give me that hanging indent effect and i can drag it up and i can drag it back down again and if i want to indent the first line you might have guessed it we can click and we can drag and it’s going to indent that first line so just be aware that you have these controls these tab stops up here as well to adjust your indentation now tab stops can be used in a slightly different way so what i’m going to do here is i’m going to click after what is coffee and press the enter key to give myself a new paragraph now what about if i want to have maybe three columns of text here maybe i want to have a column that shows the coffee type maybe i want some information in the middle of the page which shows the country of origin and then maybe i want some information over on the right hand side of the page which shows the amount consumed well currently that’s quite hard to do if i was to type in say coffee type i could press my tab key to kind of move across and sort of guess where the middle part is and then i could say country and then i could tab across and then maybe say something like amount but this isn’t particularly consistent and it’s going to be really hard for me to start lining up my items underneath so this is where tab stops come in really handy so i’m going to control z just to get rid of this and show you how these tab stops work now if you cast your eyes all the way over to the left hand side of the screen notice right in the top corner here we have this little symbol which looks like a small l if i hover my mouse over it that is my left tab but if i click my mouse it cycles through to a different style of tap and if i hover over that is a center tab if i click again it’s going to give me a right tab if i click again it’s going to give me a decimal tab let’s click one more time that is a bar tab we have a first line indent a hanging indent and then we’re back to our left tab so this basically allows you to cycle through all the different kinds of tabs that we have in word so how exactly do we use these well i could use these to help me with the example i just showed you now i want to type in coffee type and i want all of the items to be aligned to the left margin so i don’t really need a tab here i can just type in coffee type and it’s basically in the correct place but now i want to make sure that my next column of information is in the middle of this page so if i take a look at my ruler i’m going to say that just over eight centimeters is roughly in the middle of my page let’s say eight for argument’s sake this isn’t an exact science so what i could do if i wanted everything to be centered is i could use a center tab to help me with this so what i need to do is i need to go through my different tabs and make sure that i select center so we’re on left the next one is the center tab there we go once i have center tab selected i can then click on my ruler where i want to place that tab so i’m going to say i want to put this at eight centimeters let’s click and now you can see we have that little tab there so what this means is that when i press the tab key on my keyboard it’s going to tab directly to that point and because it’s a center tab it’s going to ensure that all of the text i start typing is in the center so i’m going to type in country of origin and then i want a final column and i want to make sure everything is aligned to the right so for this i could use a right tab so i’m going to cycle through all my tabs again so we’re on center there is the right tab and then i’m going to place this just at the end just after 16. so now when i press tab key it’s going to jump to that point and everything’s going to be aligned to the left hand side so let’s just say amount sold notice also that because i have my show hide markers turned on i’m seeing an indication of wherever i have a tab so because i now have those tab markers set i can press enter and then i can type in my items and everything’s going to be nicely lined up so let’s say java i press the tab key it jumps me to the center country of origin let’s say indonesia and we’ll say 1 million units sold hit enter i can go to the next one and if we turn off as show hide markers you can see how nice this looks everything is nicely lined up and this is really hard to achieve if you don’t use tab stops you could use something like a table but tab stops work just as well now if you’re wondering what some of these other tabs are if i toggle through to this next one the decimal tab this is what you can use if you’re typing numbers into your document if you want to make sure all of the numbers are aligned by the decimal place then you could use the decimal tab so let’s just click somewhere in this document i’m going to say 7 centimeters i’m going to hit enter tab across and if i was to type a number that has decimal places so let’s say 1 million again you can see that the decimal place will always be aligned to wherever we have that decimal tab so if i was to type a shorter number in let’s say 4000 everything’s going to be nicely lined up and what about a bar tab what does that do well if i hit enter and let’s toggle around till we get to the bar tab if i put that at let’s say three centimeters it’s going to put a line in there a bar so this is good if you want to add a little bit of separation to your columns now i’m going to ctrl z to undo that the final thing i want to point out to you here is the additional options that you have when it comes to tab stops so if i click somewhere i have a tab stop i can double click on the tab stop go to tabs if you recall we were in here earlier and this is going to show me my tab stop positions for this line that i’m currently clicked in and i can make any changes that i need to so you can see here tab stop position i’ve got a tab at eight centimeters which i do it’s the center tab and i have another one at 16.25 and that is a right tab and you can see that for both of these i don’t have what we call leaders so what i could do here if we delete out everything that we’ve had in there and i’m also going to remove the tab stops by just simply clicking and dragging them off of the ruler i could set up all of my tab stops from this tabs dialog box so i might say that i want a tab stop position at four centimeters so let’s say four i want it to be a center tab and i want it to have a dotted leader click on set and it’s going to add that in notice that i have a tab stop at 16.25 well i don’t want that one to be there i can click it and i can say clear let’s add another tab stop position so let’s add one at 11 centimeters and i want this to be a right tab stop with a dotted leader and click on ok so now if i type in my titles let’s say coffee type and press the tab key it’s going to tab across to that first tab stop which is four centimeters and i have that dotted leader i can type in my next so let’s say country press tab again it’s going to jump across to 11 centimeters and i can then type my next heading so that is how your tabs and your tab stops work really useful if you’re trying to line up things in a document in this exercise we’re going to practice some of the skills that we’ve learned in this section and we have quite a few different tasks to complete so the first thing i’d like you to do is working in the solar system document after the second paragraph i’d like you to type the title planets comma distance from the sun i’d like you to make sure that you turn on rulers and make sure that the measurement unit is set to inches once you’ve done that i’d like you to add a center tab stop at three inches across the ruler i’d then like you to add a right tab stop at six inches across the ruler once you have those tab stops set up i’d like you to open the document planets distance from the sun table dot dot x and once again you’ll find this in the exercise files folder i’d like you to use that information as a guide and manually input it into the solar system document using the tab stops once you have all of that information in there i’d like you to just apply bold formatting to the heading row to differentiate it from the rest of the information now once you’ve done that i’d like you to scroll back up to the top of the document and after the main title i’d like you to insert or type a bulleted list and this bulleted list should list out all of the planets and instead of using one of the regular bullet symbols i’d like you to use the icon titled planet icon.png again you’ll find this in the exercise files folder make sure that that icon represents each bullet point in the list so quite a few different things to do there if you’d like to see my answer then please keep watching so the first thing i asked you to do in this exercise is after paragraph number two which is this one just here we need to get onto a new line and type a brand new heading and that needs to say planets distance from the sun next i asked you to make sure that you have your rulers turned on so if you can’t see a horizontal ruler running across the top of the page you’re going to need to go to view and make sure you have a check in the box next to ruler i also asked you to make sure that the measurements are displayed in inches now if you have something that looks different to what i have here you’re going to need to go into file down into options and into the advanced page now if we scroll all the way down to the display section we want to make sure where it says show measurements in units of this is set to inches so if you have anything else in there you want to make sure you select inches let’s click on ok i then asked you to add a tab stop at 3 inches across the document so for this we need to reach our mouse all the way over to the left hand side where we have our different tab stops so i need to click until i get to the center tab stop which is this one just here i can now go to my ruler and where it says three inches i’m going to click to add that center tab stop i then asked you to add a right tab stop at six inches across the ruler so once again let’s go over to add tabs in the top left hand corner click again to move to the right tab stop and then we can just click at six inches on the ruler to add that the next thing i asked you to do was to add some information using these tab stops and for this we’re going to refer to another document that we have saved off in the exercise files folder and that is this file just here planets distance from the sun table dot dot x so basically we want to manually type in all of this information by using our tab stops in the other document so for this i’m going to divide my screen into so to make this easier i’ve placed my documents side by side the first thing i’m going to type here is planet and then i’m going to press my tab key to move across to that center tab stop let’s type solar system press the tab key again to move across to that right tab stop once we get to the end of the line let’s press enter and we can start to type in the first planet so the first one is mercury press tab again it’s part of the inner solar system and it is 35 million miles from the sun so what i need you to do here was go through and add as many of these as you like if you didn’t add them all that’s not too much of a problem just as long as you get the idea behind tap stops so i’m going to go away and add the rest of these in and then we’ll pick up with the rest of the exercise so once you have all of these typed in the next thing i asked you to do was just to make sure that the column headings were in bold so let’s select this top row ctrl b to make those bold the final part of this exercise was to type out a list of all of the planets at the top of the document and i wanted you to make this a bulleted list so if we scroll up to the top of the document let’s click and get ourselves onto a new line i’m going to type in mercury venus earth and then all of the rest of the planets now we want to make these a bulleted list but i don’t want to use just the regular bullets i asked you to use an icon that’s stored off in the exercise files folder so let’s select a list let’s go to the home tab we’re going to click the drop down next to bullets and from here you needed to define a new bullet we need to go to picture from a file and then just navigate to the folder wherever you have the planet icon saved so let’s select it click on insert and ok again and we now have a bulleted list with a customized bullet point if you’re not a subscriber click down below to subscribe so you get notified about similar videos we upload to get the course exercise files and follow along with this video click over there and click over there to watch more videos on youtube from simon says it

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

    Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!